Xiv Model11x 21x Isg

IBM XIV Storage System Gen3
Models 281x-11x and 281x-21x
Installation and Service Guide
GC27-3921-16
Note
Before using this information and the product it supports, read the information in “Safety and environmental notices” on
page xiii and “Notices” on page 409.
This edition replaces GC27-3921-15.

© Copyright IBM Corporation 2011, 2015.
US Government Users Restricted Rights – Use, duplication or disclosure restricted by GSA ADP Schedule Contract
with IBM Corp.
Contents
Figures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . vii Connecting the XIV system to a room emergency
power off switch . . . . . . . . . . . 55
Tables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . xi Inspecting receptacles and ac-power source. . . . 57
Inspecting the main-power cables . . . . . . . 61
Powering on the XIV system . . . . . . . . 62
Safety and environmental notices . . . xiii Powering on the XIV system models 281x-114
Safety notices and labels . . . . . . . . . . xiii 281x-214, and 281x-216 . . . . . . . . . 62
Special caution and safety notices. . . . . . . xiv Powering on the XIV system model 281x-215 . . 68
Laser safety . . . . . . . . . . . . . xiv Verifying the XIV system rack setup . . . . . . 69
Ladder usage. . . . . . . . . . . . . xv Connecting your notebook computer to the XIV
Fire suppression systems . . . . . . . . . xv system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 72
Power cables . . . . . . . . . . . . . xv Starting the IBM XIV Storage Management GUI and
Sound pressure . . . . . . . . . . . . xvi command-line interface . . . . . . . . . . 72
Leakage current . . . . . . . . . . . xvi Verifying the system state . . . . . . . . . 73
Site preparation. . . . . . . . . . . . xvi Starting the Technician Assistant tool . . . . . . 74
Environmental notices . . . . . . . . . . xvii Configuring system parameters. . . . . . . . 75
Routing and connecting customer cables. . . . . 76
About this guide . . . . . . . . . . xix Configuring Call Home . . . . . . . . . . 76
Summary of changes . . . . . . . . . xix . . Configuring remote support . . . . . . . . . 77
Who should use this guide . . . . . . . xxi . . Configuring contact information . . . . . . . 78
Conventions used in this guide . . . . . xxi . . Configuring Simple Network Management Protocol 79
Service publications . . . . . . . . . . . xxii Verifying the customer management interfaces . . 79
Publications and related information . . . . . xxiii Configuring email notifications and rules . . . . 80
Getting information, help, and service . . . . . xxv Completing the installation for XIV system . . . . 81
Ordering publications . . . . . . . . . . xxvi Completing the installation for XIV system
Sending your comments . . . . . . . . . xxvi models 281x-114 281x-214, and 281x-216 . . . . 81
Completing the installation for XIV system model
Chapter 1. Setting the activity level for 281x-215 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 84
Support access . . . . . . . . . . . 1 Routing and connecting customer host cables . . . 86
Upgrading IBM XIV Storage System code . . . . 88
Collecting system logs . . . . . . . . . . . 88
Chapter 2. XIV system overview . . . . 3
Rack components . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3
Chapter 4. Installing additional
Rack configurations . . . . . . . . . . . . 4
Capacity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 modules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 91
Processors and memory . . . . . . . . . 7
Connectivity . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7 Chapter 5. Relocating an XIV system 93
Network connections . . . . . . . . . . . 8 Relocating model 281x-114 and 281x-214. . . . . 93
Management ports requirements . . . . . . 11 Preparing an XIV system for relocation . . . . 93
Preparing a weight-reduced XIV system for
Chapter 3. Installing the XIV system . . 13 relocation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 94
Before you begin installing . . . . . . . . . 13 Packing an XIV system . . . . . . . . . 96
Warnings and notes . . . . . . . . . . 13
Preparing for the installation . . . . . . . 14 Chapter 6. Replacing hardware
Required tools and materials . . . . . . . 14 components . . . . . . . . . . . . 99
Installing the IBM XIV Storage System Components overview. . . . . . . . . . . 99
management tools . . . . . . . . . . . 15 Disk drive modules. . . . . . . . . . . 99
Installing the Technician Assistant tool . . . . 16 Data modules . . . . . . . . . . . . 100
Getting started . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16 Interface modules . . . . . . . . . . . 103
Setting up the XIV system rack . . . . . . . . 17 Module power-supply units . . . . . . . 106
Setting up XIV model 281x-114 and 281x-214 . . 17 InfiniBand switches . . . . . . . . . . 107
Setting up the XIV model 281x-215 rack . . . . 53 InfiniBand switch power-supply units . . . . 108
Setting up the XIV model 281x-216 rack . . . . 53 Maintenance module . . . . . . . . . . 108
Setting up an emergency power off circuit . . . . 54 Uninterruptible power supplies . . . . . . 109
Emergency power off considerations . . . . . 54 Uninterruptible power-supply batteries . . . . 110
Emergency power off cables . . . . . . . . 55
© Copyright IBM Corp. 2011, 2015 iii

Uninterruptible power-supply Removing an InfiniBand switch power-supply
network-management cards. . . . . . . . 111 unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 174
Automatic transfer switch . . . . . . . . 111 Installing an InfiniBand switch power-supply
Modem . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 115 unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 174
Before you begin replacing components . . . . 116 Completing the service call . . . . . . . . 175
Warnings and notes . . . . . . . . . . 116 Returning the defective component . . . . . 176
Electrostatic discharge . . . . . . . . . 117 Replacing an InfiniBand switch fan unit . . . . 176
Required tools and materials . . . . . . . 118 Replacing the maintenance module . . . . . . 177
Installing the IBM XIV Storage System Removing the maintenance module and guide
management tools . . . . . . . . . . . 118 rails . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 177
Installing the Technician Assistant tool . . . . 119 Installing the M5 guide rails and maintenance
Verifying host-system configurations . . . . 119 module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 182
Getting Started . . . . . . . . . . . . . 120 Completing the service call . . . . . . . . 186
Connecting your notebook computer to the XIV Returning the defective component . . . . . 187
system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 121 Replacing uninterruptible power supplies . . . . 187
Starting the Technician Assistant tool . . . . 121 Starting the guided repair . . . . . . . . 189
Starting the IBM XIV Storage Management GUI Removing the uninterruptible power supply 189
and command-line interface . . . . . . . 122 Installing the uninterruptible power supply . . 197
Replacing disk drive modules . . . . . . . . 123 Completing the guided repair . . . . . . . 205
Enabling DDM intermix . . . . . . . . . 124 Completing the service call . . . . . . . . 205
Phasing out the disk drive module . . . . . 124 Returning the defective component . . . . . 206
Starting the guided repair . . . . . . . . 125 Replacing uninterruptible power-supply batteries 206
Removing the disk drive module . . . . . . 125 Check the uninterruptible power-supply
Installing a disk drive module . . . . . . . 127 battery-born date . . . . . . . . . . . 207
Completing the guided repair . . . . . . . 128 Starting the guided repair . . . . . . . . 207
Completing the service call . . . . . . . . 128 Removing the uninterruptible power-supply
Returning the defective component . . . . . 129 batteries . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 208
Replacing data modules . . . . . . . . . . 129 Inserting the uninterruptible power-supply
Phasing out the data module . . . . . . . 131 batteries . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 210
Starting the guided repair . . . . . . . . 132 Completing the guided repair . . . . . . . 210
Removing the data module . . . . . . . . 132 Completing the service call . . . . . . . . 210
Installing the data module . . . . . . . . 137 Returning the defective component . . . . . 211
Completing the guided repair . . . . . . . 143 Replacing uninterruptible power-supply
Completing the service call . . . . . . . . 144 network-management cards . . . . . . . . 212
Returning the defective component . . . . . 145 Powering off the uninterruptible power supply 212
Replacing interface modules . . . . . . . . 145 Removing the uninterruptible power-supply
Phasing out the interface module . . . . . . 146 network-management card . . . . . . . . 213
Starting the guided repair . . . . . . . . 147 Installing the uninterruptible power-supply
Removing the interface module . . . . . . 147 network-management card . . . . . . . . 214
Installing the interface module . . . . . . 153 Powering on the uninterruptible power supply 214
Completing the guided repair . . . . . . . 160 Completing the service call . . . . . . . . 215
Completing the service call . . . . . . . . 160 Returning the defective component . . . . . 216
Returning the defective component . . . . . 161 Replacing the automatic transfer switch . . . . 216
Replacing module power-supply units . . . . . 161 Replacing the automatic transfer switch
Starting the guided repair . . . . . . . . 162 (non-concurrent) . . . . . . . . . . . 217
Removing the module power-supply unit . . . 162 Replacing the automatic transfer switch
Installing the module power-supply unit . . . 163 (concurrent) . . . . . . . . . . . . . 226
Completing the guided repair . . . . . . . 165 Replacing an SFP . . . . . . . . . . . . 260
Completing the service call . . . . . . . . 165 Starting the guided repair . . . . . . . . 261
Returning the defective component . . . . . 166 Replacing the main-power cables (concurrent) . . 261
Replacing module solid-state drives . . . . . . 166 Preparing to replace the main-power cables . . 262
Starting the guided repair . . . . . . . . 167 Swapping the main-power cables. . . . . . 264
Replacing InfiniBand switches . . . . . . . . 167 Verifying the main-power cable replacement . . 268
Starting the guided repair . . . . . . . . 168 Completing the service call . . . . . . . . 269
Phasing out the InfiniBand switch . . . . . 168 Replacing the modem . . . . . . . . . . 270
Removing the InfiniBand switch . . . . . . 169 Removing the modem . . . . . . . . . 270
Installing the InfiniBand switch . . . . . . 170 Installing the modem . . . . . . . . . . 271
Completing the guided repair . . . . . . . 172 Completing the service call . . . . . . . . 271
Completing the service call . . . . . . . . 172 Returning the defective component . . . . . 272
Returning the defective component . . . . . 173 Replacing cables . . . . . . . . . . . . 272
Replacing InfiniBand switch power-supply units 173
iv IBM XIV Gen3 281x-11x and 281x-21x Installation and Service Guide
Replacing module-to-module (Ethernet and Running basic diagnostic test . . . . . . . 323
serial-to-USB) cables . . . . . . . . . . 273 Collecting system logs . . . . . . . . . 324
Replacing module-to-switch (serial-to-USB) Viewing the event log . . . . . . . . . 325
cables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 274 Identifying status LEDs . . . . . . . . . 325
Replacing the InfiniBand switch-to-switch cables 275 Verifying host-system configurations . . . . 335
Replacing the ac-sensor cable from the ATS to Troubleshooting the XIV system . . . . . . . 336
uninterruptible power supply 3 . . . . . . 276 Notebook computer is not communicating with
Replacing the ac-sensor cable from the ATS to the XIV system . . . . . . . . . . . . 336
module 1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 277 Troubleshooting data and interface modules . . . 337
Replacing patch-panel (Ethernet and Fibre Physically installed modules are not displayed
Channel) cables. . . . . . . . . . . . 279 in the IBM XIV Storage Management GUI . . . 337
Replacing power cables . . . . . . . . . 281 Module not receiving power . . . . . . . 338
Replacing the rack top cover . . . . . . . . 285 Two modules report input power failures . . . 339
Removing the rack top cover . . . . . . . 286 Communication problems on modules 1, 2, and
Installing the rack top cover . . . . . . . 287 3 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 340
Replacing the standard front and rear rack doors 287 Multiple modules are in the Failed state . . . 340
Removing the standard front and rear rack Module PSU status LED flashes for more than
doors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 288 10 seconds . . . . . . . . . . . . . 342
Installing the standard front and rear rack doors 289 Troubleshooting the solid-state drive . . . . . 343
Replacing the rear-door heat exchanger. . . . . 289 Solid-state drive does not pass component test 343
Replacing the rear-door heat exchanger. . . . 291 Troubleshooting InfiniBand switches. . . . . . 344
Draining the heat exchanger . . . . . . . 293 InfiniBand-switch power supply unit status LED
Attaching and detaching the supply hose . . . 294 is not lit or is lit red . . . . . . . . . . 344
Attaching and detaching the return hose . . . 295 InfiniBand switch fan status LED is not lit or is
Removing and installing the hose-retention plate 296 lit red . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 344
Purging air from the heat exchanger. . . . . 296 InfiniBand switch is not working and
Opening and closing the air-purging valves . . 297 unresponsive . . . . . . . . . . . . 344
Replacing rack side panels . . . . . . . . . 298 Troubleshooting uninterruptible power supplies 345
Removing rack side panels . . . . . . . . 298 Uninterruptible power supply does not power
Installing rack side panels . . . . . . . . 300 on . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 345
Replacing the ruggedized brace . . . . . . . 302 Bypass LED on the uninterruptible power
Removing the ruggedized brace . . . . . . 302 supply is lit . . . . . . . . . . . . . 345
Installing the ruggedized brace . . . . . . 302 Fault LED on the uninterruptible power supply
Replacing the radio frequency identification device is lit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 345
tag . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 303 Overload and Fault LEDs on the uninterruptible
Removing and recycling coin batteries . . . . . 304 power supply are lit . . . . . . . . . . 346
Removing the coin battery from the M3 and M4 Overload and Bypass LEDs on the
maintenance modules . . . . . . . . . 305 uninterruptible power supply are lit . . . . . 346
Removing the coin battery from the Replace Battery LED on the uninterruptible
maintenance module . . . . . . . . . . 307 power supply is lit or flashing. . . . . . . 346
Removing the coin battery from a data or LEDs on the uninterruptible power supply are
interface module . . . . . . . . . . . 311 flashing sequentially . . . . . . . . . . 347
Troubleshooting cables and ports . . . . . . . 347
Chapter 7. Powering on and off the Failed Fibre Channel ports . . . . . . . . 347
XIV system . . . . . . . . . . . . 313 Running the rack cabling verification test . . . 348
Troubleshooting rear-door heat exchanger . . . . 349
Powering on the XIV system after shutdown . . . 313
Repairing a leak in the water-supply circuit . . 349
Powering on the XIV system after shutdown 313
Powering on the XIV model 281x-215 after
shutdown . . . . . . . . . . . . . 315 Chapter 10. Parts listing . . . . . . . 351
Powering off the XIV system . . . . . . . . 317 Components FRUs . . . . . . . . . . . 351
Powering off XIV system . . . . . . . . 317 Cable FRUs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 355
Powering off XIV model 281x-215 after Serial cable FRUs . . . . . . . . . . . 355
shutdown . . . . . . . . . . . . . 318 Ethernet cable FRUs . . . . . . . . . . 355
Fibre Channel cable FRU . . . . . . . . 356
Chapter 8. Temperature threshold and InfiniBand cable FRUs . . . . . . . . . 356
Automatic transfer switch ac-sensor cable FRUs 356
events . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 321 Modem cable FRUs . . . . . . . . . . 356
Front-door logo-LED cable FRU . . . . . . 357
Chapter 9. Troubleshooting . . . . . 323 Host-attachment cable FRUs . . . . . . . 357
Tips and techniques for troubleshooting a problem 323 Main-power cable FRUs . . . . . . . . . 357
Verifying the XIV system health . . . . . . 323 Power cord FRUs . . . . . . . . . . . 358
Contents v
Nonstocked FRUs . . . . . . . . . . . . 360 Power-distribution unit 1 (U1). . . . . . . 398
Patch panel cable connections . . . . . . . . 399
Chapter 11. Cable connections . . . . 361 Utility patch panel (U) cable connections . . . 399
Data and interface module cable connections . . . 361 1GbE host-connections patch-panel cable
Upper data-module cable connections . . . . 361 connections . . . . . . . . . . . . . 400
Interface-module cable connections . . . . . 368 10 GbE host-connections patch-panel cable
Lower data-module cable connections . . . . 380 connections . . . . . . . . . . . . . 403
InfiniBand switch cable connections . . . . . . 384 Modem cable connection . . . . . . . . . 406
InfiniBand switch 2 (N2) . . . . . . . . 384 Front-door logo LED cable connection . . . . . 407
InfiniBand switch 1 (N1) . . . . . . . . 386
Maintenance module cable connections . . . . . 388 Notices . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 409
Uninterruptible power-supply cable connections 389 Trademarks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 410
Uninterruptible power supply 3 (U3) . . . . 389 Homologation statement . . . . . . . . . 410
Uninterruptible power supply 2 (U2) . . . . 391
Uninterruptible power supply 1 (U1) . . . . 392 Glossary . . . . . . . . . . . . . 411
Automatic transfer switch cable connections . . . 394
Power-distribution-unit cable connections . . . . 396
Index . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 417
Power-distribution unit 2 (U2). . . . . . . 397
vi IBM XIV Gen3 281x-11x and 281x-21x Installation and Service Guide
Figures
1. Support settings window . . . . . . . . 1 49. Ground and male pins on the main-power
2. Example of a fully-populated XIV system model cable . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 61
281x-114 or model 281x-214 . . . . . . . 5 50. Removing the filler panel . . . . . . . . 63
3. Example of a minimally populated XIV system 6 51. Securing main-power cables to the patch panel 64
4. Host-connections patch panel with Fibre 52. Top view of the ATS . . . . . . . . . 64
Channel and 10 Gb Ethernet iSCSI ports . . . 8 53. Power sockets and circuit breakers on the side
5. Host-connections patch panel with Fibre of the ATS . . . . . . . . . . . . . 65
Channel and 1 Gb Ethernet iSCSI ports . . . 9 54. LEDs on the single-phase ATS . . . . . . 65
6. Installing the side panel . . . . . . . . 19 55. LEDs on the three-phase ATS . . . . . . 65
7. Rack top cover . . . . . . . . . . . 20 56. Front view of the uninterruptible power
8. Locking screw . . . . . . . . . . . 21 supply . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 66
9. Rack top cover . . . . . . . . . . . 21 57. Uninterruptible power-supply batteries 66
10. Leveling feet . . . . . . . . . . . . 23 58. Uninterruptible power-supply circuit breakers 67
11. Rack tie-down kit for non-raised floors 25 59. Front view of the uninterruptible power
12. Recommended bolt holes in the rack-mounting supply . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 67
plate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26 60. Front view of the maintenance module 68
13. Assembled rack tie-down kit for non-raised 61. Circuit-breaker guards on the
floors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27 power-distribution-units . . . . . . . . 69
14. Leveling feet . . . . . . . . . . . . 27 62. Circuit-breakers on the power-distribution-
15. Eyebolts installed in the subfloor . . . . . 28 units . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 69
16. Rack tie-down kit for raised floors . . . . . 29 63. LEDs on the front of the data and interface
17. Layout and dimensions for circular cutouts 30 modules . . . . . . . . . . . . . 70
18. Assembled rack tie-down kit for raised floors 31 64. Front view of the maintenance module 70
19. Leveling feet . . . . . . . . . . . . 32 65. LEDs on the rear of the data and interface
20. Ruggedized door supports . . . . . . . 33 modules . . . . . . . . . . . . . 71
21. Ruggedized x-brace . . . . . . . . . . 33 66. LEDs on the rear of the maintenance module 71
22. Side-panel retention kit . . . . . . . . 34 67. LEDs on the rear of the InfiniBand switch 71
23. Installing the side panel . . . . . . . . 35 68. Front view of the uninterruptible power
24. Disk-drive-module numbering sequence 36 supply . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 82
25. Front view of a disk drive module . . . . . 37 69. Power sockets and circuit breakers on the side
26. Front view of the data and interface modules 38 of the ATS . . . . . . . . . . . . . 83
27. Disk-drive module latch in the closed and 70. Uninterruptible power-supply cable ports 83
open positions . . . . . . . . . . . 39 71. LEDs on the front of the data and interface
28. Inserting the disk-drive modules into the bay 40 modules . . . . . . . . . . . . . 84
29. Rear view of upper data modules (10 - 15) 41 72. Circuit-breaker guards on the
30. Rear-door heat exchanger option kit . . . . 43 power-distribution-units . . . . . . . . 85
31. Hinge kit . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44 73. Circuit-breakers on the power-distribution-
32. Rear-door heat exchanger . . . . . . . . 45 units . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 85
33. Hose-retention plate. . . . . . . . . . 46 74. Circuit-breakers on the power-distribution-
34. Water-supply hoses . . . . . . . . . . 46 units . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 86
35. Air-purging valves . . . . . . . . . . 48 75. LEDs on the front of the data and interface
36. Air-purging tool . . . . . . . . . . . 48 modules . . . . . . . . . . . . . 86
37. Water-return hose . . . . . . . . . . 49 76. Host-connections patch panel with Fibre
38. Hose-retention plate. . . . . . . . . . 50 Channel and 1 Gb Ethernet iSCSI ports . . . 87
39. Water hoses assembled in a raised and 77. Host-connections patch panel with Fibre
non-raised floor. . . . . . . . . . . . 51 Channel and 10 Gb Ethernet iSCSI ports . . . 88
40. Standard door latch . . . . . . . . . . 52 78. Disk-drive-module numbering sequence 95
41. Ruggedized door latch . . . . . . . . . 53 79. Front view of a disk drive module . . . . . 99
42. Rear view of the uninterruptible power supply 55 80. Disk-drive modules in a data or interface
43. Power sockets and circuit breakers on the side module . . . . . . . . . . . . . 100
of the ATS . . . . . . . . . . . . . 56 81. Front view of the data and interface modules 100
44. Uninterruptible power-supply cable ports 57 82. Rear view of upper data modules (10 - 15) 101
45. Ground pin in customer ac-power outlet 58 83. Rear view of lower data modules (1 - 3) 101
46. Voltage pins in customer ac-power outlet 59 84. Front view of the data and interface modules 103
47. Voltage pins in customer ac-power outlet 60 85. Rear view of interface modules (4 - 9) with 10
48. Agency label . . . . . . . . . . . . 61 Gb Ethernet ports . . . . . . . . . . 104
© Copyright IBM Corp. 2011, 2015 vii

86. Rear view of interface modules (4 - 9) with 1 134. Module power-supply units. . . . . . . 154
Gb Ethernet ports . . . . . . . . . . 104 135. Front view of the data and interface modules 154
87. Module power-supply units. . . . . . . 107 136. Solid-state disk . . . . . . . . . . . 155
88. Front view of the InfiniBand switch . . . . 107 137. Disk-drive-module numbering sequence 155
89. Rear view of the InfiniBand switch . . . . 107 138. Front view of a disk drive module . . . . 156
90. Port numbering scheme on the InfiniBand 139. Inserting the disk-drive modules into the bay 156
switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 108 140. Rear view of interface modules (4 - 9) with 10
91. Power-supply units in the InfiniBand switch 108 Gb Ethernet ports . . . . . . . . . . 157
92. Front view of the maintenance module 108 141. Rear view of interface modules (4 - 9) with 1
93. Rear view of the maintenance module 109 Gb Ethernet ports . . . . . . . . . . 157
94. Front view of the uninterruptible power 142. Cable connections for data module 5 (front
supply . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 110 view) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 158
95. Rear view of the uninterruptible power 143. Power button on the front of the data and
supply . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 110 interface modules . . . . . . . . . . 159
96. Uninterruptible power-supply batteries 111 144. Module power-supply units. . . . . . . 163
97. Network management card on the 145. Module power-supply units. . . . . . . 164
uninterruptible power supply . . . . . . 111 146. Solid-state disk . . . . . . . . . . . 167
98. Front view of the three-phase ATS . . . . 112 147. Front view of the InfiniBand switch . . . . 169
99. Front view of the single-phase ATS . . . . 112 148. Rear view of the InfiniBand switch . . . . 170
100. Side view of the ATS . . . . . . . . . 113 149. Rear view of the InfiniBand switch . . . . 171
101. ATS-to-uninterruptible power-supply 150. Port numbering scheme on the InfiniBand
connections in a two-main-power-cable switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 171
configuration. . . . . . . . . . . . 114 151. InfiniBand switch power-supply unit 174
102. ATS-to-uninterruptible power-supply 152. Fan unit and LEDs in the InfiniBand switch 177
connections in a four-main-power-cable 153. Front view of the M3 and M4 maintenance
configuration. . . . . . . . . . . . 114 modules . . . . . . . . . . . . . 178
103. Modem . . . . . . . . . . . . . 115 154. Rear view of the M3 maintenance module 178
104. Modem bracket attachment . . . . . . . 115 155. Rear view of the M4 maintenance module 178
105. Disk-drive-module numbering sequence 126 156. Guide rails on the maintenance module 179
106. Front view of a disk drive module . . . . 126 157. Front view of the M5 maintenance module 179
107. Disk-drive-module numbering sequence 127 158. Information panel on the front of the M5
108. Front view of a disk drive module . . . . 127 maintenance module . . . . . . . . . 180
109. Inserting the disk-drive modules into the bay 128 159. Rear view of the maintenance module 180
110. Rear view of upper data modules (10 - 15) 133 160. Guide rail locking tab . . . . . . . . . 181
111. Rear view of lower data modules (1 - 3) 133 161. Mounting screw . . . . . . . . . . 181
112. Solid-state disk . . . . . . . . . . . 134 162. Releasing the guide rails from the rack 182
113. Disk-drive-module numbering sequence 135 163. Opening the locking tab . . . . . . . . 183
114. Front view of a disk drive module . . . . 135 164. Rear of guide rail: pins and screw inserted in
115. Module power-supply units. . . . . . . 136 rack. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 183
116. Front view of the data and interface modules 136 165. Front of guide rail: locking tab open and pins
117. Module power-supply units. . . . . . . 138 in place . . . . . . . . . . . . . 183
118. Front view of the data and interface modules 139 166. M5 guide rails extended . . . . . . . . 184
119. Solid-state disk . . . . . . . . . . . 139 167. Opening the guide rail locking tabs . . . . 185
120. Disk-drive-module numbering sequence 140 168. Cabling ports on the maintenance module 185
121. Front view of a disk drive module . . . . 140 169. Information panel on the front of the
122. Inserting the disk-drive modules into the bay 140 maintenance module . . . . . . . . . 185
123. Rear view of upper data modules (10 - 15) 141 170. Power-cable retainer that is not clipped 190
124. Rear view of lower data modules (1 - 3) 142 171. Power sockets and circuit breakers on the
125. Power button on the front of the data and side of the ATS . . . . . . . . . . . 191
interface modules . . . . . . . . . . 143 172. Power-cable retainer that is not clipped 192
126. Rear view of interface modules (4 - 9) with 10 173. Power sockets and circuit breakers on the
Gb Ethernet ports . . . . . . . . . . 148 side of the ATS . . . . . . . . . . . 192
127. Rear view of interface modules (4 - 9) with 1 174. Main-power cable pigtail retention bracket 193
Gb Ethernet ports . . . . . . . . . . 149 175. Uninterruptible power-supply cable ports 193
128. Cable connections for data module 5 (front 176. Front view of the uninterruptible power
view) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 149 supply . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 195
129. Solid-state disk . . . . . . . . . . . 150 177. Uninterruptible power-supply battery cover 195
130. Disk-drive-module numbering sequence 151 178. Uninterruptible power-supply batteries 195
131. Front view of a disk drive module . . . . 151 179. Power-socket number scheme for the
132. Module power-supply units. . . . . . . 152 uninterruptible power-supply . . . . . . 199
133. Front view of the data and interface modules 152 180. Uninterruptible power-supply cable ports 199
viii IBM XIV Gen3 281x-11x and 281x-21x Installation and Service Guide
181. ATS-to-uninterruptible power-supply 226. Front view of the maintenance module
connections in a two-main-power-cable information and connection panel. . . . . 247
configuration . . . . . . . . . . . 200 227. ATS installation stage A . . . . . . . . 248
182. Power sockets and circuit breakers on the 228. ATS installation stage B . . . . . . . . 248
side of the ATS . . . . . . . . . . . 200 229. ATS installation stage C . . . . . . . . 250
183. Power-cable retainer that is clipped . . . . 201 230. ATS installation stage D . . . . . . . . 252
184. ATS-to-uninterruptible power-supply 231. LEDs on the single-phase ATS . . . . . . 252
connections in a four-main-power-cable 232. LEDs on the three-phase ATS . . . . . . 252
configuration . . . . . . . . . . . 201 233. ATS installation stage E . . . . . . . . 253
185. Power sockets and circuit breakers on the 234. Side view of the ATS . . . . . . . . . 253
side of the ATS . . . . . . . . . . . 202 235. ATS installation stage F . . . . . . . . 254
186. Power-cable retainer that is clipped . . . . 202 236. ATS installation stage G . . . . . . . . 254
187. Main-power cable pigtail retention bracket 203 237. ATS installation stage H . . . . . . . . 255
188. Power sockets and circuit breakers on the 238. ATS installation stage I . . . . . . . . 256
side of the ATS . . . . . . . . . . . 204 239. Side view of the ATS . . . . . . . . . 257
189. Uninterruptible power-supply circuit breakers 204 240. Front view of the maintenance module
190. Front view of the uninterruptible power information and connection panel. . . . . 257
supply . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 205 241. LEDs on the single-phase ATS . . . . . . 263
191. Uninterruptible power-supply serial number 207 242. LEDs on the three-phase ATS . . . . . . 263
192. Front view of the uninterruptible power 243. Front panel of the uninterruptible power
supply . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 209 supply . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 264
193. Uninterruptible power-supply battery cover 209 244. LEDs on the single-phase ATS . . . . . . 266
194. Uninterruptible power-supply batteries 209 245. LEDs on the three-phase ATS . . . . . . 266
195. Uninterruptible power-supply circuit breakers 213 246. LEDs on the single-phase ATS . . . . . . 268
196. Power sockets and circuit breakers on the 247. LEDs on the three-phase ATS . . . . . . 268
side of the ATS . . . . . . . . . . . 213 248. Uninterruptible power-supply cable ports 276
197. Rear view of the uninterruptible power 249. Side view of the ATS . . . . . . . . . 277
supply . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 214 250. Rear view of lower data modules (1 - 3) 278
198. Front view of the uninterruptible power 251. Side view of the ATS . . . . . . . . . 279
supply . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 215 252. Uninterruptible power-supply cable ports 282
199. Power sockets and circuit breakers on the 253. Power sockets and circuit breakers on the
side of the ATS . . . . . . . . . . . 218 side of the ATS . . . . . . . . . . . 283
200. Top view of the ATS . . . . . . . . . 219 254. Front view of the uninterruptible power
201. Side view of the ATS . . . . . . . . . 220 supply . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 284
202. Side view of the ATS . . . . . . . . . 222 255. Rack top cover . . . . . . . . . . . 286
203. Top view of the ATS . . . . . . . . . 222 256. Rack top cover . . . . . . . . . . . 287
204. Side view of the ATS . . . . . . . . . 223 257. Rack doors . . . . . . . . . . . . 288
205. Front view of the uninterruptible power 258. Rack doors . . . . . . . . . . . . 289
supply with the power-off cover removed . . 224 259. Rear-door heat exchanger components 290
206. LEDs on the single-phase ATS . . . . . . 228 260. Rear-door heat exchanger . . . . . . . 292
207. LEDs on the three-phase ATS . . . . . . 228 261. Water-supply hoses . . . . . . . . . 294
208. Front panel of the uninterruptible power 262. Water-return hose . . . . . . . . . . 295
supply . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 229 263. Hose-retention plate . . . . . . . . . 296
209. ATS installation stage A . . . . . . . . 231 264. Air-purging tool . . . . . . . . . . 297
210. ATS installation stage B . . . . . . . . 231 265. Air-purging tool . . . . . . . . . . 298
211. ATS installation stage C . . . . . . . . 233 266. Side-panel retention kit . . . . . . . . 299
212. Power-cable retainer that is not clipped 234 267. Installing the side panel . . . . . . . . 300
213. Power-cable retainer that is clipped . . . . 235 268. Installing the side panel . . . . . . . . 301
214. ATS installation stage D . . . . . . . . 235 269. Side-panel retention kit . . . . . . . . 301
215. ATS installation stage E . . . . . . . . 237 270. Ruggedized x-brace . . . . . . . . . 302
216. ATS installation stage F . . . . . . . . 239 271. Ruggedized x-brace . . . . . . . . . 303
217. LEDs on the single-phase ATS . . . . . . 239 272. Radio frequency identification device tag on
218. LEDs on the three-phase ATS . . . . . . 239 the rack front cover . . . . . . . . . 304
219. ATS installation stage G . . . . . . . . 240 273. Radio frequency identification device tag 304
220. Side view of the ATS . . . . . . . . . 240 274. Riser-card assembly in the maintenance
221. ATS installation stage H . . . . . . . . 241 module . . . . . . . . . . . . . 306
222. ATS installation stage I . . . . . . . . 241 275. Maintenance module battery . . . . . . 306
223. ATS installation stage J . . . . . . . . 242 276. Maintenance module cover removal . . . . 308
224. ATS installation stage K . . . . . . . . 246 277. Air baffle removal . . . . . . . . . . 309
225. Side view of the ATS . . . . . . . . . 246 278. Coin battery location . . . . . . . . . 310
279. Coin battery removal . . . . . . . . . 310
Figures ix
280. Power sockets and circuit breakers on the 314. Cable connections for data module 8 with 10
side of the ATS . . . . . . . . . . . 314 Gb Ethernet ports . . . . . . . . . . 371
281. Uninterruptible power-supply circuit breakers 314 315. Cable connections for data module 7 with 1
282. Front view of the uninterruptible power Gb Ethernet ports . . . . . . . . . . 372
supply . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 315 316. Cable connections for data module 7 with 10
283. Circuit-breaker guards on the Gb Ethernet ports . . . . . . . . . . 373
power-distribution-units . . . . . . . . 316 317. Cable connections for data module 6 with 1
284. Circuit-breakers on the power-distribution- Gb Ethernet ports . . . . . . . . . . 374
units . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 316 318. Cable connections for data module 6 with 10
285. LEDs on the front of the data and interface Gb Ethernet ports . . . . . . . . . . 375
modules . . . . . . . . . . . . . 317 319. Cable connections for data module 5 (front
286. LEDs on the front of the data and interface view) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 376
modules . . . . . . . . . . . . . 318 320. Cable connections for data module 5 with 1
287. Circuit-breaker guards on the Gb Ethernet ports (rear view) . . . . . . 377
power-distribution-units . . . . . . . . 319 321. Cable connections for data module 5 with 10
288. Circuit-breakers on the power-distribution- Gb Ethernet ports (rear view) . . . . . . 377
units . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 319 322. Cable connections for data module 4 with 10
289. LEDs on the disk drive module . . . . . 325 Gb Ethernet ports . . . . . . . . . . 379
290. LEDs on the front of the data and interface 323. Cable connections for data module 3 with 1
modules . . . . . . . . . . . . . 326 Gb Ethernet ports . . . . . . . . . . 381
291. LEDs on the rear of the data and interface 324. Cable connections for data module 2 382
modules with 1 Gb Ethernet ports only. . . 327 325. Cable connections for data module 1 383
292. Rear view of interface modules (4 - 9) with 326. Cable connections on front side of InfiniBand
10 Gb Ethernet ports . . . . . . . . . 327 switch 2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . 385
293. Front view of the maintenance module 327. Cable connections on rear side of InfiniBand
information and connection panel. . . . . 329 switch 2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . 385
294. LEDs on the rear of the maintenance module 330 328. Port numbering scheme on the InfiniBand
295. LEDs on the rear of the InfiniBand switch 331 switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 385
296. LEDs on the front of the InfiniBand switch 331 329. Cable connections on front of InfiniBand
297. Front panel of the uninterruptible power switch 1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . 386
supply . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 332 330. Cable connections on rear of InfiniBand
298. LEDs on the single-phase ATS . . . . . . 333 switch 1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . 387
299. LEDs on the three-phase ATS . . . . . . 334 331. Port numbering scheme on the InfiniBand
300. ATS output power LEDs . . . . . . . . 334 switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 387
301. Ethernet ports for connecting to the notebook 332. Maintenance module cabling ports . . . . 388
computer . . . . . . . . . . . . . 337 333. Uninterruptible power-supply 3cable ports 390
302. LEDs on the rear of the data and interface 334. Power-socket number scheme for the
modules . . . . . . . . . . . . . 339 uninterruptible power-supply . . . . . . 390
303. LEDs on the rear of the data and interface 335. Uninterruptible power-supply 2 cable ports 391
modules . . . . . . . . . . . . . 342 336. Power-socket number scheme for the
304. Solid-state disk . . . . . . . . . . . 343 uninterruptible power-supply . . . . . . 392
305. Cable connections for data module 15 361 337. Uninterruptible power-supply 1 cable ports 393
306. Cable connections for data module 14 362 338. Power-socket number scheme for the
307. Cable connections for data module 13 364 uninterruptible power-supply . . . . . . 393
308. Cable connections for data module 12 365 339. ATS cable ports . . . . . . . . . . . 395
309. Cable connections for data module 11 366 340. Power-distribution-unit cable ports . . . . 397
310. Cable connections for data module 10 367 341. Host-connections patch panel with Fibre
311. Cable connections for data module 9 with 1 Channel and 1 Gb Ethernet iSCSI ports . . . 400
Gb Ethernet ports . . . . . . . . . . 368 342. Host-connections patch panel with Fibre
312. Cable connections for data module 9 with 10 Channel and 10 Gb Ethernet iSCSI ports . . 404
Gb Ethernet ports . . . . . . . . . . 369 343. Modem . . . . . . . . . . . . . 407
313. Cable connections for data module 8 with 1 344. Front-door logo LED cable . . . . . . . 408
Gb Ethernet ports . . . . . . . . . . 370
x IBM XIV Gen3 281x-11x and 281x-21x Installation and Service Guide
Tables
1. IBM XIV related publications . . . . . . xxiv 37. Module 14 cable connections . . . . . . 363
2. IBM XIV related websites . . . . . . . xxv 38. Module 13 cable connections . . . . . . 364
3. Feature codes for rack configurations . . . . 4 39. Module 12 cable connections . . . . . . 365
4. Fully populated rack limits for data storage 4 40. Module 11 cable connections . . . . . . 366
5. Minimally populated rack limits for data 41. Module 10 cable connections . . . . . . 367
storage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 42. Module 9 cable connections . . . . . . . 369
6. Capacity for XIV systems . . . . . . . . 7 43. Module 8 cable connections . . . . . . . 371
7. Fibre Channel and iSCSI ports on interface 44. Module 7 cable connections . . . . . . . 373
modules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7 45. Module 6 cable connections . . . . . . . 375
8. Utility patch panel connections . . . . . . 10 46. Module 5 cable connections . . . . . . . 377
9. Data module weight . . . . . . . . . 101 47. Module 4 cable connections . . . . . . . 379
10. Feature codes for data modules . . . . . 102 48. Module 3 cable connections . . . . . . . 381
11. Interface module weights . . . . . . . 104 49. Module 2 cable connections . . . . . . . 382
12. Feature codes for interface modules . . . . 105 50. Module 1 cable connections . . . . . . . 383
13. Minimum code requirements for DDM 51. InfiniBand switch 2 cable connections 385
intermix . . . . . . . . . . . . . 124 52. InfiniBand switch 1 cable connections 387
14. IBM Storage System temperature thresholds 53. Maintenance module cable connections for
and events . . . . . . . . . . . . 321 1 Gb Ethernet configuration systems. . . . 388
15. Disk drive module LED status . . . . . . 326 54. Maintenance module cable connections for
16. Status LEDs on the front of data and interface 10 Gb Ethernet configuration systems . . . 389
modules . . . . . . . . . . . . . 327 55. Uninterruptible power supply 3 cable
17. Status LEDs on the rear of data and interface connections . . . . . . . . . . . . 390
modules . . . . . . . . . . . . . 328 56. Uninterruptible power supply 2 cable
18. Status LEDs on the front of the maintenance connections . . . . . . . . . . . . 392
module . . . . . . . . . . . . . 329 57. Uninterruptible power supply 1 cable
19. Status LEDs on the front of the maintenance connections . . . . . . . . . . . . 393
module . . . . . . . . . . . . . 330 58. Automatic transfer switch cable connections 395
20. InfiniBand switch LED . . . . . . . . 331 59. Power-distribution-unit cable connections 397
21. Uninterruptible power-supply LEDs . . . . 332 60. Power-distribution-unit cable connections 398
22. ATS LEDs. . . . . . . . . . . . . 334 61. Utility panel cables . . . . . . . . . 400
23. Module to uninterruptible power supply 62. Patch panel 6 cable connections . . . . . 401
connectivity . . . . . . . . . . . . 340 63. Patch panel 5 cable connections . . . . . 401
24. Uninterruptible power supply failure chart 341 64. Patch panel 4 cable connections . . . . . 401
25. XIV system component FRUs . . . . . . 351 65. Patch panel 3 cable connections . . . . . 402
26. Serial cable FRUs . . . . . . . . . . 355 66. Patch panel 2 cable connections . . . . . 402
27. Ethernet cable FRUs . . . . . . . . . 355 67. Patch panel 1 cable connections . . . . . 403
28. Fibre Channel cable FRU. . . . . . . . 356 68. Patch panel 6 cable connections . . . . . 404
29. InfiniBand cables FRUs . . . . . . . . 356 69. Patch panel 5 cable connections . . . . . 404
30. ATS ac-sensor cable FRUs . . . . . . . 356 70. Patch panel 4 cable connections . . . . . 405
31. Modem cable FRUs . . . . . . . . . 356 71. Patch panel 3 cable connections . . . . . 405
32. Front-door logo-LED cable FRU . . . . . 357 72. Patch panel 2 cable connections . . . . . 406
33. Host-attachment cable FRUs . . . . . . 357 73. Patch panel 1 cable connections . . . . . 406
34. Main-power cable FRUs . . . . . . . . 357 74. Modem cable connection. . . . . . . . 407
35. Nonstocked component FRUs . . . . . . 360 75. Front-door logo LED cable connection 408
36. Module 15 cable connections . . . . . . 361
© Copyright IBM Corp. 2011, 2015 xi

xii IBM XIV Gen3 281x-11x and 281x-21x Installation and Service Guide
Safety and environmental notices
Review the safety notices, environmental notices, and electronic emission notices
for IBM® XIV® Storage System before you install and use the product.
Safety notices and labels

Review the safety notices and safety information labels before using this product.
IBM Systems safety notices and information
This publication contains the safety notices for the IBM Systems products in
English and other languages. Anyone who plans, installs, operates, or services the
system must be familiar with and understand the safety notices. Read the related
safety notices before beginning work.
IBM Systems Safety Notices, G229-9054
The publication is organized into three sections:

Safety notices
Lists the danger and caution notices without labels, organized
alphabetically by language.
The following notices and statements are used in IBM documents. They are
listed in order of decreasing severity of potential hazards.
Danger notice definition
A special note that calls attention to a situation that is potentially
lethal or extremely hazardous to people.
Caution notice definition
A special note that calls attention to a situation that is potentially
hazardous to people because of some existing condition, or to a
potentially dangerous situation that might develop because of
some unsafe practice.
Labels Lists the danger and caution notices that are accompanied with a label,
organized by label reference number.
Text-based labels
Lists the safety information labels that might be attached to the hardware
to warn of potential hazards, organized by label reference number.
Note: This product has been designed, tested, and manufactured to comply with
IEC 60950-1, and where required, to relevant national standards that are based on
IEC 60950-1.
Finding translated notices
Each safety notice contains an identification number. You can use this identification
number to check the safety notice in each language.
To find the translated text for a caution or danger notice:
© Copyright IBM Corp. 2011, 2015 xiii

1. In the product documentation, look for the identification number at the end of
each caution notice or each danger notice. In the following examples, the
numbers (D002) and (C001) are the identification numbers.
DANGER
A danger notice indicates the presence of a hazard that has the potential
of causing death or serious personal injury. (D002)
CAUTION:
A caution notice indicates the presence of a hazard that has the potential of
causing moderate or minor personal injury. (C001)
2. Open the IBM Systems Safety Notices.
3. Under the language, find the matching identification number. Review the topics
concerning the safety notices to ensure that you are in compliance.
To view a PDF file, you need Adobe Reader. You can download it at no charge
from the Adobe website (get.adobe.com/reader/).
Special caution and safety notices

This information describes special safety notices that apply to the IBM XIV Storage
System. These notices are in addition to the standard safety notices supplied and
address specific issues relevant to the equipment provided.
Laser safety
When using an NVRAM5 or NVRAM6 cluster media converter, the storage system
must be installed in a restricted access location.
CAUTION:
This product contains a Class 1M laser. Do not view directly with optical
instruments. (C028)
This equipment contains Class 1 laser products, and complies with FDA radiation
Performance Standards, 21 CFR Subchapter J, and the international laser safety
standard IEC 825-2.
CAUTION:
Class I
Data processing environments can contain equipment transmitting on system
links with laser modules that operate at greater than Class 1 power levels. For
this reason, never look into the end of an optical fiber cable or open receptacle.
(C027)
Attention: In the United States, use only SFP or GBIC optical transceivers that
comply with the FDA radiation performance standards, 21 CFR Subchapter J.
Internationally, use only SFP or GBIC optical transceivers that comply with IEC
standard 825–1. Optical products that do not comply with these standards might
produce light that is hazardous to the eyes.
xiv IBM XIV Gen3 281x-11x and 281x-21x Installation and Service Guide
Usage restrictions: The optical ports of the modules must be terminated with an
optical connector or with a dust plug.
Ladder usage
A step or platform ladder might be necessary to service higher modules.
Use an OSHA/CSA approved non-conductive step or platform ladder specified for

at least a 136.4 kg (300 lb.) load capacity.
Fire suppression systems

A fire suppression system is the responsibility of the customer. The insurance
underwriter, local fire marshal, or a local building inspector, or all three, must be
consulted in selecting a fire suppression system that provides the correct level of
coverage and protection.
IBM designs and manufactures equipment to internal and external standards that
require certain environments for reliable operation. Because IBM does not test any
equipment for compatibility with fire suppression systems, IBM does not make
compatibility claims of any kind nor does IBM provide recommendations on fire
suppression systems.
Power cables
Use only IBM approved UL power cables.
For your safety, IBM provides a power cable with a grounded attachment plug to
use with this IBM product. To avoid electrical shock, always use the power cable
and plug with a correctly grounded outlet. IBM power cables used in the United
States and Canada are listed by Underwriters Laboratories (UL) and certified by
the Canadian Standards Association (CSA). For units intended to be operated at
115 volts: Use a UL-listed and CSA-certified cable set consisting of a minimum 18
AWG, Type SVT or SJT, three-conductor cable, a maximum of 15 feet in length and
a parallel blade, grounding-type attachment plug rated 15 amperes, 125 volts. For
units intended to be operated at 230 volts (U.S. use), use a UL-listed and
CSA-certified cable set consisting of a minimum 18 AWG, Type SVT or SJT,
three-conductor cable, a maximum of 15 feet in length and a tandem blade,
grounding-type attachment plug rated 15 amperes, 250 volts. For units intended to
be operated at 230 volts (outside the U.S.), use a cable set with a grounding type
attachment plug. The cable set must have the appropriate safety approvals for the
country in which the equipment is to be installed. IBM power cables for a specific
country or region are usually available only in that country or region.
Connect all power cables to a correctly wired and grounded electrical outlet.
Ensure that the outlets supplies correct voltage and phase rotation according to the
system rating plate. Ensure that all customer facility outlets are protected with
circuit breakers rated at maximum for 30 Amps. The power cable plugs operate as
the system main-disconnection method.
Safety and environmental notices xv

Sound pressure
Hearing protection must be worn while you service the XIV system.
CAUTION:
Depending upon local conditions, the sound pressure might exceed 85 dB(A)
during service operations. Hearing protection must be worn when you are in a
room that has an XIV system while either the front or rear door is open or when
the front and rear doors are not installed.
Leakage current
XIV systems incorporate electromagnetic-interference filter capacitors that are
required to prevent electrical noise from penetrating the power grid. A
characteristic of filter capacitors, during normal operation, is a high amount of
leakage current.
Depending on the storage configuration, this leakage current can reach 100 mA.
For the most reliable operation, do not use Ground Fault Circuit Interrupter
(GFCI), Earth Leakage Circuit Breaker (ELCB), and Residual Current Circuit
Breaker (RCCB) type circuit breakers with XIV systems. The XIV system is certified
for safe operation and is compliant with IEC, EN, UL, CSA 60950-1 standards.
However, if leakage detection circuit breakers are required by local electrical
practice, the breakers must be sized for a leakage-current rating of 300 mA or
greater to reduce the risk of server outage caused by erroneous and spurious
tripping.
Site preparation
The IBM service representative can only minimally reposition the rack at the
installation site, as needed to service the XIV system. The customer is responsible
for using professional movers or riggers in the case of equipment relocation or
disposal.
Attention: Do not tilt the XIV system rack more than 12.5 degrees.
If more clearance is needed for models 281x-114 or 281x-214 racks, the

weight-and-height-reduced shipping (feature code 0200) must be ordered to reduce
the height of the rack. When this option is ordered, data modules 12 - 15 are
shipped separately, and the rack top cover can be removed by the IBM service
representative before the XIV system is moved to its final location by professional
movers.
DANGER
Heavy equipment - personal injury or equipment damage might result if

mishandled. Use only professional movers.
xvi IBM XIV Gen3 281x-11x and 281x-21x Installation and Service Guide
xiv10012
Environmental notices
This publication contains all the required environmental notices for IBM Systems
products in 26 languages. The environmental notices that are included are
limitations, product recycling and disposal, product information, battery return
program, flat panel display, monitors and workstations, refrigeration, and
water-cooling system.
IBM Systems Environmental Notices and User Guide (ftp://

public.dhe.ibm.com/systems/support/warranty/envnotices/
environmental_notices_and_user_guide.pdf), Z125-5823
Safety and environmental notices xvii

xviii IBM XIV Gen3 281x-11x and 281x-21x Installation and Service Guide
About this guide
This document provides service information for the IBM XIV Storage System
models 281x-114, 281x-116, 281x-214, 281x-215, and 281x-216. This document
describes how to install the XIV system, replace hardware components, and
troubleshoot hardware problems.
Summary of changes
Use this information to learn about new features and enhancements.
This table describes the current technical changes and enhancements to IBM XIV
Storage System as of June 4, 2015.
Function Description
System overview v Updated rack components to include model 281x-216 (see “Rack
components” on page 3).
Installing v Updated instructions for verifying the rack setup for the new M5
maintenance module (see “Verifying the XIV system rack setup”
on page 69).
Relocating an XIV v Updated part number for relocation kit (see “Packing an XIV
system system” on page 96).
Replacing hardware v Added instructions for the M5 maintenance module and guide
components rails (see “Replacing the maintenance module” on page 177).
v Updated instructions for replacing the automatic transfer switch
(see “Preparing to replace the automatic transfer switch” on
page 227).
v Added instructions for maintenance module coin battery
removal (see “Removing and recycling coin batteries” on page
304).
Temperature v Added support for temperature thresholds and events (see
thresholds and events Chapter 8, “Temperature threshold and events,” on page 321).
Troubleshooting v Added support for 10 Gb Ethernet iSCSI LEDs (see “Data and
interface module LEDs” on page 326).
v Added support for the M5 maintenance module (see
“Maintenance module LEDs” on page 329).
Parts listing v Added support for 6 TB Self Encrypting Drives (see
“Components FRUs” on page 351).
v Added support for 480 GB Micron M500DC SSD (see
Cable connections v Updated cable connections for M5 maintenance module (see
“Maintenance module cable connections” on page 388).
Storage System as of August 21, 2014.
© Copyright IBM Corp. 2011, 2015 xix

Replacing hardware v Added instructions for replacing an 8 Gbps Fibre Channel or 10
components Gbps Ethernet adapter small form-factor pluggable (SFP)
transceiver (see “Replacing an SFP” on page 260).
v Added instructions for using the guided repair procedure on the
8 Gbps Fibre Channel SFP. (see “Starting the guided repair” on
page 261).
Parts listing v Added support for a USB to Ethernet Adapter (see “Components
FRUs” on page 351).
v Added support for 8 Gbps Fibre Channel or 10 Gbps Ethernet
adapter SFP (see “Components FRUs” on page 351).
Storage System as of November 15, 2013.
New XIV system Added installation and service information for the new XIV system
model Model 281x-216.
Replacing hardware v Added instructions for replacing the main-power cables (see
components “Replacing the main-power cables (concurrent)” on page 261).
v Updated instructions for cable placement when removing and
installing the InfiniBand switch (see “Removing the InfiniBand
switch” on page 169 and “Installing the InfiniBand switch” on
page 170).
Powering on and off Updated instructions for powering on after a shutdown (see
the XIV system “Powering on the XIV system after shutdown” on page 313).
Relocating an XIV Updated relocation kit part number (see “Relocating model
system 281x-114 and 281x-214” on page 93).
Parts listing v Added support for 800 GB Micron M500DC SSD (see
v Added support for 2 TB, 3 TB, and 4 TB Self Encrypting Drives
(see “Components FRUs” on page 351).
Troubleshooting Added instructions for running the rack cabling verification test
(see “Running the rack cabling verification test” on page 348).
Storage System as of August 7, 2013.
Replacing hardware Updated instructions for replacing the uninterruptible power
components supplies (see “Replacing uninterruptible power supplies” on page
187) and replacing uninterruptible power-supply batteries (see
“Replacing uninterruptible power-supply batteries” on page 206)
using the Technician Assistant tool.
Storage System as of June 27, 2013.
xx IBM XIV Gen3 281x-11x and 281x-21x Installation and Service Guide
Replacing hardware Updated minimum code requirements for disk drive module
components intermix (see “Enabling DDM intermix” on page 124).
Parts listing Added support for 4 TB disk drive module (see “Components
FRUs” on page 351).
Overview, Replacing Added information for the new model 281x-214 4 TB
hardware components self-encrypting disk drive modules (DDMs), including the
following items: (see “Rack configurations” on page 4, “Capacity”
on page 6, “Processors and memory” on page 7, “Interface
modules” on page 103, and “Data modules” on page 100).
Storage System as of May 13, 2013.
Replacing hardware Update concurrent ATS replacement procedure to disable
components automatic uninterruptible power-supply calibration before starting
the replacement, and enabling calibration when the replacement is
complete (see “Preparing to replace the automatic transfer switch”
on page 227 and “Completing the service call” on page 258).
MES and RPQ Updated the following installation instructions with additional
installation model support (see “Service publications” on page xxii)
instructions v Capacity Expansion: Data Modules and Interface Modules FFBM
(98Y4955,M08475)
v Ruggedized Rack Kit Installation RPQ (98Y4950,M08491)
v Single-Phase 60 A Two-Main-Power Cable Configuration to
Single-Phase 30 A Four-Main-Power Cable Configuration
Conversion RPQ (98Y4953,M08491)
v Ruggedized Rack Kit Installation MES (98Y5052,M08512)
v ATS and Line Cords Installation FFBM (98Y5050,M08512)
v Main-Power Cables Installation FFBM (98Y5048,M08512)
v USB Modem Installation FFBM (98Y5049,M08512)
v Host-Attachment Cables Installation FFBM (98Y5051,M08512)
Updated the Capacity Expansion: Data Modules and Interface

Modules FFBM installation instructions (98Y4955,M08475) new
feature codes (see “Service publications” on page xxii)
Who should use this guide

This document is intended for IBM service personnel only. The procedures
described in this document are performed only by trained IBM service personnel.
CAUTION:
Servicing of this product or unit is to be performed by trained service
personnel only. (C032)
Conventions used in this guide

These notices are used to highlight key information.
Note: These notices provide important tips, guidance, or advice.
About this guide xxi

Important: These notices provide information or advice that might help you avoid
inconvenient or difficult situations.
Attention: These notices indicate possible damage to programs, devices, or data.

An attention notice is placed before the instruction or situation in which damage
can occur.
CAUTION:
These notices indicate a situation that is potentially hazardous to people because
of some existing condition or where a potentially dangerous situation might
develop because of some unsafe practice.
DANGER
These notices indicate a situation that is potentially lethal or hazardous to
people. For example, after a computer side panel is removed, exposed
high-voltage wires might be lethal.
Service publications
Use these links to access the service-related information for the IBM XIV Storage
System models 281x-114, 281x-214, 281x-215, and 281x-216.
Information center
IBM XIV Storage System Service Information Center website

(service.atlanta.ibm.com:9090/support/knowledgecenter/STJTAG_ent)
From the IBM XIV Storage System Service information center, you can browse all
product and service documentation.
Publications
Service information that is available in the information center is also available in a

set of publications, in PDF format. You can find the following PDFs in the
information center on the Service publications and related information web page
(http://service.atlanta.ibm.com:9090/support/knowledgecenter/STJTAG_ent/
com.ibm.help.xivgen3_srv.doc/xiv_114servicepubs.dita).
Title Description Order number

IBM XIV Storage System Gen3 This publication describes service GC27-3921
Models 281x-11x and 281x-21x tasks for the IBM XIV Storage
Installation and Service Guide System 281x-114, 281x-214, and
281x-215. This book describes how
to install a new system, replace
field replaceable unit (FRU)
components, and troubleshoot
hardware problems.
xxii IBM XIV Gen3 281x-11x and 281x-21x Installation and Service Guide
Title Description Order number
IBM XIV Storage System Gen3 This document describes how to SC27-5416
Model 281x-215 Rack Installation set up the XIV model 281x-215
Guide rack, including installing the rack
migration kit and inserting the
hardware components into the
customer rack.
Note: This document is used with
the IBM XIV Storage System Gen3
Models 281x-11x and 281x-21x
Installation and Service Guide to
complete the installation.
IBM XIV Storage System Safety This document provides service GA32-0832
Notices information for the IBM XIV
Storage System, including
installing a new system, replacing
FRU components, and
troubleshooting hardware
problems.
This document describes all

standard IBM XIV Storage System
safety notices.
Publications and related information

Product manuals, other IBM publications, and websites contain information that
relates to the IBM XIV Storage System.
Information centers
v IBM XIV Storage System Information Center website (ibm.com/support/
knowledgecenter/STJTAG)
From the IBM XIV Storage System Information Center, you can browse all
product documentation.
v IBM Storage Host Software Solutions Information Center website
(http://pic.dhe.ibm.com/infocenter/strhosts/ic/index.jsp)
From the Storage Host Software Solutions Information Center, you can browse
documentation for platform and application integration software that is
supported by IBM XIV Storage System.
Publications
Information that is available in the information center is also available in a set of

publications, in PDF format. You can find the following PDFs in the information
center on the Publications and related information web page (http://
publib.boulder.ibm.com/infocenter/ibmxiv/r2/topic/com.ibm.help.xivgen3.doc/
xiv_pubsrelatedinfoic.html).
v IBM XIV Storage System Product Overview
This document contains an overview of the IBM XIV Storage System hardware
and software.
About this guide xxiii

v IBM XIV Storage SystemGen3 Model 281x-11x and 281x-21x Planning Guide
This guide defines installation requirements for IBM XIV Gen3 Storage System
model 281x-114, and model 281x-214. It is important to ensure that you meet all
requirements to ensure a fast and reliable installation.
v IBM XIV Storage System Model 281x-A14 Planning Guide
This guide defines installation requirements for IBM XIV Storage System model
281x-A14. It is important to ensure that you meet all requirements to ensure a
fast and reliable installation.
v IBM XIV Storage System Application Programming Interface Reference
This reference assists you in developing CIM-based applications by using the
XIV Open API.
v IBM XIV Storage System Commands Reference
This reference describes the IBM XIV command-line interface (XCLI) system and
utility commands that are used to manage and maintain the XIV system,
including the command syntax, parameter descriptions, output descriptions, and
examples.
v IBM XIV Storage System XCLI User Manual
This guide describes how to use the IBM XIV command-line interface (XCLI) to
run XIV system and utility commands.
v IBM XIV Management Tools User Guide.
This user guide describes how to install and use the IBM XIV Management
Tools. The document describes the new component: IBM XIV Multi-System
Manager, and the relevant XIV GUI capabilities.
v IBM XIV Storage System Remote Support Proxy Installation and User's Guide
This guide describes how to install, configure, and use the IBM XIV Storage
System Remote Support Proxy to connect an XIV system to the XIV Remote
Support Center.
v IBM XIV Storage System Safety Notices
This document describes all standard IBM XIV Storage System safety notices.
IBM Redbooks publications and technical papers
Various IBM Redbooks® publications, Redpapers, and white papers are available
for the IBM XIV Storage System. For more papers, see the IBM XIV Storage System
website (http://www.ibm.com/systems/storage/disk/xiv/).
Table 1. IBM XIV related publications
Title Description
IBM XIV Storage System: This Redbooks publication describes the concepts,
Architecture, Implementation, and architecture, and implementation of the XIV system,
Usage which is a scalable enterprise storage system that is
based on a grid array of hardware components.
IBM XIV Storage System with the This Redbooks publication describes how you can
Virtual I/O Server and IBM i connect the XIV system to the IBM i operating system
through the Virtual I/O Server (VIOS). A connection
through the VIOS is especially useful for IT centers
that have many small IBM i partitions. When you use
the VIOS, the Fibre Channel host adapters can be
installed in the VIOS and shared by many IBM i
clients by using virtual connectivity to the VIOS.
xxiv IBM XIV Gen3 281x-11x and 281x-21x Installation and Service Guide
Table 1. IBM XIV related publications (continued)
Title Description
XIV Storage System: Host Attachment This Redbooks publication describes how to attach an
and Interoperability XIV system to various hosting operating systems in
combination with databases and other
storage-oriented application software. It also provides
solutions for combining the IBM XIV Storage System
with other storage systems, host servers, or gateways.
IBM XIV Storage System: Copy This Redbooks publication describes IBM XIV Storage
Services and Migration System copy and migration functions for various data
protection scenarios to enhance your business
continuance, data migration, and online-backup
solutions. These include point-in-time copies (also
known as snapshots and full volume copies) and
remote-copy capabilities in synchronous or
asynchronous mode. This book also describes how to
integrate the snapshot function with the IBM Tivoli®
FlashCopy® Manager, built-in migration capability,
and migration alternatives that are based on the IBM
SAN Volume Controller.
Related websites
View these websites to get more information about the XIV system.
Table 2. IBM XIV related websites
Title Description
IBM website Find more information about IBM products and
services.
IBM Support Portal website Find support-related information such as downloads,
(www.ibm.com/storage/support) documentation, troubleshooting, and service requests
and PMRs.
IBM Directory of Worldwide Find contact information for general inquiries,
Contacts website technical support, and hardware and software
support by country.
IBM XIV Storage System website Use this website to learn about the XIV system,
(http://www.ibm.com/systems/ including features and hardware summary. This
storage/disk/xiv/) website also has links to white papers, Redbooks
publications, and product documentation.
IBM Systems Storage forum website Use this forum to share ideas with knowledgeable
(www.ibm.com/developerworks/ experts and discover how the latest IBM storage
forums/forum.jspa?forumID=846) solutions can address your business challenges.
Forum topics include storage management, storage
virtualization, business continuity, infrastructure
simplification, disk storage systems, and storage
software products and solutions.
Getting information, help, and service

If you need help, service, technical assistance, or want more information about IBM
products, you can find various sources to assist you. You can view the following
websites to get information about IBM products and services and to find the latest
technical information and support.
v IBM website (ibm.com®)
About this guide xxv

v IBM Support Portal website (www.ibm.com/storage/support)
v IBM Directory of Worldwide Contacts website (www.ibm.com/planetwide)
Ordering publications
The IBM Publications Center is a worldwide central repository for IBM product
publications and marketing material.
The IBM Publications Center website (www.ibm.com/shop/publications/order/)

offers customized search functions to help you find the publications that you need.
Some publications are available for you to view or download at no charge. You can
also order publications. The publications center displays prices in your local
currency.
Sending your comments

Your feedback is important in helping to provide the most accurate and highest
quality information.
Procedure
To submit any comments about this book or any other IBM XIV Storage System
documentation:
Send your comments by email to starpubs@us.ibm.com. Be sure to include the

following information:
v Exact publication title and version
v Publication form number (for example, GC27-1234-00)
v Page, table, or illustration numbers that you are commenting on
v A detailed description of any information that needs to be changed
xxvi IBM XIV Gen3 281x-11x and 281x-21x Installation and Service Guide
Chapter 1. Setting the activity level for Support access
An activity level can be set for Support access allowable by the customer.
About this task
Select the activity level for Support access. Any activity level above the selected
level is subject to customer permission.
Procedure
1. From the XIV GUI, select Systems > System Settings > Support. The following
window is displayed:
Figure 1. Support settings window
2. In the Support Access Level field, select one of the following options:
v None - No access is allowed without customer permission. Connecting to the
system requires previous approval from the customer. If approval is received,
all actions can be performed. Once approved, connecting to the system,
guided repairs, reports and the rest are not blocked.
v Diagnostic - Access is granted for diagnostic purposes only (for example,
X-Ray). Allows X-Ray collection and view/list/status actions. Other actions
require permission.
v No impact - Access is granted for diagnostic and non-impacting changes.
Any change that could possibly result in impaired/reduced/impacted host
IO requires customer permission.
v Full - No prior permission is required to perform any repair action. Access is
granted for all activities.
3. Click Update to save your settings.
© Copyright IBM Corp. 2011, 2015 1

2 IBM XIV Gen3 281x-11x and 281x-21x Installation and Service Guide
Chapter 2. XIV system overview
Read this information before servicing an XIV system to understand the system
components, supported rack configurations, and network connections.
Rack components
This information lists the components that are supplied with each XIV system.
Models 281x-114 and 281x-214

The following components are supplied with each XIV system:
v IBM T42 rack
v Three to nine data modules, each with 12 disk drive modules (DDMs) and one
optional solid-state drive (SSD)
v Three or six interface modules, each with 12 DDMs and one optional SSD
v Three uninterruptible power supplies
v Two InfiniBand switches
v One maintenance module
v One automatic transfer switch
v One modem
v Six host-connections patch panels with Fibre Channel and Ethernet (iSCSI) ports
v Utility patch panel with maintenance, technician, management, remote support,
and modem ports
v Complete set of internal cabling
Custom-rack model 281x-215
The following components are supplied with each XIV system:

v One modem
and modem ports
v Rack migration kit
Custom-rack model 281x-216
The following components are supplied with each XIV model 281x-216:
v Three uninterruptible power supplies
v One automatic transfer switch (ATS)
v One modem

and modem ports
Rack configurations
The IBM XIV Storage System supports racks that contain a total of 6 or 9-15
modules Seven-module and eight-module configurations are not supported.
Table 3 shows the various system configuration options with their feature codes.
Table 3. Feature codes for rack configurations
Feature description Feature code
6 module initial capacity 806
The IBM XIV Storage System requires a corresponding software license for each
entitled data or interface module.
Partially populated configurations have the same power, floor planning, hardware,
software, and cabling configurations as fully populated systems. In other words,
partially populated racks are identical to fully populated rack, except that they
have fewer modules and therefore less storage capacity. XIV systems with only six
modules also have fewer usable Fibre Channel and iSCSI ports.
Fully populated rack (15 modules)
A fully populated rack contains nine data modules and six interface modules, for a
total of 15 modules.
Each module contains twelve 1 TB limited capacity, 2 TB, 3 TB, 4 TB, or 6 TB disk
drive modules (DDMs), for a total of 180 DDMs.
Table 4 shows the various configuration limits for a fully populated rack's data
storage.
Table 4. Fully populated rack limits for data storage
XIV systems with limited capacity DDMs Amount to be used for data storage
1 TB 81 TB
2 TB 161 TB
3 TB 243 TB
4 TB 325 TB
6 TB 485 TB
The following figure shows an example of the front and rear views of a fully
populated XIV system.
a aa
aaaaaaaaa
a
aaaaaaaaa aaaaaaaaaaaaaa
aaaaa aaaaaaa aaaaaaa aaaaa aaaaaa aaaaaaaaa aaaaaaaa
aaaaaaa aaaaaaa
aaaaaaaa
aaaaa
aaaaaaaaaa
aaaaaaa
aaaaa
aaaaaaaaaa
aaaaa
aaaaaaaaaa
aaaaa
aaaaa
aaaaaaaaaa
aaaaa
aaaaaaaaaa
aaaaa
aaaaaaaa
aaaaa
aaaaaaaaaa
aaaaaaa
Data module 15 aaaaaa
a a a
aaaaaaaaa
aaaaaa
aaaaaa
a a a
aaaaaaaaa
aaaaaaa
aaaaaaa
a a a a
a a a a
aaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaa
a a a a a a a a a a a a aaaaaaaaa aaaaaaaaaaaaaaa
aaaaaaa aaaaaaa aaaaaaa aaaaaaa aaaaaa aaaaaaaa aa a a aa
aaaaa
aaaaaaaaaa
aaaaa
a
aaaaaaaaa
a a a
aaaaaaaaaa
a a a
aaaaaaaaaa
aaaaaa aaaaaaaaaa aaaaaaaaaaa
aaaaaaa a a a a
aaaaaaaa
aaaaa aaaaa aaaaaaa aaaaaaa aaaaaa
aaaaaa aaaaaaa
a
aaaaaaaaa a
aaaaaaaaa aaaaaaaa aaaaaaaa aaaaaa aaaaaaa
aaaaa aaaaa aaaaa aaaaa a a a a a a a
a aa aa a aa aa aaaaaaa aaaaaaa aaaaaaaaa aaaaaaaaaaaaaaa
a a a aaaaa aaaaa aaaaa
aaaaaaa aaaaa aaaaa aaaaa aaaaaa aaaaaaaa aa a a aa
aaaaaaaaaaa
aaaaaaaa
aaaaa
aaaaaaaaaa
aaaaaaa
a a a
aaaaaaaaaa
aaaaa
aaaaaaaaaa
aaaaa
a a a
aaaaaaaaaa
aaaaa
aaaaaaaaaa
aaaaa
a a a
aaaaaaaaaa
aaaaa
aaaaaaaaaa
aaaaa
a a a
a a a
aaaaaaaaa
aaaaaa
aaaaaa
a a a
aaaaaaaaaa
aaaaaaa a a a a
aaaaaaa
aaaaaaa
a a a a
aaaaaaa aaaaaaa aaaaaaa aaaaaaa aaaaaaaaa aaaaaaaaaaaaaaa
a a a
aaaaaaaaaa
aaaaaaa
aaaaa
a
aaaaaaaaa
aaaaa
a
aaaaaaaaa
a a a
aaaaaaaaaa
aaaaaaa Data module 12 aaaaaa
aaaaaa
aaaaaa
aaaaaa
aaaaaaaaa a a a a
aaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaa
aaaaaaaa a a a aa
a
aaaaa aaaaa aaaaaa aaaaaaa
aaaaaaaa a
aaaaaaaaa a
aaaaaaaaa aaaaaaaa aaaaaaa
a
aaaaaa a a a a
aaaaa aaaaa aaaaa aaaaa a a a
aaaaaaa aa aa a aa aa a aaaaaaa
aaaaa aaaaa a a a
aaaaaaa
a a a
aaaaaaa
Data module 11 aaaaaaaaa
aaaaaa aaaaaaaaa
aaaaaaaaaaaaaa
a
aaaaa aaaaa aaaaaaaa
aaaaaaaaaa aaaaaaaaaa aaaaaaaa aaaaaaaa aaaaaa aaaaaaaaa a a a a
aaaaa aaaaa
a a a aaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaa
a a
aaaaa aaaaa
aaaaaaaaaa aaaaaaaaaa aaaaaaaaa aaaaaaa
aaaaaaa
aaaaaaaaaa aaaaaaaaaa aaaaaa aaaaaaa
aaaaaaa aaaaaaa aaaaaa
aaaaa
a a a
aaaaaaa
a a a
aaaaaaaaaa
aaaaa
a a a
aaaaaaa
aaaaa
aaaaaaaaaa
a a a
aaaaaaa
aaaaa
aaaaaaaaaa
a a a
aaaaaaa
a a a
aaaaaaaaaa
Data module 10 a a a
aaaaaaaaa
aaaaaa
aaaaaa
a a a
a a a a
aaaaaaaa
aaaaaaaaaaaaaaa
aaaaaaaaaa
aaaaaaaa
a a a a
aaaaaaa aaaaaaaaa
aaaaaaa aaaaa aaaaa aaaaaaa aaaaaaaaa aaaaaaa
aaaaaaaa
aaaaa
aaaaaaa
a a a
aaaaaaa
aaaaaaaaaa
aaaaa
a a a
aaaaaaa
aaaaa
aaaaaaaaaa
aaaaa
a a a
aaaaaaa
aaaaa
aaaaaaaa
aaaaa
aaaaaaa
a a a
aaaaaaa
Interface module 9 aaaaaa
aaaaaa
aa aa aa
aaaaaa
aaaaaa
aaaaaa
aaaaaaa
a a a a
aaaaaaaa
aaaaaaaaaaaaaaa
aaaaaaaaaa
aaaaaaaa
aaaaaaaa
aaaaaaaa aaaaaaaaaa aaaaaaaaaa aaaaaaaa a a a a
aaaaaaa a a a a
aaaa
aaaaaaa
aaaaa
aaaaaaaaaa
aaaaaaa
a a a
aaaaa
aaaaaaaaaa
aaaaa
a a a
aaaaaaa
aaaaa
aaaaaaaaaa
aaaaa
a a a
aaaaaaa aaaaaaa
aaaaa
aaaaaaaaaa
aaaaaaa
a a a
Interface module 8 aaaaaaaaa
aaaaaa
aaaaaa
a a a
aaaaaaaaa
aaaaaa
aaaaaaa
aaaaaaa
a a a a
aaaaaaaaaaaaaaa
aaaaaaaa aaaaaaaa
aaaaa aaaaa aaaaa aaaaa aaaaaa aaaaaaaaaa a a a a
aaaaaaaaaa
aaaaa
a
aaaaaaaaa
aaaaa
aaaaaaaaaa
aaaaa
aaaaaaaaaa
aaaaa
aaaaaaaa
aaaaa
aaaaaaaaaa
aaaaaaa
aaaaaaaa
aaaaa
aaaaaaaaaa
aaaaaaa
Interface module 7 a a a
aaaaaaaaa
aaaaaa
aaaaaa
a a a
aaaaaaa aaaaaaaaa
aaaaaaa
aaaaaaa
a a a a
a a a a a a a a a a a a aaaaaaaaa aaaaaaaaaaaaaaa
aaaaaaa
aaaaa
aaaaaaaa
aaaaaaa
aaaaaaa
aaaaa
aaaaaaaaaa
aaaaa
aaaaaaa
aaaaa
aaaaaaaaaa
aaaaa
aaaaaaa
aaaaa
aaaaaaaa
aaaaaaa
InfiniBand switch 2 aaaaaa
aaaaaa
a a a
aaaaaaaaa
aaaaaa
aaaaaaaa
aa aaaaaaaaaa
a aaaaa a a a a
aaaaa
aaaaaa
a a
a
a a aa
aaaaaaaaaaa
aaaaa
aaaaaaaa aaaaaaaaaa aaaaaaaaaa aaaaaaaa aaaaaa a a aaa
aaaaaa a aa
a a
aaaa
aaaaaaa
a
aa
aaaaa
aaaaaa aaaaaaaa
a a aaaaaaa
aaaa aaaaaaaaaa
aaaaa
aaaaaaaa
a a a
aaaaa
aaaa a aaaa
a a
aaaa
aaaaaaa
a
aa
InfiniBand switch 1 a a a
aaaaaa aaa aaaaaa aaaaaaaaaaa aaaaaaaa aaaaaa aaa

a a a a a aaaaaaa a a a a a a
Maintenance module 1
a
a a aa aaaa aaaaaaaaaa aaaaa aaaa a
aaaa a a a a a a a a a a a a aa
a
aaaa
aaa
aaaaaaa
a a
aaaaaaa aaaaaaa aaaaaaa
Interface module 6 aaaaaaaaa
aaaaaa aaaaaaaaaaaaaaa
a
aaaaaaaa aaaaaaaa
aaaaa aaaaa aaaaa aaaaa aaaaaa aaaaaaaaaa a a a a
aaaaaaaaaa aaaaaaaaaa aaaaaaaaaa aaaaaaaaaa a a a
aaaaaaaaa aaaaaaa aaaaaaaaa
a a
aaaaa aaaaa aaaaa aaaaa aaaaaa aaaaaaa
a a a a
aaaaaaaaaa aaaaaaaaaa aaaaaaaaaa aaaaaaaaaa aaaaaa aaaaaaa
Interface module 5
a
a a a aaaaa aaaaa a a a a a a
aaaaa a a a a a a aaaaa aaaaaaaaa aaaaaaaaaaaaaaa
aaaaaaa aaaaaaa aaaaaaa aaaaaaa aaaaaa
aaa
a
a aaaaaaaa a a aa
aaaaa aaaaa aaaaa aaaaa aaaaaa aaaa a aaaaaaaaaaaaaaaa
aa
aaaaaaaaaa aaaaaaaaaa aaaaaaaaaa aaaaaaaaaa a a a aa aaaa a
a
aaaaa aaaaa aaaaa aaaaa aaaaaaaaa a
aaaaaaaa
aaaaaa aa a a a
aaaaaaaaaa aaaaaaaaaa aaaaaaaaaa aaaaaaaaaa a aaaaa
Interface module 4 aaaaaa
a
aaaaaaa aaaaaaa aaaaaaa aaaaaaa aaaaaa
a
aaaaa aaaaa aaaaa aaaaa aaaaaa aaaaaaaa a
aaaa a a
aaaaaa
a aaaaaaaa
aaaaaaaaaa aaaaaaaaaa aaaaaaaaaa aaaaaaaaaa a a a aa aaaaa aaaaaaaa
a
aaaaaaaaa a
aaaaa
aaaaaaaaaa
aaaaa
aaaaaaaaaa
aaaaa
aaaaaaaaaa
aaaaa
aaaaaaaaaa
aaaaaa
aaaaaaa
aa a a a
a aaaaa
a
aaaaaaa aaaaaaa aaaaaaa aaaaaaa
aaaa
aaaaaa aaaaaaaa aa a a a
aaaaa aaaaa aaaaa aaaaa aaaaaa a a a aaaa aaaaaaaa
aaaaaaaaaa aaaaaaaaaa aaaaaaaaaa aaaaaaaaaa a a a
aaaaaaaaa aaaaaa a aaaaaaaa
aaaaa aaa
aaaaa
aaaaaaaaaa
a a a
aaaaa
aaaaaaa
aaaaa
aaaaaaaaaa
aaaaa
a a a
aaaaaaa
aaaaa
aaaaaaaaaa
aaaaa
a a a
aaaaaaa
aaaaa
aaaaaaaaaa
a a a
aaaaa
aaaaaaa
aaaaaa
a a a
aaaaaaaaa
aaaaaa
a aaaaa
aaaaaaa
aaaaaaaa
aaaaaaaaaaaaaaa
a
aaaa a a
aaaaa aaaaa aaaaa aaaaa aaaaaa a a a aaaa aaaaaa
aaaaaaaaaa aaaaaaaaaa aaaaaaaaaa aaaaaaaaaa
a a a
aaaaaaaaa aaaaaa a aaaaaaaa
aaaaa aaa
Data module 1
aa
aaaaa aaaaa aaaaa aaaaa aaaaaa a aaaaa
aaaaaaaaaa aaaaaaaaaa aaaaaaaaaa aaaaaaaaaa aaaaaa
a a a aaaaaaa
a a a aaaaa aaaaa a a a aaaaaaaaa aaaaaaaaaaaaaaa
aaaaa a a a a a a aaaaa aaaaaa
aaaaaaa aaaaaaa aaaaaaa aaaaaaa aaaaaa aaaaaaaa aaaaaaaaa
aaaaa aaaaa aaaaa aaaaa a a a aaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaa aa
aaaaaaaaa aa a aaa
aaaaaaaaaa aaaaaaaaaa aaaaaaaaaa aaaaaaaaaa aaaa a a
aaaaaa a aaaaa
aaaaa
aaaaaaaaaa
a a a
aaaaa
aaaaa
aaaaaaaaaa
aaaaa
a a a
aaaaa
aaaaaaaaaa
aaaaa
a a a
aaaaa
aaaaaaaaaa
a a a
aaaaa
Modem aaaaaa
a a a aaaaaaa
aaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaa
aaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaa
a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a
Uninterruptible power supply 3
aaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaa aaaaaaaaa
a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a aaaaaa
aaaaaa
aaaaaa
Uninterruptible power supply 1 aaaaaa
aaaaaa
a a a
Automatic transfer switch
xiv10398
Front Rear
Figure 2. Example of a fully-populated XIV system model 281x-114 or model 281x-214
Minimally populated rack (six modules)
A minimally populated rack contains three data modules and three interface
modules, for a total of six modules.
Each module contains twelve 1 TB limited capacity, 2 TB , 3 TB, or 4 TB, 3 TB, 4

TB, or 6 TB disk drive modules (DDMs), for a total of 180 DDMs.
Table 5 shows the various minimal configuration limits for a rack's data storage.
Table 5. Minimally populated rack limits for data storage
XIV systems with limited capacity DDMs Amount to be used for data storage
1 TB 28 TB
2 TB 55 TB
3 TB 84 TB
4 TB 112 TB
6 TB 169 TB
The following figure shows an example of the front and rear views of a minimally
populated XIV system.
Chapter 2. Overview 5
InfiniBand switch 2
InfiniBand switch 1
aaa
aaaa aa a a a a a aaaaa aaaa aa
a a a aaaa aaaaaaaaaaa a a a a a a
aaaa aa a a aaaaaaa aaaaa aaaa aa
aaaaaa aaa aaaaaa aaaaaaaaaa aaaaaa aaa
aaaaaaaa
Maintenance module
a
a a a aaaa aaaaaaaaaaa a a a a a a
aaaa
a a a a a aaaaaaa aaaaa a a a
aaaa aa aaaa aaaaaaa a a a aaaa aa
a
aaaa
aaa
aaaaaaa aaaaaaa
a a
aaaaaaa aaaaaaa
Interface module 6 aa
aa
aa
aa
aa
aa aaaaaaaaaaaaaaa
a
aa aaaa aaaaaaaa aaaaaaaa
aaaaa aaaaa aaaaa aaaaa aa aaa aaaaaaaaaaa a a a
aaaaaaaaaa aaaaaaaaaa aaaaaaaaaa aaaaaaaaaa aa
aaaa aa aaaaaaa aaaaaaaaa
a
aaaaa aaaaa aaaaa aaaaa aa aaaa
a aaaaaaa
aaaaaaa
aaaaaaaaaa aaaaaaaaaa aaaaaaaaaa aaaaaaaaaa aaaa a
a aaaa a a a a
a a a
aaaaa
aaaaaaa
a a a
aaaaa
aaaaaaa
a a a
aaaaa
aaaaaaa
a a a
aaaaa
aaaaaaa Interface module 5 aaaa
aa a
aa
aaa aaaaaaaaaaaaaaa
aaa
aa aaa aaaaaaaa aa a a a
aaaaaaaa
aaaaa aaaaa aaaaa aaaaa aa aaa aaaaaaaaaa
aaaaaaaaaa aaaaaaaaaa aaaaaaaaaa aaaaaaaaaa aa aa aaaaaaa aaaaaaaa
a
a aaaa aaaaaaa
aaaaa aaaaa aaaaa aaaaa aaaa aa aaaaaaa
aaaaaaaaaa aaaaaaaaaa aaaaaaaaaa aaaaaaaaaa aa aaaa a a a a
a
aaaaaa
Interface module 4
a
a a a a a a a a a a a a
aaaaa aaaaa aaaaa aaaaa aa a
a aa aaaaaaaaaaaaaaa
aaaaaaa aaaaaaa aaaaaaa aaaaaaa aaaa a
a
aaaaa aaaaa aaaaa aaaaa aaaa a aaaaaaaa aa a a a
aaaaaaaa
aa
aa aaaaaaaaaa
aaaaaaaaaa aaaaaaaaaa aaaaaaaaaa aaaaaaaaaa aaaa aaaaaaa aaaaaaaa
a
aaaaa aaaaa aaaaa aaaaa a aaaa aaaaaaa
aaaa aa aaaaaaa
aaaaaaaaaa aaaaaaaaaa aaaaaaaaaa aaaaaaaaaa aa aaaa
Data module 3 aa aaaa a a a a
a
aaaaa aaaaa aaaaa aaaaa aa
aa a
aa aaaaaaaaaaaaaaa
aaaaaaa aaaaaaa aaaaaaa aaaaaaa aaaa
aaaa
a aaaaaaaa aa a a a
aaaaa aaaaa aaaaa aaaaa aaaaaa
a
a aaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaa
aaaaaaaaaa aaaaaaaaaa aaaaaaaaaa aaaaaaaaaa aaaa aa
a aaaa aaaaaaa aaaaaaaa
aaaaa aaaaa aaaaa aaaaa aaaa a aaaaaaa
aa aaaa aaaaaaa
a a a
aaaaa
aaaaa
aaaaaaa
aaaaaaaaaa
a a a
aaaaa
aaaaa
aaaaaaa
aaaaaaaaaa
a a a
aaaaa
aaaaa
aaaaaaa
aaaaaaaaaa
a a a
aaaaa
aaaaa
aaaaaaa
aaaaaaaaaa
Data module 2 aa
aa
aaaa
aaaa
a aa
aa
aa
a
aa
aa
a
aa
aaaaaaaaaaaaaaa
aaaaaaaa
aaaaaaaaaa
a
aaaa
aaaaaaa aaaaaaaa
a a
aaaaaa
aa
a a aaaaaaa
aaaaa aaaaa aaaaa aaaaa aaaaaaa aaaaaaa
aa aaaa
a a a
aaaaaaa
aaaaa
aaaaa
aaaaaaaaaa
a a a
aaaaaaa
aaaaa
aaaaa
aaaaaaaaaa
a a a
aaaaaaa
aaaaa
aaaaa
aaaaaaaaaa
a a a
aaaaaaa
aaaaa
aaaaa
aaaaaaaaaa
Data module 1 aa
aa
aa
aaaa
a
aaaaaa
a aaaa
aa a a
a
aa aaaaaaaaaaaaaaa
aaaaaaaa
aaaaaaaaaa
a a
aaaaaa
aaaaaaa aaaaaaaa
aaaaaaa
a
aaaa
aaaaa aaaaa aaaaa aaaaa aaaaaaa aaaaaaa
aa a aa
aaaaaaaaaa aaaaaaaaaa aaaaaaaaaa aaaaaaaaaa aaaaaa a a a a
aaaaa aaaaa aaaaa aaaaa
Modem
Uninterruptible power supply 2 aa
aa
aa
aa
aa
aa
aaaa aa
aaaaaa
aaaa aa
aaaaaa
aaaaaa
xiv10296
Front Rear
Figure 3. Example of a minimally populated XIV system
Capacity
Each data and interface module contains twelve 1 TB limited capacity, 2 TB or 3 TB
disk drive modules (DDMs), for a total of 72 DDMs.
You can order an XIV system with DDMs of the same capacity, either 1 TB limited
capacity, 2 TB, 3 TB, 4 TB, or 6 TB. You cannot order an XIV system with a mix of
DDM capacities.
For data and interface modules with 1 TB limited-capacity, the modules contain 2
TB DDMs, but the usable capacity is limited to 1 TB by using the short-stroking
method. By short stroking the DDM, only the outer sectors of the disk platters are
used to store data. Head repositioning delays are minimized, which results in
shorter access times and increased I/O performance.
DDMs in the XIV system do not need to be repaired immediately upon failure
because the XIV system is fully redundant, even with the failures. Replacement for
failed DDMs is deferred until the third DDM fails, or until another component
requires immediate onsite maintenance. For administrators, if a DDM fails but
replacement is deferred, the IBM XIV Storage Management GUI displays the DDM
as pale red, and the Status as Failed (Deferred). When there are three or more
DDMs in failed state, the IBM XIV Storage Management GUI displays the failed
DDMs as bright red, and the Status as Failed. For IBM service representative
(technicians), the IBM XIV Storage Management GUI displays the failed DDM as
bright red, and the Status as Failed regardless of whether the replacement is
deferred.
The following table lists the total capacity and usable capacity available in fully
populated and partially populated racks for each supported DDM capacity. The
usable capacity is the amount of space that can be used for data storage. The
remaining space is used for system activities, data redundancy, and spare capacity.
For usable capacity, the decimal is rounded down.
Table 6. Capacity for XIV systems
Number of Total usable capacity in TB
modules in the Number of Number of data Number of disk (1 TB limited capacity / 2
rack interface modules modules drives TB / 3 TB / 4 TB / 6 TB)
6 3 3 72 28 / 55 / 84 / 112 / 169
9 6 3 108 44 / 88 / 132 / 177 / 267
10 6 4 120 51 / 102 / 154 / 207 / 311
11 6 5 132 56 / 111 / 168 / 225 / 338
12 6 6 144 63 / 125 / 190 / 254 / 382
13 6 7 156 67 / 134 / 203 / 272 / 409
14 6 8 168 75 / 149 / 225 / 301 / 453
15 6 9 180 80 / 161 / 243 / 325 / 485
Processors and memory

The information lists the number of processors and memory that are available in
fully populated and partially populated racks.
Connectivity
This information lists the number of Fibre Channel and Ethernet (iSCSI) ports that
are available in fully and partially populated racks.
The maximum number of iSCSI host ports that can be logged-in concurrently is
700 per interface module. The maximum number of Fibre Channel (FC) host ports
that can be logged-in concurrently is 350 per target port and 700 per interface
module. However, the limit of 700 per interface module includes FC and iSCSI
host ports logged-in concurrently, and mirror connectivity. The per system limit is
1400 concurrent port log-ins for a six module system and 2000 concurrent port
log-ins for nine or more module systems (including FC, iSCSI and mirror
connectivity). This applies to XIV Gen3 microcode version 11.1.1 or later.
The following table lists the number of Fibre Channel and iSCSI ports and
identifies the interface modules from which Fibre Channel and iSCSI ports are
available for each module configuration. For XIV systems with 1 Gb Ethernet
ports, interface module 4 has four Fibre Channel ports and two Ethernet (iSCSI)
ports. Interface modules 5 - 9 have four Fibre Channel ports and four Ethernet
(iSCSI) ports each. For XIV systems with 10 Gb Ethernet ports, all interface
modules have four Fibre Channel ports and two Ethernet (iSCSI) ports.
Table 7. Fibre Channel and iSCSI ports on interface modules
Interface modules Number of iSCSI
Number of modules with Fibre Channel Number of Fibre ports (1 Gb3
in the rack and iSCSI ports Channel ports / 10 Gb)
6 4, 5 81, 2 6/4
1, 2
9 4, 5, 7, 8 16 14 / 8
1, 2
10 4, 5, 7, 8 16 14 / 8
Table 7. Fibre Channel and iSCSI ports on interface modules (continued)
Interface modules Number of iSCSI
Number of modules with Fibre Channel Number of Fibre ports (1 Gb3
in the rack and iSCSI ports Channel ports / 10 Gb)
11 4, 5, 7, 8, 9 201 18 / 10
1
12 4, 5, 7, 8, 9 20 18 / 10
13 4, 5, 6, 7, 8, 9 24 22 / 12
14 4, 5, 6, 7, 8, 9 24 22 / 12
15 4, 5, 6, 7, 8, 9 24 22 / 12
Notes:
1. Fibre Channel and iSCSI ports on module 6 are not active in configurations of 12 or
fewer modules.
2. Fibre Channel and iSCSI ports on module 9 are not active in configurations of 10 or
fewer modules.
3. On interface module 4, only two of the four available Ethernet ports are used.
Network connections
This information describes the patch panel and utility panels, which are used for
network connectivity for IBM XIV Storage System.
Host-connections patch panel
Host systems are connected to the XIV system through a SAN network by using
Fibre Channel or Ethernet (iSCSI) ports in the host-connections patch panel. There
is a host-connections patch panel for each interface module.
The following figures illustrate the host-connections patch panels for XIV systems
with 1 Gb Ethernet ports or 10 Gb Ethernet ports.
Module
1
F
I
B
R 2 1 1
E 0
C G
H b
A 3 E 2
N
N
E
xiv10424
L 4
Figure 4. Host-connections patch panel with Fibre Channel and 10 Gb Ethernet iSCSI ports
Module
1 1
F
I
B
R 2 2
E i
S
C C
H S
A 3 I 3
N
N
E
xiv10087
L 4 4
Utility patch panel
The following table describes the ports that are available in the patch panel and
the component to which each patch-panel port connects. A diagram of the utility
patch panel is also shown in the “Patch panel” column.
Table 8. Utility patch panel connections
Patch panel Patch panel port Component Description
RMM Maint (maintenance Maintenance Use these two ports to connect directly to the
1
module) ports module maintenance module.
M
A Management ports Modules 1, 2, Use these three redundant ports to connect to systems
I RMM
N 3 that are used for managing the XIV system using the
T 2 IBM XIV Storage Management GUI and IBM XIV
command-line interface (XCLI). These ports can also be
Spare
used for sending email notifications and SNMP traps
about event alerts, and communication with key servers
for managing encryption keys.
Module 3 Note: Use all three connections for redundancy. If the
M 1 customer uses only one path and the module for that
A connection goes down, the ability to manage the XIV
N
A
Module 2 system is lost.
G 2
E For information about IP configuration and protocol
M requirements, see “Management ports requirements” on
E Module 1
N page 11.
T 3
VPN (remote support) Modules 1, 3 Use these two virtual private network (VPN) ports are
Module 3 ports used to connect to the XIV Remote Support Center.
Note: Use both VPN connections for redundancy to
1
V avoid losing remote support if one of the modules fails.
P Module 1
N Tech (technician) ports (Model Use these two ports to connect the XIV system directly
2 218x-11x to a notebook computer on which the GUI and XCLI are
only) installed. The IBM service representative uses these
Module 3 Modules 2, 4 ports to initial configure and service the XIV system.
1
T (Model A Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol (DHCP) server
E
C Module 2 218x-21x is implemented over this port. The DHCP server
H only) automatically assigns IP addresses to the notebook
2
Modules 2, 3 computer and establishes a connection to the XIV
Modem system.
xiv10088
To establish a connection between the notebook

computer and the XIV system, you must manually set
the Ethernet adapter on the notebook computer to use a
fixed address and subnet mask. Do not use the Dynamic
Host Configuration Protocol (DHCP) server that is
implemented over this port.
Important:
v The technician port must be used only by an IBM
service representative. It is not intended for customer
use.
v Use the technician ports only for a direct-connection
to a single notebook-computer. Do not connect the
technician ports to the network. A connection to the
network might cause incorrect IP address assignments
to the host systems.
v The technician port for module 4 is active on XIV
system code V11.0.1 or later. The port is not active on
XIV system code V11.0.0.
v (Model 218x-11x only) The technician port that is
labeled "3" is logically routed to module 3 through
module 4.
Modem port Modem Use this port to connect to a modem for remote support.
Management ports requirements
The management ports are connected to systems that are used for managing the
XIV system through the IBM XIV Storage Management GUI and IBM XIV
command-line interface (XCLI). These ports can also be used for sending e-mail
notifications and SNMP traps about event alerts.
To ensure redundancy in case of interface-module failure, the IBM XIV Storage

System is managed through three IP addresses over Ethernet interfaces. Each IP
address is handled by a different interface module. The IBM XIV Storage
Management GUI and XCLI must be configured with all three IP addresses that
are defined for the XIV system. Management functions can be performed through
any of the IP addresses. These addresses can be accessed simultaneously by
multiple clients. Users must configure the IBM XIV Storage Management GUI or
XCLI for the set of IP addresses that are defined for the specific XIV system.
To be resilient to a network failure, ensure that the network equipment that

provides management communication is protected by an uninterruptible power
supply.
IP configuration
For each of the three management ports, the customer or technical assistant must
provide the following information to the IBM service representative before the
installation is started:
v IP address of the port
v Net mask
v Default IP gateway
v Maximum transmission unit (MTU)
Note: All management IP interfaces must be connected to the same subnet and use
the same network mask, gateway, and MTU.
In addition, provide the following system-level IP information:

v IP address of the primary and secondary DNS servers
v IP address or DNS names of the SNMP manager, if required
v IP addresses or DNS names of the SMTP servers
Protocols
The XIV system is managed through dedicated management ports that are running
TCP/IP over an Ethernet connection. Management is carried out through the
following protocols:
v The XIV system communicates with key servers using the KMIP protocol over
TCP port 5696 (if the encryption feature is enabled).
v Proprietary protocols are used to manage the XIV system from the IBM XIV
Storage Management GUI and IBM XIV command-line interface (XCLI). This
management communication is over TCP port 7778. The XIV GUI and XCLI act
as the client and initiate the connection. The XIV system acts as the server. All
traffic over this port is encrypted through the Secure Sockets Layer (SSL)
protocol.
v The XIV system responds to SNMP requests when sending replies to SNMP
managers.
v The XIV system initiates SNMP packets when sending traps to SNMP managers.
v The XIV system initiates SMTP traffic when sending emails for either event
notifications or for SMS gateways. SMTP connections use port 25.
v The IBM XIV Storage Management GUI and XCLI communication is Secure
Sockets Layer (SSL) encrypted, which provides security for passwords and
various information.
v The management ports must be on a different subnet than the VPN ports that
are used for remote access.
Chapter 3. Installing the XIV system
This information describes how to initially install and configure the XIV systems.
Before you begin installing

Read and understand the following prerequisites before installing the IBM XIV
Storage System.
Warnings and notes

Read and understand these important warnings and notes before you install an
IBM XIV Storage System and before you replace or repair hardware components.
v Ensure that you read and fully understand the rack safety notices and other
safety and environmental notices that are described in “Safety and
environmental notices” on page xiii.
v The IBM service representative can only minimally reposition the rack within the
room, as needed to complete required service actions. The customer is
responsible for using professional movers or riggers in the case of equipment
relocation or disposal.

weight-and-height-reduced shipping (feature code 0200) must be ordered to
reduce the height of the rack. When this option is ordered, data modules 12 - 15
are shipped separately, and the rack top cover can be removed by the IBM
service representative before the XIV system is moved to its final location by
professional movers.
v Never power off the XIV system unless instructed to do so by the service
procedure.
If the XIV system is in an unexpected state or if a service procedure fails, always
leave the XIV system powered on, and contact your next level of support.
Powering off the XIV system makes it difficult to understand the failure and to
recover the XIV system.
v Service the XIV system only when it is in the Full Redundancy state.
The XIV system is self-healing and automatically recovers to the Full
Redundancy state, if possible. After a failed module is replaced, recovery to the
Full Redundancy state might take up to six hours. If the XIV system does not
return to the Full Redundancy state, contact your next level of support for an
action plan before you service the XIV system.
v Depending upon local conditions, the sound pressure might exceed 85 dB(A)
during service operations. When you work on the XIV system while either the
front or rear door is in the open position, hearing protection must be worn.
v Do not move installed components to another location.
– After a component is removed from the XIV system, it must be replaced, as
soon as possible, with a new field replaceable unit (FRU) component.
– After a component is installed in the XIV system, that component must not be
moved to a different position in the same XIV system or moved to another
XIV system. Certain components (including data modules, interface modules,
and InfiniBand switches) can cause serious malfunctions if they are moved.

v Do not press or use any button, switch, or circuit breaker on the XIV system
unless instructed to do so by the service procedure. Pressing a button or flipping
a switch or circuit breaker might cause data loss or other unwanted effects. For
example, powering off using buttons on the uninterruptible power supply
bypasses the battery backup and causes loss of data if done on an operational
XIV system.
v If it is necessary to power off the XIV system, use only the documented
procedure.
v If more than one component failed and must be replaced, contact your next level
of support for an action plan. The replacement order of components might be
important when there are multiple failures.
v Plug cables in to the correct ports to ensure that the XIV system functions
correctly. All cables are labeled with port-to-port information. All cables must be
plugged in to the correct port that is indicated on the cable label.
Preparing for the installation

Before the XIV system can be installed, a technical delivery assessment must be
completed, planning worksheets must be filled out, and the installation site must
be prepared.
A technical delivery assessment (TDA) must be completed before the first

installation of an XIV system. The IBM installation planning representative, IBM
service representative, and IBM technical advisor must participate in this
assessment.
The customer must plan for each XIV system installation with assistance from an
IBM installation planning representative or IBM service representative. The IBM
XIV Storage SystemGen3 Model 281x-11x and 281x-21x Planning Guide
(www.ibm.com/support/knowledgecenter/STJTAG/com.ibm.help.xivgen3.doc/
docs/xiv_model11x_21x_pg.pdf) describes how to plan and prepare for an XIV
system installation. The Technical Delivery Assessment (TDA) pre-installation
checklist and worksheets document (http://w3-03.ibm.com/support/assure/
assur30i.nsf/WebIndex/SA830) provides several worksheets that the customer
must complete for each XIV system and give to the IBM installation planning
representative or IBM service representative. The recorded information in the
worksheets is used to install and configure the XIV system. Before you start an
installation, ensure that you have these completed worksheets.
The customer must prepare the installation site before the equipment is delivered.
If the site cannot be prepared before the delivery date, the customer must make
arrangements to have professional movers return to finish the transportation later.
Only professional movers can transport the equipment. The IBM service
representative can only minimally reposition the rack at the installation site to
complete required service actions. The customer is responsible for using
professional movers when you relocate or dispose of an XIV system.
Required tools and materials

The following tools and materials are required to install the IBM XIV Storage
System.
Models 281x-114 281x-214, and 281x-216

v Set of screwdrivers
v Set of wrenches, including 7 mm and 8 mm
v Set of socket wrenches, including 7, 8, 9, and 10 mm and 3/8-in. with a 15 cm
(6-in.) extension bar
v A flashlight or other moveable light source
v A notebook computer with the most current version of the following
configuration and management tools:
– IBM XIV Storage Management GUI
– IBM XIV command-line interface (XCLI)
– Technician Assistant tool
v If you are installing the optional rear-door heat exchanger, the following tools
are required:
– Hose assemblies, as described in the IBM XIV Storage SystemGen3 Model
281x-11x and 281x-21x Planning Guide
– An enclosed container with a capacity of at least 2 liters (2 quarts)
– Water-absorbent material to place beneath the door assembly
Model 281x-215
v Set of Phillips screwdrivers, including PH2X100 and H3X100
v Set of flathead screwdrivers, including 1.2X6.0X100
v Set of socket wrenches, including 8 mm and 11 mm, with a 10 cm (4 in.)
extension bar
v A tie-wrap cutter
v A flashlight or other moveable light source
v A ruler or tape measure
v A plastic hammer
Installing the IBM XIV Storage System management tools

This information describes how to download and install the IBM XIV management
tools, including the IBM XIV Storage Management GUI, the IBM XIV online
monitoring tool (XIVTop), and the IBM XIV command-line interface (XCLI) for all
supported platforms.
About this task
For installation requirements and a list of available packages, see the Release Notes
on the IBM Support Portal website (www.ibm.com/storage/support).
Procedure
Complete the following steps to download and install the IBM XIV management
tools on your notebook computer:
1. Download the IBM XIV Management Tools installation package and
Release Notes from the IBM Support Portal website (www.ibm.com/storage/
support).
2. Complete one of the following procedures for your operating system:
Chapter 3. Installing the XIV system 15

v Windows Mac OS X Double-click the downloaded file, and follow the
instructions to complete the installation.
v Linux HPUX Solaris Run the following command to complete the
installation:
sh file_name
Installing the Technician Assistant tool

Ensure that the latest version of the Technician Assistant tool is installed on your
notebook computer.
About this task
The Technician Assistant tool is ready to use after it is downloaded to your

notebook computer. You can also choose to install the Technician Assistant tool to
get automatic updates.
You can run the Technician Assistant tool directly from the downloaded executable
file. If you choose to install the Technician Assistant tool, an agent is installed on
your local system. The agent runs in the background to check for updates, and
then automatically downloads and installs the updates. The installation also adds
shortcuts to the Start menu for starting the Technician Assistant tool.
Procedure
Complete the following steps to download and install the Technician Assistant tool
1. Download the latest version of the Technician Assistant tool to your notebook
computer from the XIV Code Download website (https://
servicecenter.xiv.ibm.com/ta/).
a. Select XIV Utilities, and then click Continue.
b. Read and understand the license agreement. If you agree, select I Agree,
and then click I Confirm.
c. Select Technician Assistant tool under the Software Update Tools section.
d. Click Download now.
2. Optional: Install the Technician Assistant tool by completing the following
steps:
a. Double-click the Technician Assistant tool executable file (for example,
TechnicianAssistantTool_v.r.m.exe where v.r.m is the version, release, and
modification). The Technician Assistant Setup window is displayed.
b. Click the Install radio button.
c. Click the Install button.
d. When the installation is complete, click Close to close the Technician
Assistant Setup window.
Getting started
Use this checklist as a guide to complete the IBM XIV Software System installation.
The checklist contains a list of required and optional steps.
__ 1. “Setting up the XIV system rack” on page 17
__ 2. (Optional) (Models 281x-114 281x-214, and 281x-216 only) “Setting up an
emergency power off circuit” on page 54
__ 3. (Models 281x-114 281x-214, and 281x-216 only) “Inspecting receptacles and
ac-power source” on page 57
__ 4. “Inspecting the main-power cables” on page 61
__ 5. “Powering on the XIV system” on page 62
__ 6. “Verifying the XIV system rack setup” on page 69
__ 7. “Connecting your notebook computer to the XIV system” on page 72
__ 8. “Starting the IBM XIV Storage Management GUI and command-line
interface” on page 72
__ 9. “Verifying the system state” on page 73
__ 10. “Starting the Technician Assistant tool” on page 74
__ 11. “Configuring system parameters” on page 75
__ 12. “Routing and connecting customer cables” on page 76
__ 13. “Configuring Call Home” on page 76
__ 14. “Configuring remote support” on page 77
__ 15. “Configuring contact information” on page 78
__ 16. “Verifying the customer management interfaces” on page 79
__ 17. (Optional) “Configuring email notifications and rules” on page 80
__ 18. “Completing the installation for XIV system” on page 81
__ 19. (Optional) “Routing and connecting customer host cables” on page 86
__ 20. “Upgrading IBM XIV Storage System code” on page 88
__ 21. (Optional) “Collecting system logs” on page 88
Setting up the XIV system rack

Complete one of the following procedures to set up the XIV system rack,
depending on the model type.
Procedure
v “Setting up XIV model 281x-114 and 281x-214”
v “Setting up the XIV model 281x-215 rack” on page 53
Setting up XIV model 281x-114 and 281x-214

Use this procedure to set up the XIV model 281x-114 and 281x-214, including
positioning and leveling the rack, removing and replacing components for optional
height reduction, and installing optional components.
About this task
Professional movers are contracted to unpack the XIV system, following the
instructions that are shipped with the XIV system, as part of the shipping
agreement. Only professional movers can transport the XIV system.

weight-and-height-reduced shipping (feature code 0200) must be ordered to reduce
the height of the rack. When this option is ordered, data modules 12 - 15 are
shipped separately, and the rack top cover can be removed by the IBM service
representative before the XIV system is moved to its final location by professional
movers.

The XIV system arrives fully assembled with all components in place, unless the
weight and height reduced shipping option (feature code 0200) is ordered. If the
XIV system is ordered with 12 - 15 modules and the weight-and-height-reduced
shipping, data modules 12 - 15 are shipped separately. The data modules must be
installed during the XIV system installation.
If the site does not meet the delivery clearances and the weight-and-height-reduced
shipping is ordered, you must remove the doors, side panels, and rack top cover
before the rack can be moved to the final location. Only professional movers can
transport the equipment. After the rack is in its final location, you must return to
complete the installation, including reinstalling the rack top cover, side panels and
doors.
Important: If a miscellaneous equipment specification (MES), other than power

cables, is scheduled for installation at the same time as the XIV system installation,
complete the XIV system installation first.
CAUTION:
Before proceeding, ensure that you read and fully understand the rack safety
notices described in the IBM XIV Storage System Safety Notices (GA32-0832).
Complete the following procedures to set up the XIV system rack:

__ 1. (Weight-and-height-reduced shipping only) “Removing the standard front
and rear rack doors”
__ 2. (Weight-and-height-reduced shipping only) “Removing rack side panels”
on page 19
__ 3. (Weight-and-height-reduced shipping only) “Removing the rack top cover”
on page 19
__ 4. “Positioning the rack” on page 20
__ 5. (Weight-and-height-reduced shipping only) “Installing the rack top cover”
on page 21
__ 6. “Removing protective wrappings” on page 22
__ 7. “Leveling the rack” on page 22
__ 8. (Optional) “Grounding the rack frame” on page 23
__ 9. (Ruggedized rack only) “Installing the ruggedized rack” on page 23
__ 10. (Weight-and-height-reduced shipping only) “Installing rack side panels” on
page 34
__ 11. (Weight-and-height-reduced shipping only) “Installing the data modules 12
- 15” on page 35
__ 12. (Rear-door heat exchanger option only) “Installing the rear-door heat
exchanger” on page 41
__ 13. (Weight-and-height-reduced shipping only) “Installing the standard front
and rear rack doors” on page 51
__ 14. (Ruggedized rack only) “Installing the ruggedized door latches” on page 52
Removing the standard front and rear rack doors

If the weight-and-height-reduced shipping (feature code 0200) was ordered,
remove the standard front and rear rack doors.
Procedure
Complete the following steps to remove the standard front and rear doors.
1. Open the rack door.
2. (Front door only) Disconnect the logo LED cable from the mUSB port on
module 5.
Important: If this cable is already disconnected, do not reconnect the cable

when you reinstall the door.
3. Remove the door by lifting it up and away from the hinges.
4. Repeat this procedure for the remaining door.
Removing rack side panels

If the weight-and-height-reduced shipping (feature code 0200) or the ruggedized
rack (feature code 0080) was ordered, remove the rack side panels.
Procedure
Complete the following steps to remove the side panels:

1. Unlock the side panels by pressing down on both locking latches to release the
latches.
Locking latches
Door
xiv10076
Figure 6. Installing the side panel
2. Tilt the top of the side panel slightly toward you.

3. Lift up the side panel and away from the ridge on the bottom of the rack.
4. Repeat this procedure for the other side panel.
Removing the rack top cover

If the weight-and-height-reduced shipping (feature code 0200) was ordered,
remove the rack top cover.

Before you begin
A 10 mm box socket with an extension bar is required to remove the screws from
the top cover. Other tools might cause the screw heads to become rounded and
unremovable.
Procedure
Complete the following steps to remove the rack top cover:

1. Remove the four bolts on the left side of the top cover by using an 8 mm
socket wrench, and then remove the top-cover side panel. Repeat on the right
side.
2. Remove the eight bolts that connect the top cover to the rack on the left and
right sides by using a 10 mm socket wrench.
Top cover
Top-cover side
panel
Rack side panel

xiv10078
Figure 7. Rack top cover
3. Lift off the top cover.
Positioning the rack

Correct rack positioning is needed to comply with safety and regulatory
requirements.
Procedure
Complete the following steps to correctly position the rack and lock the wheels:
1. Place the rack in its final location according to the customer floor plan.
Tip: While moving the XIV system to its final location and during relocation,
lay down floor covering (such as Lexan sheets) to avoid floor-panel damage.
Place the last floor covering exactly adjacent and in front of the final location.
2. Lock each caster wheel by tightening the locking screw.
Locking screw
xiv10072
Wheel
Figure 8. Locking screw
Installing the rack top cover

If the rack top cover was removed, install the rack top cover.
Procedure
Complete the following steps to install the rack top cover:

1. Position the rack top cover on the rack.
2. Install the eight bolts that connect the top cover to the rack on the left and right
sides by using a 10 mm socket wrench.
Top cover
Top-cover side
panel
Rack side panel

xiv10078
3. Install the four bolts on the left side of the top cover by using an 8 mm socket
wrench, and then remove the top-cover side panel. Repeat on the right side.

Removing protective wrappings
Use this procedure to remove the tape, packing materials, and protective
wrappings from unconnected cables.
About this task
If the weight-and-height-reduced shipping was ordered or if the rack is partially

populated, the unconnected cables ends are wrapped in a protective plastic
covering. Do not leave any wrappings on the cables when the XIV system is
powered on. Heat generated by the XIV system might melt the plastic coverings.
A single blue Ethernet cable is included with the cable bundle. This cable is
intended for used by IBM service representatives when servicing the XIV system. It
is used to connect the technician notebook computer to the technician port.
Procedure
Complete the following steps to remove the protective plastic covering:

1. Remove tape and packing materials from the rack.
2. Carefully cut the ties that secure the protective wrappings to the cable.
Attention: Ensure that you do not cut the cables and do not cut the ties that
bundle the cable clusters
3. Remove the protective wrappings.
4. If you are installing a partially populated rack, secure the cables to the unused
rack rails by using hook-and-loop straps.
The cables must be fastened in the same position as they were when shipped.
Do not attempt to change the position of cables that are not in use.
Leveling the rack

If the ruggedized rack (feature code 0080) was not ordered, use this procedure to
level the rack.
Procedure
Complete the following steps to level the rack:

1. Loosen the jam nut on each leveling foot.
2. Rotate each leveling foot downward until it contacts the floor.
3. Adjust each leveling foot downward as needed until the rack is level. When the
rack is level, tighten the jam nuts against the base.
Leveling feet
Leveling feet
xiv10074
Figure 10. Leveling feet
Grounding the rack frame

Use this procedure to ground the rack.
About this task
This procedure is optional based on customer requirements.
Electrical grounding is important both for safety and correct operation.
Procedure
Ground the rack frame by using the grounding screw that is connected to the rack
just below the ATS. This screw is also used to ground the ATS to the rack.
Installing the ruggedized rack

If the ruggedized rack (feature code 0080) was ordered, use this procedure to
install the option.
About this task
The ruggedized rack includes a rack tie-down kit, door supports, ruggedized
x-brace, and ruggedized door latch. The ruggedized door latch is installed in a
later procedure.
Complete the following procedures to install the rack tie-down kit, door supports,
and ruggedized x-brace:
1. “Attaching the rack tie-down kit” on page 24
2. “Installing the ruggedized-door supports and brace” on page 32
The rack tie downs are intended for securing a frame weighing 1,134 kg (2500 lbs)
per rack. These tie downs are designed to secure the rack on either a non-raised
floor or a raised floor installation. Instructions, drawings, and data are provided on
an "as is" basis, WITHOUT WARRANTY OF ANY KIND, EXPRESS OR IMPLIED,
INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OR
CONDITIONS OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR
PURPOSE. IBM has made every effort to conduct limited tests, but not all

situations are tested, and the drawings and data are provided on an "AS IS" basis,
with no warranty of any kind, express or implied. Rather, IBM has provided the
information to help procure the parts that are needed and either install the design
or request IBM to install the design as a service.
Attaching the rack tie-down kit:
Use this information to install the rack tie-down kit to secure the rack to the floor.
About this task
Complete one of the following procedures to attach the rack tie-down kit:
v “Attaching the rack to a concrete (non-raised) floor”
v “Attaching the rack to a raised floor” on page 27
Attaching the rack to a concrete (non-raised) floor:
Use this procedure to attach the rack to the concrete floor.
About this task
Ensure that the rack is in its predetermined location and the locking screws on the
casters are tightened.
Verify that the rack-mounting kit contains the following parts:

v Two rack-mounting plates
v Four rack-mounting bolts
v Four thin washers
v Eight plastic-isolator bushings
v Four thick washers
v Four spacers
Important: Eight concrete anchors (two per rack corner) must be supplied by the
customer. Each anchor must be able to withstand 2268 kg (5000 lb) pull force. See
the IBM XIV Storage SystemGen3 Model 281x-11x and 281x-21x Planning Guide for
more information.
Procedure
Complete the following steps to attach the rack to a concrete floor.

1. Temporarily install the lower plastic-isolator bushings to help you locate the
mounting locations for the rack-mounting plate. After the mounting locations
are located, remove the lower plastic-isolator bushings.
Rack-mounting bolt
Thin washer
Plastic-isolator bushing
Thick washer
Spacer
Leveling foot
Rack-mounting plate
xiv10196
Bracket bolt-down holes
Figure 11. Rack tie-down kit for non-raised floors
2. Position the two rack-mounting plates in the approximate mounting location

under the rack.
3. Create four rack-mounting bolt assemblies by adding the following items, in
the order that is listed, to each rack-mounting bolt:
a. Thin washer
b. Top plastic-isolator bushing
c. Thick flat washer
d. Spacer
4. Insert one rack-mounting bolt assembly through each of the leveling feet.
5. Reposition the two rack-mounting plates under the rack-mounting bolts at the
front and rear of the rack. Center the rack-mounting bolts directly over the
threaded bolt holes.
6. Turn the rack-mounting bolts four complete rotations into the threaded-bolt
holes in the mounting plate.
7. Mark the floor around the edges of both rack-mounting plates.
8. Mark the plate bolt-down holes that are accessible through the opening in the
rear of the rack.
9. Remove the rack-mounting bolt assemblies.
10. Remove the bottom plastic-isolator bushing from each of the leveling feet.
11. Remove the rack-mounting plates from the marked locations.
12. Loosen each of the locking screws on the casters.
13. Move the rack so that it is clear of both areas that were marked on the floor.
14. Reposition the rack-mounting plates within the marked areas.
15. Mark the floor at the center of all holes in both rack-mounting plates.
16. Remove the two rack-mounting plates from the marked areas.
17. At the marked locations, drill four clearance holes that are approximately 19
mm (0.75 in.) deep into the concrete floor. This depth provides the
rack-mounting bolts enough room to protrude past the thickness of the
rack-mounting plates.

Note: You must use a minimum of two anchor bolts for each rack-mounting
plate to securely attach the rack-mounting plate to the concrete floor. Some
rack-mounting plate holes might not be usable if they align with concrete
reinforcement rods embedded in the concrete.
18. Select at least two suitable hole locations for each rack-mounting plate bolt.
The selected locations must be as close to the threaded bolt holes as possible.
Ensure that the locations selected at the rear of the rack are accessible.
Recommended hole locations
xiv10236
Threaded bolt holes
Figure 12. Recommended bolt holes in the rack-mounting plate
19. Drill holes at the selected locations into the concrete floor.
20. Insert the concrete anchors into the drilled holes by following instructions that
came with the concrete anchors. Each anchor must be able to withstand
2268 kg (5000 lb) pull force.
21. Position both rack-mounting plates over the concrete anchors.
22. Securely bolt the front and rear rack-mounting plate to the concrete floor.
Note: The size of the anchor bolts and concrete anchors must be determined
by a mechanical contractor.
23. Position the rack over the rack-mounting plate.
24. Insert each of the rack-mounting bolts through a flat washer, a plastic-isolator
bushing, a thick washer, and a leveling foot.
Jam nut
Leveling foot
Rack-mounting plate 19 mm (0.75 in.)
Non-raised
(concrete)
floor
xiv10189
Figure 13. Assembled rack tie-down kit for non-raised floors
25. Align the four rack-mounting bolts with the four tapped holes in each of the
two mounting plates and turn three to four rotations.
26. Tighten the locking screw on each caster.
27. Level the rack by completing the following steps:
Leveling feet
Leveling feet
xiv10074
a. Loosen the jam nut on each leveling foot.

b. Rotate each leveling foot downward until it contacts the floor surface.
c. Adjust the leveling feet downward as needed until the rack is level. When
the rack is level, tighten the jam nuts against the base.
28. Torque the four bolts to 54-67 Nm (40-50 ft-lbs).
Attaching the rack to a raised floor:
Use this procedure to attach the rack to a concrete subfloor beneath a raised floor
by using the tie-down kit.
Before you begin
The raised-floor tie-down kit can be installed on raised floors with a depth of
228.6 - 558.8 mm (9 - 22 in.). If the rack is to be attached to a raised floor with a
depth more than 558.8 mm (22 in.), a steel beam or steel channel adapter is
required for mounting the subfloor eyelets. The customer must supply the
eyebolts.
Ensure that the rack is in its predetermined location and the locking screws on the
casters are tightened.
Verify that the rack-mounting kit contains the following parts:

v Two rack-mounting plates
v Four rack-mounting bolts
v 16 hex nuts, 4 per corner (some are right threaded and some are left threaded)
v Four thin washers
v Four thick washers
v Eight plastic- isolator bushings
v Four plastic bushings
v Four rubber bushings
v Four spacers
v Four turnbuckles
v Four yokes
Important: Verify that the customer installed four 0.5x13 in. subfloor eyebolts,
with an internal diameter of 1-3/16 in. before the ruggedized rack can be installed.
The eyebolts but be installed 527.8 mm (20.8 in.) side to side and 965 mm (40 in.)
front to back. The height from the floor surface to the center of the internal
diameter of the eyebolts must be 25.4 - 63.5 mm (1 - 2.5 in.) (see Figure 15).
Higher than 63.5 mm (2.5 in.) might cause excessive lateral deflection to the tie
down hardware. Each anchor must be able to withstand 2268 kg (5000 lb) pull
force. See the IBM XIV Storage SystemGen3 Model 281x-11x and 281x-21x Planning
Guide for more information.
Concrete floor
Eyebolt
xiv10188
25.4 - 63.5 mm
(1.0 - 2.5 in.)
Figure 15. Eyebolts installed in the subfloor
Procedure
Complete the following steps to attach the rack to a concrete subfloor:

1. Temporarily install the lower plastic-isolator bushings to help you locate the
mounting locations for the rack-mounting plate. After the mounting locations
are correctly located, remove the lower plastic-isolator bushings.
Hex nut
Thin washer
Thick washer
Spacer
Rack-mounting bolt
Leveling foot
Rack-mounting plate
Rubber bushing
Plastic bushing
Hex nut
Turnbuckle
Hex nut
Yoke
xiv10197
Figure 16. Rack tie-down kit for raised floors
2. Position the two rack-mounting plates in the approximate mounting location

under the rack.
3. Create four rack-mounting bolt assemblies by adding the following items, in
the order that is listed, to each rack-mounting bolt:
a. Two hex nuts
b. Thin flat washer
c. Plastic-isolator bushing
d. Thick washer
e. Spacer
4. Insert a rack-mounting bolt assembly through each of the four leveling feet.
5. Reposition the two rack-mounting plates under the rack-mounting bolts at the
front and rear of the rack. Center the mounting bolts directly over the
threaded bolt holes.
6. Turn the rack-mounting bolts four complete rotations into the threaded bolt
holes in the rack-mounting plate.
7. Mark the floor around the edges of both rack-mounting plates.

8. Mark the plate bolt-down holes that are accessible through the opening in the
rear of the rack.
9. Remove the rack-mounting bolt assemblies.
10. Remove the bottom plastic-isolator bushing from each of the leveling feet.
11. Remove the rack-mounting plates from the marked locations.
12. Loosen each of the locking screws on the casters.
13. Move the rack so that it is clear of both areas that were marked on the floor.
14. Reposition the rack-mounting plates within the marked areas.
15. Mark the raised-floor panel at the center of each hole in the rack-mounting
plates (including the tapped holes).
16. Remove the two rack-mounting plates from the marked locations on the
raised-floor panel.
17. Drill four 52 mm (2.0 in.) circular cutouts in the raised-floor tile. The center of
each circular cutout is separated by 965 mm (38 in) in width and 527.8 mm
(20.8 in.) in length (see Figure 17).
Note: You must use a minimum of two anchor bolts for each rack-mounting
plate to securely attach the plate through the raised-floor panel to the concrete
floor. Some rack-mounting plate holes might not be usable if they align with
concrete reinforcement rods embedded in the concrete.
Rear
casters rack base
965 mm
(38.0 in.)
52 mm 527.8 mm
xiv10192
(2.0 in.) (20.8 in)

Front
Figure 17. Layout and dimensions for circular cutouts
18. Transfer the locations of the anchor-bolt holes (excluding the clearance holes
for the rack-mounting bolts) from the raised-floor panel to the concrete floor
directly beneath. Mark the hole locations on the concrete floor.
19. Position the raised-floor panel over the anchor bolt holes.
20. Position the front rack-mounting plate within the marked area on the
raised-floor panel.
21. Using the anchor bolts, secure the front rack-mounting plates on top of the
raised floor and through to the concrete floor.
22. Position the rear rack-mounting plates within the marked area on the
raised-floor panel.
23. Using the customer-supplied anchor bolts, secure the back rack-mounting
plate on top of the raised floor and through to the concrete floor.
24. Replace all raised-floor panels that were removed when you align and secure
the anchor bolts to the concrete floor.
25. Align the rack over the front and back rack-mounting plates.
26. Insert each of the bolt assemblies through a leveling foot.
Jam nut
Leveling foot
Rack-mounting plate
Raised-floor tile
228.6 - 558.8 mm
(9 - 22 in.)
Eyebolt
25.4 - 63.5 mm
(1 - 2.5 in.)
Concrete floor
xiv10190
Figure 18. Assembled rack tie-down kit for raised floors
27. Align the rack-mounting bolts with the threaded holes in each rack-mounting
plate. Turn each bolt three to four rotations.
28. Tighten the locking screw on each caster.
29. Level the rack by completing the following steps:

Leveling feet
Leveling feet
xiv10074
a. Loosen the jam nut on each leveling foot.

b. Rotate each leveling foot downward until it contacts the floor surface.
c. Adjust the leveling feet downward as needed until the rack is level. When
the rack is level, tighten the jam nuts against the base.
30. Torque the four bolts to 54 - 67 nm (40 - 50 ft-lbs).
Installing the ruggedized-door supports and brace:
Use this information to install the ruggedized-door supports and brace on the front
and rear of the rack.
Before you begin
Verify that the ruggedized-door kit contains the following parts:

v Two x-braces
v Four x-brace mounting brackets
v Four door support brackets
v 32 hex screws
v Four screws
Procedure
Complete the following steps to install the ruggedized-door supports and brace:
1. From the front of the rack, install the door-support brackets at the top and
bottom opening on the right side of the rack. Secure each bracket by using two
screws (see Figure 20 on page 33).
Door-support bracket
Screws
X-brace-mounting
X-brace-mounting
bracket (left)
bracket (right)
Hex screws Hex screws
Door-support bracket
Screws
xiv10206
Figure 20. Ruggedized door supports
2. Install the x-brace mounting bracket on the left and right side of the rack
opening (see Figure 21).
X-brace
Hex screws
xiv10198
Figure 21. Ruggedized x-brace
3. Install the x-brace and secure by using 10 hex screws.

4. Repeat steps 1 on page 32 - 3 from the rear of the rack.

Installing rack side panels
If the rack side panels were previously removed, use this procedure to install the
side panels on the rack.
About this task
Verify that the side-panel retention kit contains the following parts:
v Two nut clips
v Two flat washers
v Two screws
Procedure
Complete the following steps to replace the side panels:

1. If the ruggedized rack was ordered, install the nut clip on the side panel in the
notch next to the rear locking latch.
Side panel
Nut clip
Washer
Screw xiv10194
Figure 22. Side-panel retention kit

3. Place the bottom of the side panel onto the ridge on the bottom of the rack.
Locking latches
Door
xiv10076
4. Push the top of the side panel towards the rack until the latches lock in place.
5. If the ruggedized rack was ordered, slide the washer onto the screw, and secure
the screw in the nut clip.
Installing the data modules 12 - 15

If the XIV system is ordered with 12 - 15 modules and the weight-and-height-
reduced shipping (feature code 0200), data modules 12 - 15 are shipped separately.
Use this procedure to install the data modules that were shipped separately.
About this task
All data modules to be installed are labeled with a serial number and the position
of the module in the rack. You must install the rack components in the correct
positions. For a full rack configuration, there are 15 data and interface modules,
numbered 1 through 15. Module 1 is the lowest module and module 15 is the
highest module.
CAUTION:
Before proceeding, ensure that you read and understand the rack safety
guidelines described in the IBM XIV Storage System Safety Notices (GA32-0832).
Install all components from the bottom up to prevent the rack from becoming
top heavy.

CAUTION:
>16 kg (35 lb)
16-30 kg (35-66 lb)

The weight of this part or unit is 16 - 30 kg (35 - 66 lb). It takes
two persons to safely lift this part or unit. (C040)
1. A single person can remove and install modules 1 - 6 only after the disk
drive modules (DDMs) and power-supply units (PSUs) have been removed.
2. Two persons are required to remove and install modules 7-15 because of the
awkward position.
3. Use a mobile lift, if available, to assist in removing and installing modules
7-15.
4. A step or platform ladder might be necessary to service higher modules (see
“Ladder usage” on page xv).
Complete the following procedures to install data modules 12 - 15. Complete these
procedures for each module before proceeding to the next module. Install the
modules starting with module 12 and working up to prevent the rack from
becoming top heavy.
1. “Removing the disk drive modules”
2. “Removing the module power-supply units” on page 37
3. “Inserting the module into the rack” on page 37
4. “Installing the module power-supply units” on page 39
5. “Installing the disk drive modules” on page 39
6. “Connecting the cables to the data modules” on page 40
Removing the disk drive modules:
All disk drive modules (DDMs) must be removed from the module before
removing the module from the rack to reduce the weight of the module.
Procedure
Complete the following steps to remove the DDMs from the module:
1. Label each DDM with its position in the module using the numbering sequence
in the following figure.
Each DDM must be returned to its original position in the module after the
module is installed in the rack.
Figure 24. Disk-drive-module numbering sequence
2. Release the DDM latch by pinching together the release tab with the orange
stripe and the depression in the latch.
Latch
Latch depression Green LED
xiv10176
Release tab Amber LED
Figure 25. Front view of a disk drive module
3. Open the latch by rotating the latch in an outward motion.

Withdraw the DDM approximately 25 mm (1 in.) until you see the end of the
black band on the DDM, and wait approximately 30 seconds to give the DDM
time to spin down.
Attention: If the DDM is withdrawn more than 25 mm (1 in.) while still
spinning, damage might occur to the DDM.
4. Carefully extract the DDM from the drive bay.
5. Return the latch to the closed position.
6. Repeat the procedure for each DDM.
Removing the module power-supply units:
Use this procedure to remove the power-supply units (PSUs) from a data or
interface module.
Procedure
Complete the following steps from the front of the rack to remove the PSU:
1. Unhook the power-cord retaining clip.
2. Disconnect the power cord. The green LED goes off.
3. Push the locking tab to the left.
4. While you hold the locking tab, use the handle to slide the PSU out of its
mounting cage.
Note: As you start to remove the PSU, you can release the locking tab.
5. Repeat these steps for the remaining PSU.
Inserting the module into the rack:
Use this procedure to insert the data module in the rack.

About this task
CAUTION:
>16 kg (35 lb)
16-30 kg (35-66 lb)

awkward position.
7-15.
Attention:
v Each module is labeled with a serial number, as well as the position of the
module in the rack. You must install the modules in the correct positions.
v You must install the modules starting at the lowest module and working up to
prevent the rack from becoming top heavy.
Procedure
Complete the following steps to insert the module in the rack:

1. Carefully align the module with the empty slot.
Although there is a snug fit within the empty slot, you might need to wiggle
the module a bit until you can slide it into position.
2. Use the grips on the front ends of the module to slide the module into the bay.
As the module slides into position, the security latches automatically engage.
3. Use a Phillips screwdriver to tighten the two front panel retaining screws, as
shown the following figure.
These captive screws take only a few turns to tighten into the retaining
supports.
xiv10173
Grip Grip
Retaining screw Retaining screw
Figure 26. Front view of the data and interface modules
Installing the module power-supply units:
Use this procedure to install power-supply unit (PSUs) in a data or interface

module.
Before you begin
Do not force the PSU into the module. Ensure that you do not damage the
connector pins when replacing the PSU. Do not install the PSU if any of the
connector pins are bent.
Procedure
Complete the following steps from the front of the rack to install the PSUs:
1. Use the power-supply unit handle to slide the PSU into the bay.
An audible click is heard when the securing pin engages.
2. Verify that the PSU appears flush with the module.
Installing the disk drive modules:
Use this procedure to reinstall the disk drive modules (DDMs) in the data module.
About this task
Important: You must reinstall each disk drive module (DDM) in the same bay
from which it was removed.
Procedure
Complete the following steps to reinstall each DDM in the module:

1. Release the DDM latch by pinching together the tab with the orange stripe and
the depression in the handle.
2. Open the release latch by rotating the latch in an outward motion.
If the handle is in the closed position, the DDM cannot be inserted completely
into the bay.
Figure 27 shows the DDM latch in the closed and open positions.
Closed latch Open latch

xiv10177
Figure 27. Disk-drive module latch in the closed and open positions
3. Carefully insert the DDM into the module (see Figure 28 on page 40).
Ensure that the DDM is oriented so that the latch swings open from the left
(see Figure 27).

Note: Ensure that the DDM handle remains open while inserting the assembly
into the drive bay.
xiv10174
Figure 28. Inserting the disk-drive modules into the bay
4. Carefully slide the DDM all the way into the drive bay until it is fully engaged.
5. Close the DDM latch.
An audible click is heard when the handle is snapped shut and closed. When
closed, the DDM is fully seated in the drive bay.
7. Verify that all DDMs are inserted flush with the module cage. Firmly push each
replaced DDM into position to ensure that all assemblies are fully engaged.
Connecting the cables to the data modules:
Use this procedure to connect the power cords, data cables, and serial-to-USB
cables.
About this task
Figure 29 on page 41 shows connection ports on the rear of the upper data
modules.
Figure 29. Rear view of upper data modules (10 - 15)
All cables are labeled at both ends with the component and port location to which
the cable ends connect. The labels at both ends of the cable are identical. For
example, a cable with label “M9S1-M7USB3” connects from serial port S1 on
module 9 to USB3 port on module 7.
Each cable end is color coded to aid in ensuring that cables are correctly
connected.
The cabling is different for each module. For a detailed list of cables and cable-end
colors for each module, see “Data and interface module cable connections” on page
361.
Important: Always reconnect the power cords last.
Procedure
Complete the following steps to connect cables:

1. Connect the InfiniBand cables to their correct data ports G1 and G2.
2. Connect the serial-to-USB cable to USB port 3.
3. Connect the data cables to their correct data ports A1 and A2.
4. Connect the serial-to-USB cable to serial port S1, and tighten the retaining
screws.
5. Verify that all cables have been correctly connected.
6. Connect both power cords into their correct sockets P1 and P2.
7. Secure the power cord by moving the retaining clip over the power cord.
Installing the rear-door heat exchanger

If the rear-door heat exchanger (feature code 0082) was ordered, use this procedure
to install the door.
Before you begin
The customer must prepare the site with a water delivery system for the secondary
cooling loop that provides chilled water to the rear-door heat exchanger. The water
delivery system includes pipes, hoses, and the required connection hardware to
connect to the rear-door heat exchanger. Procurement and installation of the

components that creates the secondary cooling-loop system are responsibility of the
customer. See the IBM XIV Storage SystemGen3 Model 281x-11x and 281x-21x
Planning Guide for more information.
Attention: The water must not originate from the primary chilled-water system
for the building. Conditioned water for the heat exchanger must be supplied as
part of a secondary, closed-loop system.
About this task
Note: Connecting the hoses from the pump unit to the heat exchanger creates the
required secondary loop in the water-circulation system. See the IBM XIV Storage
SystemGen3 Model 281x-11x and 281x-21x Planning Guide for information about
primary and secondary loops in a water-circulation system.
Complete the following procedures to install the rear-door heat exchanger:

1. “Attaching the door assembly” on page 44
2. “Connecting the water supply” on page 46
3. “Filling the rear-door heat exchanger with water” on page 47
4. “Securing the hoses and the door” on page 50
Required tools and materials:
This information describes the tools and materials that are needed to install the
rear-door heat exchanger.
After you unpack the rear-door heat exchanger, verify that the kit contains the
following parts:
v Door assembly
v Hinge kit
v Air-purging tool
Door assembly
Hinge kit
xiv10128
Air-purging tool
Figure 30. Rear-door heat exchanger option kit
In addition to the items that come in the option kit, the following tools are
required:
v 7 mm wrench to remove and install the hinges.
v 8 mm wrench to adjust the latch mechanism.
v The hose assemblies that are described in the IBM XIV Storage SystemGen3 Model
281x-11x and 281x-21x Planning Guide. The hose assemblies connect the rear-door
heat exchanger to the pump unit, creating the secondary loop.
Note: For a non-raised floor, you must use the elbow-style hose assemblies that
are described in the IBM XIV Storage SystemGen3 Model 281x-11x and 281x-21x
Planning Guide.
v One container with a minimum capacity of 2 liters (0.5 gallons) for purging air.
v One container with a minimum capacity of 6 liters (1.6 gallons) for draining the
rear-door heat exchanger.
v Water absorbent material.

v Safety goggles or other eye protection.
Attaching the door assembly:
Use this procedure to attach the door assembly for the rear-door heat exchanger.
Procedure
Complete the following steps to install the rear-door heat exchanger:

1. Remove the rear-door heat exchanger door assembly and all parts from the
packaging.
2. Open the hinge kit that comes with the rear-door heat exchanger. One hinge
has a long pin, and one hinge has a shorter pin.
Top hinge
short pin
Bottom hinge
long pin
xiv10219
Figure 31. Hinge kit
3. Remove the two screws that hold the top-rear hinge in place on the rack
cabinet, and remove the hinge.
4. Install the new hinge with the short pin in the same location on the rack
cabinet.
5. Remove the two screws that hold the bottom hinge in place on the rack cabinet,
and remove the hinge.
6. Install the new hinge with the long pin in the same location on the rack
cabinet.
Store both old hinges with the old rear door for possible future use.
7. Position the door at a 90° angle to the rack cabinet as shown in the following
figure.
CAUTION:
18-32 kg (39.7-70.5 lbs)
The weight of this part or unit is 18 - 32 kg (39.7 - 70.5 lb). It takes two
persons to safely lift this part or unit. (C009)
Lift handles
Rear door heat

exchanger assembly
xiv10217
Bottom hinge
(long pin)
Figure 32. Rear-door heat exchanger
Attention: Ensure that you engage the bottom hinge pin first when you install
a rear door on the rack cabinet.
8. Place the door so that the bottom hinge pin on the rack cabinet goes into the
locator hole in the bottom hinge area of the door. While keeping the door on
the bottom hinge pin, lift the door slightly and place the door top hinge on the
top hinge pin on the rack. Then, lower the door onto the hinge pins.
9. Close and adjust the latch mechanism so that all door gaskets touch the rack
and compress to a gap of approximately 7 mm (0.25 in.) on all four sides of the
door.

Connecting the water supply:
Use this procedure to connect the water supply to the rear-door heat exchanger.
Procedure
Complete the following steps to connect the secondary-loop water supply to the
heat exchanger:
1. Open the rear door to 90°, and remove the hose-retention plate.
Captive screw
Hose retention
plate
xiv10222
Figure 33. Hose-retention plate
2. If the rack cabinet is on a raised floor, remove the floor tile that the hoses are to
pass through. Pull the hoses up to provide slack.
3. Attach the water-supply hose to the female coupling (on the supply manifold)
on the heat exchanger. Complete the following step to attach the supply hose:
Return-manifold coupling
(male)
Supply-hose assembly
(male)
xiv10223
Supply-manifold coupling
(female)
Figure 34. Water-supply hoses
a. Align the male hose coupling with the female supply-manifold coupling.
Note: If the couplings are not correctly aligned, it is difficult to connect the
hose.
b. Move the female collar upward.
c. Insert the male hose coupling. Exert upward pressure until the female collar
moves downward and locks in place with an audible click.
Note: After the couplings are engaged but before the collar has locked into
place, you can let go of the collar and use both hands to push the hose
upward to lock the couplings.
Important: Do not connect the return hose until instructed to do so in a later

procedure.
Filling the rear-door heat exchanger with water:
When filling the rear-door heat exchanger with water, use the air purge tool to
purge air from the heat exchanger manifolds.
Before you begin
Attention: Wear safety goggles or other eye protection whenever filling, draining,
or purging air from the rear-door heat exchanger.
Two containers are required for capturing water. The other container must have a
minimum capacity of 2 liters (0.5 gallons) for purging air. Another container must
have a minimum capacity of 6 liters (1.6 gallons) for draining the rear-door heat
exchanger.
About this task
Refer to the following figure when completing the procedure below.

Air-purging valve
(return manifold)
Air-purging valve
(supply manifold)
xiv10215
Figure 35. Air-purging valves
Procedure
Complete the following steps to fill the heat exchanger with water for the first
time:
1. Unscrew and retain the caps from both air-purging valves.
Note: The valves are similar to the valves on bicycle or automobile tires. The
following illustration shows the air-purging tool.
Hose
Handle
Open
Valve Closed
xiv10216
Extension hose
Figure 36. Air-purging tool
2. Attach the air-purging tool to the leftmost (supply) air-purging valve. Ensure
that the air-purging tool handle is in the closed position (perpendicular to the
hose).
Note: The 6-inch extension hose for the air-purging tool is not required for
this procedure. You can attach the extension hose to the tool, or you can set
the extension hose aside.
3. Place the other end of the air-purging tool into the 2-liter container to catch
the water and air bubbles that escape during the filling procedure.
4. Turn on the flow of water to the heat exchanger.
Note: Depending on the facility, turn on the pump unit, opening a valve at
the pump unit, or a similar action.
5. Turn the air-purging tool handle to the open position (parallel to the hose).
Water that is mixed with air begins to spit into the container when the
manifold is almost full.
6. When there is a steady stream of water from the air-purging tool, turn the tool
handle to the closed position. Then, disconnect the tool and move it and the
container to the rightmost (return) air-purging valve.
Attention: If water drips from an air-purging valve after you remove the
air-purging tool, reattach the tool and disconnect it again to reseat the seal.
7. Turn the air-purging tool handle to the open position. When there is a steady
stream of water from the air-purging tool, turn the tool handle to the closed
position. Then, disconnect the tool, and set it aside temporarily.
(male)
Return-hose assembly
(female)
Supply-hose
Supply-manifold
assembly (male)
xiv10220
coupling
(female)
Figure 37. Water-return hose
8. Attach the return hose to the male coupling (on the return manifold) on the
heat exchanger. To attach the return hose, complete the following steps.
Note: To make it easier to attach the return hose, turn off the water supply
temporarily to remove water pressure. After attaching the return hose, turn on
the water supply again.
a. Align the female hose coupling with the male return-manifold coupling.
Note: If you misalign the couplings, it is difficult to connect the hose.

b. Move the female collar downward and raise the coupling to the male
coupling.
c. Exert upward pressure until the female collar moves upward and locks in
place with an audible click.
9. Attach the air-purging tool to the leftmost air-purging valve, and purge the air
from the valve again. Then, repeat on the rightmost valve.
Note:
v Water sprays or spits into the container immediately.
v Air in a manifold causes a splashing or gurgling sound. Repeat the
air-purging procedure on both valves if this sound is present.
10. Feel the tops and bottoms of the manifolds (the vertical copper supply and
return pipes on the heat exchanger). If they are cool to the touch, the chilled
water is flowing correctly through the heat exchanger.
11. Screw the valve caps onto the air-purging valves and hand-tighten them to
provide a secondary seal.
Securing the hoses and the door:
Use this procedure to secure the hoses and the door.
Procedure
Complete the following steps to complete the installation of the rear-door heat
exchanger:
1. Reinstall the hose-retention plate by completing the following steps:
a. Slide the middle flange of the hose-retention plate below the matching lip of
the corresponding plate, and wiggle the plate into place.
Middle flange
Hose retention
plate
Captive screw
xiv10218
b. Fasten the captive screw.
Raised floor Non-raised floor
xiv10221
Figure 39. Water hoses assembled in a raised and non-raised floor.
2. Install the floor tile (on a raised floor) or route the hoses away from the rack
cabinet (on a non-raised floor).
3. Close and latch the door.
Note: If the rack cabinet is on a non-raised floor, keep the hoses parallel, and
move the hoses back into position as you close the door.
What to do next
After several hours of operation, check the rear-door heat exchanger. If there is a
splashing or gurgling sound, trapped air from the hoses might have migrated to
the heat exchanger. Repeat the air-purging procedure on both valves.
After one month of operation, check the rear-door heat exchanger for air in the
manifolds again to ensure that the heat exchanger is filled correctly.
Installing the standard front and rear rack doors

If the standard front and rear rack doors were previously removed, use this
procedure to install the doors on the rack.
About this task
Note: If the XIV system was delivered with the rear water-cooled door, see
“Installing the rear-door heat exchanger” on page 41 for installation instructions.
Procedure
Complete the following steps to install the standard front and rear door:
1. Position the inside corner of the door frame against the rack hinges, with the
door hinge brackets slightly above the rack hinge pin ends. Lower the door so
the door hinge brackets slide onto the rack hinge pins.
2. (Front door only) Connect the logo LED cable:
Important: If this cable was already disconnected before the door was
removed, do not reconnect the cable.
v If the ruggedized rack is not installed, connect the logo LED cable to the
mUSB port on module 5.
v If the ruggedized rack is installed, connect the logo LED cable to the mUSB
port on module 6.
3. Close the door on the rack.

Installing the ruggedized door latches
If the ruggedized rack (feature code 0080) was ordered, use this procedure to
install the ruggedized door latches on the front and rear doors.
Before you begin
Verify that the ruggedized latch kit contains the following parts:
v Two round nuts
v Two hex nuts
Procedure
Complete the following steps to install the ruggedized latch kit on the front and
rear door:
1. Remove the end cap, hex nut, and screw from the existing latch (see Figure 40).
The screw and the hex nut are reused, but the end cap can be discarded.
Screw
Hex nut
End cap
xiv10191
Figure 40. Standard door latch
2. Reinsert the screw into the latch in reverse orientation, and reattach the hex nut
on the screw (see Figure 41 on page 53).
Round nut Hex nuts
Screw
xiv10193
Figure 41. Ruggedized door latch
3. Install the additional hex nut on the screw.

4. Install the round nut so that it is flush with the end of the screw.
5. Tighten the new hex nut against the round nut.
6. Adjust the screw as necessary to secure the door, and tighten the reused hex
nut.
What to do next
Optionally set up an emergency power off circuit.
Setting up the XIV model 281x-215 rack

Use this procedure to set up the XIV model 281x-215, including installing the
migration kit and inserting the hardware components into the customer rack.
About this task
For detailed instructions, see the IBM XIV Storage System Gen3 Model 281x-215 Rack
Installation Guide PDF (clusterdev5.raleigh.ibm.com:8096/help/topic/
com.ibm.help.xivgen3_srv.doc/docs/xiv_model215_rmig.pdf).
What to do next
Power on the XIV system.
Setting up the XIV model 281x-216 rack

Use this procedure to set up the XIV model 281x-216, including installing the
migration kit and inserting the hardware components into the customer rack.

About this task
For detailed instructions, see the MES installation instructions for Rack Installation
and Service Instructions, FC 8102 MES EC: M08559 PDF
(clusterdev5.raleigh.ibm.com:8096/help/topic/com.ibm.help.xivgen3_srv.doc/
xiv_114servicepubs.html).
What to do next
Optionally set up an emergency power-off circuit.
Setting up an emergency power off circuit

(Models 281x-114 281x-214, and 281x-216 only) The output power for an
uninterruptible power supply can be disabled in an emergency by closing a switch
that is connected to the emergency power off (EPO) terminal. Use this procedure to
understand EPO considerations and cables and to optionally connect a room EPO
switch.
About this task
This procedure is optional based on customer requirements.
Adhere to national and local electrical codes when wiring the EPO.
Emergency power off considerations

The IBM XIV Storage System does not have an emergency power-off (EPO) switch;
however, you can connect the XIV system to a room EPO switch.
Note: National or local building, electrical, fire prevention, safety, and other laws
or regulations might address or control the manner in which information
technology equipment is installed within certain facilities and environments. The
application of those laws or regulations might depend on considerations of factors
beyond the nature or design of the equipment to be installed. It is a customer
responsibility to interpret and identify any laws or regulations applicable to the
installation of information technology in its environment and to inform IBM, IBM
Business Partners, or their designated installers of any actions not identified in this
planning guide that are necessary to install information technology equipment in
the customer facilities in accordance with such applicable laws or regulations.
A room EPO switch can be powered by the XIV system uninterruptible power
supplies for use with non-powered switch circuit breakers. The EPO circuit in the
uninterruptible power supplies is considered a Class 2 circuit (UL, CSA standards)
and a safety extra-low voltage (SELV) circuit (IEC standard). Contact your IBM
service representative for more information about connecting to a room EPO
switch.
Attention: Powering off the XIV system using a room EPO switch results in data
loss and possible loss of configuration. An IBM service representative is required to
recover an XIV system that was turned off using a room EPO switch. If the XIV
system loses ac power but is not powered off using an EPO circuit, data and
configuration are preserved.
ATS-to-uninterruptible Network management card
power supply power cord
ATS ac-sensor port

Circuit breakers (OUTPUT) ATS ac-sensor port
and guard (N1)
10 Amp power sockets Serial port EPO port
xiv10144
(S1)
Online/bypass switch
Figure 42. Rear view of the uninterruptible power supply
Both Class 2 and SELV circuits must be isolated from all primary circuitry. Do not
connect any circuit to the EPO terminal block unless you confirmed that the circuit
is Class 2 or SELV.
If circuit standard cannot be confirmed, use a contact closure switch.
Important:
v If using an EPO switch circuit, you must connect the EPO switch for all three
uninterruptible power supplies in the XIV system.
v The EPO circuits must close concurrently.
v Do not connect all three uninterruptible power supply EPO terminals to a
common terminal. Each uninterruptible power supply must be connected to its
own circuit.
Emergency power off cables

This information describes the cables types to connect the uninterruptible power
supply to the room emergency power off (EPO) switch.
Use one of the following cable types:

v CL2: Class 2 cable for general use
v CL2P: Plenum cable for use in ducts, plenums, and other spaces used for
environmental air
v CL2R: Riser cable for use in a vertical run in a floor-to-floor shaft
v CLEX: Limited use cable for use in dwellings and for use in raceways
v For installation in Canada: Only CSA-certified, extra-low voltage control (ELC)
cable
Connecting the XIV system to a room emergency power off

switch
This information describes how to connect the XIV system to a room emergency
power off (EPO) switch.

About this task
Connecting a room EPO switch is a non-concurrent operation and is generally

done at installation time, before turning the XIV system over to the customer.
You must connect the EPO terminals for each of the three uninterruptible power
supplies to separate EPO switch circuits.
Attention: If the XIV system is powered off using the EPO switch, data and
configuration information is lost. Consider reinstalling and reconfiguring XIV
systems that were powered off using the EPO.
Procedure
Complete the following steps to set up the room EPO switch:
1. From the rear of the rack, verify that the four circuit breakers on the ATS are in
the off (down) position.
Maintenance module
power cord
Maintenance module
circuit breaker
P3 F3
Uninterruptible
power supply Uninterruptible
power cord P2 F2 power supply
sockets circuit breakers
F1
P1
xiv10149
Figure 43. Power sockets and circuit breakers on the side of the ATS
2. Verify that all three circuit breakers on each uninterruptible power supply are
in the off (down) position.
ATS ac-sensor port
(N1)
Circuit breakers ATS ac-sensor port
and guard (OUTPUT)
xiv10145
(S1)
Figure 44. Uninterruptible power-supply cable ports
3. Disconnect all power cables from the 10-Amp power sockets on the
uninterruptible power supply.
4. Connect a cable from EPO circuit to the EPO port on each uninterruptible
power supply.
Inspecting receptacles and ac-power source

(Models 281x-114 281x-214, and 281x-216 only) Use this procedure to check the
ac-power source at the customer site before you connect the rack to the ac power
source and applying power to the IBM XIV Storage System.
Before you begin
You must have the appropriate meter and leads identified in the yearly IBM safety
training for service representatives to run the following checks:
v Resistance checks
v Voltage checks
v High voltage probing
v Ground impedance checks
Use the following measuring equipment to check the ac-power source:

v Analog multimeter: Mastech 7040 (part number 00P7029) or equivalent
v Digital multimeter: Fluke 179 (part number 8496278) or equivalent
Attention: Do not use a digital multimeter to measure grounding resistance.
Ensure that the receptacle face plate is in the normal installed position when you
measure grounding resistance.
About this task
DANGER
Lethal voltages are present.
DANGER

If the receptacle has a metal shell, do not touch the shell until you completed
the voltage and grounding checks. Incorrect wiring or grounding might place
dangerous voltage on the metal shell. If any conditions are not as described,
stop. Ensure that the incorrect voltage or impedance conditions are corrected
before proceeding. (D003)
Procedure
Complete the following steps to inspect the receptacles and ac-power source:
1. Have the customer turn off the customer mainline ac-power circuit breaker for
the ac-power outlet to which the XIV system to be plugged in. Attach a “Do
Not Operate” tag and lockout padlock to the circuit breaker.
2. Check the customer-receptacle voltage while the customer circuit breaker is
turned off:
a. Prepare the multimeter to measure 1.0 V ac or less.
b. Measure the voltage at the customer ac-power outlet between the receptacle
case and the building ground.
Note: If the receptacle case or faceplate is painted, ensure that the probe tip
penetrates the paint and contacts the metal.
c. Measure the voltage at the customer ac-power outlet between the ground
pin and the building ground (such as a raised floor metal structure, water
pipe, or building steel).
L3 L2
N L1
Ground Ground PE/Ground

xiv10237
Three-Phase 30/60 A Single-Phase 60 A Three-Phase 30 A EU
Figure 45. Ground pin in customer ac-power outlet
If the voltage for either measurement is greater than 1.0 V ac, inform the
customer that even though the circuit breaker is turned off, voltage is present at
the ac-power outlet.
DANGER
Inform the customer that, even though the circuit breaker is off, a voltage
higher than 1.0 V ac is measured at the failing customer voltage outlet
pins. Do not continue until the voltage is less than 1.0 V ac.
3. Check the customer receptacle ground-pin resistance while the customer circuit
breaker is turned off:
a. Prepare the multimeter to measure 1.0 ohm or less of resistance.
b. Measure the resistance at the customer ac-power outlet between the ground
pin and the building ground (such as a raised floor metal structure, water
pipe, or building steel).
c. Measure the resistance at the customer ac-power outlet between the ground
pin and the receptacle case.
If the resistance is greater than 1.0 ohm, the circuit is not correctly grounded.
DANGER
Inform the customer that, even though the circuit breaker is off, the
resistance is higher than 1.0 ohm indicating that the circuit is not correctly
grounded. Do not continue until the resistance is 1.0 ohm or less.
4. Check the customer receptacle voltage-pins while the customer circuit breaker
is turned off.
a. Prepare the multimeter to measure 1.0 V ac or less.
b. Measure the voltage at the customer ac-power outlet between the voltage
pins and ground pin.
c. Measure the voltage at the customer ac-power outlet between each pair of
voltage pins.
1 2 3 1 2
L3 L2
N L1

xiv10238
Figure 46. Voltage pins in customer ac-power outlet

If the voltage for either measurement is greater than 1.0 V ac, inform the
customer that there is a wiring short to ground or a wiring reversal.
DANGER
An electrical outlet that is not correctly wired might place hazardous

voltage on the metal parts of the system or the devices that attach to the
XIV system. It is the responsibility of the customer to ensure that the
outlet is correctly wired and grounded to prevent an electrical shock.
(D004)
5. Remove the “Do Not Operate” tag and lockout padlock from the customer
mainline ac-power circuit breaker to which theXIV system being plugged in.
Have the customer turn on the circuit breaker.
6. Check the customer receptacle voltage-pins while the customer circuit breaker
is turned on.
a. Prepare the multimeter to read line-voltage ac.
DANGER
Dangerous voltages might be present. Do not touch the internal parts

(pins and connectors) of the customer receptacle.
b. Measure the voltage at the customer ac-power outlet between each pair of
voltage pins (1, 2 and 3) if no neutral pin is present. If a neutral pin
(marked “N”) is present, measure the voltage at the customer ac-power
outlet between each pair of voltage pins (L1, L2, L3) and the neutral pin. A
neutral pin is present on 3W+N+G type power connections as shown on the
agency label.
1 2 3 1 2
L3 L2
N L1

xiv10238
Figure 47. Voltage pins in customer ac-power outlet
If the voltages are not within 10% of each other, inform the customer that
the voltages are not correct.
Attention: Do not continue until the voltages are correct.
c. Verify that the measurements taken in the previous step match the
input-voltage specification for the rack. The voltage, current, and phase
specifications for the rack are on the agency label, which is adhered to the
bottom of the rack at the rear.
®Registered Trademark of Licensed Machine Code - Property of IBM ©Copyright IBM Corp. 2010 All rights reserved. Machine Type: 2810/2812 Model: 114
International Business Machines US Government Users Restricted Rights. Use, duplication or disclosure restricted by GSA
ADP Schedule Contract with IBM Corp.
Produced in the US of US and non-US components for IBM Corporation (2X) 200-240 (2X) 200-240 (2X) 220-240 V ~
46 30 16 A
Product Certified in
50/60 OR 50/60 OR 50/60 Hz
(Manufacturer) : IBM Corporation San Jose, CA, USA
2W+G 3W+G 3W+N+G
This machine is manufactured from new parts or new and used parts.
Apparaten skall anslutas till jordat uttag
This device complies with part 15 of FCC rules. Operation is subject to the following two
Apparatet må tilkoples jordet stikkontakt
conditions: (1) this device may not cause harmful interference, and (2) this device must
Laite on liitettävä suojamaadoituskoskettimilla
accept any interference received, including interference that may cause undesired operation.
varustettuun pistorasiaan KCC-REM-IBC-
CANADA ICES/NMB - 003 Class/Classe A 2810
xiv10239
PN 99Y1025 EC H26880B
Figure 48. Agency label
Inspecting the main-power cables

(Models 281x-114 281x-214, and 281x-216 only) Use this procedure to check the
main-power cables before you connect the rack to the ac-power source and
applying power to the IBM XIV Storage System.
Before you begin
You must have the appropriate analog multimeter and meter leads identified in the
yearly IBM safety training for service representatives to run resistance checks.
Procedure
Complete the following safety checks on each main-power cable:

1. Prepare the multimeter to measure 0.1 ohm or less resistance.
2. Place one multimeter lead on the ground pin of the male plug on the
main-power cable. Place the other meter lead on the conductive-metal contact
"G" on the other end of the main-power cable. Ensure that the reading is less
than 0.1 ohm of resistance.
1 2 3 1 2
L3 L2
N L1

xiv10238
Figure 49. Ground and male pins on the main-power cable

3. Keep one multimeter lead on contact "G," and place the other meter lead on
each of the other male pins on the main-power cable. Ensure that each reading
is infinite resistance.
4. Measure the end-to-end resistance and the resistance to each of the remaining
connectors on the main-power cable. Ensure that the end-to-end resistance is
less than 0.1 ohm, and ensure that the resistance of the other connectors is
infinite.
5. If measurements are not correct, do not use the main-power cable.
Powering on the XIV system

Perform one of the following procedures to power on the XIV system, depending
on the model type.
Procedure
v “Powering on the XIV system models 281x-114 281x-214, and 281x-216”
v “Powering on the XIV system model 281x-215” on page 68
Powering on the XIV system models 281x-114 281x-214, and

281x-216
This information describes how to power on the XIV system models 281x-114
281x-214, and 281x-216.
Procedure
Complete the following steps to power on the XIV system:

1. Ensure that the facility-power source turned off before you connect the
main-power cables.
2. Ensure that the rack is in the final location and that all four feet are lowered
to prevent the XIV system from rolling.
Important: Only professional movers can move the rack.

3. From the rear of the rack, verify that all connected cables and power cables in
the rack are fully seated, especially the cables to the uninterruptible power
supplies.
4. If you are routing cables through the top of the rack, complete the following
steps from the rear of the rack:
a. Remove the two hex screws by using a 5/16-inch socket wrench.
Hex screws
Top cover
Filler panel
xiv10343
Figure 50. Removing the filler panel
b. Slide the filler panel towards the rear of the rack to remove the panel.
c. Remove two hook-and-loop straps that secure the Ethernet cables that lead
into the cable-management arm at the opposite side of the patch panel to
ensure that the main-power cables fit exactly between the
cable-management arm and the patch panel.
d. Route the main-power cables through the hole in the rack top cover.
Note: Do not coil excess cables on top of the rack.

e. Route both main-power cables between the cable-management arm and
the patch panel. There is just enough room for the cables to fit.

Cable-managment arm
Patch panel
xiv10390
Main power cables
Figure 51. Securing main-power cables to the patch panel
f. Secure both main-power cables to the bridge lances above the patch panel,
to the rack side frame by using hook-and-loop straps.
5. If you are routing cables through the bottom of the rack, route the
main-power cables through the hole in the bottom of the rack to the left of the
automatic transfer switch (ATS).
6. Connect both main-power cables to the facility power outlets.
7. Connect both main-power cables to the ATS.
Tip: If both power feeds into the XIV system have voltages within operational
tolerance, the feed that gets energized first becomes the primary feed. (On the
ATS, the selected-source LED identifies the primary feed.) You can use this
characteristic of the XIV system to manually balance the power load among
several XIV systems. If a power-feed failure occurs, the ATS switches the
power load to the remaining feed. When power is resumed, you must repeat
the manual balancing operation.
J2 line cord
J1 line cord
xiv10209
Power cord
retainer
Figure 52. Top view of the ATS
8. Ask the customer to turn the facility-power source back on.

9. Switch all four circuit breakers on the ATS to the on (up) position.
Maintenance module
power cord
Maintenance module
circuit breaker
P3 F3
Uninterruptible
F1
P1
xiv10149
10. For a single-phase ATS, verify that both input LEDs (J2 line 2 or J1 line 1) on
the ATS are lit green (see Figure 54). For a three-phase ATS, verify that both
input LEDs (J2 line 2 and J1 line 1) on the ATS are lit green, and one or both
of the selected-source LEDs are lit green (see Figure 55).
Figure 54. LEDs on the single-phase ATS
SELECTED Input
SOURCE OK
J2 LINE 2
FAULT
J1 LINE 1
Figure 55. LEDs on the three-phase ATS
11. From the front of the rack, remove the plastic cover from each uninterruptible
power supply.
Note: It might be necessary to remove the power-off cover before you remove
the plastic cover.

Plastic cover
Data may
be lost
if button
is pushed
xiv10143
Test button Power-off cover
Figure 56. Front view of the uninterruptible power supply
12. Plug in both battery connectors for each uninterruptible power supply.
The uninterruptible power supplies are shipped with one of the batteries
unplugged to prevent battery drainage. If one or both batteries are unplugged,
firmly push both battery connectors into place. A slight click is heard.
Battery connectors
xiv10211
Battery hand grips
Figure 57. Uninterruptible power-supply batteries
13. Verify that the fan on the front of each uninterruptible power supply is
operating after you plug in the batteries. If the fan is not operating, ensure
that the power cable is securely plugged into the ATS and that the ATS circuit
breaker for the uninterruptible power supply is in the on (up) position.
14. Replace the plastic cover on each uninterruptible power supply.
Note: If you removed the power-off cover, reinstall the cover before you
continue.
15. From the rear of the rack, verify that all three output circuit breakers on each
uninterruptible power supply are set to the on (up) position.
Circuit breakers
and guard
xiv10152
Online/bypass
switch
Figure 58. Uninterruptible power-supply circuit breakers
16. Verify that the online/bypass switch on each uninterruptible power supply is
set to the online (left) position.
If the switch is not set to the online (left) position, move the switch to the
online position and report the condition to your next level of support.
17. From the front of the rack, press the Test button on each uninterruptible
power supply in rapid succession, or simultaneously if possible, to power on
all rack components.
Plastic cover
Data may
be lost
if button
is pushed
xiv10143
18. Press the power-control button to power on the maintenance module.
Tip: Use a pen or a small tool to press the power-control button.

Figure 60. Front view of the maintenance module
Powering on the XIV system model 281x-215

This information describes how to power on the XIV system model 281x-215.
Procedure

1. Ensure that the facility-power source turned off before connecting the
main-power cables.
2. Connect both main-power cables from the power distribution units (PDUs) to
the facility power outlets.
3. Ask the customer to turn the facility-power source back on.
4. From the rear of the rack, lift up all circuit-breaker guards on both PDUs. There
are six circuit-breaker guards all together.
There are two circuit breakers under each circuit-breaker guard.
PDU1 PDU2
circuit-breaker guards
xiv10510
Figure 61. Circuit-breaker guards on the power-distribution-units
5. Power on the XIV system by pushing all 12 circuit-breaker handles on the

PDUs to the on (up) position.
Important: All circuit break levers must be turn on within 10 seconds.

xiv10429
Figure 62. Circuit-breakers on the power-distribution-units
6. Close all circuit-breaker guards.

7. Wait a few minutes for all components to power on.
Verifying the XIV system rack setup

This information describes the steps to verify that the IBM XIV Storage System
rack was set up correctly.

Procedure
Complete the following steps to verify the rack installation:

1. (Models 281x-114281x-214, and 281x-216 only) From the front of the rack, verify
that the online LED ( ) is lit green on all uninterruptible power supplies,
indicating that the uninterruptible power supplies are operating on ac power.
Note: If no LEDs are lit on the uninterruptible power supplies, the batteries
might be drained. The XIV system delays the initial machine load (IML) until
the batteries are sufficiently charged (see “Uninterruptible power supply does
not power on” on page 345).
If one or more batteries do not charge and one or more online LEDs do not
light, contact your next level of support.
2. Verify that the Power status LED on each data and interface module is lit
green, indicating that the module is powered on.
Power status LED
Fault LED
ID LED
xiv10208
Figure 63. LEDs on the front of the data and interface modules
3. Verify that the power-on LED is lit on the maintenance module, indicating that
the maintenance module is powered on.
If the LED is flashing, the maintenance module is powered off. Press the
power-control button to power on the maintenance module.
If the LED is not lit, the maintenance module is not receiving power. Contact
your next level of support.
4. From the rear of the rack, verify that both power-supply unit (PSU) status
LEDs on each data and interface module are lit green, indicating that the PSUs
are supplying power to the module.
PSU2 status LED InfiniBand activity LEDs
xiv10160
PSU1 status LED ID D7 D6 D5 D4 D3D2 D1D0 Ethernet LEDs
Figure 65. LEDs on the rear of the data and interface modules
5. Verify that the active-link LED is lit on all the InfiniBand ports on each data
and interface module.
6. Verify that the active-link LED is lit on Ethernet ports 1 and 2 on the
maintenance module.
Figure 66. LEDs on the rear of the maintenance module
7. Verify that the active-link LED is lit on all the InfiniBand ports on each
InfiniBand switch.
Figure 67. LEDs on the rear of the InfiniBand switch
8. (Model 281x-215 only) From the rear of the rack, verify that all cables are
connected to the correct port and are fully seated.

All cables are labeled at both ends with the component and port location to
which the cable ends connect. The labels at both ends of the cable are identical.
For example, a cable with label “M9S1-M7USB3” connects from serial port S1
on module 9 to USB3 port on module 7.
Each cable end is color-coded to aid with connecting cables correctly. In the
following figures, the cable connectors are color-coded to match the color of the
cable end that plugs in to the connector.
9. (Model 281x-215 only) Verify that all components in the rack are
communicating correctly.
Related reference:
Chapter 11, “Cable connections,” on page 361
This information provides a list of the cables that connect components in the XIV
system.
Connecting your notebook computer to the XIV system

Use this procedure to connect your notebook computer to the IBM XIV Storage
System.
About this task
The IP address for the XIV system is 14.10.202.250.
Procedure
1. Connect the notebook computer to one of the technician ports on the patch
panel by using the blue CAT5 cable that is supplied with the XIV system.
(Model 281x-114 only) The technician port that is labeled "3" is logically routed
to module 3 through module 4. It does not matter which technician port is used
unless module 2 or 4 failed or needs servicing. If module 2 failed or is to be
serviced, use the module 4 port (upper technician port). If module 4 failed or is
to be serviced, use the module 2 port (lower technician port).
(Model 281x-214 and 281x-215 only) It does not matter which technician port is
used unless module 2 or 3 failed or needs servicing. If module 2 failed or is to
be serviced, use the module 3 port (upper technician port). If module 3 failed
or is to be serviced, use the module 2 port (lower technician port).
Note: The technician port for module 4 is not active on XIV system code
V11.0.0. The port is active on XIV system code V11.0.1 or later.
2. Manually set the Ethernet adapter on the notebook computer to use fixed
address 14.10.202.1 and subnet mask 255.255.255.0. Do not use the Dynamic
Host Configuration Protocol (DHCP) server that is implemented over the
technician port.
3. From a command line on the notebook computer, run the ipconfig command,
and verify the following parameters:
v IP address: 14.10.202.1
v Netmask: 255.255.255.0
v Gateway: None
Starting the IBM XIV Storage Management GUI and command-line

interface
This information describes how to start the IBM XIV Storage Management GUI
and IBM XIV command-line interface (XCLI).
Procedure
Complete the following steps to start the IBM XIV Storage Management GUI and
XCLI on your notebook computer:
1. From the desktop, double-click the IBM XIV Storage System icon.
While the tool is loading, a splash screen is displayed. When loading is
complete, the Login window is displayed.
2. Type the technician user name and password.
3. Select Connect directly, and then click Add.
The main IBM XIV Storage Management GUI window is displayed in the All
Systems view.
4. Right-click the XIV system being serviced, and then click Launch XCLI.
An XCLI session is displayed.
Note: If you are not able to connect to the XIV system, look for a security
window that asks whether to allow or not allow the connection. Select Permit
Always, and launch the XCLI again.
Verifying the system state

Use this information to verify that the IBM XIV Software System components are
operating correctly
Procedure
Complete the following steps to verify that the hardware components are operating
correctly:
1. From the All Systems view in the IBM XIV Storage Management GUI, click the
XIV system icon to display the system view.
2. Verify that the status pod on the lower-right corner of the window shows Full
Redundancy.
If the state is not Full Redundancy, contact your next level of support.
3. If any component is in the Initializing state, wait 10 minutes, and check the
status pod again.
If a component stays in the Initializing state (the component is displayed as
yellow), complete the following steps from the IBM XIV Storage Management
GUI:
a. Right-click the component, and click Phase Out > Failed.
b. Hover the cursor over the component, and verify that Status is Failed.
c. Verify that the system status on the lower-right corner of the window shows
Full Redundancy.
d. Right-click the component, and click Test.
The component goes through a testing procedure. When complete, the
Command executed successfully message is displayed.
e. Hover the cursor over the component, and verify that Status is Ready.
4. If any component is in the Ready state, complete the following steps from the
IBM XIV Storage Management GUI:
a. Right-click the component, and click Phase In.
When you phase in a disk drive module (DDM), data module, or interface
module, the component turns yellow, and the status on the lower right

corner of the window shows Redistributing. Depending on the amount of
data to be redistributed, this process might take some time.
b. Hover the cursor over the component, and verify that Status is OK.
5. If any component is in the Failed state (the component is displayed as red),
complete the following steps from the IBM XIV Storage Management GUI:
a. From the All Systems view, right-click the XIV system, and click View
Events. The Events window is displayed.
b. View the event log to determine the cause of the failure.
c. If the reason cannot be determined, disconnect and then reconnect the
power cable to the failed component, and then right-click the component,
and click Test.
d. If the component is still failed, contact your .
6. Click View > Monitor > Events, and verify that there are no events with
severities other than informational.
If there are other events, contact your .
Starting the Technician Assistant tool

This information describes how to start the Technician Assistant tool.
Before you begin
To run the Technician Assistant tool, the following requirements must be met:
v The IBM XIV Storage Management GUI must be installed on the notebook
computer.
v The notebook computer must be connected to the XIV system, either through the
customer network or directly to the technician port on the patch panel.
Some utilities and scripts in the Technician Assistant tool require the XIV system to
be in a healthy state before the utilities and scripts are run.
Procedure
Complete the following steps to start and initially configure the Technician
Assistant tool:
1. Start the Technician Assistant tool in one of the following ways:
v If you installed the Technician Assistant tool on your notebook computer,
click Start > All Programs > XIV, and then click Technician Assistant Gen-3.
v To run Technician Assistant tool in stand-alone mode:
TechnicianAssistantTool_v.r.m.exe where v.r.m is the version, release,
and modification). The Technician Assistant Setup window is displayed.
b. Click StandAlone.
c. Select Gen-3.
d. Click Run. The Technician Assistant Setup window is closed, and the
Technician Assistant window is displayed.
2. Enter the technician password, and click OK.
If you do not know the Technician Assistant password, contact your next level
of support.
3. If you are starting Technician Assistant tool for the first time, click Technician
not setup at the bottom of the window, and complete the fields with your
profile information. See the online help for detailed information about each
field.
4. Click Press to Connect. The Connection Details window opens.
5. Select Direct Connect, and then click OK.
The Technician Assistant tool automatically checks the health of the connected
XIV system. The connection buttons at the bottom of the window display
information about the XIV system.
If you receive a warning that the XIV system cannot be reached, contact your
next level of support.
What to do next
Some utilities open a Challenge and Response window, which requires you to
enter a response to a challenge. You can find the response for the XIV system on
the IBM XIV Service Center website (http://servicecenter.xiv.ibm.com).
Note: You must be authorized to obtain a unique response key for the challenge. If
you are not authorized, contact your next level of support.
Configuring system parameters

Use the Initial Setup - System params page in the Technician Assistant to configure
XIV system parameters.
About this task
The Technical Delivery Assessment (TDA) pre-installation checklist and worksheets

document provides several worksheets that the customer must complete for each
XIV system and give to the IBM installation planning representative or IBM service
representative. The recorded information in the worksheets is used to install and
configure the XIV system.
Procedure
Complete the following steps using the TDA pre-installation checklist and
worksheets to configure XIV system parameters:
1. From the Technician Assistant tool, click Launch > Initial Setup. The Initial
Setup window is displayed with the System params page open.
2. Enter appropriate values for each field.
The fields are divided into the following categories. See the online help for
detailed information about each field.
System
Defines the name of the XIV system.
Management
Defines the IP address of the management modules, netmask, and
gateway.
DNS Defines primary and secondary domain name space (DNS) servers.
Time Defines the time zone, time, and date of the XIV system, and the IP
address of the network time protocol (NTP) server.

Customer SMTPGW
Defines the IP addresses to use for sending Simple Mail Transfer
Protocol (SMTP) messages.
Note: Enter the DNS name of the SMTP gateway server in the IP
address field.
3. Click Apply to save the current configuration.
4. From the IBM XIV Storage Management GUI, click the arrow to show the patch
panel. Hover the cursor over each port on the patch panel, and verify that
Status is Ready.
Routing and connecting customer cables

Use this procedure to connect management, virtual private network (VPN), and
remote access cables from the customer environment to the patch panel.
Procedure
Complete the following steps to connect customer cables:

1. Route customer cables through the hole at the top or bottom of the rack.
Note: For overhead cable installations, do not coil excess cables on top of the
rack.
2. Secure the cables to the bridge lances on the patch panel by hook-and-loop
straps.
3. Connect the customer Ethernet cables to the management port on the patch
panel.
4. Connect the customer Ethernet cables to the virtual private network (VPN)
ports on the patch panel.
5. If the customer uses the modem for remote access, connect a CAT5 phone cable
to the modem port on the patch panel.
Configuring Call Home

Use the Initial Setup – Call Home page in the Technician Assistant tool to
configure Call Home.
About this task
Call home connects the XIV system directly to the IBM Trouble Ticketing System.
The call home function sends notifications automatically to the IBM XIV Service
Center when there is a problem with the XIV system. If a problem requires service,
an IBM service representative is sent to the customer site with any necessary
replacement parts.
Call home does not allow access to customer-stored data in the XIV system.
Attention: It is a customer responsibility to configure the Simple Mail Transfer

Protocol (SMTP) email system so that XIV system can send outgoing emails for the
call home function. The email configuration rules must not inhibit call home emails
from being sent in real time. Emails with “Importance” or “Priority” in the email
header must not be delayed. For example, XIV emails must not be placed in a
queue for later delivery or filtered for priority. The administrator must verify
correct configuration and function of the email system before installation.
Procedure
worksheets to configure call home:
1. From the Initial Setup dialog box, click the Call Home tab.
2. Complete the appropriate values for each field. See the online help for detailed
information about each field.
4. Click Create Event to send a custom_event call-home notification to the IBM
XIV Service Center. An information message box is displayed.
5. Click OK.
6. Optional: Verify that the customer_event notification is displayed in the Event
Center section of the IBM XIV Service Center website (http://
servicecenter.xiv.ibm.com) to ensure that the notification was sent correctly.
If the test succeeds, several events are listed for the XIV system using the serial
number of the system, such as the following example notification:
"Informational", "Test event for event_center"
Note: You can use filters in the IBM XIV Service Center website
(http://servicecenter.xiv.ibm.com) to view events that occur for a specific time,
date, and XIV system.
Configuring remote support

Use the Initial Setup – Remote Support page in the Technician Assistant tool to
define information about the customer contact that can authorize remote-support
access and enable the XIV system for remote support.
About this task
Note: The XIV Remote Support Center is available for XIV system code V10.1 and
later.

Procedure
worksheets to define remote-support contact information:
1. From the Initial Setup window, click the Remote Support tab.
2. Select one of the following connection types:

Remote connection through management ports
A network connection to the XIV Remote Support Center is made
through a management port on the patch panel. This connection type is
the default value.
Dedicated remote connectivity ports
A network connection to the XIV Remote Support Center is made
through a virtual private network (VPN) port connection on the patch
panel.
3. If you selected the Remote connection through management ports connection
type, complete the following steps to define up to eight remote support centers
to which the XIV system can connect.
a. From the Remote Support Centers table, click the green + icon twice to add
two rows.
The position of the row in the table identifies the priority for the
remote-support server being defined.
Tip: You might need to scroll to see the icon.

b. Double-click the cells and edit the information to match the following table.
See the online help for detailed information about each field.
Name Address Port Priority

front-2 195.110.41.141 22 10
front-3 195.110.41.142 22 11
c. Click Apply.
Note: Double-click each cell to edit the existing definition. Select a row and
click the red X icon to delete an existing definition (row).
4. Complete each field in the Remote Connectivity ports configuration on the
XIV system group box. See the online help for detailed information about each
field.
Note: You must complete fields for both connection types.

5. Click Apply to save and validate the current configuration.
6. Click OK.
7. Verify that the report icon at the bottom of the window shows All reports
passed.
8. Click Test to verify that the XIV system can connect successfully to the external
remote support servers.
Configuring contact information

Use the Initial Setup - Contact Info page in the Technician Assistant to define
customer contact information. This information is included in problem
management records (PMRs) that are generated for the XIV system.
About this task

Procedure
worksheets to define customer contact information:
1. From the Initial Setup window, click the Contact Info tab.
2. Complete the appropriate values for each field.
Important: It is the responsibility of the customer to update this information as

changes occur. The IBM service representative must be able to contact the
correct person when an event occurs in the XIV system that requires service.
The fields on this page are divided into the following categories. See the online
help for detailed information about each field.
Customer name and special instructions
Defines the names of the customers and any special instructions that
might be needed when providing remote support.
Primary contact
Defines contact information for the primary customer contact.
Secondary contact
Defines contact information for the secondary customer contact.
IBM contact
Defines contact information for the IBM service representative.
Location
Defines the street address where the XIV system is located.
Remote support contact
Defines the contact at the customer site that can authorize remote
support access and can enable the XIV system for remote support.
4. Click Exit to close the Technician Assistant tool.
Configuring Simple Network Management Protocol

The Simple Network Management Protocol (SNMP) is defined and configured by
the customer, if needed.
Verifying the customer management interfaces

Use this procedure to verify that the customer can communicate with the XIV
system using the management interfaces.
Procedure
Complete the following steps from a customer system to verify communication:

1. From the IBM XIV Storage Management GUI, click the user ID in the
upper-right corner, and log in using a customer user ID and password.
2. Click OK. The main IBM XIV Storage Management GUI window is displayed
in the All Systems view.
3. Click Add System. The Add System Management dialog box is displayed.
4. Enter the customer management IP addresses.
5. Click Add to add the specified IP addresses.
6. Verify that the XIV system is connecting.

Verify that the status bar under the new XIV system is green.
7. After the XIV system is connected, double-click the XIV system icon to display
the system view.
Redundancy.
Configuring email notifications and rules

Use this procedure to optionally set up and verify email notifications and rules.
About this task
This procedure is optional. You can use this procedure to set up email notification
for the technical advisor and top guns when major or high-level events occur in
the XIV system.
Procedure
Complete the following steps to configure email notifications.

1. From the IBM XIV Storage Management GUI, click the user ID in the upper
right corner, and log in as the administrator.
2. Click View > Monitor > Events.
3. Click Setup ( ). The Events Configuration wizard is displayed with the

Welcome page open.
4. Click Next. The Gateway page is displayed.
5. Click Define Gateway, and follow the steps in the Gateway Create wizard to
define another gateway by entering the IP address of the SMTP server.
6. Click Next.
7. Click Create Destination, and follow the steps in the Destination Create
wizard to add email an address for the technical advisor.
8. Optional: Repeat step 7 to add email addresses for each of the top guns.
9. Click Create Destination, and follow the steps in the Destination Create
wizard to define a destination group named IBM_Team, and add the email
addresses that were created in steps 7 and 8.
10. Click Next.
11. Click Create Rule, and follow the steps in the Rule Create wizard to create a
rule with the following values:
v Rule name: IBM_Major
v Minimum severity: Major
v Event code: All
v Destination: IBM_Team
12. Click Next. The Finish page is displayed.
13. Click Finish to close the wizard.
14. Click the Home icon to display the system view.
15. Right-click an uninterruptible power supply, and click Phase Out > Ready to
bring the uninterruptible power supply offline.
16. Verify that an email notification was sent to the technical advisor email
address.
If an email notification was not sent, click System > All Systems > View
Events to view event log and troubleshoot the problem.
17. Right-click a uninterruptible power supply, and click Test to bring the
uninterruptible power supply online.
Completing the installation for XIV system

Complete one of the following procedures to verify that the XIV system can be
powered off and then powered on without any errors.
Procedure
v “Completing the installation for XIV system models 281x-114 281x-214, and
281x-216”
v “Completing the installation for XIV system model 281x-215” on page 84
Completing the installation for XIV system models 281x-114

281x-214, and 281x-216
Use this procedure to verify that the XIV system can be powered off and then
powered on without any errors.
Procedure
Complete the following steps to complete the XIV system installation:

1. Verify with the customer that the XIV system is idle and ready to power off.
upper-right corner, and log in using the xiv_maintenance user ID and
password.
If you do not know the password, contact your next level of support.
3. Click the XIV system to be powered off.
4. Click System > System Settings > Shutdown System to power off the XIV
system.
5. Enter the customer password, and click OK.
6. Wait until all LEDs on each data module, interface module, and switch turn
off.
7. From the front of the rack, power on the uninterruptible power supply by
pressing the Test button on each uninterruptible power supply in rapid
succession, or simultaneously if possible.
When you press the Test button, power is applied to the rack and all
modules, and the boot process starts for the interface modules and data
modules.

Plastic cover
Data may
be lost
if button
is pushed
xiv10143
8. From the IBM XIV Storage Management GUI, click Tools > Settings > System,
and verify that all previously configured settings persist.
9. Click View > Monitor > Events, and verify that no problem events were
generated.
If you see an event of severity other than informational, contact call your next
level of support.
10. If you connected the XIV system to a room emergency power-off (EPO)
switch, complete the following steps:
a. Activate the EPO switch for uninterruptible power supply 1.
b. Verify that Online LED ( ) is not lit on uninterruptible power supply

1.
c. Wait 30 seconds.
d. Deactivate the EPO switch for uninterruptible power supply 1.
e. On the ATS from the front of the rack, turn off the circuit breaker for the
uninterruptible power supply 1.
Maintenance module
power cord
Maintenance module
circuit breaker
P3 F3
Uninterruptible
F1
P1
xiv10149
f. Turn off the three circuit breakers on uninterruptible power supply 1.
ATS ac-sensor port

(N1)
and guard (OUTPUT)
xiv10145

(S1)
g. Reconnect the power cables in the 10-Amp power sockets on the

h. Turn on the all three circuit breakers on the uninterruptible power supply
1.
i. On the ATS, turn on the circuit breaker for the uninterruptible power
supply 1.

j. From the front of the rack, power on the uninterruptible power supply 1 by
pressing the Test button on the uninterruptible power supply 1.
k. Ensure that the Online LED ( ) on all three uninterruptible power

supplies 1 are lit.
If the Online LED is not lit, contact to your next level of support.
l. From the IBM XIV Storage Management GUI, right-click uninterruptible
power supply 1, and click Phase In. When phasing in, the uninterruptible
power supply turns yellow. When the phase-in process is complete, the
uninterruptible power supply turns black.
m. Hover the cursor over uninterruptible power supply 1, and verify that the
Status is OK.
n. Repeat these steps for the remaining two uninterruptible power supplies.
11. Complete the following steps if the customer uses the modem for remote
support:
v Dial in to the modem by using a telephone.
v Verify that the modem answers.
Completing the installation for XIV system model 281x-215

Use this procedure to verify that the XIV system model 281x-215 can be powered
off and then powered on without any errors.
Procedure
Complete the following steps to complete the XIV system installation:

1. Power off the XIV system.
a. Verify with the customer that the XIV system is idle and ready to power off.
b. From the IBM XIV Storage Management GUI, click the user ID in the
password.
c. Click the XIV system to be powered off.
d. Click System > System Settings > Shutdown System to power off the XIV
system.
e. Click OK.
f. From the front of the rack, verify that power-status LED on each module
power-supply unit are flashing green. A flashing green LED indicates that
the data and interface modules are powered off.
Power status LED
Fault LED
ID LED
xiv10208
g. From the rear of the rack, lift all circuit-breaker guards on both power
distribution units (PDUs). There are six circuit-breaker guards all together.
PDU1 PDU2
xiv10510
h. Push all six circuit-breaker levers on the power distribution units to the off
(down) position.
xiv10431
2. Power on the XIV system.

a. From the rear of the rack, lift the circuit-breaker guard for each circuit
breaker on the power distribution units. There are six circuit-breaker guards
all together.
Important: All circuit break levers must be turned on within 10 seconds.

xiv10429
b. Power on the XIV system by pushing all six circuit-breaker levers on the
power distribution units to the on (up) position.

c. Close the circuit-breaker guards.
d. From the front of the rack, wait a few minutes, and verify that power-status
LED on each module power-supply unit are solid green. A solid green LED
indicates that the data and interface modules are powered on.
Power status LED
Fault LED
ID LED
xiv10208
3. From the IBM XIV Storage Management GUI, click Tools > Settings > System,
and verify that all previously configured settings persist.
4. Click View > Monitor > Events, and verify that no problem events were
generated.
If you see an event of severity other than informational, contact call your next
level of support.
5. Complete the following steps if the customer uses the modem for remote
support:
v Dial in to the modem by using a telephone.
v Verify that the modem answers.
Routing and connecting customer host cables

Use this procedure to optionally route and connect the XIV system to the customer
SAN network using the host cables.
Before you begin
Attention:
Use an approved electrostatic discharge wrist strap to prevent damage. For more
information, see “Electrostatic discharge” on page 117.
Locate the host cables (LC or LC/SC Fibre Channel or Ethernet (iSCSI)).
Ensure that the customer has connected the host systems to a minimum of two
SAN switches.
Ask the customer for a diagram that identifies where each host cable is to be
connected on the XIV patch panel and SAN switches, or for the host-attachment
checklist in the Technical Delivery Assessment (TDA) pre-installation checklist and
worksheets (w3-03.ibm.com/support/assure/assur30i.nsf/WebIndex/SA830)
document that was filled out by the IBM installation-planning representative with
assistance from the customer.
Procedure
Complete these steps to route and connect the host cables:

1. Route the host cables to the rear of the rack.
2. Open rear rack door.
3. Feed the host cables through the bottom or top of rack, and route the host
cables near the Fibre Channel and iSCSI ports on the patch panel.
Important: For overhead cable installations, do not coil excess cables on top of
the rack.
4. Secure the cables to the bridge lances on the patch panel by using
hook-and-loop straps.
Attention: When routing the Fibre Channel cables, do not cause sharp bends
or crimps in the cable. Sharp bend or crimps in the cable might cause the cable
to fail or degrade the signal.
5. Using the host-attachment diagram or checklist as an aid, connect each host
cable from the appropriate SAN switch to appropriate Fibre Channel or iSCSI
port on the XIV system patch panel. See the following figures for reference.
Important: For Fibre Channel cables, connect the LC end to the patch panel.
Module
1 1
F
I
B
R 2 2
E i
S
C C
H S
A 3 I 3
N
N
E
xiv10087
L 4 4

Module
1
F
I
B
R 2 1 1
E 0
C G
H b
A 3 E 2
N
N
E
xiv10424
L 4
6. Optional: Label the host cables from each patch panel port using the
cable-identification plan and the labels provided by the customer.
7. Close rear rack door.
What to do next
The customer can now configure the hosts, install host-attachment software, and
verify connectivity.
Upgrading IBM XIV Storage System code

If the XIV system code is not at the latest mandatory level, upgrade the code by
using the installation instructions that are included in the installation package.
Before you begin
Verify the level of code that is running on the XIV system by viewing the
connection icon at the bottom of the Technician Assistant tool window.
The XIV system must be in a healthy state before upgrading the code.
About this task
For detailed upgrade instructions and compatibility, see the installation instructions
that are included in the code bundle on the XIV Code Download website
(https://servicecenter.xiv.ibm.com/ta/).
For fixes, limitations, and known problems and workarounds, see the
Release Notes.
Some miscellaneous equipment specifications (MESs) have code prerequisites. See

the MES installation instructions for prerequisites before installing an MES.
Collecting system logs

Use this procedure to collect system logs (also called x-ray files), which includes
various logs, files, and traces for the XIV system.
About this task
This procedure is optional. It collects x-ray files, include various logs, files, and
traces, and saves them in a specified directory on the notebook computer. These
files can be stored on your notebook computer, sent to the IBM Support Center
through FTP, or sent to IBM ECuREP.
Procedure
Complete the following steps to collect x-ray files:

1. From the Technician Assistant tool, click Launch > Xray Collect. The Xray
Collect window is displayed.
2. Click Collect to start collecting files.
3. (Optional) Click Yes to open an SSH tunnel to collect files faster.
4. Enter the response to the challenge by using the challenge key that is displayed
in the window.
You can find the response for the XIV system on the IBM XIV Service Center
website (http://servicecenter.xiv.ibm.com).
Note: You must be authorized to obtain a unique response key for the
challenge. If you are not authorized, contact your next level of support.
5. Click XSC.
6. Wait for the x-ray files to be collected. This might take several minutes.
7. Select the directory where you want to store the files, and click Save.
8. Wait for the x-ray files to be saved on your local system. This might take
several minutes.
9. Close the Xray Collect window.

Chapter 4. Installing additional modules
You can install additional data and interface modules after the initial installation to
increase storage capacity.
Before you begin
Before installing this MES, XIV system code 11.1.0 or later must be installed on the
XIV system. To upgrade the XIV system code, download the code from the XIV
Code Download website (https://servicecenter.xiv.ibm.com/ta/) and use the
instructions that are provided in the appropriate release notes. Note that the
management IP addresses must be defined before upgrading XIV system code.
About this task
For information about installing additional data and interface modules, see the
MES installation instructions for the Capacity Expansion: Data Modules and Interface
Modules FFBM II PDF (http://service.atlanta.ibm.com:9090/support/
knowledgecenter/STJTAG_ent/com.ibm.help.xivgen3_srv.doc/
xiv_114servicepubs.dita).

Chapter 5. Relocating an XIV system
This information describes how to pack an IBM XIV Storage System so that it can
be moved to a new location. It also describes how to disassemble the XIV system
to reduce weight.
Relocating model 281x-114 and 281x-214

This information describes how to pack an XIV model 281x-114 or 281x-214 so that
it can be moved to a new location. It also describes how to disassemble the XIV
system to reduce weight before the system is moved.
Before you begin
The following materials are required to pack the XIV system:

v Relocation kit (part number 46W9494)
v Physical protection and asset sealing kit (part number 7334847)
v Banding cutter
v Phillips-head screwdriver
v Battery powered screwdriver with Phillips-head bits
v Ratchet with 13-mm hex socket or 13-mm hex wrench
Preparing an XIV system for relocation

Use this procedure to prepare an XIV system model 281x-114 rack before you move
it to another location.
Procedure
Complete the following steps to prepare the XIV system rack:

1. Ask the customer if the weight of the rack must be reduced to move the rack
from its current location or to the new location. If the weight must be reduced,
see “Preparing a weight-reduced XIV system for relocation” on page 94 instead.
2. Confirm with the customer that the XIV system is idle and ready to power off.
password.
4. Click the XIV system and click System > System Settings > Shutdown System.
5. Disconnect all ac-power cables from the ATS.
6. If the ruggedized rack is installed, detach the rack from the floor.
7. If the rear-door heat exchanger is installed, complete the following steps to
drain the water and detach the hoses:
a. Drain the water from the heat exchanger (see “Draining the heat exchanger”
on page 293).
b. Detach the supply and return hoses (see “Attaching and detaching the
supply hose” on page 294 and “Attaching and detaching the return hose”
on page 295).
c. Open the door assembly 90°.

CAUTION:
18-32 kg (39.7-70.5 lbs)
d. Grasp the door assembly firmly with both hands and lift it upward and
away from the hinges.
8. Carefully wrap and secure the cables in the rack to ensure that they are not
damaged during shipment or transport.
What to do next
Pack the rack for relocation by using the repacking kit 45W5000. For packaging
instructions, see “Packing an XIV system” on page 96.
Preparing a weight-reduced XIV system for relocation

Use this procedure to prepare and disassemble an XIV system model 281x-114 rack
before moving it to another location while retaining the data for storage purposes.
About this task
The XIV system must be disassembled in an orderly manner. This procedure

includes removing the top four data modules, top cover, and optional features.
Procedure
Complete the following steps to disassemble and pack the XIV system:
1. Confirm with the customer that the XIV system is idle and ready to power off.
2. Ask the customer to power off the XIV system. From the IBM XIV Storage
Management GUI, click the XIV system and click File > System Shutdown.
Important: Ensure that the XIV system is powered off before proceeding.
3. Disconnect all ac power cables from the ATS.
4. If installed, remove data modules 12 - 15.
Attention: Ensure that you remove components from the highest to the lowest
to ensure that the rack does not become top heavy and to avoid toppling over.
CAUTION:
>16 kg (35 lb)
16-30 kg (35-66 lb)

a. A single person can remove and install modules 1 - 6 only after the disk
drive modules (DDMs) and power-supply units (PSUs) have been
removed.
b. Two persons are required to remove and install modules 7-15 because of
the awkward position.
c. Use a mobile lift, if available, to assist in removing and installing
modules 7-15.
d. A step or platform ladder might be necessary to service higher modules
(see “Ladder usage” on page xv).
Complete the following steps for each of the four top data modules, starting
with the highest module in the rack and working your way down:
a. Label the module with its position in the rack so that the module can be
returned to the same position. The modules are numbered 1 - 15 with
module 15 at the top of the rack.
b. Label all disk drive modules (DDMs) by using the numbering sequence
shown in the following figure.
The DDMs must be returned to the same drive bay from which they were
removed.
c. Remove all DDMs (see “Removing the disk drive module” on page 125).
d. Remove the module.
e. Reinstall the DDMs in the same locations in the drive bay from which they
were removed.
f. Pack the module for shipment. Ensure that each module create is clearly
labeled with the module number for easier reassembly at the new location.
Modules must be installed in the same location from which they are
removed.
5. If the ruggedized rack is installed, detach the rack from the floor.
6. If the rear-door heat exchanger is installed, complete the following steps to
drain the water and detach the hoses:
a. Drain the water from the heat exchanger (see “Draining the heat exchanger”
on page 293).
Chapter 5. Relocating an XIV system 95

b. Detach the supply and return hoses (see “Attaching and detaching the
supply hose” on page 294 and “Attaching and detaching the return hose”
on page 295).
c. Open the door assembly 90°.
CAUTION:
18-32 kg (39.7-70.5 lbs)
d. Grasp the door assembly firmly with both hands and lift it upward and
away from the hinges.
7. Carefully wrap and secure the cables in the rack to ensure that they are not
damaged during shipment or transport.
What to do next
Pack the rack for relocation by using the repacking kit 45W5000. For packaging
instructions, see “Packing an XIV system.”
Packing an XIV system

Use this procedure to pack an IBM XIV Storage System before moving the XIV
system to a new location.
Before you begin
The following materials are required to pack the XIV system:

v Relocation kit (part number 46W9497)
v Physical protection and asset sealing kit (part number 7334847)
v Banding cutter
v Phillips-head screwdriver
v Battery powered screwdriver with Phillips-head bits
v Ratchet with 13-mm hex socket or 13-mm hex wrench
Procedure
Complete the following steps to pack an XIV system:

1. Check the packing list to ensure that you received the correct relocation kit.
2. Verify that the correct packaging materials are included with the relocation kit,
including:
v 8 hex bolts M8x1.25
v 8 lock washers M8
v 2 mounting brackets
v 1 pallet
v 2 ramps
3. If down, raise the leveling feet (two in front and two in back) that are under
the rack by using a Phillips-head screwdriver. Screw the leveling feet all the
way up until they go no further. The feet are no longer touching the floor, and
the rack stands on its wheels.
4. Pack the rack by using the physical protection and asset sealing kit (part
number 7334847).
What to do next
The customer is responsible for using professional movers or riggers to move the
XIV system. The professional mover completes the following tasks after the rack is
prepared for shipment by the IBM service representative.
1. Attach one metal mounting bracket to the rear of the pallet (end opposite from
ramps).
2. Attached the ramps to the front of the pallet.
3. Position the rack in front of the ramps so that the swivel casters on the rear of
the rack are facing the ramps.
4. Roll the XIV system up the ramp and onto the pallet until the rear of the rack
rests against the metal mounting brackets.
5. Attach the remaining metal mounting bracket to the front of the pallet.
6. Attach metal mounting brackets to rack.
7. Attach one ramp to each side of the rack by using the IBM logo tape included
with asset sealing kit
Chapter 5. Relocating an XIV system 97

Chapter 6. Replacing hardware components
This information describes how to remove and install hardware components for
the IBM XIV Storage System.
Components overview
This information describes the hardware components in IBM XIV Software System.
Disk drive modules

Each disk drive module (DDM) consists of a hard disk drive that is mounted in a
frame. The DDM is inserted into a drive bay in a data or interface module. There
are 12 DDMs in each data and interface module.
Attention: All drive bays must be filled. Operating a data or interface module
with one or more missing DDMs disrupts airflow and prevents the DDMs from
cooling sufficiently. All DDMs must be correctly in place before operating the
module. If you are replacing a DDM while the module is operating, the
replacement DDM must be reinserted within 10 minutes. Do not remove the DDM
until you have the replacement DDM.
Note: If the entire module has failed, the state of each DDM reflects the state of
the module.
For XIV systems with call-home support, the IBM Service Center identifies the
correct field replaceable unit (FRU) to use for the defective DDM in the problem
management report (PMR).
Figure 79 shows the front view of the DDM. Figure 80 on page 100 shows the front
view of a module with all 12 DDMs installed.
Latch
xiv10176

xiv10173
Grip Grip
Figure 80. Disk-drive modules in a data or interface module
Data modules
The data modules contain the 12 disk drive modules (DDMs), two power-supply
units (PSUs), SAS expander cards, 10 cooling fans, a compact flash card, an
optional solid-state drive (SSD), InfiniBand interfaces, and the system board. The
lower data modules also contain Ethernet interfaces. The data modules do not
contain Fibre Channel interfaces.
The replacement data module is supplied with all components except the DDMs
and the optional SSD. The DDMs that are in the defective data module are
installed in the new module in the same location from which they were removed.
Figure 81 shows the front view of the data modules with 12 DDMs installed.
Figure 82 on page 101 and Figure 83 on page 101 shows the rear view of the upper
and lower data modules.
xiv10173
Grip Grip
Figure 83. Rear view of lower data modules (1 - 3)
Table 9 describes the weight of the data module with and without DDMs and
PSUs.
Table 9. Data module weight
Weight Kilograms Pounds
Maximum configuration 28 61.7
Without disk drive modules (DDMs) 17.8 39.2
Without DDMs and power supply units 15 33.1
(PSUs)
Chapter 6. Replacing hardware components 101

CAUTION:
>16 kg (35 lb)
16-30 kg (35-66 lb)

awkward position.
7-15.
Feature codes
The following table describes the features codes that are available for data modules
when you order an XIV system.
Capacity on Demand (CoD) modules are modules that are physically installed in
the rack but are not activated for use until more capacity is needed. Additional
capacity is activated by ordering a miscellaneous equipment specification (MES)
with the appropriate CoD activation feature.
CoD activation features do not require physical installation. If you receive

notification to install this feature, only report the installation according to the
field-reporting guide for your respective geographical area.
Table 10. Feature codes for data modules
Feature code
Feature description Model 281x-114 Model 281x-214
1 TB limited-capacity data modules 1123 2016
2 TB data modules 1126 2026
2 TB CoD data module 1146 2028
2 TB module CoD activation 1149 4020
2 TB self-encrypting module CoD activation 4021
3 TB data modules 1136 2036
3 TB CoD data module 1148 2038
3 TB module CoD activation 1150 4030
Table 10. Feature codes for data modules (continued)
Feature code
4 TB data modules 2042
4 TB CoD data module 2044
6 TB data modules 2062
6 TB CoD data module 2064
Interface modules
The interface modules contain 12 disk drive modules (DDMs), two power-supply
units (PSUs), SAS expander cards, 10 cooling fans, a compact flash card, an
optional solid-state drive (SSD), InfiniBand interfaces, and the system board. The
interface modules also contain Fibre Channel and 1 Gb or 10 Gb Ethernet interfaces
for host-system connectivity. The Fibre Channel and 10 Gb Ethernet cables use
plug pairs, where each pair is a single connector.
The replacement interface module is supplied with all components except the
DDMs and the optional SSD. The DDMs that are in the defective interface module
are installed in the new module in the same location from which they were
removed.
Figure 84 shows the front view of the interface modules with 12 DDMs installed.
Figure 85 on page 104 and Figure 86 on page 104 show the rear view of the
interface modules.
xiv10173
Grip Grip

Figure 85. Rear view of interface modules (4 - 9) with 10 Gb Ethernet ports
Table 11 describes the weight of the interface module with and without DDMs and
PSUs.
Table 11. Interface module weights
Weight Kilograms Pounds
Maximum configuration 28.3 62.4
Without disk drive modules (DDMs) 18.1 39.9
Without DDMs and power supply units (PSUs) 15.3 33.7
CAUTION:
>16 kg (35 lb)
16-30 kg (35-66 lb)

awkward position.
7-15.
Feature codes
The following table describes the features codes that are available for interface
modules when you order an XIV system.
Capacity on Demand (CoD) modules are modules that are physically installed in
the rack but are not activated for use until more capacity is needed. Additional
capacity is activated by ordering a miscellaneous equipment specification (MES)
with the appropriate CoD activation feature.
CoD activation features do not require physical installation. If you receive

notification to install this feature, only report the installation according to the
field-reporting guide for your respective geographical area.
Table 12. Feature codes for interface modules
Feature code
1 TB limited-capacity interface modules with 1 GbE 1122 2015
cards
1 TB limited capacity interface modules with 10 GbE 2115
cards
2 TB interface modules with 1 GbE cards 1125 2025
2 TB interface modules with 10 GbE cards 2125
2 TB CoD interface module with 1 GbE cards 1145 2027
2 TB CoD interface module with 10 GbE cards 2127
2 TB module CoD activation with 1 GbE cards 1149 2029

Table 12. Feature codes for interface modules (continued)
Feature code
2 TB module CoD activation with 10 GbE cards 4120
2 TB self-encrypting module CoD activation with 10 4121
GbE cards
3 TB interface modules with 1 GbE cards 1135 2035
3 TB interface modules with 10 GbE cards 2135
3 TB CoD interface module with 1 GbE cards 1147 2037
3 TB CoD interface module with 10 GbE cards 2137
3 TB module CoD activation with 1 GbE cards 1150 2039
3 TB module CoD activation with 10 GbE cards 4130
GbE cards
4 TB self-encrypting interface modules with 1 GbE 2041
cards
cards
4 TB self-encrypting CoD interface module with 1 2043
GbE cards
GbE cards
GbE cards
GbE cards
cards
cards
GbE cards
GbE cards
Module power-supply units

The module power-supply units (PSUs) supply power to the data or interface
module to which it is associated. To provide redundant power, each module has
two PSUs.
The PSUs are at the rear left side of the data and interface modules in a stacked
position. PSU 1 is on the bottom, and PSU 2 is on the top.
Power supply units
Power socket P2
xiv10234
Handles Locking tabs
Power socket P1
Figure 87. Module power-supply units
InfiniBand switches
The InfiniBand switch provides internal communication between the data and
interface modules. Two independent, but communicating InfiniBand switches are
provided.
Figure 89 and Figure 88 show the front and rear views of the InfiniBand switch.
The cables in the top InfiniBand switch (N2) are red, and the cables in the bottom
InfiniBand switch (N1) are yellow.
P2 status LED Fan status LED P1 status LED
xiv10097
Secondary power Fan unit Primary power System status
supply unit (P2) supply unit (P1) LED
Figure 88. Front view of the InfiniBand switch
System status LED

PSU status LEDs InfiniBands ports
IS5030
MGMT CONSOLE
Power
PSU 1
PSU 2
FAN
RST
xiv10093
Fan status LED Switch-to-switch Switch-to-module

port (MGT) port (console)
Figure 89. Rear view of the InfiniBand switch
Tip: Because the InfiniBand switches are located deep within the rack in the front
and contain many cables in the rear, use a flashlight or other moveable light source
to better see your work.
The rear side of the InfiniBand switch has 36 quad small form-factor pluggable
(QSFP) ports in two rows, 18 ports to a row. The ports are labeled as shown in

Figure 90.
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18
xiv10096
19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36
Figure 90. Port numbering scheme on the InfiniBand switch
InfiniBand switch power-supply units

Each InfiniBand switch has two power-supply units (PSUs) that provide redundant
power. The primary power-supply unit (PSU1) is located on the right side, and the
redundant PSU (PSU2) is located on the left side at the front of the rack.
P2 status LED P1 status LED
xiv10099
Secondary power Primary power
supply unit (P2) supply unit (P1)
Figure 91. Power-supply units in the InfiniBand switch
With both PSUs installed in the redundant configuration, either PSU can be
removed without bringing down the XIV system.
Maintenance module
The maintenance module is used by IBM service personnel to check system
functions and operations by providing connectivity to all components, switches,
interface modules, data modules, and uninterruptible power supplies. The
maintenance module is also used as an SMTP server that provides remote support
to IBM XIV technicians through the modem.
Figure 92 shows the front view, and Figure 93 on page 109 shows the rear view of
the maintenance module.
Figure 93. Rear view of the maintenance module
Uninterruptible power supplies

The uninterruptible power supplies provide protection against utility power
blackouts, sags, and surges. They also filter small line-power fluctuations and
isolate the IBM XIV Storage System from large disturbances by internally
disconnecting from utility line power.
Each XIV system rack is supplied with three uninterruptible power supplies. Each
uninterruptible power supply is an independent unit, and all three provide
continuous, redundant, uninterruptible power-supply service to the rack in which
they are installed. The uninterruptible power supplies are all in a charged state
when connected to the electrical power system. While charging, the uninterruptible
power-supply batteries charge to 90% capacity during the first three hours of
normal usage. The batteries do not run at full capacity during this initial charge
period.
The replacement uninterruptible power-supply FRU is supplied with all

components except the two batteries, the plastic cover, and the power-off cover.
The batteries, the plastic cover, and the power-off cover on the defective
uninterruptible power supply are installed on the replacement uninterruptible
power supply. If the batteries are also defective, they must be ordered separately.
Removing a single uninterruptible power supply does not affect system

performance, as the remaining uninterruptible power supplies continue supplying
power.
Although the uninterruptible power supply is in the Failed state, the components
that are associated with the failed uninterruptible power supply are in the OK state
because the redundant uninterruptible power supply are still supplying power to
those components.
The following figures show the front and rear views of the uninterruptible power
supply and its various components.

Plastic cover
Data may
be lost
if button
is pushed
xiv10143

ATS ac-sensor port

and guard (N1)
10 Amp power sockets Serial port EPO port xiv10144

(S1)
Uninterruptible power-supply batteries

This information describes the battery life, weight, and return policy for
uninterruptible power-supply batteries.
Battery life
Varies based on usage and environment.
Battery weight
Less than 18 kg (40 lbs)
Recycle policy
Contains sealed, nonspillable, lead acid. Batteries must be recycled when
taken out of use.
The following figure shows the location of the batteries on the front of the
uninterruptible power-supply. The batteries are located under the battery cover
and retaining bracket.
Battery connectors
xiv10211
Battery hand grips
Uninterruptible power-supply network-management cards

The network management card provides network connectivity to and from the
The network management card is at the rear of each uninterruptible power supply,
as shown in the following figure.
Network management card

ATS ac-sensor port ATS ac-sensor port
(OUTPUT) (N1)
xiv10154
Retaining screws
Figure 97. Network management card on the uninterruptible power supply

The automatic transfer switch (ATS) supplies power to all three uninterruptible
power supplies and to the maintenance module. It receives power from one or two
external main power sources, depending on the main-power-cable configuration.
Front and side views
Figure 98 on page 112, Figure 99 on page 112, and Figure 100 on page 113 show
examples of the front and side views of a single-phase and three-phase ATS.

Line cords
Plug-securing ring
ATS retaining bracket
Maintenance
module
power cord
P3
Uninterruptible
power supply
power cords P2
P1
xiv10063
Fault LED Power input LEDs
Selected source LEDs
Figure 98. Front view of the three-phase ATS
Line cords
Plug-securing ring
ATS retaining bracket
Maintenance
module
power cord
P3
Uninterruptible
power supply
P2
power cords
P1
xiv10050
Power- input LEDs
Figure 99. Front view of the single-phase ATS
J2 line cord J1 line cord
Maintenance
module Maintenance module
power cord F4
circuit breaker
F4
Power output
LED
P3 F3
Uninterruptible
F1
P1
xiv10051
ac-sensor cable ac-sensor cable
LS port (X807) COMM port (X801)
Figure 100. Side view of the ATS
Two-main-power cable configuration
The XIV system is set up with a two-main-power-cable configuration that uses two
independent circuits, A and B. Each circuit supplies one main-power cable.
v Circuit A connects to ATS connector J1.
v Circuit B connects to ATS connector J2.
The ATS replacement procedures use J1 and J2 to refer to connectors or indicators

on the ATS. Main power cable J1 refers to the main-power cable that plugs in
connector J1. Main power cable J2 refers to the main-power cable that plugs in
connector J2.
This configuration is shown in Figure 101 on page 114.

Main-power cables Power cables
Uninterruptible
power supply 3
A J1 P3
Uninterruptible
ATS P2 power supply 2
B J2 P1
Uninterruptible
xiv10047
power supply 1
Figure 101. ATS-to-uninterruptible power-supply connections in a two-main-power-cable

configuration
Four-main-power cable configuration

The XIV system can also be set up with a four-main-power-cable configuration that
uses a single independent circuit for supplying power to all four main-power
cables.
Restriction: This configuration is not supported for environments that have more
than one independent circuit.
The ATS replacement procedures use J1 and J2 to refer to connectors or indicators

on the ATS. Main power cable J1 refers to the main-power cable that plugs in
connector J1. Main power cable J2 refers to the four-main-power-cable configuration
that plugs in connector J2.
This configuration is shown in Figure 102.
Uninterruptible
power supply 3
J1 P3
Uninterruptible
J2 P1
Uninterruptible
xiv10399
power supply 1
Figure 102. ATS-to-uninterruptible power-supply connections in a four-main-power-cable

configuration
Modem
The modem is used by IBM XIV technicians to provide remote support through the
maintenance module.
The modem is at the rear of the rack, below the utility panel and to the right side
of the automatic transfer switch. It is supported on a bracket that is attached to the
rack and is held in place by a hook-and-loop fastener.
Figure 103 illustrates the modem and modem cable port. Figure 104 illustrates
where the modem and modem bracket attach to the rack.
MOD port
xiv10166
Figure 103. Modem

xiv10167
Figure 104. Modem bracket attachment

Before you begin replacing components
Read and understand the following information before you replace IBM XIV
Storage System components.
Warnings and notes

Read and understand these important warnings and notes before you install an
IBM XIV Storage System and before you replace or repair hardware components.
v Ensure that you read and fully understand the rack safety notices and other
safety and environmental notices that are described in “Safety and
environmental notices” on page xiii.
v The IBM service representative can only minimally reposition the rack within the
room, as needed to complete required service actions. The customer is
responsible for using professional movers or riggers in the case of equipment
relocation or disposal.

weight-and-height-reduced shipping (feature code 0200) must be ordered to
reduce the height of the rack. When this option is ordered, data modules 12 - 15
are shipped separately, and the rack top cover can be removed by the IBM
service representative before the XIV system is moved to its final location by
professional movers.
v Never power off the XIV system unless instructed to do so by the service
procedure.
If the XIV system is in an unexpected state or if a service procedure fails, always
leave the XIV system powered on, and contact your next level of support.
Powering off the XIV system makes it difficult to understand the failure and to
recover the XIV system.
v Service the XIV system only when it is in the Full Redundancy state.
The XIV system is self-healing and automatically recovers to the Full
Redundancy state, if possible. After a failed module is replaced, recovery to the
Full Redundancy state might take up to six hours. If the XIV system does not
return to the Full Redundancy state, contact your next level of support for an
action plan before you service the XIV system.
v Depending upon local conditions, the sound pressure might exceed 85 dB(A)
during service operations. When you work on the XIV system while either the
front or rear door is in the open position, hearing protection must be worn.
v Do not move installed components to another location.
– After a component is removed from the XIV system, it must be replaced, as
soon as possible, with a new field replaceable unit (FRU) component.
– After a component is installed in the XIV system, that component must not be
moved to a different position in the same XIV system or moved to another
XIV system. Certain components (including data modules, interface modules,
and InfiniBand switches) can cause serious malfunctions if they are moved.
v Do not press or use any button, switch, or circuit breaker on the XIV system
unless instructed to do so by the service procedure. Pressing a button or flipping
a switch or circuit breaker might cause data loss or other unwanted effects. For
example, powering off using buttons on the uninterruptible power supply
bypasses the battery backup and causes loss of data if done on an operational
XIV system.
v If it is necessary to power off the XIV system, use only the documented
procedure.
v If more than one component failed and must be replaced, contact your next level
of support for an action plan. The replacement order of components might be
important when there are multiple failures.
v Plug cables in to the correct ports to ensure that the XIV system functions
correctly. All cables are labeled with port-to-port information. All cables must be
plugged in to the correct port that is indicated on the cable label.
Electrostatic discharge
Always wear the electrostatic discharge (ESD) wrist strap when working with or
touching ESD-sensitive parts.
Attention:
When servicing ESD-sensitive parts in an XIV system, always wear an ESD wrist
strap that is correctly connected to the rack frame or enclosure sheet metal. This
strap prevents possible damage to the hardware and decreases any possible impact
to customer operations.
The following parts are ESD-sensitive:

v All logic field replaceable units (FRUs), such as cards
v All disk drive modules
v Any cables connected to ESD-sensitive parts
To prevent damage when working with ESD-sensitive parts:

v Keep the ESD-sensitive part in a special ESD bag until you are ready to install
the part into the XIV system.
v Make the fewest possible movements with your body to prevent an increase of
static electricity from clothing, fibers, carpets, and furniture.
v If instructed to do so, power off the XIV system before you remove
ESD-sensitive parts.
v Just before touching the ESD-sensitive part, discharge any static electricity in
your body by touching the metal frame or cover of the XIV system. If possible,
keep one hand on the frame when you install or remove an ESD-sensitive part.
v Never touch or work on any electronic circuits without wearing the ESD wrist
strap.
Touching the logic-board pins without wearing the ESD wrist strap (for example,
while counting the pins) can cause logic card failures. Touching the voltmeter
leads when you measure board pins or cable connections can also cause ESD
damage.
v Do not place any ESD-sensitive parts on the XIV system cover or on a metal
table because large metal objects might become discharge paths if they are not
grounded. If you must set aside an ESD-sensitive part, first place it in the special
ESD bag.
v Prevent ESD-sensitive parts from being accidentally touched by another person.
Reinstall all covers when you are not working on the XIV system.
v If possible, keep all ESD-sensitive parts in a grounded metal case.

v Take care when working with ESD-sensitive parts in cold weather. Low
humidity and heating increase static electricity.
Attaching the ESD wrist strap
An ESD wrist strap has a high resistance (>1 megohm) resistor in series with the
grounding clip so there is no danger to you. It discharges the static electricity from
your body.
When you wear the ESD wrist strap, ensure that the flexible grounding cable
remains connected to you and to the rack frame or enclosure sheet metal.
Complete the following steps to attach an ESD wrist strap:

1. Wrap the strap round your wrist.
2. Connect the clip on the flexible grounding cable to the rack frame or enclosure
sheet metal.
3. Keep the strap on and connected while you touch, insert, or remove any
ESD-sensitive part.
Required tools and materials

The replacement procedures list the tools and materials that are required to replace
and repair each IBM XIV Storage System hardware component. The following tools
might also be required.
v Set of screwdrivers
v Set of wrenches, including 7 mm and 8 mm
v Set of socket wrenches (including 10 mm) with an extension bar
Installing the IBM XIV Storage System management tools

Ensure that you have the latest IBM XIV management tools installed on your
notebook computer. The management tools include the IBM XIV Storage
Management GUI, the IBM XIV online monitoring tool (XIVTop), and the IBM XIV
command-line interface (XCLI).
About this task
For installation requirements and a list of available packages, see the Release Notes
on the IBM Support Portal website (www.ibm.com/storage/support).
Procedure
Complete the following steps to download and install the IBM XIV management
tools on your notebook computer:
1. Download the IBM XIV Management Tools installation package and
Release Notes from the IBM Support Portal website (www.ibm.com/storage/
support).
2. Complete one of the following procedures for your operating system:
v Windows Mac OS X Double-click the downloaded file, and follow the
instructions to complete the installation.
v Linux HPUX Solaris Run the following command to complete the
installation:
sh file_name
Installing the Technician Assistant tool

Ensure that the latest version of the Technician Assistant tool is installed on your
notebook computer.
About this task
The Technician Assistant tool is ready to use after it is downloaded to your

notebook computer. You can also choose to install the Technician Assistant tool to
get automatic updates.
You can run the Technician Assistant tool directly from the downloaded executable
file. If you choose to install the Technician Assistant tool, an agent is installed on
your local system. The agent runs in the background to check for updates, and
then automatically downloads and installs the updates. The installation also adds
shortcuts to the Start menu for starting the Technician Assistant tool.
Procedure
Complete the following steps to download and install the Technician Assistant tool
1. Download the latest version of the Technician Assistant tool to your notebook
computer from the XIV Code Download website (https://
servicecenter.xiv.ibm.com/ta/).
a. Select XIV Utilities, and then click Continue.
b. Read and understand the license agreement. If you agree, select I Agree,
and then click I Confirm.
c. Select Technician Assistant tool under the Software Update Tools section.
d. Click Download now.
2. Optional: Install the Technician Assistant tool by completing the following
steps:
TechnicianAssistantTool_v.r.m.exe where v.r.m is the version, release, and
modification). The Technician Assistant Setup window is displayed.
b. Click the Install radio button.
c. Click the Install button.
d. When the installation is complete, click Close to close the Technician
Assistant Setup window.
Verifying host-system configurations

Consider verifying the host-system configuration before you perform critical
maintenance on the XIV system.
Before you begin
XIV system code V11.2.x or later must be installed on the XIV system.

About this task
Host profiles are added to the XIV system when the customer installs the
host-attachment kit. The Host Configuration Verification utility retrieves host
profiles that are stored on the XIV system.
Procedure
From the Technician Assistant tool, click Utilities > Host Configuration
Verification. The Host Configuration Verification window is displayed.
When the verification is complete, the following information is displayed:
v The number of hosts that were analyzed
v The number of hosts that were not analyzed because the host profile is missing
v The percentage of compliant of host
v The percentage of non-compliant of host
v A tabular list of non-compliant hosts, their host-profile attributes, and the reason
for non-compliance
v A tabular list of compliant hosts and their host-profile attributes
Getting Started
Use this checklist as a guide when you replace hardware components in an IBM
XIV Storage System.
__ 1. Verify that all components are in place and that all cables are securely
fastened to their sockets. Verify that there are no apparent safety concerns.
__ 2. Verify that all LEDs are lit as expected. If any LED is not lit according to
the expected condition, determine the reason before you start the repair.
__ 3. Connect your notebook computer to the XIV system.
__ 4. Start the Technician Assistant tool.
__ 5. Start the IBM XIV Storage Management GUI and XCLI.
__ 6. From the IBM XIV Storage Management GUI, verify that all components
are operating as expected and that the XIV system shows Full Redundancy
status. If the XIV system does not show Full Redundancy status, determine
the reason before you start the repair. If the XIV system does not return to
Full Redundancy, contact your next level of support before proceeding.
__ 7. Phase out the component, if necessary.
A component that is in the Failed state does not need to be phased out
because the component is already out of service; however, you might need
to phase out a component that needs to be replaced before it failed.
__ 8. Start the appropriate guided repair utility in the Technician Assistant tool,
if appropriate. Most but not all replacement procedures use this tool.
__ 9. Replace the hardware component only after it is in the Failed state.
Attention: Do not attempt to replace a component before it is in the failed
state. Doing might cause the XIV system to malfunction.
__ 10. If the guided repair utility is used, complete the guided repair steps and
close the utility.
__ 11. Phase in the component, if necessary.
When an interface module, data module, or disk drive module (DDM) is
phased in, the XIV system redistributes the data throughout the XIV
system. Depending on the amount of data that needs to be redistributed,
the phase-in process might take several hours. When modules and DDMs
are in the Redistributing state, the service procedure is considered
complete, and generally there is no need to wait until the component
reaches the OK status (LED is not lit).
__ 12. Run basic diagnostic tests to complete the service call.
Connecting your notebook computer to the XIV system

Use this procedure to connect your notebook computer to the IBM XIV Storage
System.
About this task
The IP address for the XIV system is 14.10.202.250.
Procedure
1. Connect the notebook computer to one of the technician ports on the patch
panel by using the blue CAT5 cable that is supplied with the XIV system.
(Model 281x-114 only) The technician port that is labeled "3" is logically routed
to module 3 through module 4. It does not matter which technician port is used
unless module 2 or 4 failed or needs servicing. If module 2 failed or is to be
serviced, use the module 4 port (upper technician port). If module 4 failed or is
to be serviced, use the module 2 port (lower technician port).
(Model 281x-214 and 281x-215 only) It does not matter which technician port is
used unless module 2 or 3 failed or needs servicing. If module 2 failed or is to
be serviced, use the module 3 port (upper technician port). If module 3 failed
or is to be serviced, use the module 2 port (lower technician port).
Note: The technician port for module 4 is not active on XIV system code
V11.0.0. The port is active on XIV system code V11.0.1 or later.
2. Manually set the Ethernet adapter on the notebook computer to use fixed
address 14.10.202.1 and subnet mask 255.255.255.0. Do not use the Dynamic
Host Configuration Protocol (DHCP) server that is implemented over the
technician port.
3. From a command line on the notebook computer, run the ipconfig command,
and verify the following parameters:
v IP address: 14.10.202.1
v Netmask: 255.255.255.0
v Gateway: None
Starting the Technician Assistant tool

This information describes how to start the Technician Assistant tool.
Before you begin
To run the Technician Assistant tool, the following requirements must be met:
v The IBM XIV Storage Management GUI must be installed on the notebook
computer.
v The notebook computer must be connected to the XIV system, either through the
customer network or directly to the technician port on the patch panel.
Some utilities and scripts in the Technician Assistant tool require the XIV system to
be in a healthy state before the utilities and scripts are run.

Procedure
Complete the following steps to start and initially configure the Technician
Assistant tool:
1. Start the Technician Assistant tool in one of the following ways:
v If you installed the Technician Assistant tool on your notebook computer,
click Start > All Programs > XIV, and then click Technician Assistant Gen-3.
v To run Technician Assistant tool in stand-alone mode:
TechnicianAssistantTool_v.r.m.exe where v.r.m is the version, release,
and modification). The Technician Assistant Setup window is displayed.
b. Click StandAlone.
c. Select Gen-3.
d. Click Run. The Technician Assistant Setup window is closed, and the
Technician Assistant window is displayed.
2. Enter the technician password, and click OK.
If you do not know the Technician Assistant password, contact your next level
of support.
3. If you are starting Technician Assistant tool for the first time, click Technician
not setup at the bottom of the window, and complete the fields with your
profile information. See the online help for detailed information about each
field.
4. Click Press to Connect. The Connection Details window opens.
5. Select Direct Connect, and then click OK.
The Technician Assistant tool automatically checks the health of the connected
XIV system. The connection buttons at the bottom of the window display
information about the XIV system.
If you receive a warning that the XIV system cannot be reached, contact your
What to do next
Some utilities open a Challenge and Response window, which requires you to
enter a response to a challenge. You can find the response for the XIV system on
the IBM XIV Service Center website (http://servicecenter.xiv.ibm.com).
Note: You must be authorized to obtain a unique response key for the challenge. If
you are not authorized, contact your next level of support.
Starting the IBM XIV Storage Management GUI and

command-line interface
This information describes how to start the IBM XIV Storage Management GUI
and IBM XIV command-line interface (XCLI).
Procedure
Complete the following steps to start the IBM XIV Storage Management GUI and
XCLI on your notebook computer:
1. From the desktop, double-click the IBM XIV Storage System icon.
While the tool is loading, a splash screen is displayed. When loading is
complete, the Login window is displayed.
2. Type the technician user name and password.
3. Select Connect directly, and then click Add.
The main IBM XIV Storage Management GUI window is displayed in the All
Systems view.
4. Right-click the XIV system being serviced, and then click Launch XCLI.
An XCLI session is displayed.
Note: If you are not able to connect to the XIV system, look for a security
window that asks whether to allow or not allow the connection. Select Permit
Always, and launch the XCLI again.
Replacing disk drive modules

Use this procedure to replace one or more disk drive modules (DDMs) in a data or
interface module.
Before you begin

Ensure that the latest IBM XIV Storage Management GUI and Technician Assistant
tool are installed on your notebook computer.
Important: Ensure that you have the replacement DDMs ready before starting the
replacement procedure. You must insert the replacement DDM within 10 minutes
after removing the defective DDM.
Attention:
Use an approved electrostatic discharge wrist strap to prevent damage.
About this task

Replacement time: Approximately 2 minutes per DDM, not including the phasing
out and phasing in procedures.
The XIV system does not place a service call until three DDMs fail. When three
DDMs are in a failed state and Call Home is enabled, the XIV system sends a
call-home message and generates a problem management record (PMR). In
addition, if another PMR is opened that requires on-site maintenance and there are
one or two DDMs in a failed state, these failed DDMs are called out for
replacement in the action plan. Any failed DDMs that are encountered during a
maintenance action must be replaced at the same time as the non-DDM
maintenance activity. The procedure for replacing defective DDMs is the same
regardless of how many DDMs need to be replaced.
Complete the following procedures to replace one or more DDMs:

1. “Enabling DDM intermix” on page 124
2. “Phasing out the disk drive module” on page 124
3. “Starting the guided repair” on page 125
4. “Removing the disk drive module” on page 125
5. “Installing a disk drive module” on page 127
6. “Completing the guided repair” on page 128

7. “Completing the service call” on page 128
8. “Returning the defective component” on page 129
Enabling DDM intermix

Use this procedure to verify and enable the intermix of disk drive modules
(DDMs).
Before you begin
If you are mixing DDMs of different vendors within the same module or rack,
ensure that the XIV system is running the supported level of code. The following
table identifies the minimum code level that is required to support DDM intermix.
Table 13. Minimum code requirements for DDM intermix
DDM Minimum code level
1 TB capacity V11.1.1 and later
2 TB V11.0.0 and later
Note: On XIV systems running V11.3.0.a and later, the intermix policy is built in
and does not need to be enabled using the TA tool.
Procedure
Complete the following steps to enable DDM intermix:

1. From the IBM XIV Storage Management GUI, verify that the status pod on the
lower-right corner of the window shows Full Redundancy.
2. From the Technician Assistant tool, click the rightmost pod at the bottom of the
Technician Assistant window. The System Reports window is displayed.
3. Verify that the Disk mix has a green check after it, indicating that DDM
intermix is enabled.
4. If the Disk mix has a red x after it, double-click Disk mix to enable DDM
intermix. The red x changes to a green check.
Phasing out the disk drive module

Use this procedure to phase out the disk drive module (DDM) to be replaced. The
DDM must be phased out before removing it from the data or interface module.
Before you begin
If a DDM is already in the Failed state, it is not necessary to phase out the DDM.
To determine if a DDM is in the Failed state, hover the cursor over the DDM, and
verify that Status is Failed.
Attention: Do not click Phase Out > Ready unless instructed to do so by your
Procedure
Complete the following steps to phase out each DDM to be replaced:

1. From the IBM XIV Storage Management GUI, verify that the status on the
lower-right corner of the window shows Full Redundancy.
2. Right-click the DDM to be phased out.
3. Click Phase Out > Failed.
When phasing out, the DDM in the IBM XIV Storage Management GUI turns
orange. When the phase out process is complete, the DDM turns red.
4. Hover the cursor over the DDM, and verify that Status is Failed.
5. Verify that the XIV system status on the lower-right corner of the window
shows Full Redundancy.
If you are replacing a single DDM and the state is Rebuilding or Redistributing,
wait until the state changes to Full Redundancy. The XIV system must be in the
Full Redundancy state before removing the DDM. When a DDM fails, the XIV
system changes to the Rebuilding state and rebuilds the lost data on other
DDMs in the XIV system. When a DDM is being phased out, the XIV system
changes to the Redistributing state and redistributes the data to other DDMs in
the XIV system. When the rebuild or redistribution is complete, the XIV system
changes to the Full Redundancy state. If you replace a DDM while the XIV
system is in the Rebuilding state, customer data might be lost .
If you are replacing multiple DDMs, the XIV system can be in the
Redistributing state when you start to replace the next DDM.
6. From the front of the rack, verify that both LEDs (green and amber) on the
DDM to be replaced are on.
Starting the guided repair

Use this procedure to start the guided repair for a failed disk drive module (DDM)
using the Technician Assistant tool.
Procedure
Complete the following steps to start the guided repair for DDMs:
1. From the Technician Assistant tool, click Launch > Guided repair > Guided
repair for Disk. The Guided repair for disk window is displayed.
2. Follow the instructions in the guided repair viewer.
The guided-repair utility instructs you to replace the failed DDMs. Continue
with the next procedures to remove the failed DDM and install the DDM FRU.
Removing the disk drive module

Use this procedure to physically remove the disk drive module (DDM) to be
replaced from the module.
Before you begin
If you are replacing a single DDM and the state is Rebuilding or Redistributing,
wait until the state changes to Full Redundancy. The XIV system must be in the
Full Redundancy state before removing the DDM. When a DDM fails, the XIV
system changes to the Rebuilding state and rebuilds the lost data on other DDMs
in the XIV system. When a DDM is being phased out, the XIV system changes to
the Redistributing state and redistributes the data to other DDMs in the XIV
system. When the rebuild or redistribution is complete, the XIV system changes to

the Full Redundancy state. If you replace a DDM while the XIV system is in the
Rebuilding state, customer data might be lost .
If you are replacing multiple DDMs, the XIV system can be in the Redistributing
state when you start to replace the next DDM.
If you are removing multiple DDMs that are to be reinserted back into the data or
interface module but not replaced with new ones, you must ensure that the DDMs
are reinserted into the exact same location from which they were removed. Before
removing the DDMs, label each DDM by using the numbering sequence shown in
the following figure.
Procedure
Complete the following steps from the front of the rack to remove each DDM:
Latch
xiv10176

Attention: If the DDM is removed while still spinning, damage can occur to
the DDM.
Withdraw the DDM approximately 25 mm (1 in.) until you see the end of the
black band on the DDM. Wait approximately 30 seconds to give the DDM time
to spin down.
5. From the Technician Assistant tool, click Next. The guided repair tool verifies
that the correct DDM was removed.
6. Click Next to continue.
What to do next
Insert the replacement DDMs within 10 minutes of removing the defective DDMs.
Installing a disk drive module
Use this procedure to physically install the disk drive module (DDM) into the
drive bay.
About this task
If you are inserting DDMs back in to the module but not replacing them with new
ones, you must ensure that the DDMs are reinserted into the exact same location
from which they were removed. Use the numbering sequence shown in the
following figure to ensure that the DDMs are inserted into the correct drive bay.
Procedure
Complete the following steps to install each DDM:

the depression in the release latch.
Latch
xiv10176

into the drive bay.
3. Carefully insert the DDM all the way into the drive bay until it is fully
engaged.

xiv10174

5. Verify that all DDMs are inserted flush with the module cage to ensure that the
replaced DDMs are fully seated in position. Firmly push each replaced DDM
into position to ensure that all assemblies are fully engaged.
6. From the Technician Assistant tool, click Next. The guided repair tool verifies
that the correct DDM was installed.
Completing the guided repair

Use this procedure to complete the guided repair.
Procedure
Complete the following steps to complete the guided repair:

1. From the Technician Assistant tool, follow the remaining instructions in the
guided repair viewer to complete the repair.
2. Close the Guided repair viewer window.
Completing the service call

Use this information to verify that all IBM XIV Storage System components are
operating correctly before completing the service call.
Procedure
correctly:
Redundancy.
status pod again.
GUI:
Full Redundancy.
and click Test.
Returning the defective component

Use this procedure to package and return the defective component.
Procedure
1. Package the defective component using the packaging from the replacement
component.
2. Send the defective component package to the appropriate facility according to
the process for your respective country or geography.
Replacing data modules

Use this procedure to replace a data module.
Before you begin
Ensure that you have the replacement module before you start the replacement
procedure. You must insert the replacement module as soon as possible after
removing the defective module to prevent a disruption in airflow and cooling.

Ensure that you have a table or other surface on which to place the module,
power-supply units (PSUs), and disk drive modules (DDMs).
Use a mobile lift, if possible, to assist in removing and installing the module.
About this task
Replacement time: Approximately 65 minutes
Data and interface modules are replaced as a complete unit. The new module field
replaceable unit (FRU) is supplied with all components except disk drive modules
(DDMs) and the optional solid-state drive (SSD). DDMs and SSD are separate
FRUs.
You can identify a defective data or interface module from the IBM XIV Storage
Management GUI. If the module is defective, the entire module is removed,
packed, and sent to the repair facility. Defective data or interface modules are not
repaired on site.
If multiple modules need to be replaced, replace and install one module at a time.
Do not remove all defective modules at once. Replace the next module only after
the previously replaced module is phased in successfully and after data is
redistributed.
If you must remove multiple modules at the same time, remove the modules
starting with the highest module in the rack and working down to prevent the
rack from becoming top heavy.
Attention:
v Do not replace the module until it is in the Failed state, and the XIV system
itself is in the Full Redundancy state. These states indicate that the data in the
defective module is redistributed to other modules and DDMs.
v When replacing a module, do not leave a bay empty any longer than necessary,
as it affects airflow and cooling.
CAUTION:
>16 kg (35 lb)
16-30 kg (35-66 lb)

awkward position.
7-15.
Complete the following steps to replace a data module:

1. “Phasing out the data module”
3. “Removing the data module” on page 132
4. “Installing the data module” on page 137
Phasing out the data module

Use this procedure to phase out the data module before physically removing it
from the rack.
Before you begin
If the data module is already in the Failed state, it is not necessary to phase out the
data module. From the IBM XIV Storage Management GUI, hover the cursor over
the data module, and verify that the Status is Failed.
Attention: Do not select Phase Out > Ready unless you are instructed to do so
by your next level of support.
Procedure
Complete the following steps to phase out the data module:

1. From the IBM XIV Storage Management GUI, right-click the module to be
phased out.
When phasing out, the module turns orange, and the status on the lower-right
corner of the window shows Redistributing.
When the phase-out process is complete, the module and DDMs turn red, and
the status on the lower-right corner of the window shows Full Redundancy.

3. Hover the cursor over the module, and verify that the Status is Failed.
Redundancy.
5. Wait 10 minute before proceeding.

Use this procedure to start the guided repair for a failed data module using the
Technician Assistant tool.
Procedure
Complete the following steps to start the guided repair for data modules:
repair for Module. The Guided repair for module window is displayed.
The guided-repair utility instructs you to replace the failed module. Continue
with the next procedures to remove the failed module and install the module
FRU.
Removing the data module

Use this procedure to remove the interface module from the rack.
Before you begin
The data module must be in the Failed state before it can be removed.
The XIV system must be in the Full Redundancy state before removing the data
module. When a data module fails, the XIV system changes to the Rebuilding state
and rebuilds the lost data on other DDMs in the XIV system. When the data
module is being phased out, the XIV system changes to the Redistributing state
and redistributes the data to other DDMs in the XIV system. When the rebuild or
redistribution is complete, the XIV system changes to the Full Redundancy state.
Attention: If you replace a data module while the XIV system is in the
Rebuilding state, customer data might be lost.
About this task
If multiple failed modules need to be replaced, replace and install one module at a
time. Do not remove all modules at one time. Replace the next module only after
the previously replaced module is phased successfully in and data is redistributed.
Complete the following procedures to remove the data module:

1. “Disconnecting the cables from the data module” on page 133
2. “Removing the disk drive modules from the data module” on page 134
3. “Removing the power-supply units from the failed data module” on page 135
4. “Removing the data module from the rack” on page 136
5. “Installing the power-supply units in the failed data module” on page 136
Disconnecting the cables from the data module
Use this procedure to disconnect the power cables, data cables, serial cables, and
USB cables.
About this task
Figure 110 and Figure 111 shows connection ports on the rear of the upper and
lower data modules.
Procedure
Complete the following steps from the rear of the rack to disconnect the cables
from the module that is being replaced:
1. Remove the retaining clip from both power cables, and disconnect the power
cables from the module power-supply units.
2. Loosen the retaining screws, and disconnect the serial cable from port S1.
3. Disconnect the data cables from data ports A1 and A2.

4. (Module 1 only) Disconnect the USB cable from port USB1.
5. (Module 3 on model 281x-214 and 281x-215 only) Disconnect the USB cable
from port USB2.
6. Disconnect the USB cable from port USB3.
7. (Modules 1 - 3 only) Disconnect the Ethernet cables from ports F1, F2, F3, and
F4.
8. Disconnect the InfiniBand cables from ports G1 and G2.
Removing the solid-state drive from the failed data module

Use this procedure to remove the solid-state drive (SSD) from the failed data
module.
Procedure
From the rear of the rack, push the release tab to the right, and pull the SSD out of
the carrier assembly using the pull tab.
Figure 112. Solid-state disk
Removing the disk drive modules from the data module

Use this procedure to remove the disk drive modules (DDMs) from the data
module.
Procedure
Repeat the following steps from the front of the rack to remove each DDM:
Latch
Release tab Amber LED xiv10176

Attention: If the DDM is removed while still spinning, damage might occur
to the DDM.
4. Withdraw the DDM approximately 25 mm (1 in.) until you see the end of the
time to spin down.
Removing the power-supply units from the failed data module

If you are replacing data module 1, 2, or 3 by yourself, use this procedure to
reduce the weight of the failed data module by removing both power-supply units
(PSUs). This procedure is optional.
Procedure
Repeat the following steps from the rear of the rack to remove each PSU:

Power supply units
Power socket P2
xiv10234
Power socket P1
2. While you hold the locking tab, use the handle to slide the PSU out of its bay.
Note: As you start removing the PSU, you can release the locking tab.
Removing the data module from the rack

Use this procedure to physically remove the data module from the rack.
Procedure
Complete the following steps from the front of the rack to remove the data
module:
1. Loosen the two retaining screws on either side of the module by using a
Phillips screwdriver (see Figure 116). The retaining screws are not removable
and take only a few turns to loosen.
xiv10173
Grip Grip
2. If a mobile lift is available, move it slightly beneath the module to catch the
module when it is removed.
3. Use the grips on the front ends of the module to slide the module outward.
About a half of the way out, the module catches in the metal safety latches.
4. Push in the left-rail and right-rail safety latches and hold while extracting the
module from the bay.
5. Place the module on the mobile lift, or manually lift the module away from the
rack.
Installing the power-supply units in the failed data module

If you are replacing data module 1, 2, or 3 by yourself, and you removed the
power-supply units (PSUs) to reduce the weight of the failed data module, use this
procedure to reinstall both PSUs in the failed data module.
Procedure
Using the PSU handle, slide the PSU into the bay. An audible click is heard when
the securing pin engages.
Installing the data module

Use this procedure to install the data module in the rack.
About this task
CAUTION:
>16 kg (35 lb)
16-30 kg (35-66 lb)

awkward position.
7-15.
Complete the following procedures to install the data module:

1. “Removing the power-supply units from the replacement data module”
2. “Installing the data module into the rack” on page 138
3. “Installing the disk drive modules in the data module” on page 139
4. “Installing the power-supply units in the replacement data module” on page
141
5. “Connecting the cables to the data module” on page 141
Removing the power-supply units from the replacement data

module
If you are replacing data module 1, 2, or 3 by yourself, use this procedure to
reduce the weight of the replacement data module by removing both
power-supply units (PSUs).
Procedure
Repeat the following steps to remove each PSU:


Power supply units
Power socket P2
xiv10234
Power socket P1
Note: As you start to remove the PSU, you can release the locking tab.
What to do next
Set the PSUs aside. The PSUs are reinserted in the data module after inserting the
data module in the rack.
Installing the data module into the rack

Use this procedure to install the data module in the rack.
About this task
All data and interface module FRUs are shipped with an Ethernet network
interface card (NIC) installed; however, data modules that are installed in positions
10 - 15 do not use the Ethernet NIC or connection.
Procedure
Complete the following steps from the front of the rack to install the data module:
1. If a mobile lift is available, place the new module onto a mobile lift.
If a mobile lift is not available, two persons are required to complete this
procedure for modules 7-15 because of the awkward position.
2. Carefully align the new module with the empty slot.
The security latches automatically engage when the module is in position.
4. Tighten the two retaining screws on the front panel by using a Phillips
screwdriver (see Figure 118 on page 139).
xiv10173
Grip Grip
Installing the solid-state drive in the replacement data module

Use this procedure to reinstall the solid-state drive (SSD) in the replacement data
module.
Procedure
Complete the following steps to install the SSD:

1. Orient the replacement SSD so that the arrow on the pull tab points upward.
2. Push the release tab to the side, and insert the new SSD into the opening in the
carrier assembly. Release the tab to secure the SSD in place.
Installing the disk drive modules in the data module

Use this procedure to reinstall the disk drive modules (DDMs) in the data module.
About this task
Each DDM must be returned to the same drive bay from which it was removed by
using the numbering sequences shown in Figure 120 on page 140.

Procedure
Repeat the following steps from the front of the rack to install each DDMs:
the depression in the release latch.
Latch
xiv10176

into the drive bay.
engaged.
xiv10174

5. Verify that the DDM is inserted flush with the module cage. Firmly push the
DDM to ensure that it is fully engaged.
Installing the power-supply units in the replacement data module
If you are replacing data module 1, 2, or 3 by yourself, and you removed the
power-supply units (PSUs) to reduce the weight of the replacement data module,
use this procedure to reinstall both PSUs in the replacement data module.
Procedure
Using the PSU handle, slide the PSU into the mounting cage. An audible click is
heard when the securing pin engages.
Connecting the cables to the data module

Use this procedure to connect the power cables, data cables, serial cables, and USB
cables.
About this task
Figure 123 and Figure 124 on page 142 illustrates the location of each port on the
rear of the upper and lower data modules.

Each cable end is color-coded to aid in ensuring that cables are correctly connected.
colors for each module, see “Upper data-module cable connections” on page 361
and “Lower data-module cable connections” on page 380.
Important: Always reconnect the power cables last.
Procedure
Complete the following steps from the front of the rack to connect cables:
1. Connect the InfiniBand cables to their correct data ports G1 and G2.
2. (Modules 1 - 3 only) Connect the Ethernet cables to their correct data ports F1,
F2, F3, and F4.
3. (Module 1 only) Connect the USB cable to port USB1.
4. (Module 3 on model 281x-214 and 281x-215 only) Connect the USB cable from
port USB2.
5. Connect the USB cable to port USB3.
6. Connect the data cables to their correct data ports A1 and A2.
Important: The cable that is labeled M1A2-MtopA1 must be connected to port

A1 in the highest module. For example, for an XIV system in a 10-module
configuration, the cable that is labeled M1A2-MtopA1 must be connected to
module 10 in port A1. In some XIV systems, this cable is labeled
M1A2-M15A1.
7. Connect the serial cable to serial port S1, and tighten the retaining screws.
8. Verify that all cables are correctly connected and fully seated.
9. Connect both power cables into their correct sockets P1 and P2.
10. Secure the power cable by moving the retaining clip over the power cable.
11. Verify that the PSU green LEDs are steady on.
If the LED is not steady on, see “Troubleshooting data and interface modules”
on page 337.
12. From the front of the rack, verify that the power LED is lit.
If the LED is not lit, power on the module by pressing the power button.
Then, wait 5 minutes for the module to power on.
Power
button
Power status LED
xiv10365
Figure 125. Power button on the front of the data and interface modules
13. (Module 3 only) Verify that the maintenance module can communicate with
module 3.
a. From the Technician Assistant, click SSH tunnel closed. The Challenge
and Response window is displayed, which requires you to enter a
response to a challenge.
b. Enter the response to the challenge, and click OK. The button changes to
SSH tunnel open.
You can find the response for the XIV system on the IBM XIV Service
Center website (http://servicecenter.xiv.ibm.com).
c. From the Technician Assistant tool, click Launch > Open System shell.
The Open system shell window is displayed.
d. Run the ssh root@14.10.202.3 command to connect to data module 3.
e. Verify that the following prompt is displayed, which means that the
notebook computer is connected to data module 3:
chubaka-1310133:~ #
f. Enter exist to log out of the SSH session.
g. Close the Open system shell window.

Procedure


3. If you need to replace or repair another module, wait until the XIV system is in
the Full Redundancy state. You can verify the system state by checking the
status at the lower-right corner of the IBM XIV Storage Management GUI.

Procedure
correctly:
Redundancy.
status pod again.
GUI:
Full Redundancy.
and click Test.
Procedure
component.
Replacing interface modules

Use this procedure to replace an interface module.
Before you begin
Ensure that you have the replacement module before you start the replacement
procedure. You must insert the replacement module as soon as possible after
removing the defective module to prevent a disruption in airflow and cooling.
Ensure that you have a table or other surface on which to place the module,
power-supply units (PSUs), and disk drive modules (DDMs).
Use a mobile lift, if possible, to assist in removing and installing the module.
About this task
Data and interface modules are replaced as a complete unit. The new module field
replaceable unit (FRU) is supplied with all components except disk drive modules
(DDMs) and the optional solid-state drive (SSD). DDMs and SSD are separate
FRUs.
You can identify a defective data or interface module from the IBM XIV Storage
Management GUI. If the module is defective, the entire module is removed,
packed, and sent to the repair facility. Defective data or interface modules are not
repaired on site.
If multiple modules need to be replaced, replace and install one module at a time.
Do not remove all defective modules at once. Replace the next module only after
the previously replaced module is phased in successfully and after data is
redistributed.
Attention:
v Do not replace the module until it is in the Failed state, and the XIV system
itself is in the Full Redundancy state. These states indicate that the data in the
defective module is redistributed to other modules and DDMs.
v When replacing a module, do not leave a bay empty any longer than necessary,
as it affects airflow and cooling.

CAUTION:
>16 kg (35 lb)
16-30 kg (35-66 lb)

awkward position.
7-15.
Complete the following steps to replace an interface module:

1. “Phasing out the interface module”
3. “Removing the interface module” on page 147
4. “Installing the interface module” on page 153
Phasing out the interface module

Use this procedure to phase out the interface module before physically removing it
from the rack.
Before you begin
If the interface module is already in the Failed state, it is not necessary to phase
out the interface module. From the IBM XIV Storage Management GUI, hover the
cursor over the interface module, and verify that the Status is Failed.
Procedure
Complete the following steps to phase out the interface module:

1. From the IBM XIV Storage Management GUI, right-click the module to be
phased out.
When phasing out, the module turns orange, and the status on the lower-right
corner of the window shows Redistributing.
When the phase-out process is complete, the module and DDMs turn red, and
the status on the lower-right corner of the window shows Full Redundancy.
3. Hover the cursor over the module, and verify that the Status is Failed.
Redundancy.
5. Wait 10 minute before proceeding.

Use this procedure to start the guided repair for a failed interface module using
the Technician Assistant tool.
Procedure
Complete the following steps to start the guided repair for data modules:
repair for Module. The Guided repair for module window is displayed.
The guided-repair utility instructs you to replace the failed module. Continue
with the next procedures to remove the failed module and install the module
FRU.
Removing the interface module

Use this procedure to remove the interface module from the rack.
Before you begin
The interface module must be in the Failed state before it can be removed.
The XIV system must be in the Full Redundancy state before removing the
interface module. When an interface module fails, the XIV system changes to the
Rebuilding state and rebuilds the lost data on other DDMs in the XIV system.
When the interface module is being phased out, the XIV system changes to the
Redistributing state and redistributes the data to other DDMs in the XIV system.
When the rebuild or redistribution is complete, the XIV system changes to the Full
Redundancy state.
Attention: If you replace an interface module while the XIV system is in the
Redistributing state, customer data might be lost.
About this task
Important:
v If multiple failed modules need to be replaced, replace and install one module at
a time. Do not remove all modules at one time. Replace the next module only
after the previously replaced module is successfully phased in and data is
redistributed.
v If you must remove multiple modules at the same time, remove the modules
Complete the following procedures to remove the interface module:

1. “Disconnecting the cables from the interface module” on page 148
2. “Removing the disk drive modules from the interface module” on page 150

3. “Removing the power-supply units from the failed interface module” on page
151
4. “Removing the interface module from the rack” on page 152
5. “Installing the power-supply units in the failed interface module” on page 152
Disconnecting the cables from the interface module

Use this procedure to disconnect the power cables, data cables, serial cables, USB
cables, and interface cables.
Before you begin
Important: When you disconnect optical Ethernet and Fibre Channel cable, take
care to not cause sharp bends or crimp the cables. If the cable is bent or crimped,
system information flow might be compromised.
About this task
Figure 126 and Figure 127 on page 149 show the connection ports on the rear of the
interface modules. Figure 128 on page 149 shows the connection port on the front
of the interface module 5.
mUSB port
Figure 128. Cable connections for data module 5 (front view) xiv10207
Procedure
Complete the following steps to disconnect the cables from the module:
1. (Module 5 or 6 only) From the front of the rack, disconnect the front-door
logo LED cable from the mUSB port. This cable is connected to module 5 if
the ruggedized rack is not installed or to module 6 if the ruggedized rack is
installed.

2. From the rear of the rack, remove the retaining clip from both power cables,
and disconnect the power cables from the module power-supply units.
3. Loosen the retaining screws, and disconnect the serial-to-USB cable from serial
port S1.
4. Disconnect the data cables from data ports A1 and A2.
5. (Module 4, 5, and 6 only) Disconnect the serial-to-USB cable from port USB1.
6. (Module 4 on model 281x-214 and 281x-215 only) Disconnect the USB cable
from port USB2.

7. Disconnect the serial-to-USB cable from port USB3.
8. (Module 4 and 5 only) Disconnect the serial-to-USB cable from port USB4.
9. Disconnect the Fibre Channel cables from ports D1, D2, E1, and E2.
Note: When you disconnect the Fibre Channel cables, ensure that you plug
the socket with the special socket plugs. Exposed sockets can get small
amounts of dirt or debris lodged in them, which might affect performance or
cause failure.
10. Disconnect the 10 Gb optical Ethernet cables to their correct ports F1 and F2,
or disconnect the 1 Gb Ethernet cables from ports F1, F2, F3, and F4.
11. Disconnect the InfiniBand cables from ports G1 and G2.
Removing the solid-state drive from the failed interface module

Use this procedure to remove the solid-state drive (SSD) from the failed interface
module.
Procedure
From the rear of the rack, push the release tab to the right, and pull the SSD out of
the carrier assembly using the pull tab.
Removing the disk drive modules from the interface module

Use this procedure to remove the disk drive modules (DDMs) from the interface
module.
Procedure
Repeat the following steps from the front of the rack to remove each DDM:
Latch
Release tab Amber LED xiv10176

Attention: If the DDM is removed while still spinning, damage might occur
to the DDM.
4. Withdraw the DDM approximately 25 mm (1 in.) until you see the end of the
time to spin down.
Removing the power-supply units from the failed interface

module
If you are replacing interface module 4, 5, or 6 by yourself, use this procedure to
reduce the weight of the failed interface module by removing both power-supply
units (PSUs). This procedure is optional.
Procedure
Repeat the following steps from the rear of the rack to remove each PSU:

Power supply units
Power socket P2
xiv10234
Power socket P1
Removing the interface module from the rack

Use this procedure to physically remove the interface module from the rack.
Procedure
Complete the following steps from the front of the rack to remove the interface
module:
1. Loosen the two captive screws on either side of the module by using a Phillips
screwdriver (see Figure 133). The captive screws are not removable and take
only a few turns to loosen.
xiv10173
Grip Grip
2. If a mobile lift is available, move it slightly beneath the module to catch the
module when it is removed.
3. Use the grips on the front ends of the module to slide the module outward.
About a half of the way out, the module catches in the metal safety latches.
4. Push in the left-rail and right-rail safety latches and hold while extracting the
module from the bay.
5. Place the module on the mobile lift, or manually lift the module away from the
rack.
Installing the power-supply units in the failed interface module

If you are replacing interface module 4, 5, or 6 by yourself, and you removed the
power-supply units (PSUs) to reduce the weight of the module, use this procedure
to reinstall both PSUs in the failed interface module.
Procedure
Using the PSU handle, slide the PSU into the bay. An audible click is heard when
the securing pin engages.
Installing the interface module

Use this procedure to install the interface module in the rack.
About this task
CAUTION:
>16 kg (35 lb)
16-30 kg (35-66 lb)

awkward position.
7-15.
Complete the following procedures to install the interface module:

1. “Removing the power-supply units from the replacement interface module”
2. “Installing the interface module in the rack” on page 154
3. “Installing the disk drive modules in the interface module” on page 155
4. “Installing the power-supply units in the replacement interface module” on
page 156
5. “Connecting the cables to the interface module” on page 156
Removing the power-supply units from the replacement interface

module
If you are replacing interface module 4, 5, or 6 by yourself, use this procedure to
reduce the weight of the replacement interface module by removing both
power-supply units (PSUs).
Procedure
Repeat the following steps to remove each PSU:


Power supply units
Power socket P2
xiv10234
Power socket P1
2. While holding the locking tab, use the handle to slide the PSU out of its bay.
What to do next
Set the PSUs aside. The PSUs are reinserted in the interface module after inserting
the interface module in the rack.
Installing the interface module in the rack

Use this procedure to install the interface module in the rack.
Procedure
Complete the following steps from the front of the rack to install the interface
module:
1. If a mobile lift is available, place the new module onto a mobile lift.
If a mobile lift is not available, two persons are required to complete this
procedure for modules 7-15 because of the awkward position.
2. Carefully align the new module with the empty slot.
The security latches automatically engage when the module is in position.
4. Tighten the two retaining screws on the front panel by using a Phillips
screwdriver (see Figure 135).
xiv10173
Grip Grip
Installing the solid-state drive in the replacement interface

module
Use this procedure to reinstall the solid-state drive (SSD) in the replacement
interface module.
Procedure
Complete the following steps to install the SSD:

2. Push the release tab to the side, and insert the new SSD into the opening in the
carrier assembly. Release the tab to secure the SSD in place.
Installing the disk drive modules in the interface module

Use this procedure to reinstall the disk drive modules (DDMs) in the interface
module.
About this task
Each DDM must be returned to the same drive bay from which it was removed by
using the numbering sequences shown in Figure 137.
Procedure
Complete the following steps from the front of the rack to install each DDMs:
the depression in the release latch (see Figure 138 on page 156).

Latch
xiv10176

into the drive bay.
engaged.
xiv10174

5. Verify that the DDM is inserted flush with the module cage. Firmly push the
DDM to ensure that it is fully engaged.
Installing the power-supply units in the replacement interface

module
If you are replacing interface module 4, 5, or 6 by yourself, and you removed the
power-supply units (PSUs) to reduce the weight of the replacement interface
module, use this procedure to reinstall both PSUs in the replacement interface
module.
Procedure
Using the PSU handle, slide the PSU into the mounting cage. An audible click is
heard when the securing pin engages.
Connecting the cables to the interface module

Use this procedure to connect the power cables, data cables, serial cables, USB
cables, and interface cables.
Before you begin
Important: When you disconnect the optical Ethernet and Fibre Channel cables,
take care to not cause sharp bends or crimp the cables. If the cable is bent or
crimped, system information flow might be compromised.
About this task
Figure 140 and Figure 141 illustrate the location of each port on the rear of the
interface module. Figure 142 on page 158 shows the connection port on the front of
the interface module 5.

mUSB port
xiv10207
Figure 142. Cable connections for data module 5 (front view)
Each cable end is color-coded to aid in ensuring that cables are correctly connected.
colors for each module, see “Interface-module cable connections” on page 368.
Important:
v Always reconnect the power cables last.
v Do not connect the Fibre Channel cables (for ports D1, D2, E1, and E2) until after
the module is powered on. Connecting these cables before you power on the
XIV system might cause host system to lose connectivity to the XIV system.
Connect these cables only after you verify that the worldwide port name
(WWPN) on the Fibre Channel port is correct and that the module is phasing in.
Procedure
Complete the following steps to connect cables:

1. (Module 5 or 6 only) From the front of the rack, connect the front-door logo
LED cable from the mUSB port. This cable is connected to module 5 if the
ruggedized rack is not installed or to module 6 if the ruggedized rack is
installed.
2. From the rear of the rack, connect both InfiniBand cables to their correct ports
G1 and G2.
3. Connect the 10 Gb optical Ethernet cables to their correct ports F1 and F2, or
connect 1 Gb Ethernet cables to their correct ports F1, F2, F3, and F4.
4. (Module 4, 5, and 6 only) Connect the USB cable to port USB1.
5. (Module 4 on model 281x-214 and 281x-215 only) Connect the USB cable from
port USB2.
6. Connect the serial-to-USB cable to port USB3.
7. (Module 4 and 5 only) Connect the USB cable to port USB4.
8. Connect both data cables to their correct ports A1 and A2.
Important: The cable that is labeled M1A2-MtopA1 must be connected to port
A1 in the highest module. For example, for an XIV system in a 10-module
configuration, the cable that is labeled M1A2-MtopA1 must be connected to
module 10 in port A1. In some XIV systems, this cable is labeled
M1A2-M15A1.
9. Connect the serial to USB cable to port S1, and tighten the retaining screws.
10. Verify that all cables (except Fibre Channel cables) are correctly connected and
fully seated.
11. Connect both power cables into their correct sockets P1 and P2.
12. Secure the power cable by moving the retaining clip over the power cable.
13. Verify that the PSU green LEDs are steady on.
If the LED is not steady on, see “Troubleshooting data and interface modules”
on page 337.
14. From the front of the rack, verify that the power LED is lit.
If the LED is not lit, power on the module by pressing the power button.
Then, wait 5 minutes for the module to power on.
Power
button
Power status LED
xiv10365
Figure 143. Power button on the front of the data and interface modules
15. (Module 4 only) Verify that the maintenance module can communicate with
module 4.
a. From the Technician Assistant, click SSH tunnel closed. The Challenge
and Response window is displayed, which requires you to enter a
response to a challenge.
SSH tunnel open.
c. From the Technician Assistant tool, click Launch > Open System shell.
The Open system shell window is displayed.
d. Run the ssh root@14.10.202.4 command to connect to interface module 4.
notebook computer is connected to interface module 4:
chubaka-1310133:~ #
f. Enter exist to log out of the SSH session.

g. Close the Open system shell window.

Procedure

The guided repair utility instructs you when to connect the Fibre Channel
cables to the correct ports D1, D2, E1, and E2.
If the guided-repair procedure finds an error, and you cannot determine the
cause of the problem, contact your next level of support.
3. If you need to replace or repair another module, wait until the XIV system is in
the Full Redundancy state. You can verify the system state by checking the
status at the lower-right corner of the IBM XIV Storage Management GUI.

Procedure
correctly:
Redundancy.
status pod again.
GUI:
Full Redundancy.
and click Test.

Procedure
component.
Replacing module power-supply units

Use this procedure to replace a power-supply unit (PSU) in a data or interface
module.
Before you begin
Ensure that you have the replacement PSU before you start this procedure.
Operating the XIV system with a missing component disrupts airflow and prevents
the DDMs from receiving sufficient cooling; therefore, the PSU must be replaced
within 10 minutes of removing the defective PSU. If you cannot replace the PSU
within this time, do not start the procedure.
Ensure that replacement PSU is the correct type. The PSU must be replaced with a
PSU of the same type. You must not replace a regular PSU with a high-efficiency
PSU, and vice versa.
Attention:
About this task

Removing a single PSU does not affect system performance because the remaining
PSU continues supplying power to the module.
Remove the PSU only when it is in the failed state or when directed to do so by
your next level of support. You can identify a defective PSU from the IBM XIV
Storage Management GUI. If a PSU failed, the module and DDMs are in the OK
state, but the PSU is in the Failed state (red).
You cannot phase out a PSU. If it is not already failed, removing the PSU registers
a Fail status with the system.
DANGER
1. Do not remove covers from the PSU. There is danger of electric shock
inside the PSU. Do not attempt to repair a PSU on site. Always return the
PSU to the service lab. PSUs have potential hazards, including:
v Rotating fans
v Hot surfaces
2. Wear and test a suitable anti-static wrist or ankle strap, and observe all
conventional electrostatic discharge (ESD) precautions when handling
plug-in modules and components.
3. Avoid contact with backplane components, module connectors, and other
potentially dangerous components.
Complete the following procedures to replace a module PSU:

1. “Starting the guided repair”
2. “Removing the module power-supply unit”
3. “Installing the module power-supply unit” on page 163

Use this procedure to start the Technician Assistant guided repair for a failed
module power-supply units.
Procedure
Complete the following steps to start the guided repair for module power-supply
units:
repair for PSU. The Guided repair for PSU window is displayed.
The guided-repair utility instructs you to replace the failed module
power-supply units. Continue with the next procedures to remove the failed
module power-supply units and install the module power-supply units FRU.
Removing the module power-supply unit

Use this procedure to remove a defective module power-supply unit (PSU).
Before you begin
Replace the PSU only when it is in the Failed state. From the IBM XIV Storage
Management GUI, hover the cursor over the PSU, and verify that the Status is
Failed.
If the PSU is not already failed, removing the PSU registers a Fail status with the
XIV system.
Procedure
Complete the following steps from the rear of the rack to remove the PSU:
1. Unclip the power-cable retainer from the power cable.
2. Disconnect the power cable.
Power supply units

Power socket P2
xiv10234

Power socket P1
As you start to remove the PSU, you can release the locking tab.
Installing the module power-supply unit

Use this procedure to install the replacement module power-supply unit (PSU).
Before you begin
Check the replacement PSU for damage. Do not install the PSU if it is damaged.
Avoid damaging the connector pins on the PSU. Do not install the PSU if any of
the connector pins are bent. Do not force the PSU into the data or interface
module.

About this task
DANGER
v Rotating fans
v Hot surfaces
Procedure
Complete the following steps from the rear of the rack to install the PSU:
1. Use the PSU handle to slide the PSU into the bay.
An audible click is heard when the securing pin engages.
Power supply units

Power socket P2
xiv10234

Power socket P1
2. Verify that the PSU is flush with the panel surface.

3. Connect the power cable to the PSU.
Ensure that you reconnect power cable 1 (marked P1) to power socket 1 and
power cable 2 (marked P2) to power socket 2.
When power is available to the PSU, the PSU LED flashes green. When the
PSU is supplying power to the module, the PSU LED changes to solid
(continuous) green.
4. Clip the power-cable retainer over the power cable to prevent the power cable
from becoming disconnected.
5. Verify that the LED on the replaced PSU is lit green, which indicates that the
PSU is supplying power to the module.
Procedure

2. When the guided repair is complete, close the Guided repair viewer window.
3. From the IBM XIV Storage Management GUI, hover the cursor over the
replaced PSU, and verify that the Status is OK.

Procedure
correctly:
Redundancy.
status pod again.
GUI:
Full Redundancy.

and click Test.

Procedure
component.
Replacing module solid-state drives

Use this procedure to replace the solid-state drive (SSD) in a data or interface
module.
Before you begin
Attention: When you service ESD-sensitive parts in an XIV system,

always wear an ESD wrist strap that is correctly connected to the rack frame or
enclosure sheet metal. This strap prevents possible damage to the hardware and
decreases any possible impact to customer operations.
About this task
Solid-state drive (SSD) caching is an optional feature (feature code 1155 or 2255).
When this feature is ordered, one SSD is included in every data and interface
module.
Procedure
Complete the following steps to replace an SSD:

1. From the IBM XIV Storage Management GUI, click the right side of the
module to display the expanded module view.
2. Right-click the SSD at the rear of the expanded module view, and click Phase
Out > Failed.
When the phase out process is complete, the SSD turns red. Hover the cursor
over replaced SSD, and verify that Status is Failed.
3. From the rear of the rack, push the retention tab to the right and pull the SSD
out of the carrier assembly by using the pull tab.
The following figure shows the location of the carrier assembly in the data
and interface modules. The carrier assembly is the second PCI slot from the
left side of the module. The location is the same regardless of the type of data
or interface module in the rack.
5. Push the retention tab to the side, and insert the new SSD into the opening in
the carrier assembly. Release the tab to secure the SSD in place.
6. Verify that the status LED below the SSD is lit.
7. From the IBM XIV Storage Management GUI, right-click the SSD in the
expanded module view, and click Test.
8. Hover the cursor over SSD, and verify that Status is Ready. If the state is
Initializing, wait approximately 15 seconds until the state changes to Ready.
If the state does not change to the Ready, contact your next level of support.
in.
10. Hover the cursor over the SSD, and verify that Status is OK.

Use this procedure to start a guided repair for a solid-state drive (SSD) using the
Technician Assistant tool.
Procedure
Complete the following steps to start the guided repair for SSDs:
repair for SSD. The Guided repair for SSD window is displayed.
The guided-repair utility determines whether any SSDs are in a failed state.
Replacing InfiniBand switches

Use this procedure to replace an InfiniBand switch.

Before you begin
Attention:
A Phillips screwdriver with a 10-inch shaft is recommended to replace the Ethernet

switch.
Ensure that you have a table or other surface on which to place the InfiniBand
switch.
Ensure that you have a flashlight or other moveable light source to better see your
work.
About this task
Removing a single InfiniBand switch does not affect system performance, as the
remaining InfiniBand switch continues to operate.
Complete the following procedures to replace an InfiniBand switch:

1. “Phasing out the InfiniBand switch”
2. “Starting the guided repair”
3. “Removing the InfiniBand switch” on page 169
4. “Installing the InfiniBand switch” on page 170

Use this procedure to start the Technician Assistant guided repair for a failed
InfiniBand switch.
Procedure
Complete the following steps to start the guided repair for InfiniBand switch:
repair for switch. The Guided repair for switch window is displayed.
The guided-repair utility instructs you to replace the failed InfiniBand switch.
Continue with the next procedures to remove the failed InfiniBand switch and
install the InfiniBand switch FRU.
Phasing out the InfiniBand switch

Use this procedure to phase out the InfiniBand switch before removing it from the
rack.
About this task
It is not necessary to phase out the InfiniBand switch if it is already in the Failed
state. From the IBM XIV Storage Management GUI, hover the cursor over the
InfiniBand switch to be replaced, and verify that the Status is Failed.
Procedure
Complete the following steps to phase out the InfiniBand switch to be replaced:
1. From the IBM XIV Storage Management GUI, right-click the InfiniBand switch
to be phased out.
When phasing out, the InfiniBand switch turns orange. When the phase out
process is complete, the InfiniBand switch turns red
3. Hover the cursor over the InfiniBand switch to be replaced, and verify that the
Status is Failed.
Removing the InfiniBand switch

Use this procedure to remove the InfiniBand switch to be replaced from the rack.
Procedure
Complete the following steps to remove the InfiniBand switch:

1. From the front of the rack, remove the cover plate at rack EIA positions 23 and
24 to provide access to the rear of the InfiniBand switches.
2. Unplug the power cable from both power-supply units in the InfiniBand switch
to be replaced.
Note: Leave the power cables in the rack.

xiv10097
Secondary power Fan unit Primary power System status

supply unit (P2) supply unit (P1) LED
Figure 147. Front view of the InfiniBand switch
3. Verify that all LEDs on the InfiniBand switch to be replaced are off.
4. From the rear of the rack, disconnect all of the InfiniBand cables on the
InfiniBand switch to be replaced.
The cables for the upper InfiniBand switch 2 are red. The cables for lower
InfiniBand switch 1 are yellow.
Note: If one of the ports 1 to 17 in the replaced switch had no cable connected
to it but was moved to (spare) port 18 instead, make a note of this and also
attach the cable to port 18 on the replacement switch.

Note: Physically move the cables out of the way so that they do not impede
removing the InfiniBand switch. The cables are plugged back in to the
replacement InfinBand switch in a later step.
System status LED

IS5030
MGMT CONSOLE
Power
PSU 1
PSU 2
FAN
RST
xiv10093
5. Disconnect the RJ45-to-USB cable from the CONSOLE port on the InfiniBand
switch to be replaced.
6. Disconnect the Ethernet cable from the MGT port on the InfiniBand switch to
be replaced.
7. From the rear of the rack, use an 8 mm (5/16 in.) hex nut or wrench to remove
the four retaining screws at the ends of the InfiniBand switch to be replaced,
and place the screws in a secure location.
8. Carefully slide the InfiniBand switch to be replaced out of the rack.
Installing the InfiniBand switch

Use this procedure to install the replacement InfiniBand switch in the rack.
About this task
Each cable end is color coded to aid in ensuring that cables are correctly
connected.
The cabling is similar for both InfiniBand switches. For a detailed list of cables and
cable-end colors for each InfiniBand switch, see “Data and interface module cable
connections” on page 361.
Important: Always reconnect the power cables last.
Procedure
Complete the following steps to install the InfiniBand switch:

1. From the rear of the rack, carefully slide the replacement InfiniBand switch
into the rack.
Ensure that the two rows of InfiniBand ports (1 - 36) face you and that the
InfiniBand switch is top-side up so that you can read the labels on the switch.
2. Check that the replacement InfiniBand switch is correctly aligned.
3. Replace the four retaining screws by using a 8 mm (5/16 inch) hex nut or
wrench to tighten the screws into position.
4. Connect the InfiniBand cables in numerical order (see Figure 150).
Cables for the upper InfiniBand switch 2 are red. Cables for the lower
InfiniBand switch 1 are yellow.
System status LED

IS5030
MGMT CONSOLE
Power
PSU 1
PSU 2
FAN
RST
xiv10093
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18
xiv10096
19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36
The green status LED for the port is lit when the physical connection is made.
The yellow status LED for the port is lit when a logical connection is made.
When data is being transferred, the yellow status LED flashes.
Important: Carefully read the labels on each InfiniBand cable. You must
replace the cables in the correct positions. For example, on the upper
InfiniBand switch 2 (red cable), the first cable is labeled as N2.1-M1G2. This
means that the cable connects InfiniBand switch N2, port1 to module 1, port
G2.
Note: If one of the ports 1 to 17 in the replaced switch had no cable

connected to it but was moved to (spare) port 18 instead, make a note of this
and also attach the cable to port 18 when installing the replacement switch.
This will prevent a subsequent component test to fail because of a moved
cable. After the switch has been tested and phased-in successfully, contact the
next level of support to reverse the cable change.
5. Connect the Ethernet cable to the MGT port.
6. Connect the RJ45 cable to the CONSOLE port.
7. Ensure that all InfiniBand switch cables are plugged into the correct port and
are firmly seated.
8. From the front of the rack, connect both power cables into their correct sockets
P1 and P2.
The InfiniBand switch automatically powers on when the ac power is applied.
There is no power-on button.
9. Wait 3 minute for the switch to boot up correctly.
While the InfiniBand switch is starting, the status LED might be lit red.
10. Verify that the system status, P1, P2, and fan LEDs are lit green.

Attention: If one or more status LEDs are lit yellow, an error occurred that
must be dealt with immediately.

Procedure


Procedure
correctly:
Redundancy.
status pod again.
GUI:
Full Redundancy.
and click Test.

Procedure
component.
Replacing InfiniBand switch power-supply units

Use this procedure to replace a power-supply unit (PSU) in an InfiniBand switch.
Before you begin
Ensure that you have the replacement PSU before starting this procedure.
Operating the XIV system with any component missing disrupts airflow and
prevents the DDMs from receiving sufficient cooling; therefore, the PSU must be
replaced within 10 minutes of removing the defective PSU. If you cannot replace
the PSU within this time, do not start the procedure.
Ensure that you have the correct illumination before attempting to work within the
rack.
Attention:
About this task
Remove the PSU only when it is in the failed state or when directed to do so by
If the PSU has failed, the InfiniBand switch appears normal (status OK, green) in
the IBM XIV Storage Management GUI because the other PSU continues providing
power.

You cannot phase in or out a PSU. If the PSU is not failed, removing the PSU
registers a Failed status with the XIV system.
DANGER
v Rotating fans
v Hot surfaces
Complete the following procedures to replace a PSU:

1. “Removing an InfiniBand switch power-supply unit”
2. “Installing an InfiniBand switch power-supply unit”
Removing an InfiniBand switch power-supply unit

Use this procedure to remove the power-supply unit (PSU) from the InfiniBand
switch.
Procedure
Complete the following steps to remove an InfiniBand switch PSU:

1. Remove the cover plate at rack EIA positions 23 and 24 to provide access to the
rear of the InfiniBand switches.
2. Ensure that status LED is green on the PSU that is not being replaced.
3. Unplug the power cord on the defective PSU.
4. Push the latch release to the right with your thumb while pulling the PSU
handle outward. As the PSU becomes unseated, the PSU status LED turns off.
xiv10100
Latch release Handle
Figure 151. InfiniBand switch power-supply unit
5. Slide the PSU out of the InfiniBand switch.
Installing an InfiniBand switch power-supply unit

Use this procedure to install the power-supply unit (PSU) in the InfiniBand switch.
Before you begin
Important: Do not attempt to insert a PSU with a power cord connected to it.
Procedure
Complete the following steps to install an InfiniBand switch PSU:

1. Ensure that the mating connector of the new PSU is free of dirt and obstacles.
2. Insert the PSU by sliding it into the opening until a slight resistance is felt.
3. Continue pressing the PSU until it seats completely. The latch snaps into place
when correctly installed.
4. Plug the power cord into the power socket. The PSU status LED lights green.
If the PSU status LED does not light green, extract and reinsert the PSU.

Procedure
correctly:
Redundancy.
status pod again.
GUI:
Full Redundancy.

and click Test.

Procedure
component.
Replacing an InfiniBand switch fan unit

Use this procedure to replace a fan unit in an InfiniBand switch.
Before you begin
Ensure that you have a replacement fan unit before starting this procedure. Install
the replacement fan unit in less than 2 minutes after removing the defective fan
unit. If you cannot replace the fan unit within this time, do not start the procedure.
Ensure that you have an illumination source before attempting to work within the
rack.
About this task
If one of the fans in the fan unit is inoperable, the InfiniBand switch can operate as
long as the ambient temperature is less than 45°C (113°F) .
Procedure
Complete the following steps from the front of the rack to remove and install the
fan unit:
1. Remove the cover plate at rack EIA positions 23 and 24 to provide access to the
rear of the InfiniBand switches.
2. Using two hands, push both latch releases toward each other simultaneously
while pulling the fan unit out of the switch (see Figure 152 on page 177). As the
fan unit unseats, the fan status indicator turns off.
Release
latches Fan status LED
xiv10110
Fan unit
Figure 152. Fan unit and LEDs in the InfiniBand switch
3. Ensure that the mating connector of the new fan unit is free of any dirt and
obstacles.
4. Insert the fan unit by sliding it into the opening until slight resistance is felt.
Continue pressing the fan unit until it seats completely.
5. Verify that the fan status LED lights green (see Figure 152).
6. Verify that the airflow labels on the fan unit and the power-supply units (PSUs)
are identical (see Figure 152).
7. Run diagnostic tests to ensure that the IBM XIV Software System is operating
correctly (see “Running basic diagnostic test” on page 323).
8. Package the defective fan unit using the packaging from the replacement fan
unit.
9. Send the defective fan-unit package to the appropriate facility according to the
process for your respective country or geography.
Replacing the maintenance module

Use this procedure to replace the maintenance module.
About this task
Replacement time: Approximately 1 hour and 25 minutes
Complete the following procedures to replace the maintenance module:

1. “Removing the maintenance module and guide rails”
2. “Installing the M5 guide rails and maintenance module” on page 182
Removing the maintenance module and guide rails

Use this procedure to remove the maintenance module and guide rails.
Before you begin
Either a mobile lift or two people are required to hold the maintenance module in
place while the module is being removed.
Determine which maintenance module is installed on your XIV system and follow
the appropriate instructions:
v “Removing the M3 and M4 maintenance modules and guide rails” on page 178
v “Removing the M5 maintenance module and guide rails” on page 179

Important: In this procedure, disconnect cables only at the maintenance module.
Do not disconnect cable ends that are connected to other components, including
data and interface modules.
Removing the M3 and M4 maintenance modules and guide rails

Use this procedure to remove the M3 and M4 maintenance module and guide rails.
Procedure
Complete the following steps to remove the maintenance module:

1. From the front of the rack, power off the maintenance module by pressing the
power-control button.
Tip: Use a pen or a small tool to press the power-control button.
Hard disk drive activity LED

Locator LED
Reset button System-error LED
Power-control button
Power-on LED
xiv10169
Figure 153. Front view of the M3 and M4 maintenance modules
2. Verify that the power-on LED turns off.

3. Loosen the retaining thumb screw on both sides of the maintenance module.
4. Carefully slide the maintenance module out of the rack by using the retaining
thumb screws on both sides of the maintenance module. About a half of the
way out, the maintenance module catches in the metal safety latches.
5. Disconnect the power cable from the power socket from the rear of the
maintenance module.
Ethernet ports Ethernet ports

Power socket A1, A2 C1, C2
xiv10171
USB 1
Figure 154. Rear view of the M3 maintenance module
Ethernet ports Ethernet ports

Power socket A1, A2 C1, C2
xiv10393
USB 1
Figure 155. Rear view of the M4 maintenance module
6. Disconnect the four Ethernet cables (C1, C2, A1, and A2).
7. Disconnect the modem cable from port USB1.
8. Pull up on the blue pin on the left guide rail to disconnect the cable
management arm from the guide rail.
9. Push in the left-rail and right-rail safety latches down and hold while sliding
the maintenance module out of the rack. The maintenance module is removed
with the guide rails attached.
10. Remove both the left and right guide rails from the maintenance module by
removing the three mounting screws that hold each rail in place. Use a
Phillips screwdriver to remove the mounting screws.
The guide rails are not part of the maintenance-module field replaceable unit
(FRU). These same guide rails and mounting screws are reused when you
install the replacement maintenance module.
Guide rails
xiv10364
Screws
Figure 156. Guide rails on the maintenance module
Removing the M5 maintenance module and guide rails

Use this procedure to remove the M5 maintenance module and guide rails:
Procedure
Complete the following steps to remove the maintenance module:

1. From the front of the rack, power off the maintenance module by pressing the
Figure 157. Front view of the M5 maintenance module

Figure 158. Information panel on the front of the M5 maintenance module
2. Verify that the power-on LED goes from a lit state to flashing slowly. For more
LED status information, see “Maintenance module LEDs” on page 329.
3. From the rear of the module, disconnect the power cable from the power
socket.
Figure 159. Rear view of the maintenance module
4. Disconnect all Ethernet connection cables (C1, C2, A1, A2, and any other
optional connections).
5. Disconnect the modem cable from port USB1.
6. Disconnect the cable management arm.
7. From the front of the module, pull down on the rack release latches on either
side of the server (see Figure 157 on page 179) and slide the module out, until
the rails are fully extended and click into place.
8. Press on the blue dots, on the outer guide rails (see Figure 160 on page 181),
one on either rail by the front of the unit. This opens the locking tabs and
releases the maintenance module from the guide rails.
Figure 160. Guide rail locking tab
9. Carefully lift the maintenance module out of the rack.
Removing the guide rails:
Once the M5 maintenance module has been removed, the guide rails can be
removed from the rack.
Before you begin
A Phillips screwdriver with a 10-inch shaft is recommended to replace the guide

rails
Procedure
1. From the back of the rack, remove the mounting screw that holds the rail in
place.
The guide rails are not part of the maintenance-module field replaceable unit
(FRU). These same guide rails and mounting screws are reused when you
install the replacement maintenance module.
Figure 161. Mounting screw

2. From the front of the rack, push the blue locking tab inward.
Figure 162. Releasing the guide rails from the rack
3. Guide the rails inward and remove the rails from the rack.
Repeat this process on the second rail.
Installing the M5 guide rails and maintenance module

Use this procedure to insert the guide rails and maintenance module, and
reconnect the cables.
Before you begin
Either a mobile lift or two people are required to hold the maintenance module in
place while the module is being installed.
A Phillips screwdriver with a 10-inch shaft is recommended to replace the guide

rails
Before the maintenance module is installed, the guide rails must be installed in the
rack. To install the guide rails, see “Installing the M5 guide rails.” If the guide rails
are already installed, proceed to “Installing the M5 maintenance module” on page
184.
Installing the M5 guide rails

Use this procedure to insert the guide rails for the M5 maintenance module
Procedure
Complete the following steps to install the guide rails:
Note: The guide rails are labeled on their outer-sides which are the Right Front
and Left Front, in order to avoid wrong installation.
1. Fully extend the guide rail by opening the locking tab on the outer back side of
the guide rail (see Figure 163 on page 183).
Figure 163. Opening the locking tab
2. Align and place guide rail pins in the back of the rack.
Figure 164. Rear of guide rail: pins and screw inserted in rack
3. From the front of the rack, open the blue locking tab and push the front two
pins into place.
Figure 165. Front of guide rail: locking tab open and pins in place

4. On the rear of the rail, replace the screw and tighten with a Phillips head screw
driver, as shown in Figure 164 on page 183.
Repeat this process, steps 1 on page 182 through 4, on the second rail.
Once the guide rails have been installed, you can proceed to install the
maintenance module. See “Installing the M5 maintenance module.”
Installing the M5 maintenance module

Use this procedure to insert the maintenance module and reconnect the cables.
Procedure
1. From the front of the rack, fully extend the guide rails. (If the guide rails have
not yet been installed, follow the instructions the section “Installing the M5
guide rails” on page 182.
2. Align all three pins and pinholes on each side, back-to-front, one side at a
time. Ensure that all pins are inserted properly in each of the six pinholes
before continuing.
Figure 166. M5 guide rails extended
3. Push the two blue locking tabs inwards (left and right) and slide the module
into the rack.
Figure 167. Opening the guide rail locking tabs
4. Slide the maintenance module and rails into the rack.

5. From the back of the module, connect the modem cable to port USB1.
Figure 168. Cabling ports on the maintenance module
6. Connect the Ethernet cables to their correct ports A1, A2, C1, and C2, as well
as any other optional port connections. Verify that each cable is connected to
the correct port.
7. Connect the power cable in the power socket.
8. Connect the cable management arm.
9. Press the power-control button to power on the maintenance module.
Figure 169. Information panel on the front of the maintenance module
10. Verify that the Power-on LED is lit green.

If the Power-on LED is flashing, the maintenance module did not power on.
Press the Power-control button again. For more information about
maintenance module LEDs, see “Maintenance module LEDs” on page 329.

11. Verify that the maintenance module can communicate with data module 3 and
interface module 4.
a. From the Technician Assistant, use the superuser login details and click
SSH tunnel closed. The Challenge and Response window is displayed,
which requires you to enter a response to a challenge.
SSH tunnel open.
c. From the Technician Assistant tool, click Launch > Open System shell. The
Open system shell window is displayed.
d. Run the ssh root@14.10.202.3 command to connect to data module 3.
Note: In order to see the current module version (for both module 3 and
module 4), once connected to the module, run the following command:
cat /etc/version
Example:
chubaka-7812348:~#cat /etc/version
11.1.3-20141113
notebook computer is connected to data module 3:
chubaka-7812348:~ #
Example:
superuser@nextra-7812348-module-1:~# ssh 14.10.202.3
Last login: Thu Feb 26 18:05:32 2015 from module-4
chubaka-7812348:~ # exit
Connection to chubaka-1 closed

f. Enter exit to log out of the SSH session.
g. Run the ssh root@14.10.202.4 command to connect to interface module 4.
h. Verify that the following prompt is displayed, which means that the
notebook computer is connected to interface module 4:
chubaka-7812348:~ #
Example:
superuser@nextra-7812348-module-1:~# ssh 14.10.202.4
Last login: Thu Feb 26 18:11:36 2015 from module-3
chubaka-7812348:~ # exit
Connection to chubaka-1 closed

i. Enter exit to log out of the SSH session.
j. Close the Open system shell window.

Use this information to verify that the IBM XIV Storage System maintenance
module is operating correctly before completing the service call.
Procedure
Complete the following steps to verify that the maintenance module is operating
correctly:
Redundancy.
If the state is not in Full Redundancy, contact your next level of support.
3. If the maintenance module is in the Failed state (the component is displayed as
red), complete the following steps from the IBM XIV Storage Management GUI:
b. View the Event log to determine the cause of the failure.
power and data cables to the failed maintenance module, and then
right-click the XIV system, and hover the cursor over the component, and
verify that Status is OK.
d. Verify that the maintenance module can communicate with data module 3
and interface module 4 by completing step 11 on page 186 of “Installing the
M5 maintenance module” on page 184, using superuser login details.
4. Click View > Monitor > Events, and verify that there are no new events with
If there are other events, contact your next level of support.

Procedure
component.
Replacing uninterruptible power supplies

Use this procedure to replace an uninterruptible power supply.
Before you begin

v The replacement uninterruptible power supply FRU is shipped without batteries.
The batteries from the defective uninterruptible power supply are installed in
the replacement uninterruptible power supply, unless the batteries are also
defective. If the batteries are defective, they must be ordered separately.
v Ensure that all power connections from the ATS to the uninterruptible power
supplies and all output connections to the uninterruptible power supplies are
secure and fully seated.
v Verify that all module power-supply units (PSUs) are connected and providing
power. Ensure that the LEDs on each PSU are solid green, indicating that the
PSU is supplying power to the module.
v Verify that all uninterruptible power supplies that are not scheduled for repair
are operating correctly:

– From the front of the rack, verify that the online LED ( ) is green and
that the on-battery LED ( ) is not lit.

– From the IBM XIV Storage Management GUI, hover the cursor over each
uninterruptible power supply, and verify that Status is OK.
Important: If multiple uninterruptible power supplies failed, contact your next

level of support before you replace the uninterruptible power supply.
v Ensure that circuit breaker guard is installed on each uninterruptible power
supply. If the circuit breaker guards are not installed, contact your next level of
support to order circuit breaker guard (part number 45W3343).
v Have a table or other surface close by on which to place the batteries and
v Have a flashlight or other illumination source to make components and cables in
the rack easier to see. An angled mirror might also be useful.
About this task
CAUTION:
18-32 kg (39.7-70.5 lbs)
The weight of this part or unit is 18 - 32 kg (39.7 - 70.5 lb). It takes two persons
to safely lift this part or unit. (C009)
Weight: 55kg
1. It is necessary to use two persons to remove and replace a uninterruptible
power supply. The weight of a uninterruptible power supply with the
batteries removed is 19 kg (41.8 lbs).
Before beginning the procedure, ensure that you have a stable surface
available (appropriate to the weight and size) on which to place the removed
and replacement module, such a wheeled cart or table.
2. You must remove the heavy batteries before extracting the uninterruptible
power supply.
Attention: If unexpected conditions take place during the replacement procedure,

stop all actions, and contact your next level of support before proceeding.
Unexpected conditions include accidental power loss to any system component or
accidental tripping of circuit breakers on other uninterruptible power supplies. Do
not attempt to recover from these conditions on your own.
Complete the following procedures to replace an uninterruptible power supply:

2. “Removing the uninterruptible power supply” on page 189
3. “Installing the uninterruptible power supply” on page 197
Use the Technician Assistant tool to start the guided repair for a failed
Procedure
Complete the following steps to start the guided repair for an uninterruptible
power supply:
repair for UPS. The Guided repair for UPS window is displayed.
This guided-repair procedure tests each failed uninterruptible power supply. If
the test fails, the guided-repair utility attempts to resolve the problem and run
the guided-repair utility again. If the guided-repair utility cannot resolve the
problem, an error message is displayed in the Guided repair for UPS window.
If one in the following situations occur, an error is displayed:
v If cables are not correctly connected to the XIV system. Check the cable
connections and try to initialize the uninterruptible power supply again.
v If batteries require charging, the UPS_SELF_TEST_IS_POSSIBLY_INACCURATE
error is displayed.
If batteries require charging, the uninterruptible power supply might stay in
the initializing state for up to three hours. It is not necessary for the IBM
service representative to wait for the batteries to charge. If the batteries are
not charged 100% after 3 hours, the customer must issue another service
request. Ask the customer to check the battery-charge status by running the
ups_list command.
3. If the guided-repair utility determines that the uninterruptible power supply is
not functioning correctly, see “Starting the guided replacement.”
Starting the guided replacement

Use the Technician Assistant tool to start the guided repair and replace a failed
uninterruptible power supply .
Procedure
Complete the following steps to start the guided replacement of an uninterruptible

power supply:
replace for UPS. The Guided replace for UPS window is displayed.
3. When the guided UPS replacement utility instructs you to power off the
uninterruptible power supply, continue with step 1 in “Removing the
uninterruptible power supply” to power off the uninterruptible power supply.
The Technician Assistant tool will then phase out the UPS.
4. When instructed by the Technician Assistant tool, continue with the procedures
in “Removing the uninterruptible power supply” to remove the failed
uninterruptible power supply and install the uninterruptible power supply
FRU.
Removing the uninterruptible power supply

Use this procedure to remove the uninterruptible power supply from the rack.

About this task
Complete the following procedures to remove the uninterruptible power supply:

1. “Disconnecting the power cables for a two-main-power-cable configuration”
2. “Disconnecting the power cables for a four-main-power-cable configuration” on
page 191
3. “Removing the uninterruptible power-supply batteries” on page 194
4. “Disconnecting the uninterruptible power-supply cables” on page 193
5. “Removing the uninterruptible power supply from the rack” on page 196
Disconnecting the power cables for a two-main-power-cable

configuration
Use this procedure to disconnect the power cable that connects the automatic
transfer switch (ATS) to the uninterruptible power supply for an XIV system that is
set up in a two-main-power-cable configuration.
About this task
In an XIV system that is set up in a two-main-power-cable configuration, the

power cables are connected from each uninterruptible power supply to the ATS.
This procedure unplugs the power cable from the ATS. The power cable is hard
wired into the back of the uninterruptible power supply and is removed along
with the uninterruptible power supply.
Procedure
Complete the following steps to disconnect power cable from the ATS:
1. Verify that each uninterruptible power supply is connected to the correct outlet
on the ATS (see Chapter 11, “Cable connections,” on page 361).
2. Unclip the power-cable retainer for the appropriate power cable on the ATS.
Power-cord
retaining bracket
xiv10150
Figure 170. Power-cable retainer that is not clipped
3. Slightly twist the power-cable plug in a counterclockwise direction, and then

disconnect the power cable from the ATS (see the following figure).
Maintenance module
power cord
Maintenance module
circuit breaker
P3 F3
Uninterruptible
F1
P1
xiv10149
4. Arrange the ATS-to-uninterruptible power-supply power cable in such a way

that it can be easily removed along with the uninterruptible power supply
without moving the other ATS-to-uninterruptible power supply connections or
interfering with the removal procedure.
Disconnecting the power cables for a four-main-power-cable

configuration
Use this procedure to disconnect the power cable that connects the automatic
transfer switch (ATS) to the uninterruptible power supply for an XIV system that is
set up in a four-main-power-cable configuration.
About this task
In an XIV system that is set up in a four-main-power-cable configuration, the

power cable for uninterruptible power supply 2 connects to the ATS. The power
cables for uninterruptible power supply 1 and 3 connect to main-power cables.
This procedure unplugs the power cable from the ATS or a main-power cable. The
uninterruptible power-supply power cable is hard wired into the back of the
uninterruptible power supply and is removed along with the uninterruptible
power supply.
Procedure
Complete the following steps to disconnect power cable from the ATS:
1. If you are replacing uninterruptible power supply 2, complete the following
steps:

a. Unclip the power-cable retainer for the appropriate power cable on the ATS.
Power-cord
retaining bracket
xiv10150
b. Slightly twist the power-cable plug in a counterclockwise direction, and

then disconnect the power cable from the ATS (see the following figure).
Maintenance module
power cord
Maintenance module
circuit breaker
P3 F3
Uninterruptible
F1
P1
xiv10149
2. If you are replacing uninterruptible power supply 1 or 3, complete the

following steps:
a. Cut the cable ties that secure the power-cable retainer to the main-power
cable and uninterruptible power supply power cable (see Figure 174 on
page 193), and remove the retainer.
Figure 174. Main-power cable pigtail retention bracket
b. Disconnect the uninterruptible power supply power cable from the

main-power cable.
3. Arrange the power cable in such a way that it can be easily removed along
with the uninterruptible power supply without moving the other
ATS-to-uninterruptible power supply connections or interfering with the
removal procedure.
Disconnecting the uninterruptible power-supply cables

Use this procedure to disconnect the power, network, serial, and ac-sensor cables
from the uninterruptible power supply.
About this task
The following figure shows the cable connections on the rear of the uninterruptible
power supply.
ATS ac-sensor port

(N1)
and guard (OUTPUT)
xiv10145

(S1)

Procedure
Complete the following steps to disconnect the power, network, serial, and
ac-sensor cables:
1. Disconnect all 10-Amp. power cables.
2. Loosen the finger screws, and remove the serial plug from serial port S1.
3. Remove the Ethernet cable from port N1.
4. (Uninterruptible power supply 3 only) Remove the ac-sensor cable from port
OUTPUT.
5. If the uninterruptible power supply is connected to an EPO circuit, disconnect
the EPO circuit at the uninterruptible power supply EPO port.
Removing the uninterruptible power-supply batteries

Use this procedure to remove the uninterruptible power-supply batteries.
About this task
It is not necessary to mark the battery positions because batteries can be replaced
into any battery bay.
The replacement uninterruptible power supply is shipped without batteries. The

batteries from the defective uninterruptible power supply are installed in the
replacement uninterruptible power supply, unless the batteries are also defective. If
the batteries are defective, they must be ordered separately.
CAUTION:
When replacing batteries, there is a certain energy risk hazard. Remove all
jewelry (such as watches, bracelets, and rings) before replacing the batteries.
CAUTION:
The batteries are heavy, approximately 18 kg (40 lbs). Handle them with care.
Procedure
Complete the following steps to remove the uninterruptible power-supply

batteries:
1. From the front of the rack, remove the two screws from the power-off cover on
the uninterruptible power supply, and then remove the power-off cover.
Store both screws in a safe place. These screws are reused when replacing the
Plastic cover
Data may
be lost
if button
is pushed
xiv10143
2. Remove the plastic cover from the front of the uninterruptible power supply.
The cover snaps off.
3. Remove the two screws from the battery cover by using a Phillips screwdriver.
Store both screws in a safe place. These screws are reused when replacing the
batteries.
Screws Hand grip Battery cover
Data may
be lost Test
if button
is pushed
xiv10212
Figure 177. Uninterruptible power-supply battery cover
4. Pull the battery cover to the left by using the hand grip to release the latch, and
swing the battery cover out towards the left to expose both batteries.
5. Unplug both battery connectors from the batteries.
Battery connectors
xiv10211
Battery hand grips

6. Use the battery hand grip to extract each battery from the battery bay.
Remove the battery slowly as the battery is heavy, approximately 18 kg (40 lbs).
Ensure that a cart, table, or mobile lift is located nearby on which to place the
batteries.
7. Place the batteries in a safe location.
8. Return the battery cover to the closed position to prevent the plate from
swinging freely.
Removing the uninterruptible power supply from the rack

Use this procedure to physically remove the uninterruptible power supply from
the rack.
Before you begin
The uninterruptible power supply batteries must be removed, and all cables must
be disconnected before removing the uninterruptible power supply from the rack.
If possible, use a mobile lift to catch the uninterruptible power supply after it is
removed.
Ensure that you have enough space to entirely pull out the uninterruptible power
supply.
About this task
CAUTION:
The uninterruptible power supply is heavy even without the batteries 19 kg

(41.8 lbs). Take care when removing the uninterruptible power supply.
Procedure
Complete the following steps to remove the uninterruptible power supply:

1. From the front of the rack, remove the remaining six retaining screws that
secure the uninterruptible power supply to the rack.
Store the screws in a safe place. These screws are reused when replacing the
2. From the rear of the rack, push the uninterruptible power supply towards the
front of the rack.
There are no grips on the front of the uninterruptible power supply that you
can use to pull the uninterruptible power supply out from the front of the rack.
3. Coil the ATS-to-uninterruptible power-supply power cable neatly.
The ATS-to-uninterruptible power-supply power cable comes out along with
the uninterruptible power supply. Ensure that the power cable does not get
caught or hung up on anything in the rack.
4. Front the front of the rack, grip the side wings and pull the uninterruptible
power supply out of rack.
Pulling the uninterruptible power supply out of the rack might take some force.
Installing the uninterruptible power supply
Use this procedure to install the uninterruptible power supply in the rack.
About this task
Complete the following procedures to install the uninterruptible power supply in

the rack:
1. “Installing the uninterruptible power supply in the rack”
2. “Inserting the uninterruptible power-supply batteries” on page 198
3. “Connecting the uninterruptible power-supply cables” on page 198
4. “Connecting power cables for a two-main-power-cable configuration” on page
199
5. “Connecting power cables for a four-main-power-cable configuration” on page
201
6. “Powering on the uninterruptible power supply” on page 203
Installing the uninterruptible power supply in the rack

Use this procedure to physically install the uninterruptible power supply in the
rack.
Before you begin
If possible, use a mobile lift to bring the uninterruptible power supply as close to
the rack as possible.
About this task
The uninterruptible power supply is inserted in the rack without the batteries.
Batteries are inserted after the uninterruptible power supply is in place and
secured.
CAUTION:
A single uninterruptible power supply without the batteries weighs 19 kg (41.8

lbs). Two persons are required to lift the uninterruptible power supply.
Procedure
Complete the following steps to install the uninterruptible power supply in the
rack:
1. Coil the ATS-to-uninterruptible power-supply power cable behind the
If the power cable is correctly placed behind the uninterruptible power supply,
you can easily insert the uninterruptible power supply into position.
2. From the front of the rack, insert the uninterruptible power supply in the rack.
Maneuver the uninterruptible power supply until you can slide it into position.
3. Push in the uninterruptible power supply as far as possible, so that the front
panel is flush with the rack and the ATS-to-uninterruptible power-supply
power cable can be seen at the rear of the rack.
4. Fasten the four retaining screws on the left side and two retaining screws on
the upper right of the uninterruptible power supply.

Important: Do not plug in the ATS-to-uninterruptible power-supply power
cable. Ensure that the power cable does not get caught or hung up on any
other cable or obstacle in the rack.
Inserting the uninterruptible power-supply batteries

Use this procedure to install the uninterruptible power-supply batteries.
About this task
CAUTION:
Procedure
Complete the following steps to install the uninterruptible power-supply batteries:

1. From the front of the rack, use the battery hand grip to insert a battery in the
battery bay, and slide the battery in as far as possible.
Ensure that the battery connector is secured between the two guide rails. Do
not yet connect the front battery connector.
2. Slide the second battery into the available battery bay.
3. Firmly push the two battery connectors into place. A slight click is heard.
4. Swing the battery cover flush against the uninterruptible power supply, and
then push the battery cover to the right by using the hand grip to secure the
latch.
5. Secure the battery retaining plate in place with two screws by using a Phillips
screwdriver. Tighten until snug.
6. Replace the plastic cover over the uninterruptible power supply. The cover
snaps in place.
7. Replace the uninterruptible power supply power-off cover, and fasten the two
retaining screws by using a Phillips screwdriver.
Connecting the uninterruptible power-supply cables

Use this procedure to connect power, network, serial, and ac-sensor cables to the
About this task
The cabling is different for each uninterruptible power supply. For a detailed list of
cables and cable-end colors for each uninterruptible power supply, see
“Uninterruptible power-supply cable connections” on page 389.
Procedure
Complete the following steps to connect the uninterruptible power supply cables:
1. Connect all color-coded 10-Amp. power cables to the appropriate power
sockets.
Use a portable flashlight or other illumination to help you read the labels. The
position is awkward for some cables.
Figure 179 on page 199 shows the location of the output-power sockets for each
Each power cable is labeled to indicate the appropriate position on the
uninterruptible power supply See “Uninterruptible power-supply cable
connections” on page 389 for a table of components and ports to which the
power cables are connected.
Power socket
1 2 3 4
xiv10235
5 6 7 8
Figure 179. Power-socket number scheme for the uninterruptible power-supply
2. Connect the Ethernet cable to the port N1.
ATS ac-sensor port

(N1)
and guard (OUTPUT)
xiv10145
(S1)
3. Connect the serial cable to the port S1, and finger tighten the fastening screws.
4. (Uninterruptible power supply 3 only) Connect the ac-sensor cable labeled
ATSX807-U3OUTPUT to the port OUTPUT (blue connector) so that the securing
screws face downward.
5. If an EPO circuit is being used, connect the EPO cable to the EPO port.
Connecting power cables for a two-main-power-cable

configuration
Use this procedure to connect the uninterruptible power-supply power cables to
the ATS for an XIV system that is set up in a two-main-power-cable configuration.
About this task
The following figure illustrates the main-power-cable connections for a XIV system
that is set up in a two-main-power-cable configuration.

Uninterruptible
power supply 3
A J1 P3
Uninterruptible
B J2 P1
Uninterruptible
xiv10047
power supply 1
Figure 181. ATS-to-uninterruptible power-supply connections in a two-main-power-cable

configuration
Procedure
Complete the following steps to connect the power cables:

1. Uncoil the uninterruptible power-supply power cable. Ensure that the power
cable does not get snagged on an internal object.
2. Connect the uninterruptible power-supply power cable to the appropriate ATS
power socket, and slightly twist the plug in a clockwise direction.
Maintenance module
power cord
Maintenance module
circuit breaker
P3 F3
Uninterruptible
F1
P1
xiv10149
3. Clip the power-cable retainer over the power-cable pigtail to secure the power
cable to the ATS.
Power-cord
retaining bracket
xiv10151
Figure 183. Power-cable retainer that is clipped
Connecting power cables for a four-main-power-cable

configuration
Use this procedure to connect the uninterruptible power-supply power cables to
the ATS for an XIV system that is set up in a four-main-power-cable configuration.
About this task
The following figure illustrates the main-power-cable connections for a XIV system
that is set up in a four-main-power-cable configuration. In this configuration, the
power cable for uninterruptible power-supply 2 connects to the ATS. The power
cables for uninterruptible power-supply 1 and 3 connect to main-power cables.
This procedure unplugs the power cable from the ATS or a main-power cable. The
uninterruptible power-supply power cable is hard wired into the back of the
uninterruptible power supply and is removed along with the uninterruptible
power supply.
Uninterruptible
power supply 3
J1 P3
Uninterruptible
J2 P1
Uninterruptible
xiv10399
power supply 1
Figure 184. ATS-to-uninterruptible power-supply connections in a four-main-power-cable

configuration
Procedure
Complete the following steps to connect the power cables:

1. Uncoil the uninterruptible power-supply power cable. Ensure that the power
cable does not get snagged on an internal object.
2. If you replaced uninterruptible power-supply 2, complete the following steps:
a. Connect the uninterruptible power-supply power cable to the appropriate
ATS power socket, and slightly twist the plug in a clockwise direction.
Maintenance module
power cord
Maintenance module
circuit breaker
P3 F3
Uninterruptible
F1
P1
xiv10149
b. Clip the power-cable retainer over the power-cable pigtail to secure the
power cable to the ATS.
Power-cord
retaining bracket
xiv10151
3. If you replaced uninterruptible power-supply 1 or 3, complete the following

steps:
a. Connect the uninterruptible power-supply power cable directly to the
main-power cable from which the defective uninterruptible power supply
was disconnected.
b. Place the power-cable retainer on the connected pigtails.
c. Secure the retainer to the main-power cable and power cable by using the
cable ties, as shown in Figure 187.
Figure 187. Main-power cable pigtail retention bracket
Powering on the uninterruptible power supply

Use this procedure to power on the uninterruptible power supply.
Procedure
Complete the following steps to power on the uninterruptible power supply:

1. From the rear of the rack, verify that all circuit breakers (F1, F2, or F3) are in
the on (up) position.

Maintenance module
power cord
Maintenance module
circuit breaker
P3 F3
Uninterruptible
F1
P1
xiv10149
2. Ensure that the three output circuit breakers on all three uninterruptible power
supplies are set to the on (up) position.
Circuit breakers
and guard
xiv10152
Online/bypass
switch
3. Verify that the online/bypass switch on each uninterruptible power supply is

set to the online (left) position.
If the switch is not set to the online (left) position, move the switch to the
online position.
pressing and holding the Test button on the front of the uninterruptible power
supply for approximately 10 seconds until the Online LED flashes green.
The battery LED briefly turns amber as the XIV system powers on, and then
turns green when power stabilizes.
Plastic cover
Data may
be lost
if button
is pushed
xiv10143
5. Ensure that the Online LED ( ) on all three uninterruptible power

supplies are lit.
If one or more online LEDs are not lit, contact your next level of support.

Procedure


Procedure
correctly:
Redundancy.
status pod again.
GUI:

Full Redundancy.
and click Test.

Procedure
component.
Replacing uninterruptible power-supply batteries

Use this procedure to replace the uninterruptible power-supply batteries.
Before you begin
Verify that all module power-supply units (PSUs) are connected and providing
power. Ensure that the LEDs on each PSU are solid green, indicating that the PSU
is supplying power to the module.
Have a table or other surface close by on which to place the uninterruptible

power-supply batteries.
About this task
Important: Each uninterruptible power-supply battery field-replaceable unit (FRU)

contains two matching batteries. You must replace both batteries at the same time
to preserve the manufacturing-date and charge-date consistency between the
battery pairs.
Each uninterruptible power supply is fitted two APC 911-0030A batteries.
Complete the following procedures to replace the uninterruptible power-supply

batteries:
1. “Check the uninterruptible power-supply battery-born date”
2. “Removing the uninterruptible power-supply batteries” on page 208
3. “Inserting the uninterruptible power-supply batteries” on page 210
Check the uninterruptible power-supply battery-born date

Use this procedure to determine the manufactured (born) date of the new
uninterruptible power-supply batteries.
Procedure
1. Check the battery-born date. If any of the replacement batteries are older than
nine months from the current date, report the battery as defective, and order a
new battery pair.
The battery-born date is on a label on the upper-right corner of each
uninterruptible power-supply battery. This label contains an APC serial number
that includes the date of manufacture. The battery-born date is encoded in
characters 3-6 of the serial number (see the following figure). These characters
indicate the year and the week within the year on which the battery was
manufactured. For example, serial number NS0929011956 indicates that the
battery was manufactured in the year 09 (2009) and week 29.
xiv10292
Born year Week within year
Figure 191. Uninterruptible power-supply serial number
2. Record both battery serial numbers on a piece of paper for later use in setting
the uninterruptible power-supply battery replacement date.

Use this procedure to start the guided repair for a failed uninterruptible
power-supply batteries using the Technician Assistant tool.

Procedure
Complete the following steps to start the guided repair for an uninterruptible
power supply:
replace for Batteries. The Guided replace for Batteries window is displayed.
3. When the guided-repair utility instructs you to replace the uninterruptible
power-supply batteries, continue with the next procedures to remove the failed
batteries and install the battery FRUs.
Removing the uninterruptible power-supply batteries

Use this procedure to remove both uninterruptible power-supply batteries.
Before you begin
Have the replacement batteries close by on which to place the batteries.
About this task
Leave the uninterruptible power supply and connected equipment operating while
removing the batteries. The batteries can be replaced into either battery bay.
CAUTION:
When replacing batteries, there is a certain energy risk hazard. Remove all
jewelry (such as watches, bracelets, and rings) before replacing the batteries.
CAUTION:
Procedure
Complete the following steps to remove the uninterruptible power-supply

batteries:
1. From the front of the rack, remove the two screws from the power-off cover on
the uninterruptible power supply, and then remove the power-off cover. Store
the screws in a safe place.
Plastic cover
Data may
be lost
if button
is pushed
xiv10143
2. Remove the plastic cover from the front of the uninterruptible power supply.
The cover snaps off.
3. Remove the two screws from the battery cover by using a Phillips screwdriver.
Store the screws in a safe place.
Screws Hand grip Battery cover
Data may
be lost Test
if button
is pushed
xiv10212
Figure 193. Uninterruptible power-supply battery cover
4. Pull the battery cover to the left by using the hand grip to release the latch, and
swing the battery cover out towards the left to expose both batteries.
5. Unplug both battery connectors.
Battery connectors
xiv10211
Battery hand grips
6. Use the battery hand grip to extract each battery from the battery bay.

Remove the battery slowly as the battery is heavy, at 18 kg (40 lbs) or less.
Ensure that a cart, table, or mobile lift is located nearby on which to place the
batteries.
7. Place the batteries in a safe location.
8. Return the battery cover to the closed position to prevent the plate from
swinging freely.
Inserting the uninterruptible power-supply batteries

Use this procedure to install the uninterruptible power-supply batteries
About this task
CAUTION:
Procedure
Complete the following steps to install the uninterruptible power-supply batteries:

1. From the front of the rack, use the battery hand grip to insert a battery in the
battery bay, and slide the battery in as far as possible.
Ensure that the battery connector is secured between the two guide rails. Do
not yet connect the front battery connector.
2. Slide the second battery into the available battery bay.
3. Firmly push the two battery connectors into place. A slight click is heard.
4. Swing the battery cover flush against the uninterruptible power supply, and
then push the battery cover to the right by using the hand grip to secure the
latch.
5. Secure the battery retaining plate in place with two screws by using a Phillips
screwdriver. Tighten until snug.
6. Replace the plastic cover over the uninterruptible power supply. The cover
snaps in place.
7. Replace the uninterruptible power supply power-off cover, and fasten the two
retaining screws by using a Phillips screwdriver.

Procedure


Procedure
correctly:
Redundancy.
status pod again.
GUI:
Full Redundancy.
and click Test.

Procedure
component.

Replacing uninterruptible power-supply network-management cards

This information describes how to replace an uninterruptible power-supply
network-management card.
Before you begin
Verify that all module power-supply units (PSUs) are connected and providing
power. Ensure that the LEDs on each PSU are solid green, indicating that the PSU
is supplying power to the module.
Attention:
About this task
Complete the following procedures to replace an uninterruptible power-supply

network-management card:
1. “Powering off the uninterruptible power supply”
2. “Removing the uninterruptible power-supply network-management card” on
page 213
3. “Installing the uninterruptible power-supply network-management card” on
page 214
4. “Powering on the uninterruptible power supply” on page 214
Powering off the uninterruptible power supply

Use this procedure to power off the uninterruptible power supply.
About this task
CAUTION:
On the automatic transfer switch (ATS), turn off the circuit breaker for the
uninterruptible power supply being removed to ensure that exposed electrical
sockets are not receiving current.
Procedure
Complete the following steps to power off the uninterruptible power supply:
1. From the rear of the rack, turn the three circuit breakers on the uninterruptible
power supply to the off (down) position.
Circuit breakers
and guard
xiv10152
Online/bypass
switch
2. On the automatic transfer switch (ATS), turn the appropriate circuit breaker for
the uninterruptible power supply being removed to the off (down) position.
Maintenance module
power cord
Maintenance module
circuit breaker
P3 F3
Uninterruptible
F1
P1
xiv10149
Removing the uninterruptible power-supply

network-management card
Use this procedure to remove the network-management card from a

Procedure
Complete the following steps to remove the network-management card:

1. Remove the uninterruptible power supply (see “Removing the uninterruptible
power supply” on page 189).
2. Remove the two screws from the network-management card (see Figure 197) by
using a Phillips screwdriver, and then remove the network-management card
from the card slot.
Store the small screws so that you can use them when replacing the
network-management card.

ATS ac-sensor port

and guard (N1)
xiv10144
(S1)
Installing the uninterruptible power-supply

Use this procedure to install the network-management card in a uninterruptible
power supply.
Procedure
Complete the following steps to install a network-management card:

1. Inspect the network-management card for defects or damage.
2. Insert the replacement network-management card into the empty card slot in
the uninterruptible power supply.
3. Replace the two retaining screws, securing to only a snug fit.
4. Replace the uninterruptible power supply. (see “Installing the uninterruptible
power supply” on page 197).
Powering on the uninterruptible power supply

Use this procedure to power on the uninterruptible power supply.
Procedure
Complete the following steps to power on the uninterruptible power supply:

1. Verify that the batteries are firmly in place and connected.
2. Power on the uninterruptible power supply by pressing and holding the Test
button on the front of the uninterruptible power supply for approximately 10
seconds until the Online LED flashes green.
The battery LED briefly goes amber as the XIV system powers on, and then
green when power stabilizes.
Plastic cover
Data may
be lost
if button
is pushed
xiv10143

supplies are lit.
If one or more online LEDs are not lit, contact to your next level of support.
4. From the IBM XIV Storage Management GUI, hover the cursor over replaced
uninterruptible power supply, and verify that Status is OK.

Procedure
correctly:
Redundancy.
status pod again.
GUI:

Full Redundancy.
and click Test.

Procedure
component.
Replacing the automatic transfer switch

Use one of the following procedures to replace the automatic transfer switch (ATS).
The ATS can be replaced while the XIV system is powered on (concurrent) or off
(non-concurrent).
About this task
CAUTION:
Take care when replacing the ATS. Considerable voltage is powering the ATS.
Ensure that all grounding precautions are taken before proceeding with the
replacement procedure.
Note: If the ATS is defective, the entire unit must be packed and sent to the
approved repair facility.
Complete one of the following procedures to replace the ATS:

v “Replacing the automatic transfer switch (non-concurrent)”
v “Replacing the automatic transfer switch (concurrent)” on page 226
Replacing the automatic transfer switch (non-concurrent)

Use this procedure to replace the automatic transfer switch (ATS) while the XIV
system is powered off.
Before you begin
Have a table or other surface close by on which to place the ATS.
About this task

Replacement time: Approximately 4 hours, but might vary depending on the time
that is needed to recharge the uninterruptible power-supply batteries.
If another component in the XIV system requires replacement, replace that

component before you replace the ATS.
CAUTION:
Take care when you replace the ATS. Considerable voltage is powering in and
out of the ATS. Ensure that all grounding precautions are taken before you
proceed to the replacement procedure.
To replace the ATS while the XIV system is powered on, see “Replacing the
automatic transfer switch (concurrent)” on page 226.
Complete the following procedures to replace the ATS non-concurrently:

1. “Powering off the XIV system”
2. “Disconnecting cables from the automatic transfer switch” on page 218
3. “Removing the automatic transfer switch from the rack” on page 220
4. “Installing the automatic transfer switch in the rack” on page 221
5. “Reconnecting cables to the automatic transfer switch” on page 221
6. “Powering on the automatic transfer switch” on page 223
7. “Verifying the automatic transfer switch replacement” on page 224
9. “Updating the PMR” on page 226
Powering off the XIV system

Use this procedure to power off the XIV system.
Procedure
Complete the following steps to power off the XIV system:

1. If the XIV system is powered on, power off XIV system.
a. Verify with the customer that the XIV system is idle and ready to power off.

b. From the IBM XIV Storage Management GUI, click the user ID in the
password.
c. Click the XIV system to be powered off.
d. Click System > System Settings > Shutdown System.
e. Click OK.
2. On the ATS, press the three uninterruptible power supply circuit breakers to
the off (down) position.
Maintenance module
power cord
Maintenance module
circuit breaker
P3 F3
Uninterruptible
F1
P1
xiv10149
3. Press the maintenance module circuit breaker to the off (down) position.
Disconnecting cables from the automatic transfer switch

Use this procedure to disconnect the automatic transfer switch (ATS) from the
main power supply, uninterruptible power supply, maintenance module, and
module 1.
Procedure
Complete the following steps to disconnect cables from the ATS:

1. Disconnect both main-power cables from the top of the ATS (see Figure 200 on
page 219).
J2 line cord
J1 line cord
xiv10209
Power cord
retainer
CAUTION:
Place both J1 and J2 main-power cables in a safe location, as both

main-power cables are receiving power from the external mains power
supply. Handle both main-power cables with caution. Wear shoes that are
approved for working with electrical hazards.
a. Turn the J1 securing ring in a counterclockwise direction, and unplug the J1
main-power cable from the ATS.
b. Turn the J2 securing ring in a counterclockwise direction, and unplug the J2
main-power cable from the ATS.
2. Rotate the three retainers to release the power cables to the side of the ATS (see
Figure 201 on page 220).
3. Disconnect the three uninterruptible power-supply power cables from the ATS
by slightly lifting the plug and twisting the plug in a counterclockwise
direction, and then unplugging the power cable (see Figure 201 on page 220).
If the XIV system has a two-main-power-cable configuration, disconnect all
three uninterruptible power supplies.
If the XIV system has a four-main-power-cable configuration, disconnect only

Maintenance
power cord F4
circuit breaker
F4
Power output
LED
P3 F3
Uninterruptible
F1
P1
xiv10051
4. Disconnect the maintenance-module power cable from power socket P4 on the

ATS.
5. Disconnect the ac-sensor cable that is labeled ATSX801-M1USB1 from port X801
(blue connector) on the ATS.
6. Loosen the two retaining screws by using a small flat screwdriver, and
disconnect the ac-sensor cable that is labeled ATSX807-U3OUTPUT from port
X807 (green connector) on the ATS.
Removing the automatic transfer switch from the rack

Use this procedure to detach the automatic transfer switch (ATS) from the rack.
Procedure
Complete the following steps to detach the ATS:

1. Remove the bolt that connects the ATS grounding wire to the rack by using an
8-mm socket wrench.
Store the bolt in a secure place. It is reused when installing the replacement
ATS.
Note: Do not remove the grounding wire from the ATS. The yellow-and-green
grounding wire comes already attached to the ATS by using a lock washer, disk
with grounding wires, flat washer, and screw.
2. Remove the retaining screw that secures the ATS to the support bracket at the
upper left side by using a Phillips screwdriver.
Store the screw in a secure place. It is reused when installing the replacement
ATS.
3. Lift the ATS, and then slide the ATS out of the rack.
The ATS is secured to the rack by several downward facing flanges that fit into
upward facing flanges in the bracket located behind the ATS.
Installing the automatic transfer switch in the rack

Use this procedure to install the automatic transfer switch (ATS) in the rack.
Procedure
Complete the following steps to attach the ATS:

1. Inset the bolt in the ATS grounding wire and fasten the screw to the rack by
using an 8-mm socket wrench. Use the same hole that was used to secure the
grounding wire for the defective ATS.
2. Carefully lower the ATS onto the retaining flanges.
The ATS is secured to the rack by several downward facing flanges that fit into
upward facing flanges in the bracket located behind the ATS. The ATS is not
heavy and does not require any special equipment to install the FRU.
3. Fasten the retaining screw to the support bracket at the upper left side by using
a Phillips screwdriver.
Reconnecting cables to the automatic transfer switch

Use this procedure to connect the automatic transfer switch (ATS) to the
uninterruptible power supply, maintenance module, module 1, and main power
supply.
About this task
Important: The ATS-to-uninterruptible power supply and maintenance module

power cables are labeled according to the component to which they are attached. It
is important to attach the correct cable to the correct component. Visually inspect
the power cables for any damage, corrosion, or signs of burning.
Procedure
Complete the following steps to connect the ATS to other components:

1. Firmly push the three ATS-to-uninterruptible power supply power-cable plugs
into the ATS, and slightly twist the plug in a clockwise direction. One of the
prongs has a safety tang to prevent unintentional removal.
If the XIV system has a two-main-power-cable configuration, connect all three
uninterruptible power supplies.
If the XIV system has a four-main-power-cable configuration, connect

Maintenance
power cord F4
circuit breaker
F4
Power output
LED
P3 F3
Uninterruptible
F1
P1
xiv10051
2. Rotate the power-cable retainer to secure the power-cable plug to the ATS.
3. Connect the maintenance module cable to the power socket P4 on the ATS.
4. Connect the ac-sensor cable that is labeled ATSX801-M1USB1 to port X801 (blue
connector) on the ATS.
5. Connect the ac-sensor cable that is labeled ATSX807-U3OUTPUT to port X807
(green connector) on the ATS, and tighten the two retaining screws by using a
small flat screwdriver.
6. Connect both main-power cables to the top of the ATS, adjusting the plug to
match the pin arrangement on the ATS input sockets.
J2 line cord
J1 line cord
xiv10209
Power cord
retainer
a. Plug the J1 main-power cable into the ATS J1 receptacle, and lock by
turning the securing ring in a clockwise direction.
b. Plug the J2 main-power cable into the ATS J2 receptacle, and lock by
turning the securing ring in a clockwise direction.
Powering on the automatic transfer switch

Use this procedure to power on the automatic transfer switch (ATS).
Procedure
Complete the following steps to power on the ATS:

1. Lift the three uninterruptible power-supply circuit breakers to the on (up)
position.
Maintenance
power cord F4
circuit breaker
F4
Power output
LED
P3 F3
Uninterruptible
F1
P1
xiv10051

2. Lift the maintenance module circuit breaker to the on (up) position.

3. From the front of the rack, press the Test button once on each uninterruptible
power supply.
Important: All three buttons must be pressed within 10 seconds of each other.

Data may
be lost Test
if button
is pushed
xiv10142
Power-off button
Power-on (Test) button
Figure 205. Front view of the uninterruptible power supply with the power-off cover removed
Pressing the Test buttons powers on all components that are connected to each
Verifying the automatic transfer switch replacement

Use this procedure to verify the ATS replacement.
Procedure
Complete these steps to verify the ATS replacement:

1. From the rear of the rack, check all power connections to the ATS, maintenance
module, and uninterruptible power supplies.
a. On the ATS, verify that each uninterruptible power-supply power
connection to the ATS is firmly secured in place. Twist the connectors P3,
P2, and P1 clockwise to verify that they are firmly seated.
b. On the maintenance module, verify that the power cable is firmly seated.
Firmly press each plug into its socket.
c. On the uninterruptible power supplies, verify that all power connections to
the modules are firmly seated in their sockets. Firmly press each plug into
its socket.
2. From the front of the rack, verify that the LEDs on each module power-supply
unit (PSU) are solid green, indicating that the module PSU is supplying power
to the module.
3. From the IBM XIV Storage Management GUI, verify that the pod at the
lower-right corner of the window says Full Redundancy.
4. Optional: Test power switching between the J1 and J2 main-power cables on
the new ATS.
a. From the rear of the rack, verify that the J1 LINE 1 and J2 LINE 2 LEDs are
lit to ensure that both main-power cables are supplying input power.
b. From the IBM XIV Storage Management GUI, hover the cursor over each
uninterruptible power supply, and verify that Charge Level is 100%, Input
Power is yes, and Status is OK.
c. Turn off the customer circuit breaker for main-power cable J1.
d. Verify that the J2 LINE 2 LED is lit on the ATS to ensure that power is
supplied by main-power cable J2.
e. From the IBM XIV Storage Management GUI, hover the cursor over each
f. Turn on the customer circuit breaker for main-power cable J1.
g. Verify that the J1 LINE 1 LED is lit on the ATS to ensure that power is
h. Turn off the customer circuit breaker for main-power cable J2.
i. Verify that the J1 LINE 1 LED on the ATS is lit to ensure that power is
j. From the IBM XIV Storage Management GUI, hover the cursor over each
k. Turn on the customer circuit breaker for main-power cable J2.
l. Verify that the J2 LINE 2 LED on the ATS is lit to ensure that power is
supplied by J2.

operating correctly before you complete the service call.
Procedure
correctly:
Redundancy.
status pod again.
GUI:
Full Redundancy.

and click Test.
Updating the PMR

Use this information to update a corresponding problem management record
(PMR) with the 11S numbers for the failed and installed ATSs.
Procedure
Complete the following steps to update the PMR:

1. Record the "11S" number from the barcode label of the failed ATS (ATS-OLD).
2. Record the "11S" number from the barcode label of the installed ATS
(ATS-NEW)
3. Enter both numbers in the corresponding PMR that was generated by the XIV
system during the replacement.
The following sample shows a PMR that is generated during the ATS
replacement:
ATS_LINE_INPUT_IS_OFF ATS 1:ATS:1 input line J1 turned off.
EMERGENCY_SHUTDOWN_NOW System is shutting down in emergency shutdown
mode due to: No External Power.

Procedure
component.
Replacing the automatic transfer switch (concurrent)

Use this procedure to replace the automatic transfer switch (ATS) while the XIV
system is powered on.
Before you begin
Important: Read and understand this procedure before you start the replacement.
A mistake in this procedure might result in data loss.
Read and understand the safety instructions, especially those dealing with danger
notices (see “Safety and environmental notices” on page xiii).
Ensure that you have the ATS concurrent cabling kit (part number 45W5009) and
grounding fastener hardware kit (part number 98Y1926). ATS concurrent cabling
kit provides temporary extension power cords to externally connect the new ATS
to the XIV system. The grounding fastener hardware kit includes screws and
external tooth washers for attaching the grounding cable from the ATS to the XIV
system rack.
About this task
that is needed to recharge the uninterruptible power supply batteries.
Important: For XIV system code V11.1.0 and later, each uninterruptible power
supply is calibrated after the component test is completed. This calibration might
significantly increase the time of the replacement procedure.
To replace the ATS while the XIV system is powered off, see “Replacing the
automatic transfer switch (non-concurrent)” on page 217.
During concurrent ATS replacement, the new ATS is initially connected external to
the XIV system rack. After the new ATS is fully operational, the old ATS is
removed from the rack, and the new ATS is moved into the XIV system rack.
The XIV system supports two power configurations: a two-main-power-cable

configuration and a four-main-power-cable configuration. If the XIV system uses a
two-main-power-cable configuration, complete steps in “Installing the automatic
transfer switch for a two-main-power-cable configuration” on page 230. If the XIV
system uses a four-main-power-cable configuration, complete steps in “Installing
the automatic transfer switch for a four-main-power-cable configuration” on page
247.
If another component in the XIV system requires replacement, replace that

component before you replace the ATS.
Replace the ATS concurrently only with consultation of your next level of support.
CAUTION:
Take care when you replace the ATS. Considerable voltage is powering in and
out of the ATS. Ensure that all grounding precautions are taken before you
proceed with the replacement procedure.
Complete the following procedures to replace the ATS concurrently:

1. “Preparing to replace the automatic transfer switch”
2. “Installing the automatic transfer switch for a two-main-power-cable
configuration” on page 230
3. “Installing the automatic transfer switch for a four-main-power-cable
configuration” on page 247
4. “Verifying the automatic transfer switch replacement” on page 257
6. “Updating the PMR” on page 259
Preparing to replace the automatic transfer switch

Use this procedure to inspect and prepare the XIV system before you replace the
automatic transfer switch (ATS).

Procedure
Complete the following steps to prepare for an ATS replacement:

1. Inspect the site to verify the following conditions:
v The XIV system rack and ATS are grounded correctly by using the
grounding screw that is connected to the rack just below the ATS.
v The uninterruptible power supplies are installed and operating correctly.
From the IBM XIV Storage Management GUI, hover the cursor over each
v All modules and InfiniBand switches are operating correctly. From the IBM
XIV Storage Management GUI, hover the cursor over each module and
InfiniBand switch, and verify that Status is OK.
2. Inspect the status of the J1 Line 1 and J2 Line 2 power LEDs on the ATS (see
Figure 206 and Figure 207).
SELECTED Input
SOURCE OK
J2 LINE 2
FAULT
J1 LINE 1
v If both LEDs are lit green, power is present at both inputs to the ATS.
v If only one LED is lit green, verify that power is coming from the customer
building distribution panel. If building power is present, the power input
path to the ATS that is associated with the unlit LED is defective. When you
transfer the inactive power cable to the new ATS in Stage C of this
replacement procedure, ensure that you transfer the defective, inactive
power cable that is associated with the unlit LED the first.
3. Connect the technician notebook computer to the technician port in the patch
panel.
password.
5. Ensure that the pod on the lower right says Full Redundancy.
6. Hover the cursor over each uninterruptible power supply, and verify that
Charge Level is 100%, Input Power is yes, and Status is OK.
7. From the rear of the rack, verify that all circuit breakers on each
uninterruptible power supply are in the on (up) position.
8. Verify that all module power supply units (PSUs) are connected and
providing power. Ensure that the LEDs on each PSU are solid green,
indicating that the PSU is supplying power to the module.
9. From the front of the rack, verify that the online LED ( ) on each
uninterruptible power supply is green. A green LED indicate that the
uninterruptible power supply is operating on ac power.
Load Battery charge

85% 96%
68% 72%
51% 48%
34% 24%
17% 0%
xiv10043
Figure 208. Front panel of the uninterruptible power supply
10. From the rear of the rack, check the power connections to the ATS,
maintenance module, and uninterruptible power supplies.
a. On the ATS, verify that each uninterruptible power-supply connection to
the ATS is firmly secured in place. Twist the connectors P3, P2, and P1
clockwise to verify that they are firmly seated.
b. On the maintenance module, verify that the maintenance-module power
cable is firmly seated. Firmly press each plug into its socket.
c. On the uninterruptible power supplies, verify that all power output
connections to the modules are firmly seated in their sockets. Firmly press
each plug into its socket.
d. On the uninterruptible power supplies, verify that all power input
connections are firmly seated. Twist the connectors clockwise to verify that
they are firmly seated.
11. Disable the automatic Uninterruptible power supply calibration. To complete
this task, XIV development user credentials are required.
To run this command, log in to the XCLI, using the xiv_development user ID
and password. If you do not know the password, contact your next level of
support.
conf_set path=cluster_hw_config.ups_automatic_calibration_disable value=yes
Note: Calibration is re-enabled when “Completing the service call” on page

258.
What to do next
If the XIV system has two main-power cables, continue with “Installing the
automatic transfer switch for a two-main-power-cable configuration” on page 230.
If the XIV system has four main-power cables, continue with “Installing the
automatic transfer switch for a four-main-power-cable configuration” on page 247.

Installing the automatic transfer switch for a two-main-power-
cable configuration
Use this procedure to replace the automatic transfer switch (ATS) in an XIV system
with two main-power cables while the XIV system is powered on.
Before you begin
To replace the ATS in an XIV system with four main-power cables, see “Installing
247.
Important: This procedure is broken down into a number of logical stages. Follow
the procedure exactly as presented, stage by stage. Failure to do so might lead to
injury, loss of access, or loss of data.
Attention: Be prepared to manually shut down the XIV system if a problem is

encountered during the replacement procedure to prevent the loss of data that is
caused by loss of uninterruptible power supply ac or battery power. To manually
shut down the XIV system using the IBM XIV Storage Management GUI, click
System > System Settings > Shutdown System. Access is lost when the XIV
system is shut down.
To shut down the XIV system, you must be logged in to the IBM XIV Storage
Management GUI as user ID xiv_maintenance. To change the user ID, click the
user ID in the upper-right corner. If you do not know the password, contact your
About this task
Note: In this procedure, ATS-OLD refers to the ATS that is being replaced, and
ATS-NEW refers to the replacement ATS that is being installed.
CAUTION:
Procedure
Complete the following steps to replace the ATS:

v Stage A. Attach the ATS-NEW grounding cable to the rack.
This following figure shows the initial power configuration before the
replacement of the ATS starts.
Stage A
Maint. mod
Uninterruptible
power supply 3
J1
ATS Uninterruptible ATS
new power supply 2 old
J2
inactive
Uninterruptible
xiv10344
power supply 1
Figure 209. ATS installation stage A
In this stage, ATS-NEW is placed near the rear of the rack, and the ground wire
is connected to the rack frame.
1. Place the ATS-NEW near the rear of the XIV system.
2. Switch off circuit breakers F1, F2, F3, and F4 on ATS-NEW.
3. Insert the bolt in the ATS-NEW grounding wire, and fasten the bolt to the
rack by using an 8-mm socket wrench. Use the hole that is next to the
grounding-wire attachment point for ATS-OLD.
Important: Do not detach or remove the grounding wire for ATS-OLD.

v Stage B. Transfer the inactive main-power cable to ATS-NEW.
In this stage, the inactive input line is transferred from ATS-OLD to ATS-NEW
(see the following figure). The active input line is transferred in a later stage.
Stage B
Maint. mod
Uninterruptible
power supply 3
J1
J2
Uninterruptible
xiv10345
power supply 1
Figure 210. ATS installation stage B
Attention: After you turn off the customer circuit breaker, you must be able to
quickly verify that the XIV system is not running on battery power. If the XIV
system is running on battery, you must be able to turn the customer circuit
breaker back on within 30 seconds.
Complete the following steps to transfer the inactive main-power cable to
ATS-NEW:
1. Determine which input line (J1 or J2) is active from the IBM XIV Storage
Management GUI by hovering the cursor over uninterruptible power-supply
3. The ATS parameter identifies the active input line as either J1 or J2.

2. If input line 2 (J2) is active, and input line 1 (J1) is inactive, complete the
following steps; otherwise, go to step 3.
a. Turn off the customer circuit breaker to the J1 main-power cable.
b. Verify that power to the J1 main-power cable is off by checking that the
J1 LED on ATS-OLD is not lit.
c. From the front of the rack, verify that all uninterruptible power supplies
are operating on ac power by checking that the online LED ( ) is
green and that the on-battery LED ( ) is not lit.

Attention: If the XIV system is running on battery power, immediately
turn on the customer circuit breaker to the J1 main-power cable within 30
seconds. Confirm that the XIV system resumed normal operation and that
the uninterruptible power supplies are receiving primary power and not
battery power.
– If the XIV system is still running on battery power:
1) Immediately run the shutdown command, from the GUI or XCLI,
to power off the XIV system.
2) Stop all operations.
3) Consult your next level of support.
– If the XIV system is now running on ac power, determine why the J2
main-power cable was not supplying ac power to the XIV system.
Before you continue, correct the condition.
d. If the XIV system is running on ac power from the J2 main-power cable,
unplug the J1 main-power cable from ATS-OLD.
e. Plug the J1 main-power cable in to ATS-NEW, and turn the locking ring
clockwise to secure the connector.
f. Turn on the customer circuit breaker for the J1 main-power cable.
g. Confirm that power is provided to ATS-NEW by verifying that the J1
LED on ATS-NEW is lit.
h. Continue with stage C.
following steps:
J2 Line 2 LED on ATS-OLD is not lit.
battery power.
v Stage C. Connect uninterruptible power supply 3 to ATS-NEW.
In this stage, uninterruptible power supply 3 power cable is disconnected from
ATS-OLD and connected to ATS-NEW by using an extension cord. Then,
uninterruptible power supply 3 receives input power from ATS-NEW.
Stage C
Maint. mod
Uninterruptible
power supply 3
J1
J2
Uninterruptible
power supply 1
xiv10346
ATS extension cord 3
Figure 211. ATS installation stage C
1. Verify that all uninterruptible power supplies are connected to ac power.

2. Right-click uninterruptible power supply 3, and click Phase out > Failed.
Note: The power might fail for some module power supply units (PSUs) or
switches when the uninterruptible power supply is phased out.

3. Wait until uninterruptible power supply 3 changes to the Failed state. From
the IBM XIV Storage Management GUI, verify that uninterruptible power
supply 3 turns orange and then turns red a few minutes later. Hover the
cursor over uninterruptible power supply 3, and verify that Status is Failed.
The uninterruptible power supply powers off as a result of the phase-out
process.
Attention: To avoid an emergency shutdown of the XIV system, you must
wait for uninterruptible power supply 3 to complete the phase-out process
before proceeding.
Attention: If the phase-out process fails:
– Hover the cursor over the remaining uninterruptible power supplies, and
verify that Charge Level is 100%. If the charge level is not 100%, wait a
few minutes and attempt to phase out the uninterruptible power supply
again.
– If any modules have PSUs in the Failed state (that are red in the IBM
XIV Storage Management GUI), click the module to show the expanded
view, right-click the failed PSU, and click Test. When all module PSUs
are corrected, attempt to phase out the uninterruptible power supply
again.
4. Turn off the circuit breaker F3 (for uninterruptible power supply 3) on
ATS-OLD.
5. Unclip the power-cable retainer, and unplug uninterruptible power supply 3
power cable from ATS-OLD
Power-cord
retaining bracket
xiv10150
6. Plug the uninterruptible power supply 3 power cable in to one of the ATS
extension cords that are supplied with the ATS concurrent replacement kit,
and turn the connector clockwise to secure.
This cord is called ATS extension cord 3. Ensure that the uninterruptible
power supply power cable is firmly connected.
Note: As a safeguard, secure the two mating connectors with a piece of

adhesive tape.
7. Plug the ATS extension cord 3 in to the ATS-NEW connector P3, and turn
the connector clockwise to secure it in place.
8. Clip the power-cable retainer over the ATS extension cord to prevent the
cord from becoming disconnected.
Note: As an extra safeguard, secure the extension cord to the ATS by using
adhesive tape.
Power-cord
retaining bracket
xiv10151
9. On ATS-NEW, turn on circuit breaker F3 (for uninterruptible power supply

3).
10. From the IBM XIV Storage Management GUI, right-click uninterruptible
power supply 3, and click Test.
11. Wait until uninterruptible power supply 3 changes to the OK state and the
batteries become fully charged.
12. Verify uninterruptible power supply 3 turns yellow and then turns black a
few minutes later. Hover the cursor over uninterruptible power supply 3,
and verify Charge Level is 100%, Input Power is yes, and Status is OK.
13. Verify that all module power supply units (PSUs) are functioning correctly.
From the IBM XIV Storage Management GUI, verify that the modules are
black and do not have an error icon.
If any modules have PSUs that are in the Failed state (that are red in the
IBM XIV Storage Management GUI), click the module to show the
expanded view, right-click the failed PSU, and click Test.
v Stage D. Connect uninterruptible power supply 2 to ATS-NEW.
Stage D
Maint. mod
Uninterruptible
power supply 3
J1
J2
Uninterruptible
power supply 1
xiv10347
Figure 214. ATS installation stage D

The uninterruptible power supply might power off as a result of the
phase-out process.
before proceeding.
again.
– If any modules have PSUs that are in the Failed state (that are red in the
expanded view, right-click the failed PSU, and click Test. When all
module PSUs are corrected, attempt to phase out the uninterruptible
power supply again.
ATS-OLD.

adhesive tape.
adhesive tape.
2).
12. From the IBM XIV Storage Management GUI, verify uninterruptible power
supply 2 turns yellow and then turns black a few minutes later. Hover the
cursor over uninterruptible power supply 2, and verify Charge Level is
100%, Input Power is yes, and Status is OK.
13. Verify that all module PSUs are functioning correctly. From the IBM XIV
Storage Management GUI, verify that the modules are black and do not
have an error icon.
v Stage E. Connect uninterruptible power supply 1 to ATS-NEW.
Stage E
Maint. mod
Uninterruptible
power supply 3
J1
J2
Uninterruptible
power supply 1
xiv10348
Figure 215. ATS installation stage E

phase-out process.
before proceeding.

again.
XIV Storage Management GUI), click the module to show the expanded
view, right-click the failed PSU, and click Test. When all module PSUs
are corrected, attempt to phase out the uninterruptible power supply
again.
ATS-OLD.
from ATS-OLD.

adhesive tape.
adhesive tape.
1).
have an error icon.
If any modules have PSUs in the Failed state (that are red in the IBM XIV
Storage Management GUI), click the module to show the expanded view,
right-click the failed PSU, and click Test.
v Stage F. Transfer the remaining main-power cable to ATS-NEW.
In this stage, the remaining main-power cable is transferred to ATS-NEW.
Stage F
Maint. mod
Uninterruptible
power supply 3
J1
J2
Uninterruptible
power supply 1
xiv10349
Figure 216. ATS installation stage F
1. Turn off the customer circuit breaker to the remaining main-power cable (J1
or J2) connected to ATS-OLD.
2. Verify that power to ATS-OLD is off by verifying that the J1 and J2 LEDs on
ATS-OLD are not lit.
SELECTED Input
SOURCE OK
J2 LINE 2
FAULT
J1 LINE 1
3. Unplug the remaining main-power cable from ATS-OLD.

4. Plug the remaining main-power cable in to the corresponding connector (J1
or J2) on ATS-NEW, and turn the locking ring clockwise to secure the
connector.
5. Turn on the customer circuit breaker for the remaining main-power cable.
6. Verify that power is provided to ATS-NEW by verifying that the J1 and J2
LEDs on ATS-NEW are lit.
v Stage G. Disconnect remaining cables.
In this stage, the remaining cables, including the maintenance module power,
serial-to-USB cable, and ac-sensor cable, are disconnected from ATS-OLD.

Stage G
Maint. mod
Uninterruptible
power supply 3
J1
J2
Uninterruptible
power supply 1
xiv10350
Figure 219. ATS installation stage G
1. Disconnect the maintenance-module power cable from plug P4 on ATS-OLD.

2. Disconnect the ac-sensor cable that is labeled ATSX801-M1USB1 from port
X801 (blue connector) on the ATS.
3. Loosen the retaining screws by using a small flat screwdriver. Then,
disconnect the ac-sensor cable that is labeled ATSX807-U3OUTPUT from port
X807 (green connector) on the ATS.
Maintenance
power cord F4
circuit breaker
F4
Power output
LED
P3 F3
Uninterruptible
F1
P1
xiv10051

v Stage H. Remove ATS-OLD from the rack.
In this stage, ATS-OLD is removed from the rack.
Stage H
Maint. mod
Uninterruptible
power supply 3
J1
ATS Uninterruptible
new power supply 2
J2
Uninterruptible
xiv10351
power supply 1
Figure 221. ATS installation stage H
1. Remove the bolt that connects the ATS-OLD grounding wire to the rack by
using an 8-mm socket wrench.
Note: Do not remove the grounding wire from the ATS-OLD. The
yellow-and-green grounding wire comes already attached to the ATS-NEW
by using a lock washer, disk with grounding wires, flat washer, and screw.
2. Remove the retaining screw that secures the ATS to the support bracket at
the upper left side by using a Phillips screwdriver.
3. Lift the ATS-OLD, and then move it out of the rack.
The ATS is secured to the rack by several downward facing flanges that fit
into upward facing flanges in the bracket that is located behind the ATS.
v Stage I. Install ATS-NEW in the rack.
In this stage, ATS-NEW is placed in the rack.
Stage I
Maint. mod
Uninterruptible
power supply 3
J1
ATS Uninterruptible
new power supply 2
J2
Uninterruptible
xiv10352
power supply 1
Figure 222. ATS installation stage I
1. Place ATS-NEW into the rack by lowering it on the retaining brackets.
Important: Take care when you move ATS-NEW so that the power cables
between each of the three uninterruptible power supplies and ATS-NEW are
not disconnected. As a safeguard, ensure that the connectors are secured with
a piece of adhesive tape before you move the ATS.

2. Position ATS-NEW to the rightmost side of the rack so the screw hole in the
support bracket aligns with the hole on the upper left side of the ATS.
3. Fasten the retaining screw to the support bracket at the upper left side by
using a Phillips screwdriver.
v Stage J. Remove temporary extension cords to the uninterruptible power
supplies.
In this stage, the extension cords are removed in a specific sequence, starting
with uninterruptible power supply 3. The sequence must be strictly followed.
Stage J
Maint. mod
Uninterruptible
power supply 3
J1
ATS Uninterruptible
new power supply 2
J2
Uninterruptible
xiv10353
power supply 1
Figure 223. ATS installation stage J
1. Remove the temporary extension cord to uninterruptible power supply 3.

a. Verify that all uninterruptible power supplies are connected to ac power.
uninterruptible power supply, and verify that Charge Level is 100%,
Input Power is yes, and Status is OK.
b. Right-click uninterruptible power supply 3, and click Phase out > Failed.
Note: The power might fail for some module power supply units (PSUs)
or switches when the uninterruptible power supply is phased out.
c. Wait until uninterruptible power supply 3 changes to the Failed state.
From the IBM XIV Storage Management GUI, verify that uninterruptible
power supply 3 turns orange and then turns red a few minutes later.
Hover the cursor over uninterruptible power supply 3, and verify that
Status is Failed.
phase-out process.
Attention: To avoid an emergency shutdown of the XIV system, you
must wait for uninterruptible power supply 3 to complete the phase-out
process before proceeding.
– Hover the cursor over the remaining uninterruptible power supplies,
and verify that Charge Level is 100%. If the charge level is not 100%,
wait a few minutes and attempt to phase out the uninterruptible
power supply again.
XIV Storage Management GUI), click the module to show the
power supply again.
d. Turn off circuit breaker F3 (for uninterruptible power supply 3) on
ATS-NEW.
e. Unplug the uninterruptible power supply 3 power cables from extension
cord 3, and unplug ATS extension cord 3 from ATS-NEW connector P3.
f. Plug the uninterruptible power supply 3 power cables into ATS-NEW
connector P3, and turn the locking ring clockwise to secure the connector.
g. Clip the power-cable retainer over the uninterruptible power-supply
pigtail to secure the power cable to the ATS.
h. Turn on the circuit breaker F3 (for uninterruptible power supply 3) on
ATS-NEW.
i. From the IBM XIV Storage Management GUI, right-click uninterruptible
j. Wait until uninterruptible power supply 3 changes to the OK state and the
batteries become fully charged. From the IBM XIV Storage Management
GUI, verify uninterruptible power supply 3 turns yellow and then turns
black a few minutes later. Hover the cursor over uninterruptible power
supply 3, and verify Charge Level is 100%, Input Power is yes, and
Status is OK
k. Verify that all module power supply units (PSUs) are functioning
correctly. From the IBM XIV Storage Management GUI, verify that the
modules are black and do not have an error icon.
If any modules have PSUs in the Failed state, click the module to display
the expanded view, right-click the failed PSU, and click Test.
Status is Failed.
phase-out process.

power supply again.
XIV Storage Management GUI), click the module to display the
power supply again.
d. Turn off circuit breaker F2 (for uninterruptible power supply 2) power
cable on ATS-NEW.
e. Unplug the uninterruptible power supply 2 power cable from ATS
extension cord 2, and unplug extension cord 2 from ATS-NEW connector
P2.
f. Plug the uninterruptible power supply 2 into ATS-NEW connector P2, and
turn the locking ring clockwise to secure the connector.
g. Clip the power-cable retainer over the uninterruptible power-supply
pigtail to secure the power cable to the ATS.
ATS-NEW.
Status is OK
Status is Failed.
phase-out process.
power supply again.
power supply again.
d. Turn off circuit breaker F1 (for uninterruptible power supply 1) on
ATS-NEW.
e. Unplug the uninterruptible power supply 1 power cable from ATS
P1.
f. Plug the uninterruptible power supply 1 power cable into ATS-NEW
connector P1, and turn the locking ring clockwise to secure the connector.
g. If present, clip the power-cable retainer over the uninterruptible
power-supply pigtail to secure the power cable to the ATS.
ATS-NEW.
Status is OK
v Stage K. Reconnect the remaining cables.
In this stage, the remaining cables, including the maintenance module power
cable, serial-to-USB cable, and ac-sensor cable, are connected to ATS-NEW.

Stage K
Maint. mod
Uninterruptible
power supply 3
J1
ATS Uninterruptible
new power supply 2
J2
Uninterruptible
xiv10354
power supply 1
Figure 224. ATS installation stage K
1. Connect the maintenance-module power cable into ATS-NEW power socket

P4.
Maintenance
power cord F4
circuit breaker
F4
Power output
LED
P3 F3
Uninterruptible
F1
P1
xiv10051

2. Turn on maintenance module circuit breaker F4.

3. Verify that the maintenance module powers on. If it does not power on,
press the power-control button on the maintenance module.
Figure 226. Front view of the maintenance module information and connection panel
4. Connect the ac-sensor cable that is labeled ATSX801-M1USB1 to port X801

(green connector) on the ATS, and tighten the retaining screws by using a
small flat screwdriver.
Installing the automatic transfer switch for a four-main-power-

cable configuration
Use this procedure to replace the automatic transfer switch (ATS) in an XIV system
with four main-power cables while the XIV system is powered on.
Before you begin
To replace the ATS in an XIV system with two main-power cables, see “Installing
the automatic transfer switch for a two-main-power-cable configuration” on page
230.
Important: This procedure is broken down into a number of logical stages. Follow
the procedure exactly as presented, stage by stage. Failure to do so might lead to
injury, loss of access, or loss of data.

encountered during the replacement procedure. Shutting down the XIV system
prevents the loss of data that is caused by the loss of uninterruptible power-supply
ac or battery power. To manually shut down the XIV system using the IBM XIV
Storage Management GUI, click System > System Settings > Shutdown System.
Access is lost when the XIV system is shut down.
Management GUI by using user ID xiv_maintenance. To change the user ID, click
the user ID in the upper-right corner. If you do not know the password, contact
About this task
Note: In this procedure, ATS-OLD refers to the ATS that is being replaced, and
ATS-NEW refers to the replacement ATS that is being installed.
CAUTION:

Procedure
Complete the following steps to replace the ATS:

v Stage A. Attach the ATS-NEW grounding cable to the rack.
This following figure shows the initial power configuration before the
replacement of the ATS starts.
Stage A
Maint. mod
Uninterruptible
power supply 3
J1
J2
inactive
Uninterruptible
xiv10356
power supply 1
Figure 227. ATS installation stage A
In this stage, ATS-NEW is placed near the rear of the rack, and the ground wire
is connected to the rack frame.
1. Place the ATS-NEW near the rear of the XIV system.
2. Switch off circuit breakers F1, F2, F3, and F4 on ATS-NEW.
3. Insert the bolt in the ATS-NEW grounding wire, and fasten the bolt to the
rack by using an 8-mm socket wrench. Use the hole that is next to the
grounding-wire attachment point for ATS-OLD.
Important: Do not detach or remove the grounding wire for ATS-OLD.

v Stage B. Transfer the inactive main-power cable to ATS-NEW.
In this stage, the inactive input line is transferred from ATS-OLD to ATS-NEW
(see the following figure). The active input line is transferred in a later stage.
Stage B
Maint. mod
Uninterruptible
power supply 3
J1
J2
Uninterruptible
xiv10357
power supply 1
Figure 228. ATS installation stage B
system is running on battery, you must be able to turn the customer circuit
breaker back on within 30 seconds.
Complete the following steps to transfer the inactive main-power cable to
ATS-NEW:
J1 LED on ATS-OLD is not lit.
are operating on ac power. Check that the online LED ( ) is green
and that the on-battery LED ( ) is not lit.

battery power.
following steps:
J2 Line 2 LED on ATS-OLD is not lit.
are operating on ac power. Check that the online LED ( ) is green
and that the on-battery LED ( ) is not lit.

battery power.
v Stage C. Connect uninterruptible power supply 2 to ATS-NEW.
Stage C
Maint. mod
Uninterruptible
power supply 3
J1
J2
Uninterruptible
power supply 1
xiv10358
Figure 229. ATS installation stage C

phase-out process.
before proceeding.
again.
– If any modules have PSUs that are in the Failed state (that are red in the
power supply again.
ATS-OLD.
6. Connect the uninterruptible power supply 2 power cable to one of the ATS
extension cords that are supplied with the ATS concurrent replacement kit.
Turn the connector clockwise to secure.

adhesive tape.
Note: As an additional safeguard, secure the extension cord to the ATS by

using adhesive tape.
2).
have an error icon.

v Stage D. Transfer the remaining main-power cable to ATS-NEW.
In this stage, the remaining main-power cable is transferred to ATS-NEW.
Stage D
Maint. mod
Uninterruptible
power supply 3
J1
J2
Uninterruptible
power supply 1
xiv10359
Figure 230. ATS installation stage D
or J2) connected to ATS-OLD.
2. Verify that power to ATS-OLD is off by verifying that the J1 and J2 LEDs on
ATS-OLD are not lit.
SELECTED Input
SOURCE OK
J2 LINE 2
FAULT
J1 LINE 1
3. Unplug the remaining main-power cable from ATS-OLD.

4. Plug the remaining main-power cable in to the corresponding connector (J1
or J2) on ATS-NEW, and turn the locking ring clockwise to secure the
connector.
6. Verify that power is provided to ATS-NEW by verifying that the J1 and J2
LEDs on ATS-NEW are lit.
v Stage E. Disconnect remaining cables.
In this stage, the remaining cables, including the maintenance module power,
serial-to-USB cable, and ac-sensor cable, are disconnected from ATS-OLD.
Stage E
Maint. mod
Uninterruptible
power supply 3
J1
J2
Uninterruptible
power supply 1
xiv10360
Figure 233. ATS installation stage E
1. Disconnect the maintenance-module power cable from plug P4 on ATS-OLD.

2. Disconnect the ac-sensor cable that is labeled ATSX801-M1USB1 from port
X801 (blue connector) on the ATS.
3. Loosen the retaining screws by using a small flat screwdriver. Disconnect the
ac-sensor cable that is labeled ATSX807-U3OUTPUT from port X807 (green
connector) on the ATS.
Maintenance
power cord F4
circuit breaker
F4
Power output
LED
P3 F3
Uninterruptible
F1
P1
xiv10051


v Stage F. Remove ATS-OLD from the rack.
In this stage, ATS-OLD is removed from the rack.
Stage F
Maint. mod
Uninterruptible
power supply 3
J1
ATS Uninterruptible
new power supply 2
J2
Uninterruptible
xiv10355
power supply 1
Figure 235. ATS installation stage F
1. Remove the bolt that connects the ATS-OLD grounding wire to the rack by
using an 8-mm socket wrench.
Note: Do not remove the grounding wire from the ATS-OLD. The
yellow-and-green grounding wire comes already attached to the ATS-NEW
by using a lock washer, disk with grounding wires, flat washer, and screw.
2. Remove the retaining screw that secures the ATS to the support bracket at
the upper left side by using a Phillips screwdriver.
3. Lift the ATS-OLD, and then move it out of the rack.
The ATS is secured to the rack by several downward facing flanges that fit
into upward facing flanges in the bracket that is located behind the ATS.
v Stage G. Install ATS-NEW in the rack.
In this stage, ATS-NEW is placed in the rack.
Stage G
Maint. mod
Uninterruptible
power supply 3
J1
ATS Uninterruptible
new power supply 2
J2
Uninterruptible
xiv10361
power supply 1
Figure 236. ATS installation stage G
1. Place ATS-NEW into the rack by lowering it on the retaining brackets.
Important: Take care when you move ATS-NEW so that the power cables
between each of the three uninterruptible power supplies and ATS-NEW are
not disconnected. As a safeguard, ensure that the connectors are secured with
a piece of adhesive tape before you move the ATS.
2. Position ATS-NEW to the rightmost side of the rack so that the screw hole in
the support bracket aligns with the hole on the upper left side of the ATS.
3. Fasten the retaining screw to the support bracket at the upper left side by
using a Phillips screwdriver.
v Stage H. Remove temporary extension cords to the uninterruptible power
supplies.
In this stage, the extension cords are removed in a specific sequence, starting
with uninterruptible power supply 3. The sequence must be strictly followed.
Stage H
Maint. mod
Uninterruptible
power supply 3
J1
ATS Uninterruptible
new power supply 2
J2
Uninterruptible
xiv10362
power supply 1
Figure 237. ATS installation stage H

phase-out process.
before proceeding.
again.
power supply again.
4. Turn off circuit breaker F2 (for uninterruptible power supply 2) power cable
on ATS-NEW.

5. Unplug the uninterruptible power supply 2 power cable from ATS
P2.
6. Plug the uninterruptible power supply 2 into ATS-NEW connector P2, and
turn the locking ring clockwise to secure the connector.
7. Clip the power-cable retainer over the uninterruptible power-supply pigtail
to secure the power cable to the ATS.
8. Turn on the circuit breaker F2 (for uninterruptible power supply 2) on
ATS-NEW.
supply 2, and verify Charge Level is 100%, Input Power is yes, and Status
is OK.
11. Verify that all module power supply units (PSUs) are functioning correctly.
From the IBM XIV Storage Management GUI, verify that the modules are
black and do not have an error icon.
v Stage I. Reconnect the remaining cables.
In this stage, the remaining cables, including the maintenance module power
cable, serial-to-USB cable, and ac-sensor cable, are connected to ATS-NEW.
Stage I
Maint. mod
Uninterruptible
power supply 3
J1
ATS Uninterruptible
new power supply 2
J2
Uninterruptible
xiv10363
power supply 1
Figure 238. ATS installation stage I
1. Connect the maintenance-module power cable into ATS-NEW power socket

P4.
Maintenance
power cord F4
circuit breaker
F4
Power output
LED
P3 F3
Uninterruptible
F1
P1
xiv10051
2. Turn on maintenance module circuit breaker F4.

3. Verify that the maintenance module powers on. If it does not power on,
press the power-control button on the maintenance module.
4. Connect the ac-sensor cable that is labeled ATSX801-M1USB1 to port X801

(green connector) on the ATS. Tighten the retaining screws by using a small
flat screwdriver.
Verifying the automatic transfer switch replacement

Use this procedure to verify that the IBM XIV Storage Management GUI is
operating correctly after replacing the automatic transfer switch (ATS).

Procedure
Complete these steps to verify the ATS replacement:

its socket.
to the module.
the new ATS.
supplied by J2.

Procedure
correctly:
Redundancy.
status pod again.
GUI:
Full Redundancy.
and click Test.
7. Enable the automatic Uninterruptible power supply calibration by running the
following command:
conf_set path=cluster_hw_config.ups_automatic_calibration_disable value=no
Updating the PMR

Use this information to update a corresponding problem management record
(PMR) with the 11S numbers for the failed and installed ATSs.

Procedure
Complete the following steps to update the PMR:

1. Record the "11S" number from the barcode label of the failed ATS (ATS-OLD).
2. Record the "11S" number from the barcode label of the installed ATS
(ATS-NEW)
3. Enter both numbers in the corresponding PMR that was generated by the XIV
system during the replacement.
The following sample shows a PMR that is generated during the ATS
replacement:
EMERGENCY_SHUTDOWN_NOW System is shutting down in emergency shutdown
mode due to: No External Power.

Procedure
component.
Replacing an SFP
Use this procedure to replace an 8 Gb Fibre Channel or 10 Gb Ethernet adapter
small form-factor pluggable (SFP) transceiver.
Before you begin
The SFP is designed to be hot-plugged. You do not need to power off the XIV
system.
Ensure that you have an illumination source before attempting to work within the
rack.
CAUTION:
Do not remove the last path from a host. If replacing this SFP concurrently,
verify that the host path through the SFP is not active and that the customer has
an active alternate path to the XIV system.
About this task
Procedure
Complete the following steps from the front of the rack to remove and install the
SFP:
1. Carefully determine the failing physical port connection.
2. Remove the Fibre Channel or Ethernet cable by pressing the release tab and
pulling the cable out. Ensure that you exert pressure only on the connector, and
do not pull the cables.
3. To remove the SFP, locate the release handle that is incorporated into the SFP,
unclip the handle, and then use the handle to pull out the SFP.
Note: If the SFP has a plastic tag instead of a release handle, pull the tag to
remove the SFP.
4. Push the new SFP into the aperture, and ensure it is securely locked with the
release handle flush to the SFP.
Note: To determine the correct SFP adapter, see “Components FRUs” on page
351.
5. Reconnect the Fibre Channel or Ethernet cable.
6. Confirm that the error is now fixed. Check the port status using the front-panel
display. If possible, check the status given by the XIV monitoring tools of the
customer. Either mark the error as fixed or restart the node depending on the
failure indication that you originally noted.
7. Package the defective SFP using the packaging from the replacement SFP.
8. Send the defective SFP package to the appropriate facility according to the
process for your respective country or geography.

Use this procedure to start a guided repair for a small form-factor pluggable (SFP)
transceiver using the Technician Assistant tool.
Before you begin
Important: The following guided repair procedure only applies to an 8 Gb

Fibre-Channel Host Adapter (FCHA) SFP transceiver.
Procedure
Complete the following steps to start the guided repair for SFPs:
repair for SFP. The Guided repair for SFP window is displayed.
The guided-repair utility determines whether any SFPs are in a failed state.
Replacing the main-power cables (concurrent)

Use this procedure to replace the main-power cables that connect to automatic
transfer switch (ATS) while the XIV system is powered on.
Before you begin
Important: Read and understand this procedure before you start the replacement.
A mistake in this procedure might result in data loss.
Read and understand the safety instructions, especially those dealing with danger
notices (see “Safety and environmental notices” on page xiii).
About this task
that is needed to recharge the uninterruptible power supply batteries.

Important: For XIV system code V11.1.0 and later, each uninterruptible power
supply is calibrated after the component test is completed. This calibration might
significantly increase the time of the replacement procedure.
The XIV system supports two power configurations: a two-main-power-cable

configuration and a four-main-power-cable configuration. If the XIV system uses a
two-main-power-cable configuration, complete steps in “Installing the automatic
transfer switch for a two-main-power-cable configuration” on page 230. If the XIV
system uses a four-main-power-cable configuration, complete steps in “Installing
247.
Replace the main-power cables concurrently only with consultation of your next
level of support.
CAUTION:
Take care when you replace the main-power cables. Considerable voltage is
powering in and out of the ATS. Ensure that all grounding precautions are taken
before you proceed with the replacement procedure.
Complete the following procedures to replace the main power cables concurrently:
1. “Preparing to replace the main-power cables”
2. “Swapping the main-power cables” on page 264
3. “Verifying the main-power cable replacement” on page 268
Preparing to replace the main-power cables

Use this procedure to inspect and prepare the XIV system before you replace the
main-power cables.
Procedure
Complete the following steps to prepare for a main-power cables replacement:

1. Inspect the site to verify the following conditions:
v The XIV system rack and ATS are grounded correctly by using the
grounding screw that is connected to the rack just below the ATS.
v The uninterruptible power supplies are installed and operating correctly.
v All modules and InfiniBand switches are operating correctly. From the IBM
XIV Storage Management GUI, hover the cursor over each module and
InfiniBand switch, and verify that Status is OK.
2. Inspect the status of the J1 Line 1 and J2 Line 2 power LEDs on the ATS (see
Figure 241 on page 263 and Figure 242 on page 263).
SELECTED Input
SOURCE OK
J2 LINE 2
FAULT
J1 LINE 1
v If both LEDs are lit green, power is present at both inputs to the ATS.
v If only one LED is lit green, verify that power is coming from the customer
building distribution panel. If building power is present, the power input
path to the ATS that is associated with the unlit LED is defective. When you
transfer the inactive power cable to the new ATS in Stage C of this
replacement procedure, ensure that you transfer the defective, inactive
power cable that is associated with the unlit LED the first.
3. Connect the technician notebook computer to the technician port in the patch
panel.
password.
5. Ensure that the pod on the lower right says Full Redundancy.
6. Hover the cursor over each uninterruptible power supply, and verify that
Charge Level is 100%, Input Power is yes, and Status is OK.
7. From the rear of the rack, verify that all circuit breakers on each
uninterruptible power supply are in the on (up) position.
8. Verify that all module power supply units (PSUs) are connected and
providing power. Ensure that the LEDs on each PSU are solid green,
indicating that the PSU is supplying power to the module.
9. From the front of the rack, verify that the online LED ( ) on each
uninterruptible power supply is green. A green LED indicate that the
uninterruptible power supply is operating on ac power.

Load Battery charge
85% 96%
68% 72%
51% 48%
34% 24%
17% 0%
xiv10043
10. From the rear of the rack, check the power connections to the ATS,
maintenance module, and uninterruptible power supplies.
a. On the ATS, verify that each uninterruptible power-supply connection to
the ATS is firmly secured in place. Twist the connectors P3, P2, and P1
clockwise to verify that they are firmly seated.
b. On the maintenance module, verify that the maintenance-module power
cable is firmly seated. Firmly press each plug into its socket.
c. On the uninterruptible power supplies, verify that all power output
connections to the modules are firmly seated in their sockets. Firmly press
each plug into its socket.
d. On the uninterruptible power supplies, verify that all power input
connections are firmly seated. Twist the connectors clockwise to verify that
they are firmly seated.
11. Disable the automatic Uninterruptible power supply calibration by running
the following command. (xiv development user credentials required)
To run this command, you must be log in using the xiv_development user ID
and password. If you do not know the password, contact your next level of
support.
conf_set path=cluster_hw_config.ups_automatic_calibration_disable value=yes
Note: Calibration is re-enabled when completing the service call.
Swapping the main-power cables

Use this procedure to replace the main-power cables in an XIV system with two
main-power cables while the XIV system is powered on.
Before you begin

encountered during the replacement procedure to prevent the loss of data that is
caused by loss of uninterruptible power supply ac or battery power. To manually
shut down the XIV system using the IBM XIV Storage Management GUI, click
System > System Settings > Shutdown System. Access is lost when the XIV
system is shut down.
Management GUI as user ID xiv_maintenance. To change the user ID, click the
user ID in the upper-right corner. If you do not know the password, contact your
About this task
system is running on battery, you must be able to turn the customer circuit breaker
back on within 30 seconds.
CAUTION:
Take care when replacing the main-power cables. Considerable voltage is

powering the ATS. Ensure that all grounding precautions are taken before
proceeding with the replacement procedure.
Procedure
Complete the following steps to replace the main-power cables:

v Stage A. Replace the inactive main-power cable.
In this stage, the inactive main-power cable is replaced. The active main-power
cable is replaced in a later stage.
Complete the following steps to replace the inactive main-power cable:

Maintenance
power cord F4
circuit breaker
F4
Power output
LED
P3 F3
Uninterruptible
F1
P1
xiv10051
J1 LED on the ATS is not lit.
SELECTED Input
SOURCE OK
J2 LINE 2
FAULT
J1 LINE 1
battery power.
unplug the old J1 main-power cable from ATS
e. Plug the new J1 main-power cable in to ATS, and turn the locking ring
g. Confirm that power is provided to ATS by verifying that the J1 LED on
ATS-NEW is lit.
h. Continue with stage B.
following steps:
J2 Line 2 LED on the ATS is not lit.

battery power.
unplug the old J2 main-power cable from the ATS.
e. Plug the new J2 main-power cable in to the ATS, and turn the locking
ring clockwise to secure the connector.

g. Confirm that power is provided to the ATS by verifying that the J2 LED
on ATS-NEW is lit.
h. Continue with stage B.
v Stage B. Replace the remaining main-power cable
In this stage, the remaining main-power cable is replaced.
or J2) connected to the ATS.
2. Verify that power to the remaining main-power cable is off by checking that
the corresponding LED on the ATS is not lit.
SELECTED Input
SOURCE OK
J2 LINE 2
FAULT
J1 LINE 1
3. Unplug the remaining main-power cable from the ATS.

4. Plug the new main-power cable in to the corresponding connector (J1 or J2)
on the ATS, and turn the locking ring clockwise to secure the connector.
6. Verify that power is provided to the ATS by verifying that the J1 and J2
LEDs on the ATS are lit.
Verifying the main-power cable replacement

Use this procedure to verify that the IBM XIV Storage Management GUI is
operating correctly after replacing the main-power cables.
Procedure
Complete these steps to verify the main-power cable replacement:

its socket.
to the module.
the new ATS.
supplied by J2.

Procedure
correctly:
Redundancy.
status pod again.
GUI:
Full Redundancy.

and click Test.
Replacing the modem

This information describes the procedures to replace the modem.
About this task
The status of the modem is not displayed in the IBM XIV Storage Management
GUI or IBM XIV command-line interface (XCLI). No action is required to
physically removing and installing a replacement modem.
Complete the following procedures to replace the modem:

1. “Removing the modem”
2. “Installing the modem” on page 271
Removing the modem

Use this procedure to remove the modem.
Procedure
Complete the following steps to remove the modem:

1. If the modem is connected to an outside telephone line or to the patch panel,
disconnect the modem.
2. Unplug the modem cable from the maintenance module.
3. Remove the hook-and-loop fastener.
4. Package and ship the modem to your approved repair facility.
Installing the modem

Use this procedure to install only the modem.
Procedure
Complete the following steps to install the modem:

1. Place the modem on the support bracket.
2. Wrap the hook-and-loop fastener around the modem and bracket.
3. Plug the modem cable in to the modem port on the maintenance-module.
4. If the modem was connected to an outside telephone line or to the patch panel,
reconnect the modem.
5. Dial in to the modem by using a telephone, and verify that the modem
answers.

Procedure
correctly:
Redundancy.
status pod again.
GUI:
Full Redundancy.

and click Test.

Procedure
component.
Replacing cables
Use these procedures replace defective cables.
About this task
Important: Replace cables only when directed to do so by your next level of

support.
If more than one cable is defective, replace one cable one at a time. Removing
multiple cables at one time might result in mixing up replacement cable order.
No IBM XIV Storage Management GUI or XCLI actions are needed to replace
cables. Cable failures are not directly displayed in the IBM XIV Storage
Management GUI; however, the IBM XIV Storage Management GUI might show a
failure in the associated components or show odd behavior in components on both
ends of the cable.
Complete one of the following tasks to replace a defective cable:

v “Replacing module-to-module (Ethernet and serial-to-USB) cables” on page 273
v “Replacing module-to-switch (serial-to-USB) cables” on page 274
v “Replacing the InfiniBand switch-to-switch cables” on page 275
v “Replacing the ac-sensor cable from the ATS to uninterruptible power supply 3”
on page 276
v “Replacing the ac-sensor cable from the ATS to module 1” on page 277
v “Replacing patch-panel (Ethernet and Fibre Channel) cables” on page 279
v “Replacing power cables for model 281x-114281x-214, and 281x-216” on page 281
Replacing module-to-module (Ethernet and serial-to-USB)
cables
Use this procedure to replace a defective Ethernet or serial-to-USB cable that
connects a data or interface module to other data or interface module.
Before you begin
Before replacing a cable, verify that the cable connections are not the cause of the
problem. Verify that each end of the cable is plugged into the correct component
and port and is fully seated. Cable-port information is provided on a label at both
ends of the cable. If the cable connections are good and the malfunction persists,
unplug and plug cable into both ports. If the malfunction still persists, use this
procedure to replace the cable.
Verify that the cable-replacement kit contains the following parts:

v One replacement cable for purple or green cables, or two replacement cables
(one short and one long) for yellow or red cables.
v Hook-and-loop fasteners
v Preprinted, peel-off labels for each port-connection in the XIV system. Only the
labels for the defect cable are used.
About this task
This procedure does not pertain to cables that connect to the patch panel. To
replace a defective Ethernet and Fibre Channel) cables from the patch panel to a
data or interface module, see “Replacing patch-panel (Ethernet and Fibre Channel)
cables” on page 279.
Procedure
Complete the following steps to replace module cables:

1. Identify the defective cable.
2. (Red or yellow cables only) Select the appropriate cable length from the
cable-replacement kit.
3. Select the appropriate labels that exactly match the labels on the defective
cable, and attach the new labels to both ends of the replacement cable.
4. Unplug the defective cable from both component ports.
5. Plug in each end of replacement cable to appropriate component port where
you previously unplugged the defective cable.
6. Verify that each cable end is plugged in to the correct port and is fully seated.
7. Run the ethernet_cable_verify_connectivity command to verify that the
cables are operating correctly and recognized by the XIV system.
Attention: Proceed to the next step only after confirming that the
replacement cable solved the problem. If the problem is not solved, contact
8. Run the replacement cable along the existing cable bundle as close as possible
to the defective cable, and secure using hook-and-loop fasteners included in
the cable-replacement kit to create a neat cable organization.
Do not undo the cable bundle, but try to recreate the cable path as close as
possible.

Note: Ensure that the replacement cable does not interfere with access to
other cables or components for any future replacements that might be
necessary.
9. Cut off both connector ends of the defective cable.
Do not remove the defective cable from the cable bundle in the rack.
10. Run diagnostic tests to ensure that the XIV system is operating correctly (see
“Running basic diagnostic test” on page 323).
Replacing module-to-switch (serial-to-USB) cables

Use this procedure if an XIV system has a defective serial-to-USB cable that
connects a data or interface module to an InfiniBand switch.
Before you begin
problem. Verify that each end of the cable is plugged into the correct component
and port and is fully seated. Cable-port information is provided on a label at both
ends of the cable. If the cable connections are good and the malfunction persists,
unplug and plug cable into both ports. If the malfunction still persists, use this
procedure to replace the cable.

v One replacement cable, either yellow or red
Procedure
Complete the following steps to replace switch-to-module cable:

3. Unplug the defective cable from both component ports.
4. Plug in each end of replacement cable to appropriate component port where
5. Verify that cable connections are working correctly and recognized by the XIV
system. From the IBM XIV Storage Management GUI, verify that the status on
the lower right of the window shows Full Redundancy.
Attention: Proceed to the next step only after confirming that the replacement
cable solved the problem. If the problem is not solved, contact your next level
of support.
to the defective cable, and secure using hook-and-loop fasteners included in the
cable-replacement kit to create a neat cable organization.
possible.
Note: Ensure that the replacement cable does not interfere with access to other
cables or components for any future replacements that might be necessary.
Replacing the InfiniBand switch-to-switch cables

Use this procedure to replace a defective cable that connects the two InfiniBand
switches.
Before you begin

problem. Verify that each end of the cable is plugged in to the correct
InfiniBand-switch port and is fully seated. Cable-port information is provided on a
label at both ends of the cable. If the cable connections are good and the
malfunction persists, unplug and plug cable into both ports. If the malfunction still
persists, use this procedure to replace the cable.
Verify that the cable kit contains the following parts:

v One replacement Ethernet or Fibre Channel cable
Procedure
Complete the following steps to replace an InfiniBand switch-to-switch cable:

3. Unplug the defective cable from both switch ports.
4. Plug in the appropriate end of the replacement cable to both switch ports
where you previously unplugged the defective cable.
5. Verify that each cable end is plugged in to the correct port and are fully seated.
to the defective cable, and secure by using hook-and-loop fasteners included in
the cable kit to create a neat cable organization.
possible.
Note: Ensure that the replacement cable does not interfere with access to other
cables or components for any future replacements that might be necessary.
7. Verify that cable connections are working correctly and recognized by the XIV
system. Using the IBM XIV Storage Management GUI or IBM XIV
command-line interface (XCLI), verify that data is correctly distributed.
Attention: Proceed to the next step only after confirming that the replacement
cable resolved the problem. If the problem is not resolved, contact your next
level of support.
Note: Ensure that you place the cut-off cable plugs in a designated disposal
area.

The cable is not easily removed from the rack. Leave the defective cable in
place. Defective cables are non-returnable items.
Replacing the ac-sensor cable from the ATS to uninterruptible

power supply 3
(Models 281x-114 281x-214, and 281x-216 only) Use this procedure to replace the
serial-to-USB cables that connect the automatic transfer switch (ATS) to
Before you begin
Use a flashlight or other external source of illumination to make components in the

rack easier to see. An angled mirror is also useful to view the surrounding
components.
About this task
The ac-sensor cable from the ATS to uninterruptible power supply 3 provides
information about ac power through the network management card on
uninterruptible power supply 3. This cable is labeled ATSX807-U3OUTPUT.
Procedure
Complete the following steps to replace the ac-sensor cable:

1. Disconnect the defective ac-sensor cable:
a. Disconnect the connector from the OUTPUT port on uninterruptible power
supply 3. The plug is not secured by retaining screws.
ATS ac-sensor port

(N1)
and guard (OUTPUT)
xiv10145

(S1)
b. Loosen the two retaining screws by using a small flat screwdriver, and
disconnect the ac-sensor cable from port X807 (green connector) on the ATS.
Maintenance
power cord F4
circuit breaker
F4
Power output
LED
P3 F3
Uninterruptible
F1
P1
xiv10051
2. Install the replacement ac-sensor cable:

a. Connect the ac-sensor cable to port X807 (green connector) on the ATS, and
tighten the two retaining screws by using a small flat screwdriver.
b. Insert and firmly press the connector in the OUTPUT port on the
uninterruptible power-supply 3 with the wire-retaining screws facing
downward and the wire location numbers upside-down.
3. From the XCLI session window, run the ats_list command to display the ATS
status. Verify that Status is OK.
Component ID Status Currently Functioning L1 Input OK L2 Input OK Outlet 1 State
1:ATS:1 OK yes yes yes J2
Outlet 2 State Outlet 3 State Firmware Version 3-Phase Dual Active

J2 J2 5 yes no
Note: The cable is not easily removed from the rack. Leave the defective cable
in place.
Replacing the ac-sensor cable from the ATS to module 1

(Models 281x-114 281x-214, and 281x-216 only) Use this procedure to replace the
ac-sensor cable that connects the automatic transfer switch (ATS) to data module 1.

About this task
The ac-sensor cable from the ATS to data module 1 provides information about ac
power through the USB1 port on data module 1. This cable is labeled
ATSX801-M1USB1.
Procedure
Complete the following steps to replace the ac-sensor cable:

1. Remove the defective ac-sensor cable:
a. Disconnect the USB plug from the USB1 port on module 1.
b. Disconnect the ac-sensor cable from port X801 (blue connector) on the ATS.
Maintenance
power cord F4
circuit breaker
F4
Power output
LED
P3 F3
Uninterruptible
F1
P1
xiv10051
2. Install replacement ac-sensor cable:

a. Connect the ac-sensor cable to port X801 (blue connector) on the ATS.
b. Plug in the USB connector to the USB1 port on module 1.
3. From the XCLI session window, run the ats_list command to display the ATS
status. Verify that Status is OK.
Component ID Status Currently Functioning L1 Input OK L2 Input OK Outlet 1 State
1:ATS:1 OK yes yes yes J2
Outlet 2 State Outlet 3 State Firmware Version 3-Phase Dual Active

J2 J2 5 yes no
Note: The cable is not easily removed from the rack. Leave the defective cable
in place. Defective cables are non-returnable items.
Replacing patch-panel (Ethernet and Fibre Channel) cables

Use this procedure to replace a defective Ethernet or Fibre Channel cable that
connects the rack patch panel to a data or interface module.

Before you begin
Before you replace a cable, verify that the cable connections are not the cause of
the problem:
v Verify that the Ethernet or Fibre Channel cable is plugged in to the correct
module port and that the cable is fully seated. Cable-port information is
provided on a label at both ends of the cable.
v Verify that the customer cable is plugged into the front of the patch panel and is
fully seated.
If the cable connections are good and the malfunction persists, unplug and replug
the cable in to both ports. If the malfunction still persists, use this procedure to
replace the cable.

v One replacement 1 Gb Ethernet, 10 Gb optical Ethernet, or Fibre Channel cable
v One female-to-female cable connector
About this task
Important: When you replace an optical Ethernet cable or Fibre Channel cable,
take care to not cause sharp bends or crimp the cables. If the cable is bent or
crimped, system information flow might be compromised.
Attention: Because the patch-panel-to-module cables are bundled and it is

difficult to access both ends of the cable, a defective patch-panel-to-module cable is
bypassed instead of replaced. Do not attempt to remove the patch panel, the end
of the cable that is attached to the rear of the patch panel, or the defective cable.
Procedure
Complete the following steps to replace an Ethernet or Fibre Channel cable

between the patch panel and a data or interface module:
3. Unplug the defective cable from the module port.
4. Plug the appropriate end of the replacement cable into module port where
5. Attach the female-to-female cable connector that is provided in the
cable-replacement kit to the other end of the replacement cable.
6. Verify that each cable end is plugged into the correct port and are fully seated.
7. Run the replacement cable along the existing cable bundle from the module to
the patch panel, as close as possible to the defective cable, and secure using
hook-and-loop fasteners included in the cable-replacement kit to create a neat
cable organization.
Do not undo the cable bundle, but try to re-create the cable path as close as
possible.
Note: Take care that the replacement cable does not interfere with access to
necessary.
8. Remove the customer cable from the port at the front of the patch panel.
9. Attach the customer cable to the open end of the female-to-female cable
connector.
10. From the IBM XIV Storage Management GUI, hover the cursor over the rack
until the patch panel is displayed to the right of the rack image, and verify
that the connection is white, indicating that the cable connection is working
correctly and recognized by theXIV system.
You can also verify the cable connection from the XCLI by running the
fc_port_list module=1:module:x command, where x is the module number.
Attention: Proceed to the next step only after you confirm that the
replacement cable solved the problem. If the problem is not solved, contact
11. Cut off and dispose of the connector end from the defective cable that was
previously plugged in to the data or interface module.
The cable is not easily removed from the rack. Leave the defective cable in
place. Defective cables are non-returnable items.
Replacing power cables

Use this procedure to replace power cables.
Procedure
Perform one of the following procedures to replace the power cables, depending
on the model type:
1. “Replacing power cables for model 281x-114281x-214, and 281x-216”
2. “Replacing power cables for model 281x-215” on page 284
Replacing power cables for model 281x-114281x-214, and

281x-216
Use this procedure to replace power cables from the uninterruptible power supply
to other components.
Before you begin
Before replacing the power cable, verify that the cable connections are not the
cause of the problem. Verify that each end of the power cable is plugged into the
correct component and port and is fully seated. Cable-port information is provided
on a label at both ends of the power cable. If the cable connections are good and
the malfunction persists, unplug and plug each end of the power cable. If the
malfunction still persists, use this procedure to replace the power cable.

v One replacement Y-power cable

Procedure
Complete the following steps to replace a power cable:

1. Identify the defective power cable.
3. From the IBM XIV Storage Management GUI, right-click the uninterruptible
power supply that has the defective power cable, and click Phase Out >
Failed.
4. Wait until uninterruptible power supply changes to the Failed state. From IBM
XIV Storage Management GUI, verify that uninterruptible power supply turns
orange and then turns red a few minutes later. Hover the cursor over
uninterruptible power supply, and verify that Status is Failed.
5. From the rear of the rack, if the uninterruptible power supply is connected to
an EPO circuit, disconnect the EPO cable from the EPO port on the
ATS ac-sensor port

(N1)
and guard (OUTPUT)
xiv10145
(S1)
6. Turn the three circuit breakers on the uninterruptible power supply to the off
(down) position.
7. On the automatic transfer switch (ATS), turn the appropriate circuit breaker
for the uninterruptible power supply being removed to the off (down)
position.
Maintenance module
power cord
Maintenance module
circuit breaker
P3 F3
Uninterruptible
F1
P1
xiv10149
8. Unplug the defective power cable from the uninterruptible power supply and
the two components (modules or switches).
9. Plug the replacement power cable into the same sockets in uninterruptible
power supply and both components (modules or switches).
10. Verify that the label on each end of the replacement power cable matches the
component and port to which it is connected.
to the defective cable, and secure using hook-and-loop fasteners included in
the cable-replacement kit to create a neat cable organization.
possible.
necessary.
12. Mark each end of the defective cable to identify that they are no longer in use.
CAUTION:
Do not cut off the defective power cable ends. Exposed cable ends might
lead to an electrical hazard. Instead, mark the defective cables to identify
that they are no longer in use.

13. If the uninterruptible power supply is connected to an EPO circuit, connect
the EPO cable to the EPO port on the uninterruptible power supply.
14. On the automatic transfer switch (ATS), turn the appropriate circuit breaker
for the uninterruptible power supply being removed to the on (up) position.
15. Turn the three circuit breakers on the uninterruptible power supply to the on
(up) position.
pressing and holding the Test button on the front of the uninterruptible power
supply until the Online LED flashes green, which takes approximately 10
seconds.
The battery LED briefly goes amber as the system powers on, and then green
when power stabilizes.
Plastic cover
Data may
be lost
if button
is pushed
xiv10143
supplies are lit.
If one or more online LEDs are not lit, contact to your next level of support.
Replacing power cables for model 281x-215

Use this procedure to replace power cables from the power distribution unit (PDU)
to other components on an XIV model 281x-215 system.
Before you begin
Before you replace the power cable, verify that the cable connections are not the
cause of the problem. Verify that each end of the power cable is plugged into the
correct component and port and is fully seated. Cable-port information is provided
on a label at both ends of the power cable. If the cable connections are good and
the malfunction persists, unplug and plug each end of the power cable. If the
malfunction still persists, use this procedure to replace the power cable.

v One 152 cm (5 ft) power cable with blue connectors
v One 152 cm (5 ft) power cable with red connectors
v One 244 (8 ft) power cable with red connectors
v One 244 (8 ft) power cable with blue connectors
v One 305 (10 ft) power cable with blue connectors
Procedure
Complete the following steps to replace a power cable:

1. Identify the defective power cable.
2. Select a cable from the cable-replacement kit that has the same length and
connector color as the defective cable.
4. Identify the two components (modules or switches) to which the defective
cable connects (see Chapter 11, “Cable connections,” on page 361).
5. From the rear of the rack, unplug the defective power cable from the PDU
and the two components to which the cable connects.
6. Plug the replacement power cable into the same sockets in the PDU and both
components.
7. Verify that the label on each end of the replacement power cable matches the
component and port to which it is connected.
to the defective cable. Secure the cables using hook-and-loop fasteners
included in the cable-replacement kit to create a neat cable organization.
Do not undo the cable bundle, but try to re-create the cable path as close as
possible.
necessary.
10. Mark each end of the defective cable to identify that they are no longer in use.
CAUTION:
Do not cut off the defective power cable ends. Exposed cable ends might
lead to an electrical hazard. Instead, mark the defective cables to identify
that they are no longer in use.
Replacing the rack top cover

This information provides instructions for removing and installing the rack top
cover.
About this task
Required tools:
v 10 mm box socket with an extension bar

Complete the following procedures to replace the rack top cover:
1. “Removing the rack top cover”
2. “Installing the rack top cover” on page 287
Removing the rack top cover

This information provides instructions for removing and replacing the rack top
cover.
Procedure
Complete the following steps to removing the rack top cover. When removing data
modules 13 - 15, complete steps 1 - 4 for each data module before proceeding to
the next module.
1. Remove the front door (see “Removing the standard front and rear rack doors”
on page 288).
2. Remove the side panels. (see “Removing rack side panels” on page 298).
3. Remove data modules 13- 15, if installed (see “Removing the data module” on
page 132).
4. Remove the four bolts on the left side of the top cover by using an 8-mm
socket wrench, and then remove the top-cover side panel. Repeat on the right
side.
5. Remove the eight bolts that connect the top hat to the rack on the left and right
sides by using a 10-mm socket wrench.
Top cover
Top-cover side
panel
Rack side panel

xiv10078
6. Lift off the top cover.
Installing the rack top cover
If the weight-and-height-reduced shipping (feature code 0200) was ordered, use
this procedure to install the top cover on the rack.
Procedure
Complete these steps to install the rack top cover:

1. Position the rack top cover on the rack.
2. Install the eight bolts that connect the top hat to the rack on the left and right
sides by using a 10 mm socket wrench.
Top cover
Top-cover side
panel
Rack side panel

xiv10078
3. Install the four bolts on the left side of the top cover by using an 8 mm socket
wrench, and then remove the top-cover side panel. Repeat on the right side.
4. Install data modules 13- 15, if installed (see “Installing the data module” on
page 137).
5. Install the side panels. (see “Installing rack side panels” on page 300).
6. Install the front door (see “Installing the standard front and rear rack doors” on
page 289).
Replacing the standard front and rear rack doors

Use this procedure to remove and install the standard front and rear doors.
About this task
Required tools:
v 7-mm wrench
v 8-mm wrench

Complete the following procedures to replace the standard front or rear rack door:
1. “Removing the standard front and rear rack doors”
2. “Installing the standard front and rear rack doors” on page 289
Removing the standard front and rear rack doors

Use this procedure to remove the standard front and rear rack doors when
inspection or service procedures for certain components require better access.
About this task
Note: If the XIV system was delivered with the rear water-cooled door, see the
Rear Door Heat eXchanger Installation and Maintenance Guide for instructions for
removing the rear door.
Hinge pin
Door hinge
retaining screws
Door hinge
Rack chassis
Rack front Front door latch

door retaining screws
Front door latch

xiv10073
Figure 257. Rack doors
Procedure
Complete the following steps to remove the front and standard rear door.
1. Open the door of the rack.
2. (Front door only) Disconnect the logo LED cable from the mUSB port on
module 5 (or on module 6 if the ruggedized rack is installed).

3. Remove the door by lifting it up and away from the hinges.
4. Place the door in a location where it cannot fall and does not act as an
obstruction.
Installing the standard front and rear rack doors
Use this procedure to install the front and standard rear doors.
About this task
Hinge pin
Door hinge
retaining screws
Door hinge
Rack chassis
Rack front Front door latch

door retaining screws
Front door latch
xiv10073
Figure 258. Rack doors
Note: If the XIV system was delivered with the rear water-cooled door, see
“Installing the rear-door heat exchanger” on page 41 for installation instructions.
Procedure
Complete the following steps to install the front and standard rear door:
1. Carefully lift the door, and position the inside corner of the door frame against
the rack hinges, with the door hinge brackets slightly above the rack hinge pin
ends. Lower the door so the door hinge brackets slide onto the rack hinge pins.
2. (Front door only) Connect the logo LED cable:
v If the ruggedized rack is not installed, connect the logo LED cable to the
mUSB port on module 5.
v If the ruggedized rack is installed, connect the logo LED cable to the mUSB
port on module 6.
3. Close the door on the rack.
Replacing the rear-door heat exchanger

This information provides instructions for replacing the rear-door heat exchanger.

About this task
Although a leak in the heat exchanger is unlikely, if it does occur, you must replace
the door assembly.
The following illustration shows the locations of components on the rear-door heat
exchanger.
Supply manifold
Air-purging valve
(return manifold)
Return manifold
Air-purging valve
(supply manifold)
Fins
(behind protective
barrier)
Male coupling
(return manifold)
Female coupling
(supply manifold)
Drain port
Hose retention plate
xiv10224
Figure 259. Rear-door heat exchanger components
Note: Although the likelihood of water exposure is small, you might prefer to
place some water-absorbent material beneath the door assembly as a general
practice when servicing the rear-door heat exchanger.
Complete the following procedures to replace the rear-door heat exchanger:

1. “Draining the heat exchanger” on page 293
2. “Attaching and detaching the supply hose” on page 294
3. “Attaching and detaching the return hose” on page 295
4. “Removing and installing the hose-retention plate” on page 296
5. “Purging air from the heat exchanger” on page 296
6. “Opening and closing the air-purging valves” on page 297
Note: For specific repair information regarding the rear-door heat exchanger, see
Chapter 9, “Troubleshooting,” on page 323.
Replacing the rear-door heat exchanger
Although a leak in the heat exchanger is unlikely, if it does occur, you must replace
the door assembly.
Procedure
Complete the following steps to replace the door assembly from the rack cabinet:
1. Drain the water from the heat exchanger (see “Draining the heat exchanger”
on page 293).
2. Detach the supply and return hoses (see “Attaching and detaching the supply
hose” on page 294 and “Attaching and detaching the return hose” on page
295).
3. Open the door assembly 90°.
CAUTION:
18-32 kg (39.7-70.5 lbs)
4. Grasp the door assembly firmly with both hands and lift it upward and away
from the hinges.
5. Position the replacement door assembly at a 90° angle to the rack cabinet as
shown in the following illustration.

Lift handles
Rear door heat

exchanger assembly
xiv10217
Bottom hinge
(long pin)
Figure 260. Rear-door heat exchanger
Attention: Ensure that you engage the bottom hinge pin first when you
install a rear door on the rack cabinet.
6. Place the door so that the bottom hinge pin on the rack cabinet goes into the
locator hole in the bottom hinge area of the door. While keeping the door on
the bottom hinge pin, lift the door slightly and place the top hinge area of the
door on the top hinge pin on the rack cabinet; then, lower the door onto the
hinge pins.
7. Close and adjust the latch mechanism so that all the door gaskets touch the
rack members and compress to a gap of approximately 7 mm (0.25 in.) on all
four sides of the door.
8. Connect the secondary-loop water supply to the heat exchanger (see
“Connecting the water supply” on page 46).
9. Fill the heat exchanger with water and purge any remaining air (see “Filling
the rear-door heat exchanger with water” on page 47).
10. Reinstall the hose-retention late and floor tile, and then close and latch the
door (see “Securing the hoses and the door” on page 50).
What to do next
Check the heat exchanger after several hours of operation. If there is a splashing or
gurgling sound, repeat the air-purging procedure on both valves (trapped air from
the hoses might have migrated to the heat exchanger).
Draining the heat exchanger

You must drain the rear-door heat exchanger before removing it from the rack
cabinet or when directed to do so by IBM Service. The drain port is at the bottom
of the heat exchanger, near the supply and return couplings.
Before you begin
Note: Although the likelihood of water exposure is small, you might prefer to
place some water-absorbent material beneath the door assembly as a general
practice when draining the heat exchanger.
Procedure
Complete the following steps to drain water from the heat exchanger:
1. Shut off the flow of water at the source.
Note: Depending on your facility, you might need to turn off the pump unit,
closing a valve at the pump unit, or a similar action.
2. Open the door assembly to 90°.
3. Unscrew the captive screw on the hose-retention plate.
4. Lift the plate out of the door assembly.
5. Disconnect the return hose and the supply hose from the heat exchanger and
move them out of the way.
6. Remove the valve caps from the air-purging valves and from the drain port.
7. Remove the extension hose from the air-purging tool, if it is connected. Make
sure that the air-purging tool handle is in the closed position.
8. Attach the hose and valve portion of the tool to the drain port, and place the
hose end into a container capable of holding at least 5.7 liters (1.5 gallons) of
water.
9. Open the handle on the air-purging tool.
10. Attach the extension hose to one of the air-purging valves at the top of the
heat exchanger to allow air to enter the manifolds.
Note: Instead of using the extension hose, if filtered and oil-free compressed
air is available, you can attach the compressed-air hose to the air-purging
valve to force water out of the exchanger. Keep the air pressure at 50
pounds-per-square-inch gauge (psig) or less to avoid excessive spray at the
drain port.
11. When the water flow at the drain port stops, move the extension hose or
compressed-air hose to the other air-purging valve and repeat the process.
12. When the water has drained completely from the manifolds, complete the
following steps:

a. Remove the air-purging-tool extension hose or compressed-air hose from
the air-purging valve.
b. Remove the air-purging tool hose and valve from the drain port.
c. Screw the valve caps onto the air-purging valves and drain valve and
hand-tighten them to provide a secondary seal.
Attaching and detaching the supply hose

Use this information to attach and detach the supply hose from the rear-door heat
exchanger.
About this task
The following figures show the components and location of the supply hose.
(male)
Supply-hose assembly
(male)
xiv10223
Supply-manifold coupling
(female)
Figure 261. Water-supply hoses
Note: It is easier to attach and detach the hose assemblies when there is no water
pressure in the hoses.
Procedure
v To attach the water-supply hose to the female coupling (on the supply manifold)
on the heat exchanger, complete the following steps:
1. Align the male hose coupling with the female supply-manifold coupling.

2. Move the female collar upward.
3. Insert the male hose coupling. Exert upward pressure until the female collar
4. Install the hose-retention plate (see “Removing and installing the
hose-retention plate” on page 296).
v To detach the supply hose, complete the following steps:
1. Remove the hose-retention plate (see “Removing and installing the
2. Move the female supply-manifold coupling collar upward and pull the male
hose coupling from the female coupling.
Attaching and detaching the return hose

Use this information to attach and detach the return hose from the rear-door heat
exchanger.
About this task
The following figures show the components and location of the return hose.
(male)
Return-hose assembly
(female)
Supply-hose
Supply-manifold
assembly (male)
xiv10220
coupling
(female)
Figure 262. Water-return hose
Note: It is easier to attach and detach the hose assemblies when there is no water
pressure in the hoses.
Procedure
v To attach the water-supply hose to the female coupling (on the supply manifold)
on the heat exchanger, complete the following steps:
Note: To make it easier to attach the return hose, turn off the water supply
temporarily to remove water pressure. After attaching the return hose, turn on
the water supply again.
1. Align the female hose coupling with the male return-manifold coupling.

2. Move the female collar downward and raise the coupling to the male
coupling.
3. Exert upward pressure until the female collar moves upward and locks in
Note:
4. Install the hose-retention plate (see “Removing and installing the

v To detach the return hose, complete the following steps:
1. Remove the hose-retention plate (see “Removing and installing the
hose-retention plate”).
2. Move the female collar downward and pull the female hose coupling from
the male coupling.
Removing and installing the hose-retention plate

You must remove the hose-retention plate before you connect the hose assemblies
to or disconnect the hose assemblies from the manifold couplings.
About this task
The following illustration shows the location of the captive screw on the
hose-retention plate.
Middle flange
Hose retention
plate
Captive screw
xiv10218
Procedure
v Complete the following steps to remove the hose-retention plate:
1. Open the door assembly to 90°.
2. Unscrew the captive screw on the hose-retention plate.
3. Lift the plate out of the door assembly.
v Complete the following steps to replace the hose-retention plate:
1. Slide the middle flange of the hose-retention plate below the matching lip of
the corresponding plate and wiggle the plate into place.
2. Fasten the captive screw.
Purging air from the heat exchanger

Use this procedure as part of regular maintenance and when you hear a splashing
or gurgling sound from the manifolds.
Before you begin
Procedure
Complete the following steps to purge air from the heat exchanger:
1. Unscrew and retain the caps from both air-purging valves.
Note: The valves are similar to the valves on bicycle or automobile tires. The
following illustration shows the air-purging tool.
Hose
Handle
Open
Valve Closed
xiv10216
Extension hose
2. Attach the air-purging tool to the leftmost (supply) air-purging valve. Ensure
that the air-purging tool handle is in the closed position (perpendicular to the
hose).
Note: The 6-inch extension hose for the air-purging tool is not required for this
procedure. You can attach the extension hose to the tool, or you can set the
extension hose aside.
3. Place the other end of the air-purging tool in the 2-liter container to catch the
water and air bubbles that escape during the purging procedure.
4. Turn the air-purging tool handle to the open position (parallel to the hose).
Water that is mixed with air begins to spit into the container.
5. When there is a steady stream of water from the air-purging tool into the
container, turn the tool handle to the closed position; then, disconnect the tool
and move it and the container to the rightmost (return) air-purging valve.
Attention: If water drips from an air-purging valve after you remove the
air-purging tool, reattach the tool and disconnect it again to exercise and reseat
the seal.
6. Turn the air-purging tool handle to the open position. When there is a steady
stream of water from the air-purging tool, turn the handle to the closed
position; then, disconnect the tool and set it aside.
Note: Air in a manifold causes a splashing or gurgling sound. Repeat the

air-purging procedure on both valves if this sound is present.
7. Screw the valve caps onto the air-purging valves, and hand-tighten them to
provide a secondary seal.
Opening and closing the air-purging valves

The air-purging valves are similar to bicycle or automobile tire valves. You must
use the air-purging tool to open and close an air-purging valve.

About this task
The following illustration shows the air-purging tool.
Hose
Handle
Open
Valve Closed
xiv10216
Extension hose
When the air-purging tool handle is parallel to the tool hose, the tool is open, and
air flows through the tool. When the tool handle is perpendicular to the tool hose,
the tool is closed, and air does not flow.
Procedure
v Complete the following steps to open an air-purging valve:
1. Unscrew the valve cap.
2. Screw the valve of the air-purging tool onto the air-purging valve. The tool
presses the valve pin inside the valve stem and allows air to flow.
3. Open the air-purging tool (turn the handle parallel to the tool hose).
v Complete the following steps to close an air-purging valve:
1. Close the air-purging tool (turn the handle perpendicular to the tool hose).
2. Unscrew the valve of the air-purging tool from the air-purging valve.
3. When you have completed the maintenance task, such as draining the heat
exchanger or purging air from it, screw the valve cap onto the air-purging
valve. The valve cap provides a secondary seal.
Replacing rack side panels

This information provides instructions for removing and replacing the side panels.
About this task
Complete the following procedures to replace a rack side panel:

1. “Removing rack side panels”
2. “Installing rack side panels” on page 300
Removing rack side panels

Use this procedure to remove the side panels on the rack.
Procedure
Complete the following steps to remove the rack side panels:

1. If the rack has the ruggedized rack installed, complete the following steps to
remove the securing screw that secures the side panels to the rack:
Side panel
Nut clip
Washer
Screw
xiv10194
a. Open the rear rack door.

b. Remove the securing screw and washer from the side panel by using a
Phillips screwdriver. Place the screw and washer in a secure location.
2. Unlock the side panels by pressing down on both locking latches to release the
latches.

Locking latches
Door
xiv10076

4. Lift the side panel away from the ridge on the bottom of the rack.
5. Repeat this procedure for the other side panel.
Installing rack side panels

Use this procedure to install the side panels on the rack.
Procedure
Complete the following steps to install the rack side panels:

2. Place the bottom of the side panel onto the ridge on the bottom of the rack.
Locking latches
Door
xiv10076
3. Push the top of the side panel towards the rack until the latches lock in place.
4. If the rack has the ruggedized rack installed, install the security screws that
secure the side panels to the rack by completing the following steps.
Side panel
Nut clip
Washer
Screw
xiv10194
a. Open the rear rack door.

b. Locate the nut clip for the side panel that is being installed.
c. Install the securing screw and washer on the side panel by using a Phillips
screwdriver.

Replacing the ruggedized brace
This information provides instructions for removing and installing the ruggedized
brace.
About this task
The ruggedized brace is part of the ruggedized rack, feature code 0080.
Complete the following procedures to replace the ruggedized brace and latch:
Removing the ruggedized brace

Use this procedure to remove the ruggedized brace.
About this task
The ruggedized brace is part of the ruggedized rack (feature code 0080).
Procedure
To remove the ruggedized, remove the 10 securing screws, and remove the x-brace
(see Figure 270).
X-brace
Hex screws
xiv10198
Installing the ruggedized brace

Use this procedure to install the ruggedized brace.
About this task
The ruggedized brace is part of the ruggedized rack (feature code 0080).
Procedure
To install the ruggedized brace, place the x-brace on the mounting brackets, and
secure by using 10 securing screws (see Figure 271).
X-brace
Hex screws
xiv10198
Replacing the radio frequency identification device tag

Use this procedure to replace the radio frequency identification device (RFID) tag.
About this task
The RFID tag is an optional feature (feature code 0203) for the IBM XIV Storage
System. It is attached to the inside of the front door just above the latch by using
an adhesive, as shown in the following figure.

RFID label
Front door
xiv10092
Figure 272. Radio frequency identification device tag on the rack front cover
The following figure describes the information about the RFID label.
EPC code
Bar code
of the EPC
code X X
Part PXXAYYYY X X XYYY/NN/DD

number
bar code
xiv10091
Part number EC number Manufacture 3D bar code of

date the EPC code
Figure 273. Radio frequency identification device tag
Procedure
Complete the following steps to replace the RFID tag:

1. Remove the existing RFID tag by peeling off the label and adhesive.
2. Place the new label onto the adhesive, and place the adhesive on the inside of
the front door just above the latch.
3. Remind the customer to update the asset-management database with the new
RFID number for the XIV system.
Removing and recycling coin batteries

This information describes how to remove the coin battery from data modules,
interface modules, and the maintenance module. These procedures are used to
correctly dispose of and recycle the coin battery when a module is dismantled at
end of life.
About this task
Attention: These procedures are not carried out under normal service operations
by an IBM service representative. These procedures must be completed only by
personnel who are authorized to recycle or dismantle components.
Complete one of these procedures to remove the coin battery in a module or

maintenance module:
Removing the coin battery from the M3 and M4 maintenance

modules
Use this procedure to remove the coin battery from the system board of the M3
and M4 maintenance module.
Before you begin
Attention:
About this task
The system board is fitted with a 3-V lithium CR2032 coin battery.
Procedure
Complete the following procedures to remove the coin battery in the maintenance
module:
1. Power off and remove the maintenance module (see “Removing the M3 and
M4 maintenance modules and guide rails” on page 178).
2. Remove the maintenance-module cover:
a. Press down firmly on the blue tabs on the right and left sides of the top
and slide the cover toward the rear of the maintenance module until the
cover is disengaged from the chassis, approximately (0.75 in)
b. Lift the cover off the maintenance module and set it aside.
3. Remove the riser-card assembly:

Riser-card
assembly
xiv10225
Figure 274. Riser-card assembly in the maintenance module
a. Grasp the riser-card assembly at the front and rear edges and lift to remove
it from the maintenance module.
b. Disconnect any cables from the adapters in the riser-card assembly.
c. Place the riser-card assembly on a flat, static-protective surface.
4. Remove the battery
a. Locate the button battery on the system board.
Battery
Orientation
Heatsink
DIMMs
DIMMs
Microprocessor
xiv10202
Figure 275. Maintenance module battery
b. Use a fingernail to press the top of the battery clip away from the battery.
The battery pops up when released.
c. Use your thumb and index finger to lift the battery from the socket.
5. Dispose of the battery as required by local ordinances or regulations. For more
information, see IBM Systems Environmental Notices (http://ibm.co/1fBgWFI).
Removing the coin battery from the maintenance module

Use this procedure to remove the coin battery from the system board of the
maintenance module.
Before you begin
The following notes describe information that you must consider when replacing
the battery.
v IBM has designed this product with your safety in mind. The lithium battery
must be handled correctly to avoid possible danger. If you replace the battery,
you must adhere to the following instructions.
Note: In the U. S., call 1-800-IBM-4333 for information about battery disposal.
v If you replace the original lithium battery with a heavy-metal battery or a
battery with heavy-metal components, be aware of the following environmental
consideration. Batteries and accumulators that contain heavy metals must not be
disposed of with normal domestic waste. They will be taken back free of charge
by the manufacturer, distributor, or representative, to be recycled or disposed of
in a proper manner.
v To order replacement batteries, call 1-800-IBM-SERV within the United States,
and 1-800-465-7999 or 1-800-465-6666 within Canada. Outside the U.S. and
Canada, call your support center or business partner.
Note: After you replace the battery, you must reconfigure the server and reset
the system date and time.
CAUTION:
When replacing the lithium battery, use only IBM Part Number 33F8354 or an
equivalent type battery recommended by the manufacturer. If your system has
a module containing a lithium battery, replace it only with the same module
type made by the same manufacturer. The battery contains lithium and can
explode if not properly used, handled, or disposed of.
Do not:
– Throw or immerse into water
– Heat to more than 100°C (212°F)
– Repair or disassemble
Dispose of the battery as required by local ordinances or regulations. For

more information, see IBM Systems Environmental Notices (http://ibm.co/
1fBgWFI)

About this task
Procedure
Complete the following procedures to remove the coin battery in the maintenance
module:
1. Power off and remove the maintenance module (see “Removing the M5
maintenance module and guide rails” on page 179).
2. Remove the maintenance-module cover:
a. If the server has been installed in a rack, slide the server out from the rack
enclosure. Refer to the “Replacing the maintenance module” on page 177
for more information on installing or removing the server from the rack.
b. Put your thumbs on the blue tabs (cover-release buttons). Press on the blue
tab or button on the left and slide the cover toward the rear of the server
until the cover has disengaged from the chassis.
Figure 276. Maintenance module cover removal
c. Lift the server cover off the server and set it aside.
Attention: For proper cooling and airflow, replace the server cover before
you turn on the server.
3. If necessary, lift the air baffle out of the way
a. Place your fingers under the front and back of the top of the air baffle; then,
lift the air baffle out of the server.
Figure 277. Air baffle removal
4. Remove the battery. Figure Figure 278 on page 310 shows the location of the
coin battery.

Figure 278. Coin battery location
a. If there is a rubber cover on the battery holder, use your fingers to lift the
battery cover from the battery connector.
b. Use one finger to tilt the battery horizontally out of its socket, pushing it
away from the socket.
Attention: Neither tilt nor push the battery by using excessive force.
c. Use your thumb and index finger to lift the battery from the socket.
Figure 279. Coin battery removal
Attention: Do not lift the battery by using excessive force. Failing to

remove the battery properly may damage the socket on the system board.
Any damage to the socket may require replacing the system board.
Removing the coin battery from a data or interface module

Use this procedure to remove the coin battery from the system board of an
interface or data module.
Before you begin
Attention:
About this task
The system board is fitted with a 3-V lithium CR2032 coin battery.
Procedure
Complete the following procedures to replace the coin battery in a data or interface
module:
1. Phase out the data or interface module (see “Phasing out the data module” on
page 131 or “Phasing out the interface module” on page 146).
2. Remove the data or interface module from the rack (see “Removing the data
module” on page 132 or “Removing the interface module” on page 147, as
relevant.
3. Release the enclosure top cover by turning the lock mechanism to the “unlock”
position.
4. Press down firmly on the metal tab in the middle of the cover and slide the
cover towards the rear of the module until the cover disengages from the
chassis.
5. Lift the cover off the module and set it aside.
6. Locate the button battery on the system board.
7. Remove the battery by pressing down on one side to tilt the battery, and then
lift out the battery.

Chapter 7. Powering on and off the XIV system
Use this information to power on and off the IBM XIV Storage System.
Powering on the XIV system after shutdown

Perform one of the following procedures to power on the IBM XIV Storage System,
depending on the model type.
Powering on the XIV system after shutdown

Use this procedure to power on an IBM XIV Storage System after either someone
shut down the XIV system or after the XIV system automatically shut down.
About this task
The XIV system automatically performs an emergency shutdown when there is a

power failure or when more than two uninterruptible power supplies failed.
Emergency shutdowns are not performed by personnel. The XIV system
determines when to carry out an emergency shutdown. Powering on the XIV
system after an emergency shutdown uses the same procedure as when you
recover the XIV system from a controlled shutdown.
If an external power loss occurs, the XIV system will go into emergency shutdown.
When the external power returns, the XIV system will automatically power up.
This will occur if the emergency shutdown was completed successfully (no
interrupts of any kind). The system has a 6-minute timeout between the time the
power resumed and the power-on. Should the system exhibit issues during the
power-on operation (partial power on, boot to maintenance state, etc.), avoid all
manual intervention and contact the next level of support.
Procedure

1. Ensure that external electrical sources are correctly supplying power to the XIV
system.
Tip: If both power feeds into the XIV system have voltages within operational
tolerance, the feed that gets energized first becomes the primary feed. You can
use this characteristic to manually balance the power load among several XIV
systems. If a power feed fails, the ATS switches the power load to the
remaining power feed. When power is resumed, you must repeat the manual
balancing operation.
2. From the rear of the rack, verify that the circuit breakers on the ATS are in the
on (up) position.

Maintenance module
power cord
Maintenance module
circuit breaker
P3 F3
Uninterruptible
F1
P1
xiv10149
3. Verify that the three circuit breakers on each uninterruptible power supply are
set to the on (up) position.
Circuit breakers
and guard
xiv10152
Online/bypass
switch
4. From the front of the rack, press the Test button on each uninterruptible power
supply in rapid succession, or simultaneously if possible, to power on the XIV
system.
Plastic cover
Data may
be lost
if button
is pushed
xiv10143
5. Verify the system state (see “Verifying the system state” on page 73).
Powering on the XIV model 281x-215 after shutdown

Use this procedure to power on an IBM XIV Storage System after someone shut
down the XIV system.
Procedure

1. Ensure that external electrical sources are correctly supplying power to the XIV
system.
2. From the rear of the rack, lift the circuit-breaker guard for each circuit breaker
on both power distribution units (PDUs). There are six circuit-breaker guards
all together.
Chapter 7. Powering on and off the XIV system 315

PDU1 PDU2
xiv10510
3. Power on the XIV system by pushing all 12 circuit-breaker levers on the PDUs
to the on (up) position.

xiv10429

5. From the front of the rack, wait a few minutes, and verify that power-status
LED on each module power-supply unit are solid green. A solid green LED
indicates that the data and interface modules are powered on.
Power status LED
Fault LED
ID LED
xiv10208
6. From the IBM XIV Storage Management GUI, verify the system state (see
“Verifying the system state” on page 73).
Powering off the XIV system

Perform one of the following steps to power off the XIV system, based on the
model type.
Powering off XIV system

Use this procedure to power off the IBM XIV Storage System by initiating a
controlled shutdown.
Before you begin
Attention: Power off the XIV system only when necessary. When powered off,
the XIV system is taken out of use and can no longer store data from host systems.
Taking the XIV system out of use might put extra burden on all other XIV systems
and might affect storage performance for the site.
About this task
(Models 281x-114 and 281x-214 only) The XIV system automatically performs an
emergency shutdown when there is a power failure or when more than two
uninterruptible power supplies fail. An emergency shutdown is not performed by
personnel. The XIV system determines when to carry out an emergency shutdown.
When you power off the XIV system in a controlled fashion, the XIV system
completes the following actions:
v Stops serving hosts
v Flushes all data from the cache, and places all the data onto the disks (also
called destaging data)
v Turns itself off
Procedure

1. that the XIV system is idle and ready to power off.
upper-right corner, and log in using the user ID and password.
4. Click System > System Settings > Shutdown System.
5. Click OK.

Powering off XIV model 281x-215 after shutdown
Use this procedure to power off the XIV system by initiating a controlled
shutdown.
Before you begin
Attention: Power off the XIV system only when necessary. When powered off,
the XIV system is taken out of use and can no longer store data from host systems.
Taking the XIV system out of use might put extra burden on all other XIV systems
and might affect storage performance for the site.
About this task
When you power off the XIV system in a controlled fashion, the XIV system
performs the following actions:
v Stops serving hosts
v Flushes all data from the cache, and places all the data onto the disks (also
called destaging data)
v Powers off all hardware components
Procedure

1. Verify with the customer that the XIV system is idle and ready to power off.
password.
4. Click System > System Settings > Shutdown System.
5. Click OK.
6. From the front of the rack, verify that power-status LED on each module
power-supply unit are blinking green. This indicates that the data and interface
modules have been powered off.
Power status LED
Fault LED
ID LED
xiv10208
7. From the rear of the rack, lift up the circuit-breaker guard for each circuit
breaker on the power distribution units. There are six circuit-breaker guards all
together.
PDU1 PDU2
xiv10510
8. Push all 12 circuit-breaker handles on the power distribution units to the off
(down) position.
xiv10431

Chapter 8. Temperature threshold and events
Attention: The XIV Storage System handles overheating by informing the
administrator through warning events and initiating an automatic thermal
shutdown as a last resort.
Note:
v These event notifications indicate to the administrators if the system temperature
is: normal, high, too high, and critically high; above which shutdown will be
applied immediately. Table 14 depicts the temperature thresholds and events
received.
v After a manual or automatic thermal shutdown due to thermal conditions, IBM
support must be immediately contacted. Do not attempt to power up the system
before contacting IBM support.
Table 14. IBM Storage System temperature thresholds and events
Temperature
threshold Event Description
27°C (80°F) SYSTEM_TEMPERATURE_IS_OK_NOW No action required.
28°C (82.4°F) SYSTEM_TEMPERATURE_IS_ABOVE_NORMAL System should be closely monitored
and, if possible, take action to cool
down.
It is recommended to either shutdown

applications or create application
snapshots, using quiesce functions in
order to backup all data.
35°C (95°F) SYSTEM_TEMPERATURE_IS_CRITICALLY_HIGH Manually shutdown the machine using
the shutdown command.
45°C (113°F) SYSTEM_TEMPERATURE_IS_CRITICALLY_HIGH_ Automatic system shutdown is in
SHUTTING_DOWN progress.

Chapter 9. Troubleshooting
Use this information to troubleshoot and resolve problems with IBM XIV Storage
System.
Tips and techniques for troubleshooting a problem

Use these tips and techniques to narrow down the source of the problem with IBM
XIV Storage System.
Verifying the XIV system health

Use this procedure to verify the health of the IBM XIV Storage System.
Procedure
Complete the following steps to verify the system health:

1. From the Technician Assistant tool, verify that the health icon at the bottom of
the window shows System healthy.
If the system is not healthy, the health icon shows System not healthy. Click
System not healthy to identify problem. Fix the problem before continuing.
The Technician Assistant tool automatically runs the health check and updates
the health status icon on a regular basis. You can configure the interval rate by
clicking File > Preferences.
2. From the main window in IBM XIV Storage Management GUI, verify that the
number of modules in the rack icon match the number of modules that are
physically installed in the rack.
If the IBM XIV Storage Management GUI shows blank panels for modules that
are physically installed in the rack, see “Physically installed modules are not
displayed in the IBM XIV Storage Management GUI” on page 337.
Running basic diagnostic test

Use this information to run basic diagnostic tests for troubleshooting problems
with the IBM XIV Software System. These tests are also run after you replace a
hardware component.
Procedure
correctly:
Redundancy.
status pod again.
GUI:

Full Redundancy.
and click Test.
Collecting system logs

Use this procedure to collect system logs (also called x-ray files), which includes
various logs, files, and traces for the XIV system.
About this task
IBM service representatives can collect system logs using the Technician Assistant
tool. Customers can also collect system logs and send them to the IBM Support
Center using the IBM XIV Storage Management GUI. Customers can find
instructions on the One-Click X-Ray webpage on the IBM Support Portal website
(http://g01zciwas003.ahe.pok.ibm.com/support/dcf/
preview.wss?host=g01zcidbs003.ahe.pok.ibm.com&db=support/ssg/ssgtech.nsf
&unid=FE1A8994A26344A885257A0D002D8990&taxOC=STJTAG&MD=2012/05/29
%2011:05:29&sid=).
Procedure
Complete the following steps to collect x-ray files:

1. From the Technician Assistant tool, click Launch > Xray Collect. The Xray
Collect window is displayed.
2. Click Collect to start collecting files.
3. (Optional) Click Yes to open an SSH tunnel to collect files faster.
4. Enter the response to the challenge by using the challenge key that is displayed
in the window.
You can find the response for the XIV system on the IBM XIV Service Center
website (http://servicecenter.xiv.ibm.com).
5. Click XSC.
6. Wait for the x-ray files to be collected. This might take several minutes.
7. Select the directory where you want to store the files, and click Save.
8. Wait for the x-ray files to be saved on your local system. This might take
several minutes.
9. Close the Xray Collect window.
Viewing the event log

You can view and monitor all events associated with a specific XIV system from
the IBM XIV Storage Management GUI.
Procedure
To view the events from the IBM XIV Storage Management GUI from the All
Systems view, right-click the XIV system, and click View Events. The Events
window is displayed.
To view events from the XCLI command line, run the events_list command.
If the events are listed that are not associated with the failed component, analyze
the reasons for these events before replacing the failed component. If you are not
sure, contact your next level of support.
Identifying status LEDs

This information describes the status LEDs that are used as visual indicators that
identify the status of the specific components.
By inspecting LEDs, you can narrow down problems with specific components.
This information describes the status LEDs on XIV system components.
Disk drive module LEDs

The front of the disk drive modules (DDMs) contains LEDs that indicate the
operating status of each DDM.
The following figure shows the location of the LEDs on the DDM. The LED states
are describes in the following table.
Green LED
xiv10175
Amber LED
Figure 289. LEDs on the disk drive module
Chapter 9. Troubleshooting 325

Table 15. Disk drive module LED status
LED state
Green Amber Description
Off Off The DDM is not receiving power.
On Off The XIV system is operating normally. The DDM is
integrated in the XIV system and connected to the power
supply.
On Flashing The XIV system is rebuilding. You can verify that the XIV
system is rebuilding by using the IBM XIV Storage
Management GUI.
Warning: Data is lost if you remove a DDM that is in this
state.
On On One of the following issues occurred:
v The DDM failed.
Run the component_test command to verify that the
DDM failed. If the DDM failed, replace the DDM.
v The DDM was replaced.
You must phase in the DDM to complete the
Off On or flashing If one DDM is in this state, run the component_test
command test to verify that the DDM failed. If the DDM
is failed, replace the DDM.
If more than two DDMs in a data or interface module are

in this state, one of the following issues occurred:
v The data or interface module was phased out.
v The data or interface module failed.
Run the component_test command to verify that the
data or interface module failed. If the data or interface
module failed, replace the module.
Data and interface module LEDs

Data modules and interface modules contain LEDs that indicate the operating
status at the module level.
Front view
Figure 290 shows the location of the LEDs on the front of the module. The LED
states are described in Table 16 on page 327.
Power status LED
Fault LED
ID LED
xiv10208
Table 16. Status LEDs on the front of data and interface modules
LED Status Description
®
Power Green The module is receiving power and
operating normally.
Off The module is not receiving power.
Fault Amber A fault was detected.
Off Normal operation
ID Off Currently not in use.
Rear view
Figure 291 shows the location of the LEDs on the rear of the data and interface
modules with 1 Gb Ethernet ports. Figure 292 shows the location of the LEDs on
the rear of the data and interface modules with 10 Gb Ethernet ports. The LED
states are described in Table 17 on page 328.
Note: When using system code V11.2.0 or higher, the LEDs are not lit upon
module boot completion.
xiv10160
Figure 291. LEDs on the rear of the data and interface modules with 1 Gb Ethernet ports
only

Table 17. Status LEDs on the rear of data and interface modules
Power-supply unit Green The PSU is receiving power.
(PSU) LEDs
Flashing green The PSU is receiving power but is not
secured in the module cage or the module
is shut down.
Flashing red An over-current, under-current, or
over-voltage condition is occurring.
Note: An audible alarm sounds when a
fault state is detected. Mute the alarm by
pressing the ID button.
Red A fault was detected. Replace the module.
Note: An audible alarm sounds when a
fault state is detected. Mute the alarm by
pressing the ID button.
ID Blue Identifies the module when activated.
Off Normal operation.
D7 Green Indicates module internal status and
activities.
activities.
activities.
activities.
activities.
activities.
activities.
activities.
Ethernet port (top) Off There is no network connection.
Green The network connection is active.
Flashing green Transmit or receive activity is in progress.
Ethernet port Off If the top LED is green or flashing green,
(bottom) the connection is 10 Mb/s.
Green The connection is 100 Mb/s.
Amber The connection is 1 Gb/s (1000 Mb/s).
10 Gb Ethernet iSCSI Off The physical link connection has not been
Activity LEDs left established.
(ports 1 and 2)
Green Indicates that the driver is running and a
281x-214 model only. valid physical connection between nodes
See Figure 292 on exists.
page 327. Flashing green Indicates a problem with the physical link.
Table 17. Status LEDs on the rear of data and interface modules (continued)
10 Gb Ethernet iSCSI Off The logical link connection has not been
Activity LEDs right established.
(ports 1 and 2)
Yellow Indicates a valid data activity link with no
281x-214 model only. data transfer.
See Figure 292 on Flashing yellow Indicates a valid data activity link with data
page 327. transfer.
Maintenance module LEDs

The front and rear of the maintenance module contains LEDs that indicate the
power and operating status of the module
Front view
Figure 293 illustrates the location of the LEDs on the front of the maintenance
module. The LED states are described in Table 18.
Table 18. Status LEDs on the front of the maintenance module

LED LED status Description
Power-on LED Lit The maintenance module is powered on.
Fading on and The maintenance module is in a reduced-power state.
off To wake the maintenance module, press the
Flashing slowly The maintenance module is turned off and is ready
(once per to be turned on. You can press the power-control
second) button to turn on the maintenance module.
Flashing rapidly The maintenance module is turned off and is not
(4 times per ready to be turned on. The power-control button is
second) disabled. This lasts approximately 5 - 10 seconds.
Off AC power is not present, or the power supply or the
LED itself is failed.
Rear view
Figure 294 on page 330 illustrates the location of the LEDs on the rear of the
maintenance module. The LED states are described in Table 19 on page 330.

Figure 294. LEDs on the rear of the maintenance module
Table 19. Status LEDs on the front of the maintenance module

Ethernet link Lit There is an active link connection on the 10BASE-T,
LEDs 100BASE-TX, or 1000BASE-TX interface for the
Ethernet port.
Ethernet activity Lit There is activity between the server and the network.
LEDs
AC power LED Lit The maintenance module is receiving ac power.
During typical operation, both the ac and dc power
LEDs are lit.
DC power LED Lit The maintenance module is receiving dc power.
During typical operation, both the ac and dc power
LEDs are lit.
Power error (!) Lit The power supply has failed.
LED
InfiniBand switch LEDs

The InfiniBand switch contains LEDs that indicate the operating status of the
switch.
Figure 295 on page 331 and Figure 296 on page 331 show the location of the LEDs
on the front and rear of the InfiniBand switch. The LED states are describes in
Table 20 on page 331.
Figure 295. LEDs on the rear of the InfiniBand switch
xiv10098
System status
LED
Figure 296. LEDs on the front of the InfiniBand switch
Table 20. InfiniBand switch LED

InfiniBand Green The logical link is up.
activity for the
Flashing green There is data activity on the port. The flashing speed
upper
equals the data-transfer speed.
Orange The physical link is up.
and lower Flashing orange There is a problem with the physical link. The SM
might be down or not enabling the port.
ports Off No power to the port.
System status Green The switch is up and running.
LEDs
Flashing green The switch is starting up.
(connector-side
panel and Yellow A fault occurred in the switch, which. usually means
power-side that the firmware did not boot correctly.
panel) Red A major error occurred that might cause damage the
switch. Turn off the switch immediately.
Note: When the switch is powered on, the status
LED lights red until the processor is up and running,
approximately three minutes.
Off The switch has no power.
Fan status LED Green The switch is up and running.
Red One or more fans are not operating correctly.
Power off the switch and troubleshoot the fan unit.
Off The fan unit is not receiving any power. Check that
the fan unit is correctly inserted.

Table 20. InfiniBand switch LED (continued)
PSU status LEDs Green The power supply unit (PSU) is delivering the
(connector-side correct voltage (12 volts dc).
panel and
Red The PSU is not operational.
power-side
panel) Off There is no power to the switch. Neither PSU is
receiving power. If one PSU is showing green and
the second PSU is unplugged, the status lights red.
Uninterruptible power-supply LEDs

The uninterruptible power supplies contain indicators that show the status and
operating condition of the uninterruptible power supply.
The following table shows the location of the LEDs on the front of the
uninterruptible power-supply. The LED states are describes in the following table.
Load Battery charge

85% 96%
68% 72%
51% 48%
34% 24%
17% 0%
xiv10043
Table 21. Uninterruptible power-supply LEDs

LED Icon LED status Description
Load Green The five LEDs indicate the load state from
17% (low load) to 85% (high load).
Typically, two or three of the Load LEDs
are lit.
Online Green Normal operating condition.
The uninterruptible power supply is

supplying utility power to connected
components.
On battery Off Normal operating condition.
Green The uninterruptible power supply is
supplying battery power to the connected
components.
Table 21. Uninterruptible power-supply LEDs (continued)
LED Icon LED status Description
Bypass Off Normal operating condition.
Green The uninterruptible power supply is in
bypass mode. Utility power is sent directly
to the connected equipment during bypass
mode operation. Bypass mode is a result of
an internal uninterruptible power-supply
fault, an overload condition, or a
user-initiated command, either through an
accessory or the manual bypass switch.
Battery operation is not available while the
uninterruptible power supply is in bypass
mode.
Overload Off Normal operating condition.
Green An overload condition exists.
Fault Off Normal operating condition.
Green The uninterruptible power supply detected
an internal fault.
Replace Off Normal operating condition.
battery
Green The battery is disconnected or must be
replaced.
Battery charge Green The five LEDs indicate the battery charge
state, from 0% percent (no charge) to 96%,
almost charged. A fully charged
uninterruptible power supply shows all
Battery charge LEDs lit.
Automatic transfer switch LEDs

The automatic transfer switch (ATS) has two independent LED systems for
verifying power in (from the customer redundant-power grid) and power out to
the three uninterruptible power supplies and the maintenance module.
Tip: If you are servicing either a uninterruptible power supply or maintenance

module, and the ATS input-power LEDs are lit, but the corresponding
output-power LEDs on the ATS are not lit green, the problem is most likely with
the ATS. If so, verify that the ATS is receiving input power. If the ATS is not
receiving input power, notify the customer and report the situation to your next
level of support.
The following figures show the location of the LEDs on the lower-right corner on
the front of the single-phase and three-phase ATSs, and LEDs that are on the side
of the ATS.. The LED states are describes in the following table.

SELECTED Input
SOURCE OK
J2 LINE 2
FAULT
J1 LINE 1
Output power
LEDs
xiv10153
Figure 300. ATS output power LEDs
Table 22. ATS LEDs

Input power Green The ATS has two input-power LEDs, labeled J2 LINE
2 and J1 LINE 1, that are located in the lower-right
corner of the ATS just below the side cooling vents.
Each LED indicates that the input-power source is
active on the related circuit.
Off If any of the LEDs are not solid green, the XIV
system might not be connected to redundant
power-input networks. Input power is the
responsibility of the customer. If the ATS
input-power LEDs do not show solid green, notify
the customer so that they can verify input-power
redundancy.
Table 22. ATS LEDs (continued)
Selected source Green The ATS has two output-power LEDs labeled
(three-phase SELECTED SOURCE J2 LINE 2 and SELECTED
ATSs only) SOURCE J1 LINE 1, that are on the lower-right
corner of the ATS just below the side cooling vents).
The lit LED indicates the main-power cable that is
the primary feed.
Off
Fault Green When lit, this LED indicates that an ATS power fault
(three-phase occurred. If this LED is lit, contact your next level of
ATSs only) support.
Off The ATS is operational.
Output power Green The ATS has three output-power LEDs (labeled P3,
P2, and P1) that are on the side of the ATS next to
each uninterruptible power-supply power socket.
When lit, each LED indicates that the power from
the ATS to each uninterruptible power supply is
active.
There is another output-power LED that is located

below the P4 output-power socket. When lit, this
LED indicates that power from the ATS to the
maintenance module is active.
Off If any of these LEDs are not lit, power is not being
supplied to the component.
Verifying host-system configurations

Consider verifying the host-system configuration before you perform critical
maintenance on the XIV system.
Before you begin
XIV system code V11.2.x or later must be installed on the XIV system.
About this task
Host profiles are added to the XIV system when the customer installs the
host-attachment kit. The Host Configuration Verification utility retrieves host
profiles that are stored on the XIV system.
Procedure
From the Technician Assistant tool, click Utilities > Host Configuration
Verification. The Host Configuration Verification window is displayed.
When the verification is complete, the following information is displayed:
v The number of hosts that were analyzed
v The number of hosts that were not analyzed because the host profile is missing
v The percentage of compliant of host
v The percentage of non-compliant of host
v A tabular list of non-compliant hosts, their host-profile attributes, and the reason
for non-compliance
v A tabular list of compliant hosts and their host-profile attributes

Troubleshooting the XIV system
This information describes how to resolve general problems with the XIV system.
Notebook computer is not communicating with the XIV system

Use this information to troubleshoot communication problems between your
notebook and the XIV system.
Diagnosing the problem
The IBM XIV Storage Management GUI and the Technician Assistant tool on your
notebook computer communicate with the XIV system over the technician ports by
using XIV system IP address 14.10.202.250 and port 7777. The XIV system sets the
notebook computer IP address to 14.10.202.1. You can also manually set the IP
address, which is recommended when upgrading the XIV system code.
Resolving the problem
Complete one or more of the following steps to resolve the problem:

v Ensure that your notebook computer is correctly connected to one of the
technician ports on the patch panel by using an Ethernet cable.
It does not matter which technician port is used unless module 2 or 4 failed or
needs servicing. If module 2 failed or is to be serviced, use the module 4 port
(upper technician port). If module 4 failed or is to be serviced, use the module 2
port (lower technician port).
Note: The technician port for module 4 is active only on XIV system code
V11.0.1 or later.
v From a command prompt, run the ipconfig command to verify that the IP
address for the notebook computer is set to 14.10.202.1.
If IP address is not set correctly, manually set the IP address to 14.10.202.1. For
example, from a notebook computer running Windows:
1. From the Control Panel window, double-click Network Connections. The
Network Connections window is displayed.
2. Right-click Local Area Connection, and click Properties.
3. Click Internet Protocol (TCP/IP) in the This connection uses the following
items list.
4. Click Properties. The Internet Protocol (TCP/IP) Properties window is
displayed.
5. Select Use the following IP address.
6. Enter 14.10.202.1 in the IP address text field.
7. Enter 255.255.255.0 in the Subnet mask text field.
8. Leave the gateway and DNS server fields blank.
9. Click OK.
10. Click OK.
v From a command prompt, run the following command to verify that the
notebook computer can communicate with the XIV system.
ping 14.10.202.250
v Restart the notebook computer, disable the firewall, and disconnect and
reconnect the Ethernet cable to technician port on the patch panel.
v Bypass the patch panel by connecting the Ethernet cable to directly to the F2
port on data module 2 or the F4 port on interface module 4.
Ethernet ports
F4, F2
xiv10342
Figure 301. Ethernet ports for connecting to the notebook computer
v If the problem is not resolved, contact your next level of support.
Troubleshooting data and interface modules

This information describes how to resolve problems with data and interface
modules.
Physically installed modules are not displayed in the IBM XIV

Storage Management GUI
If the XIV system is partially populated, the IBM XIV Storage Management GUI
might not recognize all modules in the rack.
Symptoms
In IBM XIV Storage Management GUI, the XIV system icon shows blank panels for
modules that are physically installed in the rack.
Cause
In partially populated racks with less than 13 modules, the interface services that
are used to provide Fibre Channel and iSCSI capability is disabled on module 6. In
partially populated racks with less than 11 modules, the interface services are also
disabled on module 9. Disabling interface services on these modules is done to
maintain redundancy in partially populated racks.
When you add data modules 11 and 13, interface services are automatically
activated during the phase-in process according to the following list. When the
phase-in process for these modules is complete, the interface services show the OK
status.
v Module 11 activates interface services on module 9.
v Module 13 activates interface services on module 6.
Do not start this procedure if any of the following conditions are true:
v You are installing a rack with 15 modules.
v You are installing a rack with six modules.
v You are installing a rack with 9 - 14 modules, and all the physically installed
modules are displayed in the IBM XIV Storage Management GUI.

Complete the following steps from the IBM XIV Storage Management GUI to add
the missing data or interface modules.
Important: Add each module, one at a time, in sequential order starting with
lowest missing data or interface module and progressing to highest missing
module in the rack.
1. Right-click the missing module, and click Equip.
The module begins initializing. When complete, the module changes to the
ready state. This takes several minutes.
If the module does not enter the Ready state after several minutes, see “Module
not receiving power.”
If the procedure still returns a fail notice
a. Recheck all cabling.
b. Right-click the missing module to be added, and click Equip.
c. If the module still does not change to the Ready state, the module is faulty.
Replace the module before continuing.
2. If you are adding more than one interface module, repeat the previous step for
the next higher interface modules until all interface modules are initialized
before continuing.
3. Right-click the missing module to be added, and click Phase in.
The module begins phasing in. After the module changes to the OK state, the
disk drive modules (DDMs) begin phasing in one at a time.
Note: Phasing in the module might take some time depending upon the
amount of data that the XIV system contains. It is not necessary to wait for the
phase-in process to finish before continuing.
Adding module 11 or module 13 might activate the Fibre Channel ports on
module 9 or module 6.
4. If you are adding more than one interface module, repeat the previous step for
the next higher interface modules until all interface modules are phased in
before continuing.
5. Verify that all ports on patch panel are either yellow or gray.
6. Repeat this procedure for the next higher module.
Module not receiving power

Use this information if one or more newly installed modules are not receiving
power.
After you install a module, wait approximately 2 minutes for power to be applied
to the module and for the module to go into Ready state. If the module does not
go into the Ready state after this short waiting period, complete the following
steps to resolve the problem.

__ 1. From the IBM XIV Storage Management GUI, click System > All Systems >
View Events, and look for the following informational event for the module
that is not powering on. This event typically occurs when the new module is
loaded with new firmware during the component_test, or component_equip
process. When this event occurs, the module must be powered off and then
back on.
POWER_TO_MODULE_SHOULD_BE_DISCONNECTED_AND_RECONNECTED
__ 2. Look at the label on each cable (including the power cables), and verify that
all cables are connected to the correct port and are fully seated (see “Data
and interface module cable connections” on page 361.
__ 3. Disconnect and then reconnect the power cables from both module
power-supply units(PSUs):
a. Unclip the power-cable retainers.
b. Disconnect the power cables.
c. Wait 60 seconds.
d. Reconnect the power cables to the PSU.
Ensure that you reconnect power cable 1 (marked P1) to PSU1 and
power cable 2 (marked P2) to PSU2.
When power is available to the PSU, the PSU LED flashes green. When
the PSU is supplying power to the module, the LED changes to solid
(continuous) green.
xiv10160
e. Secure the power-cable retaining clip on the power cable by pushing the
clip to the right.
f. From the IBM XIV Storage Management GUI, right-click on the modules,
and click Test.
The modules go through a testing procedure. When complete, the
g. Click OK.
__ 4. If the module still does not enter the Ready, the module might be defective.
Contact your next level of support before proceeding.
Two modules report input power failures

Use this information if two data or interface modules report input-power loss at
the same time.
If two data modules report input-power loss at the same time, a power cable failed
or became disconnected at the uninterruptible power supply.

1. Verify that the power cables in the modules and uninterruptible power supplies
are connected and fully seated.
2. See “Uninterruptible power-supply cable connections” on page 389 to
determine the power cabling between the modules and uninterruptible power
supplies.
If the power cables for both modules that report input-power loss are
connected to the same uninterruptible power supply, replace the power cable
(see “Replacing power cables for model 281x-114281x-214, and 281x-216” on
page 281).
Communication problems on modules 1, 2, and 3

Use this information if communication problems are reported on data modules 1,
2, and 3 after the XIV system is powered on. When this occurs, the status pod in
the lower right corner of the IBM XIV Storage Management GUI shows
Maintenance Mode.
There are direct communication connections between data modules 1, 2, and 3 and
the uninterruptible power supplies, as shown in Table 23.
Table 23. Module to uninterruptible power supply connectivity
Module Uninterruptible power supply
Module 1 Uninterruptible power supply 1
When one of these data modules fails, the corresponding uninterruptible power
supply also shows as failed, because the primary communication path to that
uninterruptible power supply failed. The uninterruptible power supply continues
to provide power, and the XIV system has a redundant path to communicate with
the uninterruptible power supply through a serial connection.

1. Verify that the redundant communication path to the uninterruptible power
supply is operational. From the IBM XIV Storage Management GUI, hover the
cursor over each uninterruptible power supply, and verify that Currently
Functioning is Yes. This indicates that the redundant communication path is
working correctly.
2. From the IBM XIV Storage Management GUI, right-click on the uninterruptible
power supply, and click Test.
The uninterruptible power supply goes through a testing procedure. When
complete, the Command executed successfully message is displayed.
3. Click OK.
Multiple modules are in the Failed state

Use this information if multiple data and interface modules are in the Failed state,
but the actual failure comes from a different source.
Table 24 lists the relationship between uninterruptible power supplies and

associated modules and their power supply units (PSU).
Table 24. Uninterruptible power supply failure chart
Uninterruptible power
supply Module PSU
Uninterruptible power M2 P1
supply 1
M3 P1
M5 P1
M6 P1
M8 P1
M12 P1
M9 P1
M11 P1
M14 P1
M15 P1
InfiniBand switch 1 P1
supply 2
M3 P2
M4 P1
M6 P2
M7 P1
M9 P2
M10 P1
M12 P2
M13 P1
M15 P2
supply 3
M2 P2
M4 P2
M5 P2
M7 P2
M8 P2
M10 P2
M11 P2
M13 P2
M14 P2

If there are multiple failing PSUs, and all failing PSUs are associated with the same
uninterruptible power supply, replace only the uninterruptible power supply.
Module PSU status LED flashes for more than 10 seconds

Use this information if the power-supply unit (PSU) status LED on a data or
interface module flashes for more than 10 seconds after you connect the module to
power.
If the module PSUs are not automatically powering on the data or interface
module, the module might have defective components.

1. From the IBM XIV Storage Management GUI, click System > All Systems >
View Events, and look for the following informational event for the module
that is not powering on. This event typically occurs when the new module is
loaded with new firmware during the component_test, or component_equip
process. When this event occurs, the module must be powered off and then
back on.
POWER_TO_MODULE_SHOULD_BE_DISCONNECTED_AND_RECONNECTED
2. Look at the label on each cable (including the power cables), and verify that all
cables are connected to the correct port and are fully seated (see “Data and
interface module cable connections” on page 361.
3. Disconnect and then reconnect the power cables from both module
power-supply units(PSUs):
a. Unclip the power-cable retainers.
b. Disconnect the power cables.
c. Wait 60 seconds.
d. Reconnect the power cables to the PSU.
Ensure that you reconnect power cable 1 (marked P1) to PSU1 and power
cable 2 (marked P2) to PSU2.
When power is available to the PSU, the PSU LED flashes green. When the
PSU is supplying power to the module, the LED changes to solid
(continuous) green.

xiv10160
e. Secure the power-cable retaining clip on the power cable by pushing the
clip to the right.
f. From the IBM XIV Storage Management GUI, right-click on the modules,
and click Test.
The modules go through a testing procedure. When complete, the Command
executed successfully message is displayed.
g. Click OK.
4. If problem persists, contact your next level of support.
Troubleshooting the solid-state drive

This information describes how to resolve problems with solid-state drive (SSD).
Solid-state drive does not pass component test

Use this information if running a component test on a solid-state drive (SSD) fails.
Symptoms
When the solid-state drive is initialized. the component test fails, and the following
error is reported:
COMPONENT_TEST_OF_SSD_HAS_FAILED Test of 1:SSD:n:n has failed with error
DISK_SELF_TEST_TIMEOUT.

1. From a command session, run the following command to quiesce the SSD:
/xiv/tools/scsi_test/run_one_scsi_cmd 3 0 0 0 0D E0
2. Remove the SSD by pushing the retention tab to the right, and pulling the SSD
out of the carrier assembly using the pull tab.
3. Reinsert the SSD by pushing the retention tab to the right, and inserting the
new SSD into the opening in the carrier assembly. Release the tab to secure the
SSD in place.
4. From the IBM XIV Storage Management GUI, right-click the SSD in the
expanded module view, and click Test.
5. Hover the cursor over SSD, and verify that Status is Ready. If the state is
Initializing, wait approximately 15 seconds until the state changes to Ready.

If the state does not change to the Ready, contact your next level of support.
in.
7. Hover the cursor over the SSD, and verify that Status is OK.
Troubleshooting InfiniBand switches

Use this information to troubleshoot problems with the InfiniBand switches.
InfiniBand-switch power supply unit status LED is not lit or is

lit red
Use this information if one or both power supply unit (PSU) status LEDs on the
InfiniBand switch is not lit or is lit red.

1. If either of the status LEDs is red, unplug the switch.
2. Verify that the direction of the air-flow for the PSUs is consistent with the
fan-unit air flow.
3. Verify that there is adequate ventilation and that the fan status LED show are
green.
4. Ensure that there is nothing blocking the front or rear of the chassis and that
the fan units and ventilation holes are not blocked (especially dust over the
holes). If you find dust blocking the holes, clean the fan unit and remove the
dust from the front and rear panels of the switch by using a vacuum cleaner.
5. Verify that the power cord is plugged in to a working outlet.
6. Verify that the power cord has a voltage within the range of 100-240 volts ac.
7. Remove and reinstall the power cord.
8. Remove and reinstall the PSU.
InfiniBand switch fan status LED is not lit or is lit red

Use this information if the fan status LED on the InfiniBand switch is not lit or is
lit red.

1. Verify that the power supply unit (PSU) status LEDs are lit.
2. Remove and reinstall the fan unit. Ensure that the mating connector of the unit
is free of any dirt and obstacles.
CAUTION:
Do not run the InfiniBand switch if the fan status LED is yellow.
InfiniBand switch is not working and unresponsive

Use this information if the InfiniBand is not working and unresponsive.

1. Press the reset button by using a paper clip.
2. If resetting the switch does not work:
a. Unplug the switch.
b. Wait 5 minutes.
c. Plug in the switch.
d. If the switch does not come on, check the power supplies.
e. Check the temperature.
f. Check the Fan status.
Troubleshooting uninterruptible power supplies

This information describes how to resolve problems with uninterruptible power
supplies.
Uninterruptible power supply does not power on

Use this information if the uninterruptible power supply does not power on, no
LEDs light up, and the fan does not rotate.
Cause
v The uninterruptible power supply batteries might both be drained.
v One or more uninterruptible power supply batteries might be defective.
v The uninterruptible power supply might be defective.

1. Verify that the uninterruptible power supply has ac power.
2. Wait for the batteries to charge.
3. If the batteries do not charge, measure the dc voltage of both uninterruptible
power supply batteries. If voltage of either battery is less than 100 V, replace
the battery.
4. If the batteries are both more than 100 V, replace the uninterruptible power
supply.
Bypass LED on the uninterruptible power supply is lit

Use this information if the Bypass LED on the uninterruptible power supply is lit.
Cause
The Bypass LED indicates that the uninterruptible power supply is bypassing the
automatic transfer switch (ATS) and is running on battery power. Running on
battery power indicates a serious operating condition.
If the bypass LED is lit, contact your next level of support
Fault LED on the uninterruptible power supply is lit

Use this information if the Fault LED on the uninterruptible power supply is lit.
Cause
The uninterruptible power supply detected an internal fault.
If the Fault LED on the uninterruptible power supply is lit, contact your next level
of support.

Overload and Fault LEDs on the uninterruptible power supply
are lit
Use this information if the Overload and Fault LEDs on the uninterruptible power
supply are lit and the uninterruptible power supply sounds a sustained alarm
tone.
Symptoms
The uninterruptible power supply is not sending power to the connected

components. The connected components might have exceeded the specified
maximum loads.
If the Overload and Fault LEDs are lit on more than one uninterruptible power
supply, contact your next level of support.
Overload and Bypass LEDs on the uninterruptible power

supply are lit
Use this information if the Overload and Bypass LEDs on the uninterruptible
power supply are lit and the uninterruptible power supply sounds a sustained
alarm tone.
Symptoms
The uninterruptible power supply is overloaded. The connected components might

have exceeded the specified maximum loads.
If the Overload and Bypass LEDs are lit on more than one uninterruptible power
supply, contact your next level of support.
Replace Battery LED on the uninterruptible power supply is lit

or flashing
Use this information if the Replace Battery LED on the uninterruptible power
supply is lit or flashing.
Symptoms
The uninterruptible power supply might also sound an intermittent alarm tone for
up to 1 minute.
Cause
One of the following conditions might cause the Replace Battery LED to be lit:
v The battery is not connected.
v The battery is not fully charged.

1. Verify that the battery connectors are fully engaged.
2. Recharge the battery for 24 hours. If the problem persists after recharging,
contact your next level of support.
3. If the battery self test fails, contact your next level of support.
Important: Do not replace a single uninterruptible power supply battery. Always

replace the batteries in pairs.
LEDs on the uninterruptible power supply are flashing

sequentially
Use this information if the LEDs on the uninterruptible power supply are flashing
in sequence.
Cause
The uninterruptible power supply was powered off remotely.

No action is required. The uninterruptible power supply restart automatically
when power is applied.
If the uninterruptible power supply does not restart within 10 minutes, contact
Troubleshooting cables and ports

This information describes how to resolve problems with cables and component
ports.
Failed Fibre Channel ports

Use this information if Fibre Channel ports are marked as failed.
Complete these steps to recover Fibre Channel ports that are marked failed:
XIV system that is being serviced, and then click Launch XCLI.
2. Run the fc_port_list command to display the status of all Fibre Channel
ports, and determine which ports are in the Failed state
The following example output shows that FC_Port:8:2 and FC_Port:8:4 are in
the Failed state.

Component ID Status Currently WWPN Port ID Role User
Functioning Enabled
1:FC_Port:4:1 OK yes 50017380002F0140 00640000 Target yes
1:FC_Port:4:3 OK yes 50017380002F0142 00FFFFFF Target yes
1:FC_Port:4:4 OK yes 50017380002F0143 00FFFFFF Initiator yes
1:FC_Port:5:2 OK yes 50017380002F0151 00328C5C Target yes
1:FC_Port:8:2 Failed no 50017380002F0181 00FFFFFF Target yes
1:FC_Port:8:4 Failed no 50017380002F0183 00FFFFFF Initiator yes
Current Rate Port State Link Type Error Count

(GBaud)
4 Online Fabric Direct Attach 0
0 Offline None 0
0 Offline None 0
0 Offline None 0
0 Offline None 0
0 Offline None 0
0 Offline None 0
0 Offline None 0
0 Offline None 0
0 Offline None 0
0 Offline None 0
0 Offline None 0
0 Offline None 0
3. Repeat the following steps for each Fibre Channel port that is in the Failed
state:
a. Run the component_test command for the failed Fibre Channel port (for
example, component_test component=1:FC_port:8:2).
b. Run the fc_port_list command to display the status of all Fibre Channel
ports, and verify that the component-tested port is in the OK state.
c. If the port is still in the Failed state, wait 60 seconds, and run the
component_test command again for the failed port.
d. If the port is still in the Failed state, contact your next level of support.
Running the rack cabling verification test

Use this procedure to verify that the system components, internal connectivity, and
external connections for a newly installed custom rack XIV system are configured
correctly.
Before you begin
XIV system code V11.4.x or later must be installed on the XIV system. The system
must be healthy for the tool to run.
About this task
IBM service representatives can verify custom rack machine assembly at the
customer site using the Technician Assistant tool. This test is mandatory for custom
racks, and optional for other types of racks.
Procedure
Complete the following steps to run the rack cabling verification test:
1. From the Technician Assistant tool, click Launch > Rack Cabling Verification.
The Rack Cabling Verification window is displayed.
2. Follow the instructions in the rack cabling verification utility.
Tips:
v Ensure that the cables are properly inserted into the patch panel. If part of
the test fails due to an improperly inserted cable, you will have to start the
rack cabling verification test from the very beginning.
v After the Fibre Channel connectivity test has completed, you can remove
those cables for easier access to the patch panel to set up for the iSCSI
connectivity test.
v Your connection will be dropped during some of the test phases, and the
utility will display a message alerting you. Wait for the connection to be
restored. Do not click Cancel on the message box unless you want to exit the
utility.
Troubleshooting rear-door heat exchanger

This information describes how to resolve problems with the rear-door heat
exchanger
Repairing a leak in the water-supply circuit

Use this procedure to repair a leak in the water-supply circuit of the rear-door heat
exchanger.
Symptoms
There is a leak in the water-supply circuit of the rear-door heat exchanger.

1. Repair the leak in the user-supplied secondary loop of the water-circulation
system.
2. Reconnect the supply hose, if it is disconnected.
a. Align the male hose coupling with the female supply-manifold coupling.

b. Move the female collar upward.
c. Insert the male hose coupling. Exert upward pressure until the female collar
3. Reconnect the return hose, if it is disconnected.

a. Align the female hose coupling with the male return-manifold coupling.

b. Move the female collar downward and raise the coupling to the male
coupling.
c. Exert upward pressure until the female collar moves upward and ocks in
4. Turn on the flow of water from the pump unit to the heat exchanger.
5. Remove any air that entered the heat exchanger through the hoses (see
“Purging air from the heat exchanger” on page 296).
Chapter 10. Parts listing
All replaceable parts for the IBM XIV Storage System are to be replaced by trained
IBM personnel in response to customer problem reports or the addition of optional
parts that the customer orders from IBM as field upgrades.
Components FRUs
This information lists replaceable hardware components in the IBM XIV Storage
System.
Attention: The regional designations are general. The ATS assigned to the
regional designation might not be accurate for your country. If the input voltage
for the country uses a wye circuit, use the appropriate ATS and main-power cables
for EMEA (Europe, Middle East, and Africa) and Asia/Pacific. If input voltage for
the country uses a delta circuit, use the appropriate ATS and main-power cables
for United States, Canada, Latin America. For more information about electric
currents for various countries, see the International Trade Administration website
(http://www.trade.gov/mas/ian/ecw/all.html).
Part numbers for IBM field-replaceable units (FRUs) are subject to change without
notice. The following table contains a listing of the FRU part numbers that are
available as of the date of this printing.
Table 25. XIV system component FRUs
Component FRU part number Comments
ATS, 60A, 1Ø 45W8824 (Models 281x-114 281x-214, and 281x-216
only)
60 A, single phase - worldwide

Note: The ATS concurrent cabling kit (part
number 45W5009) is required for concurrent
ATS replacement.
only)
60 A, three phase - United States, Canada,

Latin America, and Japan
ATS replacement.
ATS, 30A, 3Ø 98Y1539 (Models 281x-114 281x-214, and 281x-216
only)
30 A, three phase - Europe, Middle East,

and Asia/Pacific (except Japan)
This ATS has a more robust housekeeping

power-supply circuitry.
ATS replacement.

Table 25. XIV system component FRUs (continued)
only)
30A, three phase - United States, Canada,

Latin America, and Japan
ATS replacement.
ATS concurrent 45W5009 (Models 281x-114 281x-214, and 281x-216
replacement cable kit only)
Three single-phase, 30 A 250 VAC

main-power extension cables
ATS grounding 98Y1926 (Models 281x-114 281x-214, and 281x-216
screws and external only)
tooth washers
Includes an M5 screw and external tooth
washer for XIV models 281x-114, 281x-214,
281x-215, , and 281x-216 and M6 screw .
USB to Ethernet 45D3566 This adapter connects the Maintenance
Adapter Module on 10 GbE interface modules only.
Interface module 98Y1990 (Models 281x-114 only) Includes one Intel
Xeon E5620 processor,24 GB cache, and two
power supply units.
Does not include disk drive modules or an

SSD.
Upper or lower data 98Y1991 (Models 281x-114 only) Includes one Intel
module Xeon E5620 processor,24 GB cache, and two
power supply units.

SSD.
Important: This module is used as-is for
both upper and lower data modules. The
data module FRU has an Ethernet interface
card. When used as an upper data module,
the Ethernet card is not used.
Data or interface 98Y3317 (Models 281x-214 and 281x-215 only)
module – 1 GbE Includes one Intel Xeon E5645 processor, 48
GB cache, 1GbE Fibre Channel ports, and
two power supply units.
Does not include disk drives or an SSD.

Important: This module is used as-is for 1
GbE interface modules, upper data modules,
and lower data modules. The module FRU
has an Ethernet interface card and two Fibre
Channel cards. When used as a lower data
module, the Fibre Channel cards are not
used. When used as an upper data module,
the Ethernet and Fibre Channel cards are
not used.
Interface module – 98Y3319 (Models 281x-214 and 281x-215 only)
10 Gbe Includes one Intel Xeon E5645 processor, 48
GB cache, 10 GbE Fibre Channel ports, and
two power supply units.

SSD.
Important: This module is used for 10GbE
interface modules only.
Solid-state drive 99Y0720 1.8-inch SATA, 480 GB
(SSD)
Solid-state drive 98Y5060 Micron M500DC, 800 GB
(SSD) - 4 TB systems
only
Module 98Y3253 (Models 281x-114 only) For data modules
power-supply unit and interface modules
(PSU)
98Y3253 replaces 45W0425 and 99Y1243.
Module 98Y3343 (Models 281x-214 and 281x-215 only) For
power-supply unit data modules and interface modules
(PSU) – high
efficiency
Disk drive module 98Y2420 2 TB Mars-K or Muskie+
This FRU is also used for 1 TB limited

capacity option.
98Y2420 replaces 45W8286.

Disk drive module 45W7766 3 TB Mantaray or Mars-K
InfiniBand switch 98Y3756 CANNOT be ordered for the following
countries: Abu Dhabi, Algeria, Bahrain,
Comoros, Djibouti, Dubai, Iraq, Kuwait,
Lebanon, Libya, Malaysia, Morocco, Oman,
Pakistan, Qatar, Saudi Arabia, Somalia,
Tunisia, United Arab Emirates, or Yemen.
InfiniBand switch 98Y3374 Only to be ordered for the following
countries: Abu Dhabi, Algeria, Bahrain,
Comoros, Djibouti, Dubai, Iraq, Kuwait,
Lebanon, Libya, Malaysia, Morocco, Oman,
Pakistan, Qatar, Saudi Arabia, Somalia,
Tunisia, United Arab Emirates, and Yemen.
InfiniBand switch 98Y3579 (Models 281x-114, 281x-116, 281x-214,
power-supply unit 281x-215, and 281x-216)
All Countries.
InfiniBand switch fan 45W7268 (Models 281x-114, 281x-116, 281x-214,
unit 281x-215, and 281x-216)
All Countries.
Maintenance module 98Y3218 98Y3218 replaces 99Y0917.
Chapter 10. Parts listing 353

Modem 98Y3992 If you are ordering a modem for use in
Brazil, replug the modem into the cable that
exists in the IBM XIV Storage System. The
cable that comes with the modem FRU must
not be used and can be discard.
98Y3992 replaces 45W1776.

Uninterruptible 45W8942 (Models 281x-114 281x-214, and 281x-216
power supply only)
Does not include batteries or front bezel.

power supply only)
battery pair
Long life batteries.
power supply only)
network
management card The network management card is at the rear
of uninterruptible power supply.
Uninterruptible 25R5594 (Models 281x-114 281x-214, and 281x-216
power supply front only)
bezel
The front bezel is at the front of
Uninterruptible 458939 (Models 281x-114 281x-214, and 281x-216
power supply only)
power-off cover kit
Includes power-off cover and screws
Rear-door heat 32R0743 (Models 281x-114 and 281x-214 only)
exchanger
Self Encrypting 98Y3238 2 TB Hitachi Mars-K Plus HDD
Drive (SED)
2 TB Seagate Megalodon
Self Encrypting 98Y3239 3 TB Hitachi Mars-K Plus HDD
Drive (SED)
Self Encrypting 98Y3241 4 TB Hitachi Mars-K Plus HDD (can be
Drive (SED) used on SED and non-SED 4 TB systems)
Self Encrypting 98Y6214 6 TB SAS HDD
Drive (SED)
8 Gb Fibre Channel 42D0492 (Model 281x-114, 281x-214, 281x-215, and
Host Adapter small 281x-216 only)
form-factor
pluggable (SFP) SFP that provides an auto-negotiating
transceiver short-wave optical connection on the 8 Gb
Fibre Channel adapter
10 GbE 850 Nm Host 98Y6024 (Model 281x-214, 281x-215, and 281x-216
Adapter SFP only)
transceiver
SFP that provides an auto-negotiating
short-wave optical connection on the 10 Gb
Ethernet adapter
Cable FRUs
This information lists the part numbers for ordering all cable field replaceable units
(FRUs).
Serial cable FRUs

This information lists field replaceable units (FRUs) for the serial cables.
The following table lists the serial cable assembly FRUs.

Table 26. Serial cable FRUs
FRU part
Cable number Description
Module to module serial cable 45W9991 DB9 to USB cable
Module to InfiniBand switch serial 45W9992 RJ45 to USB cable
cable
Module to Uninterruptible power 45W9993 This kit contains two cables:
supply and ATS serial-cable kit v Module to Uninterruptible
power supply cable (DB9 to
USB)
v Module 1 to ATS ac-sensor cable
(RJ45 to USB)
Ethernet cable FRUs

This information lists field replaceable units (FRUs) for the Ethernet cables.
Table 27. Ethernet cable FRUs
Cable Part number
1 Gb Ethernet cable kit with purple 45W9986
connectors
10 Gb Ethernet cable kit with purple 98Y4104
connectors (model 281x-214 and 281x-215
only)
Ethernet cable kit with green connectors 45W9987
Ethernet cable kit with yellow connectors 98Y4036
Ethernet cable kit with red connectors 98Y4037
Ethernet cable kit with yellow and red 45W9990
connectors
Ethernet cable kit with blue connector (for 45W1481
technician use)
USB to Ethernet adapter 45D3566

Fibre Channel cable FRU
This information lists field replaceable units (FRUs) for the Fibre Channel cables.
Table 28. Fibre Channel cable FRU
Cable Part number
Fibre Channel cable kit 98Y4104
InfiniBand cable FRUs

This information lists field replaceable units (FRUs) for the InfiniBand cables.
Table 29. InfiniBand cables FRUs
Cables Part number
InfiniBand switch-to-switch cable with red 45W9994
and yellow connectors
InfiniBand switch-to-module cable kit with 45W9995
red connectors
InfiniBand switch-to-module cable kit with 45W9996
yellow connectors
Automatic transfer switch ac-sensor cable FRUs

This information lists field replaceable units (FRUs) for the automatic transfer
switch (ATS) ac-sensor cables.
These cables are for models 281x-114 281x-214, and 281x-216 only.
Table 30. ATS ac-sensor cable FRUs
Cable Part number Description
ATS to 45W6629 ATSX807-U3OUTPUT
uninterruptible power
supply 3
ATS to module 1 45W9993 ATSX801-M1USB1
One of two cables in this serial-cable kit

FRU.
Modem cable FRUs

This information lists field replaceable units (FRUs) for the modem cables.
Table 31. Modem cable FRUs
General modem cable 45W5196 Used worldwide, except Brazil.
Brazil modem cable 45W5197 Used in Brazil only. Order this modem
cable when you order a modem FRU for
Brazil.
Modem to 45W2259
maintenance module
cable
Front-door logo-LED cable FRU
This information lists the field replaceable unit (FRU) for the logo LED cable on
the front door.
These cables are for models 281x-114 and 281x-214 only.

Table 32. Front-door logo-LED cable FRU
Back-lit logo cable 99Y0475 CRV.LED-M5.mUSB
Host-attachment cable FRUs

This information lists field replaceable units (FRUs) for the cables that attach from
the patch panel to the host systems.
Table 33. Host-attachment cable FRUs
Cable Part number
Ethernet 22R1798
Fiber optic, LC to LC 12R9561
Fiber optic, LC to SC 12R9596
Main-power cable FRUs

This information lists field replaceable units (FRUs) for the main-power cables.
The XIV models 281x-114 281x-214, and 281x-216 are available in multiple
main-power cable configurations. The automatic transfer switch (ATS) is chosen
based on the required main-power cables.
Attention: The regional designations are general. The ATS assigned to the
regional designation might not be accurate for your country. If the input voltage
for the country uses a wye circuit, use the appropriate ATS and main-power cables
for EMEA (Europe, Middle East, and Africa) and Asia/Pacific. If input voltage for
the country uses a delta circuit, use the appropriate ATS and main-power cables
for United States, Canada, Latin America. For more information about electric
currents for various countries, see the International Trade Administration website
(http://www.trade.gov/mas/ian/ecw/all.html).
Table 34. Main-power cable FRUs
Main-power Main-power ATS
cable feature cable part ATS feature ATS FRU part manufacturer
code number code number part number Description
9811 45W0892 9890 45W5160 45W5159 United States, Canada, Latin
America, and Japan
Single-phase, 60 A, two wires

+ ground with plug
Ground
xiv10137

Table 34. Main-power cable FRUs (continued)
Main-power Main-power ATS
cable feature cable part ATS feature ATS FRU part manufacturer
code number code number part number Description
9813 45W0901 9890 45W5160 45W5159 Europe, Middle East,
Asia/Pacific (except Japan),
Australia, and New Zealand
Single-phase, 60 A, two wires

+ ground, hard wired
This cable does not come with

a connector. Hard-wired or
customer must supply the
connector.
America, and Japan
Three-phase delta, 60 A, three

wires + ground with plug
xiv10138
Ground
9822 45W3255 9892 45W5162 or 45W1816 or Europe, Middle East,

45W8828 45W8827 Asia/Pacific (except Japan),
Australia, and New Zealand
Three-phase wye, 30 A, three

wires + neutral + ground, hard
wired
Customer side is hard wired or

uses customer provided
connector.
America, and Japan
Three-phase delta, 30A, three

wires + ground with plug
Pin and sleeve connector to

customer service
Ground
xiv10139
Power cord FRUs

This information lists field replaceable units (FRUs) for the power cords.
The following table lists power cords are used to connect the components to the
power distribution units for models 281x-215.
Power cable kit 98Y42274 Kit includes 152 cm (5 ft),
244 (8 ft), and 305 (10 ft)
power cables with blue
connectors, 152 cm (5 ft) and
244 (8 ft) power cables with
red connectors, hook and
loop straps, and labels
The following table lists power cords are used to connect the components to the
uninterruptible power supplies for models 281x-114 281x-214, and 281x-216.

U1.6-N1P1 98Y1643 Straight cable, green-colored
boots
U2.6-N2P1 98Y1644 Straight cable, yellow-colored
boots
U3.7-N1P2 98Y1645 Straight cable, red-colored
boots
U3.6-N2P2 98Y1646 Straight cable, red-colored
boots
U1.1-M3P1/M2P1 98Y1647 Y cable, green-colored boots
U2.1-M3P2/M1P1 98Y1652 Y cable, yellow-colored boots
U3.1-M2P2/M1P2 98Y1657 Y cable, red-colored boots
ATSP4-CPWR 45W9376 Straight cable, black-colored
boots

Nonstocked FRUs
This information lists miscellaneous FRUs that are not stocked.
Table 35. Nonstocked component FRUs
Component Part number Comments
Uninterruptible power supply 45W3343 (Model 281x-114 281x-214, and
circuit breaker guards 281x-216 only)
Required according to ECA-007

(45W7673).
Radio frequency identification 74Y7652 Europe, Middle East, and Asia
device (RFID) tag
RFID tag 46K5362 United States, Canada, Latin
America, Asia/Pacific, and Japan
Standard front door 99Y1142 (Model 281x-114 and 281x-214
only)
Standard rear door 99Y1143 (Model 281x-114 and 281x-214
only)
If this FRU is ordered to replace

the rear door heat exchanger with
the standard rear door, the door
hinges also must be replaced.
Side panel without logo 05N6478 (Model 281x-114 and 281x-214
only)
Side panel with logo 74Y5815 (Model 281x-114 only)
Side panel with logo 00E6319 (Model 281x-214 only)
Door logo (lightplate) LED 45E6548 (Model 281x-114 and 281x-214
assembly only)
Chapter 11. Cable connections
This information provides a list of the cables that connect components in the XIV
system.
Each cable end is color-coded to aid with connecting cables correctly. In the
following figures, the cable connectors are color-coded to match the color of the
cable end that plugs in to the connector.
Data and interface module cable connections

This information identifies the cables that connect from the data and interface
modules to other components.
Upper data-module cable connections

This information identifies the cables that connect from the upper data modules 10
- 15 to other components.
Module 15 (M15)
The following figure shows the rear view of data module 15. Each cable connector
and power socket is color-coded to match the color of the cable end. The color of
the power sockets is different for each module.
InfiniBand ports
G2, G1
Data ports
Power socket P2 Serial port S1 A2, A1
xiv10182
Power socket P1 USB3 port
Figure 305. Cable connections for data module 15
Table 36. Module 15 cable connections

From To
Supported
Cable type models Label Component Port Color Component Port Color
Power 281x-114, U2.5-M15P2 Module 15 P2 Yellow Uninterruptible 5 Yellow
281x-214, power supply 2
281x-216

Table 36. Module 15 cable connections (continued)
From To
Supported
Power 281x-114, U1.5-M15P1 Module 15 P1 Green Uninterruptible 5 Green
281x-216
Power 281x-215 U2.33-M15P2 Module 15 P2 Red Power- 33 Red
distribution unit
2
Power 281x-215 U1.33-M15P1 Module 15 P1 Blue Power- 33 Blue
distribution unit
1
Ethernet All M15A2- Module 15 A2 Yellow Module 14 A1 Red
M14A1
Ethernet All M1A2- Module 15 A1 Red Module 1 A2 Yellow
MtopA1
Serial (DB9 All M15S1- Module 15 S1 Black Module 13 USB3 Black
to USB) M13USB3
Unused All Module 15 USB1
Serial (DB9 All M14S1- Module 15 USB3 Black Module 14 S1 Black
to USB) M15USB3
InfiniBand All N2.15-M15G2 Module 15 G2 Red InfiniBand 15 Red
switch 2
InfiniBand All N1.15-M15G1 Module 15 G1 Yellow InfiniBand 15 Yellow
switch 1
Module 14 (M14)
InfiniBand ports
G2, G1
Data ports
xiv10161
From To
Supported
Power 281x-114, U3.5-M14P2 Module 14 P2 Red Uninterruptible 5 Red
281x-216
281x-216
distribution unit
2
distribution unit
1
M13A1
M14A1 (see
note)
to USB) M15USB3
to USB) M14USB3
switch 2
switch 1
Note: For XIV systems with a 14-module configuration, the cable that is labeled M15A2-M14A1 is not used. Instead,
the cable that is labeled M1A2-MtopA1 connects to port A1 in module 14 (the highest module in the rack).
Module 13 (M13)
Chapter 11. Cable connections 363

InfiniBand ports
G2, G1
Data ports
xiv10181

From To
Supported
281x-216
281x-216
distribution unit
2
distribution unit
1
M12A1
M13A1 (see
note)
to USB) M14USB3
to USB) M13USB3
switch 2
switch 1
Module 12 (M12)
InfiniBand ports
G2, G1
Data ports
xiv10182

From To
Supported
281x-216
281x-216
distribution unit
2
distribution unit
1
M11A1
M12A1 (see
note)
to USB) M10USB3
to USB) M12USB3
switch 2
switch 1

From To
Supported
Module 11 (M11)
InfiniBand ports
G2, G1
Data ports
xiv10161

From To
Supported
281x-216
281x-216
distribution unit
2
distribution unit
1
M10A1
M11A1 (see
note)
to USB) M12USB3
From To
Supported
to USB) M11USB3
switch 2
switch 1
Note: For XIV systems with an 11-module configuration, the cable that is labeled M12A2-M11A1 is not used.
Instead, the cable that is labeled M1A2-MtopA1 connects to port A1 in module 11 (the highest module in the rack).
Module 10 (M10)
InfiniBand ports
G2, G1
Data ports
xiv10181

From To
Supported
281x-216
281x-216
distribution unit
2
distribution unit
1
Ethernet All M10A2-M9A1 Module 10 A2 Yellow Module 9 A1 Red

From To
Supported
M10A1 (see
note)
to USB) M11USB3
to USB) M10USB3
switch 2
switch 1
Interface-module cable connections

This information identifies the cables that connect from the interface modules 4 - 9
The following tables list cable connections for the interface modules 4 - 9
Note: Interface modules have either four 1 Gb Ethernet ports or two 10 Gb

Ethernet ports.
Module 9 (M9)
1Gb Ethernet ports

Fibre Channel ports F4, F3, F2, F1
D2, D1, E2, E1
Serial port S1
Data ports InfiniBand ports
Power socket P2 A2, A1 G2, G1
xiv10159
Figure 311. Cable connections for data module 9 with 1 Gb Ethernet ports
10Gb optical Ethernet ports
F2, F1
Fibre Channel ports
D2, D1, E2, E1
Serial port S1
xiv10419

From To
Supported
281x-216
281x-216
distribution unit
2
distribution unit
1
Ethernet All M10A2-M9A1 Module 9 A1 Red Module 10 A2 Yellow
3

to USB) M7USB3
to USB) M9USB3
Fibre All P6FM9.1- Module 9 D1 White Patch panel 6 F1 White
Channel M9D1
Channel M9D2
Fibre All P6FM9.3- Module 9 E1 White Patch panel 6 F3 White
Channel M9E1
Channel M9E2

From To
Supported
1
1 Gb All P6M9.1-M9F1 Module 9 F1 Purple Patch panel 6 1 Purple
Ethernet
1 Gb All 1 P6M9.2-M9F2 Module 9 F2 Purple Patch panel 6 2 Purple
Ethernet
Ethernet
Ethernet
10 Gb 281x-214 2, P6EM9.1- Module 9 F1 White Patch panel 6 E1 White
Ethernet 281x-215 2 M9F1
switch 2
switch 1
Note:
1. These cables are only for interface modules with four 1 Gb Ethernet ports.
2. These cables are only for interface modules with two 10 Gb Ethernet ports.
3. For XIV systems with a nine-module configuration, the cable that is labeled M10A2-M9A1 is not used. Instead,
Module 8 (M8)
1Gb Ethernet ports

D2, D1, E2, E1
Serial port S1
xiv10184

USB3 port

From To
Supported
281x-216
281x-216
distribution unit
2
distribution unit
1
to USB) M9USB3
to USB) M8USB3
Channel M8D1
Channel M8D2
Channel M8E1
Channel M8E2

From To
Supported
1
Ethernet
Ethernet
Ethernet
Ethernet
switch 2
switch 1
Note:
Module 7 (M7)
1Gb Ethernet ports

D2, D1, E2, E1
Serial port S1
xiv10185

From To
Supported
281x-216
281x-216
distribution unit
2
distribution unit
1
to USB) M8USB3
to USB) M7USB3
Channel M7D1
Channel M7D2
Channel M7E1
Channel M7E2
Ethernet

From To
Supported
1
Ethernet
Ethernet
Ethernet
switch 2
switch 1
Note:
Module 6 (M6)
1Gb Ethernet ports

D2, D1, E2, E1
Serial port S1
xiv10159
10Gb optical Ethernet ports
F2, F1
Fibre Channel ports
D2, D1, E2, E1
Serial port S1
xiv10419

From To
Supported
281x-216
281x-216
distribution unit
2
distribution unit
1
3
to USB) M4USB3
Serial (DB9 All U3S1- Module 6 USB1 Black Uninterruptible S1 Black
to USB) M6USB1 power supply 3
to USB) M6USB3
Channel M6D1
Channel M6D2
Channel M6E1
Channel M6E2

From To
Supported
1
1GbE All P3M6.1-M6F1 Module 6 F1 Purple Patch panel 3 1 Purple
Ethernet
1GbE All 1 P3M6.2-M6F2 Module 6 F2 Purple Patch panel 3 2 Purple
Ethernet
Ethernet
Ethernet
switch 2
switch 1
Note:
3. For XIV systems with a nine-module configuration, the cable that is labeled M10A2-M9A1 is not used. Instead,
Module 5 (M5)
The following figures show the front and rear views of data module 5. Each cable
connector and power socket is color-coded to match the color of the cable end. The
color of the power sockets is different for each module.
mUSB port
xiv10207
Figure 319. Cable connections for data module 5 (front view)
1Gb Ethernet ports
D2, D1, E2, E1
Serial port S1
xiv10184
USB3 port
Figure 320. Cable connections for data module 5 with 1 Gb Ethernet ports (rear view)
Figure 321. Cable connections for data module 5 with 10 Gb Ethernet ports (rear view)

From To
Supported
281x-216
281x-216
distribution unit
2
distribution unit
1
Power All CRV.LED- Module 5 mUSB Black Front cover logo LED Black
M5.mUSB LED

From To
Supported
Serial (DB9 All M5S1-M6USB3 Module 5 S1 Black Module 6 USB3 Black
to USB)
Serial (DB9 All U2S1-M5USB1 Module 5 USB1 Black Uninterruptible S1 Black
to USB) power supply 2
Serial (DB9 All M4S1-M5USB3 Module 5 USB3 Black Module 4 S1 Black
to USB)
Serial (DB9 All N2.CONSOLE- Module 5 USB4 Black InfiniBand Console Red
to USB) M5USB4 switch 2
Fibre All P2FM5.1-M5D1 Module 5 D1 White Patch panel 2 F1 White
Channel
Channel
Fibre All P2FM5.3-M5E1 Module 5 E1 White Patch panel 2 F3 White
Channel
Channel
Ethernet
Ethernet
Ethernet
Ethernet
10 Gb 281x-214 2, P2EM5.1-M5F1 Module 5 F1 White Patch panel 2 E1 White
Ethernet 281x-215 2
Ethernet 281x-215 2
switch 2
switch 1
Note:
Module 4 (M4)

From To
Supported
281x-216
281x-216
distribution unit
2
distribution unit
1
Serial (DB9 All M4S1-M5USB3 Module 4 S1 Black Module 5 USB3 Black
to USB)
Serial (DB9 All U1S1-M4USB1 Module 4 USB1 Black Uninterruptible S1 Black
to USB) power supply 1
RJ45 to 281x-214 2, CA1-M4USB2 Module 4 USB2 Black Maintenance A1 Yellow
USB 281x-215 2 module
Unused All 1 Module 4 USB2
Serial (DB9 All M6S1-M4USB3 Module 4 USB3 Black Module 6 S1 Black
to USB)
Serial (DB9 All N1.CONSOLE- Module 4 USB4 Black InfiniBand Console Yellow
to USB) M4USB4 switch 1
Channel
Channel

From To
Supported
Channel
Channel
Ethernet
Ethernet
1 Gb All 1 CA1-M4F3 Module 4 F3 Yellow Maintenance A1 Yellow
Ethernet module
1 Gb All 1 UT1-M4F4 Module 4 F4 Purple Utility panel T1 Purple
Ethernet
Ethernet 281x-215 2
Ethernet 281x-215 2
switch 2
switch 1
Note:
Lower data-module cable connections

This information identifies the cables that connect from the lower data modules 1-3
Module 3 (M3)
InfiniBand ports
G2, G1
Data ports 1Gb Ethernet ports
Power socket P2 Serial port S1 A2, A1 F4, F3, F2, F1
xiv10158
USB2 port (model 281x-214 only)

From To
Supported
281x-216
281x-216
distribution unit
2
distribution unit
1
to USB) M1USB3
2
Ethernet 281x-214 , CA2-M3USB2 Module 3 USB2 Black Maintenance A2 Red
281x-215 2 module
Unused All 1 Module 3 USB2
to USB) M3USB3
Ethernet All UM1-M3F1 Module 3 F1 Purple Utility panel M1 Purple
Ethernet All UV1-M3F2 Module 3 F2 Purple Utility panel V1 Purple
2
Ethernet 281x-214 , UT1-M3F3 Module 3 F3 Purple Utility panel T1 Purple
281x-215 2
Ethernet All 1 CA2-M3F3 Module 3 F3 Red Maintenance A2 Red
module
Ethernet 281x-114 U3N1-M3F4 Module 3 F4 Red Uninterruptible N1 Red
power supply 3

From To
Supported
switch 2
switch 1
Note:
Module 2 (M2)
InfiniBand ports
G2, G1
xiv10180

From To
Supported
281x-216
281x-216
distribution unit
2
distribution unit
1
to USB) M3USB3
From To
Supported
to USB) M2USB3
Ethernet All UT2-M2F2 Module 2 F2 Purple Utility panel T2 Purple
Ethernet All M2F3- Module 2 F3 Red InfiniBand MGT Red
N2MGT switch 2
Ethernet 281x-114, U2N1-M2F4 Module 2 F4 Yellow Uninterruptible N1 Yellow
281x-214 power supply 2
switch 2
switch 1
Module 1 (M1)
InfiniBand ports
G2, G1
xiv10179
Power socket P1 USB1 port USB3 port

From To
Supported
281x-216
281x-216

From To
Supported
distribution unit
2
distribution unit
1
Ethernet All M1A2- Module 1 A2 Yellow Highest module A1 Red
MtopA1 (see in the rack
notes 1 and 2)
to USB) M2USB3
Serial (RJ45 281x-114, ATSX801- Module 1 USB1 Black Automatic X801 Blue
to USB) 281x-214, M1USB1 transfer switch
281x-216
to USB) M1USB3
Ethernet All UV2-M1F2 Module 1 F2 Purple Utility panel V2 Purple
Ethernet All M1F3- Module 1 F3 Yellow InfiniBand MGT Yellow
N1MGT switch 1
Ethernet 281x-114, U1N1-M1F4 Module 1 F4 Green Uninterruptible N1 Green
281x-216
switch 2
switch 1
Notes:
1. Cable M1A2-MtopA1 connects from module 1 to the highest module in the XIV system. For example, if the XIV
system contains six modules, this cable connects to module 6. If the XIV system contains 15 modules, this cable
connects to module 15.
2. In some XIV systems, this cable is labeled M1A2-M15PA1.
InfiniBand switch cable connections

This information identifies the cables that connect from the InfiniBand switches to
other components.
InfiniBand switch 2 (N2)

Figure 326 on page 385 and Figure 327 on page 385 show the front and rear view
of InfiniBand switch 2. Each cable connector and power socket is color-coded to
match the color of the cable end. The color of the cable connector and power
sockets is different for each InfiniBand switch. Figure 328 on page 385 shows the
sequence of the InfiniBand ports at the rear of the switch.
xiv10164
Figure 326. Cable connections on front side of InfiniBand switch 2
InfiniBand ports 1-18
IS5030
MGMT CONSOLE
Power
PSU 1
PSU 2
FAN
RST
xiv10165
InfiniBand ports 19-36 RJ45-to-serial Ethernet
Figure 327. Cable connections on rear side of InfiniBand switch 2
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18
xiv10096
19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36
The following table lists cable connections for InfiniBand switch 2. Ports 18 - 36 are
not used.
Table 51. InfiniBand switch 2 cable connections
From To
Supported
Power 281x-114, U3.6-N2P2 Switch 2 P2 Red Uninterruptible 6 Red
281x-216
Power 281x-114, U2.6-N2P1 Switch 2 P1 Yellow Uninterruptible 6 Yellow
281x-216
Power 281x-215 U2.27-N2P2 Switch 2 P2 Red Power- 27 Red
distribution unit
2
Power 281x-215 U1.27-N2P1 Switch 2 P1 Blue Power- 27 Blue
distribution unit
1
InfiniBand All N2.1-M1G2 Switch 2 1 Red Module 1 G2 Red

Table 51. InfiniBand switch 2 cable connections (continued)
From To
Supported
InfiniBand All N2.16-N1.16 Switch 2 16 Red InfiniBand 16 Yellow
switch 1
InfiniBand All N2.17-N1.17 Switch 2 17 Red InfiniBand 17 Yellow
switch 1
InfiniBand All Unused Switch 2 18 - 36
Serial (RJ45 All N2.CONSOLE- Switch 2 Console Red Module 5 USB4 Black
to USB) M5USB4
Ethernet All M2F3-N2MGT Switch 2 MGT Red Module 2 F3 Red
InfiniBand switch 1 (N1)

Figure 329 and Figure 330 on page 387 show the front and rear view of InfiniBand
switch 2. Each cable connector and power socket is color-coded to match the color
of the cable end. The color of the cable connector and power sockets is different for
each InfiniBand switch. Figure 331 on page 387 shows the sequence of the
InfiniBand ports at the rear of the switch.

xiv10162

Figure 329. Cable connections on front of InfiniBand switch 1
InfiniBand ports 1-18
IS5030
MGMT CONSOLE
Power
PSU 1
PSU 2
FAN
RST
xiv10163
InfiniBand ports 19-36 RJ45-to-serial Ethernet
Figure 330. Cable connections on rear of InfiniBand switch 1
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18
xiv10096
19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36
The following table lists cable connections for InfiniBand switch 1. Ports 18 - 36 are
not used.
Table 52. InfiniBand switch 1 cable connections
From To
Supported
Power 281x-114, U3.7-N1P2 Switch 1 P2 Red Uninterruptible 7 Red
281x-216
Power 281x-114, U1.6-N1P1 Switch 1 P1 Green Uninterruptible 6 Green
281x-216
Power 281x-215 U2.15-N1P2 Switch 1 P2 Red Power- 15 Red
distribution unit
2
Power 281x-215 U1.15-N1P1 Switch 1 P1 Blue Power- 15 Blue
distribution unit
1
InfiniBand All N1.1-M1G1 Switch 1 1 Yellow Module 1 G1 Yellow

Table 52. InfiniBand switch 1 cable connections (continued)
From To
Supported
InfiniBand All N1.16-N2.16 Switch 1 16 Yellow InfiniBand 16 Red
switch 2
InfiniBand All N1.17-N2.17 Switch 1 17 Yellow InfiniBand 17 Red
switch 2
InfiniBand All Unused Switch 1 18 - 36
Serial (RJ45 All N1.CONSOLE- Switch 1 Console Yellow Module 4 USB4 Black
to USB) M4USB4
Ethernet All M1F3-N1MGT Switch 1 MGT Yellow Module 1 F3 Yellow
Maintenance module cable connections

This information identifies the cables that connect from the maintenance module to
other components.
The following figure shows the rear view of the maintenance module.
Figure 332. Maintenance module cabling ports
Table 53 lists cable connections for 1 Gb Ethernet configurations of the

maintenance modules. Table 54 on page 389 lists cable connections for 10 Gb
Ethernet configurations of maintenance modules.
Table 53. Maintenance module cable connections for 1 Gb Ethernet configuration systems
From To
Supported
Cable type models Label Component Port Component Port Color
Power 281x-114, ATSP4-CPWR Maintenance PWR Automatic transfer P4 Black
281x-214, module switch
281x-216
Table 53. Maintenance module cable connections for 1 Gb Ethernet configuration systems (continued)
From To
Supported
Power 281x-215 U1.3-CPWR Maintenance PWR Power-distribution 3 Blue
module unit 1
Ethernet All CA1-M4F3 Maintenance A1 Module 4 F3 Yellow
module
Ethernet All CA2-M3F3 Maintenance A2 Module 3 F3 Red
module
Ethernet All CC1-UMA1 Maintenance C1 Utility panel MA1 Purple
module
module
USB All C.USB1- Maintenance USB1 Modem USBR Black
M.USBR module
Table 54. Maintenance module cable connections for 10 Gb Ethernet configuration systems
From To
Supported
Power 281x-114, ATSP4-CPWR Maintenance PWR Automatic transfer P4 Black
281x-214, module switch
281x-216
Power 281x-215 U1.3-CPWR Maintenance PWR Power-distribution 3 Blue
module unit 1
RJ45 to USB 281x-214, CA1-M4USB2 Maintenance A1 Module 4 USB2 Black
281x-215 module
RJ45 to USB 281x-214, CA2-M3USB2 Maintenance A2 Module 3 USB2 Black
281x-215 module
Ethernet All CA1-M4F3 Maintenance A1 Module 4 F3 Yellow
module
Ethernet All CA2-M3F3 Maintenance A2 Module 3 F3 Red
module
module
module
USB All C.USB1- Maintenance USB1 Modem USBR Black
M.USBR module
Uninterruptible power-supply cable connections

This information identifies the cables that connect from the uninterruptible power
supplies to other components.
Uninterruptible power supply 3 (U3)

Figure 333 on page 390 shows the rear view of uninterruptible power supply 3
Each cable connector and power socket is color-coded to match the color of the
cable end. The color of the power sockets is different for each uninterruptible
power supply. Figure 334 on page 390 shows the number scheme for the 10-Amp

power sockets.

ATS ac-sensor port

and guard (N1)
xiv10148
10 Amp power sockets Serial port
(S1)
Figure 333. Uninterruptible power-supply 3cable ports
Power socket
1 2 3 4
xiv10235
5 6 7 8
The following table lists cable connections for uninterruptible power supply 3.
Table 55. Uninterruptible power supply 3 cable connections
From To
Connector Connector
Cable type Label Component Port color Component Port color
Power n/a Uninterruptible hard Black Automatic P3 Black
power supply 3 wired transfer switch
Power U3.1-M2P2/ Uninterruptible 1 Red Module 2 P2 Red
M1P2 power supply 3
Module 1 P2 Red
M4P2 power supply 3
Module 4 P2 Red
M7P2 power supply 3
Module 7 P2 Red
M10P2 power supply 3
Module 10 P2 Red
Module 13 P2 Red
Table 55. Uninterruptible power supply 3 cable connections (continued)
From To
Connector Connector
Power U3.6-N2P2 Uninterruptible 6 Red InfiniBand P2 Red
power supply 3 switch 2
Power U3.7-N1P2 Uninterruptible 7 Red InfiniBand P2 Red
Unused Uninterruptible 8
power supply 3
Serial (DB9 U3S1-M6USB1 Uninterruptible S1 Black Module 6 USB1 Black
to USB power supply 3
Sensor ATSX807- Uninterruptible Output Blue Automatic X807 Green
U3OUTPUT power supply 3 transfer switch
Ethernet U3N1-M3F4 Uninterruptible N1 Red Module 3 F4 Red
power supply 3

Figure 335 shows the rear view of uninterruptible power supply 2. Each cable
connector and power socket is color-coded to match the color of the cable end. The
color of the power sockets is different for each uninterruptible power supply.
Figure 336 on page 392 shows the number scheme for the 10-Amp power sockets.

ATS ac-sensor port

and guard (N1)
xiv10147

(S1)
Figure 335. Uninterruptible power-supply 2 cable ports

Power socket
1 2 3 4
xiv10235
5 6 7 8
From To
Connector Connector
Power U2.1-M3P2/ Uninterruptible 1 Yellow Module 3 P2 Yellow
M1P1 power supply 2
Module 1 P1 Yellow
M4P1 power supply 2
Module 4 P1 Yellow
M7P1 power supply 2
Module 7 P1 Yellow
U2.4- M10P1 power supply 2
Module 10 P1 Yellow
Module 13 P1 Yellow
Power U2.6-N2P1 Uninterruptible 6 Yellow InfiniBand P1 Yellow
power supply 2
power supply 2
Unused Uninterruptible Output
power supply 2
Ethernet U2N1-M2F4 Uninterruptible N1 Yellow Module 2 F4 Yellow
power supply 2

Figure 337 on page 393 shows the rear view of uninterruptible power supply 1.
Each cable connector and power socket is color-coded to match the color of the
cable end. The color of the power sockets is different for each uninterruptible
power supply. Figure 338 on page 393 shows the number scheme for the 10-Amp
power sockets.

ATS ac-sensor port

and guard (N1)
xiv10146
(S1)
Figure 337. Uninterruptible power-supply 1 cable ports
Power socket
1 2 3 4
xiv10235
5 6 7 8
From To
Connector Connector
Power U1.1-M3P1/ Uninterruptible 1 Green Module 3 P1 Green
M2P1 power supply 1
Module 2 P1 Green
M5P1 power supply 1
Module 5 P1 Green
Module 8 P1 Green
M8P1 power supply 1
Module 11 P1 Green
Module 14 P1 Green

Table 57. Uninterruptible power supply 1 cable connections (continued)
From To
Connector Connector
Power U1.6-N1P1 Uninterruptible 6 Green InfiniBand P1 Green
power supply 1
power supply 1
Unused Uninterruptible Output
power supply 1
Ethernet U1N1-M1F4 Uninterruptible N1 Green Module 1 F4 Green
power supply 1
Automatic transfer switch cable connections

This information identifies the cables that connect from the automatic transfer
switch to other components.
Figure 339 on page 395 shows the side view of the automatic transfer switch. Each
cable connector and power socket is color-coded to match the color of the cable
end.
Maintenance
Maintenance module
module
circuit breaker
power cord
Power output
LED
P3 F3
Uninterruptible
F1
P1
xiv10213
Figure 339. ATS cable ports
The following table lists cable connections for the automatic transfer switch.
Table 58. Automatic transfer switch cable connections
From To
Connector Connector
Main power n/a ATS J1 Black Customer power A Black
circuit
Main power n/a ATS J2 Black Customer power B Black
circuit
Power n/a ATS P1 Black Uninterruptible Hard Black
power supply 1 wired
Power ATSP4-CPWR ATS P4 Black Maintenance PWR Black
module
Power Unused ATS P5
Power Unused ATS P6

Table 58. Automatic transfer switch cable connections (continued)
From To
Connector Connector
Serial (RJ45 ATSX801- ATS X801 Blue Module 1 USB1 Black
to USB) M1USB1
Sensor ATSX807- ATS X807 Green Uninterruptible Output Blue
U3OUTPUT power supply 3
Power-distribution-unit cable connections

This information identifies the cables that connect from the power-distribution
units (PDUs) to other components.
The following figure shows the PDUs at the rear of the rack. PDU 1 is on the left
and is used for power cables with blue connectors. PDU 2 is on the right, and is
used for power cables with red connectors. Each cable connector and power socket
is color-coded to match the color of the cable end. Not all ports in the PDUs are
used.
36
30
35
29
PDU2 34
PDU1 28
33
27
32
26
31
25
Phase 3
24
18
23
17
22
16
21
15
20
14
Phase 2
19
13
12
6
11
5
Phase 1 10
4
9
3
8
2
7
1
xiv10425
Figure 340. Power-distribution-unit cable ports
Power-distribution unit 2 (U2)

The following table lists cable connections for the power-distribution-unit.
Table 59. Power-distribution-unit cable connections.
From To
Connector Connector
Power U2.33-M15P2 PDU 2 33 Red Module 15 P2 Red

Table 59. Power-distribution-unit cable connections (continued).
From To
Connector Connector
Power U2.27-N2P2 PDU 2 27 Red Switch 2 P2 Red
Power-distribution unit 1 (U1)

The following table lists cable connections for the power-distribution-unit.
Table 60. Power-distribution-unit cable connections.
From To
Connector Connector
Table 60. Power-distribution-unit cable connections (continued).
From To
Connector Connector
Power U1.3-CPWR PDU 1 3 Red Maintenance PWR Red
module
Patch panel cable connections

This information identifies the cables that connect from the utility patch panels and
host-connections patch panel to other components.
Utility patch panel (U) cable connections

This information identifies the cables that connect from the utility patch panel to
other components in the XIV system.
System cables connect to the rear of the patch panel. Customer cables connect to
the front of the patch panel.
The following figure shows port connections on the utility patch panel.
RMM
M 1
A
I RMM
N
T 2
Spare
Module 3
M 1
A
N Module 2
A
G 2
E
M
E Module 1
N
T 3
Module 3
1
V
P Module 1
N
2
Module 3
1
T
E
C Module 2
H
2
Modem
xiv10088

Table 61. Utility panel cables
From To
Supported
Ethernet All CC1-UMA1 Utility panel MA1 Purple Maintenance C1 Purple
module
Ethernet All CC2-UMA2 Utility panel MA2 Purple Maintenance C2 Purple
module
Ethernet All Unused Utility panel MA3
Ethernet All UM1-M3F1 Utility panel M1 Purple Module 3 F1 Purple
Ethernet All UV1-M3F2 Utility panel V1 Purple Module 3 F2 Purple
Ethernet All UV2-M1F2 Utility panel V2 Purple Module 1 F2 Purple
Ethernet 281x-214 UT1-M3F3 Utility panel T1 Purple Module 3 F3 Purple
2,281x-215 2
Ethernet All 1 UT1-M4F4 Utility panel T1 Purple Module 4 F4 Purple
Ethernet All UT2-M2F2 Utility panel T2 Purple Module 2 F2 Purple
Telephone All CMOD- Utility panel Modem Black Modem MOD Black
UMOD
Note:
1GbE host-connections patch-panel cable connections

This information identifies the cables that connect from the host-connections patch
panel (with Fibre Channel and 1GbE Ethernet ports) to other components in the
XIV system.
The following figure shows ports on host-connections patch panels 1 - 6.
Module
1 1
F
I
B
R 2 2
E i
S
C C
H S
A 3 I 3
N
N
E
xiv10087
L 4 4
Patch panel 6 (P6)
Table 62. Patch panel 6 cable connections
From To
Connector Connector
Fibre P6FM9.1-M9D1 Patch panel 6 F1 White Module 9 D1 White
Channel
Channel
Fibre P6FM9.3-M9E1 Patch panel 6 F3 White Module 9 E1 White
Channel
Channel
Ethernet P6M9.1-M9F1 Patch panel 6 1 Purple Module 9 F1 Purple
Patch panel 5 (P5)

From To
Connector Connector
Channel
Channel
Channel
Channel
Patch panel 4 (P4)

From To
Connector Connector
Channel
Channel

Table 64. Patch panel 4 cable connections (continued)
From To
Connector Connector
Channel
Channel
Patch panel 3 (P3)

From To
Connector Connector
Channel
Channel
Channel
Channel
Patch panel 2 (P2)

From To
Connector Connector
Channel
Channel
Channel
Channel
From To
Connector Connector
Patch panel 1 (P1)

From To
Connector Connector
Channel
Channel
Channel
Channel
Ethernet Unused Patch panel 1 3
Ethernet Unused Patch panel 1 4
10 GbE host-connections patch-panel cable connections

This information identifies the cables that connect from the host-connections patch
panel (with Fibre Channel and 10 Gb Ethernet ports) to other components in the
XIV system.
The following figure shows ports on host-connections patch panels 1 - 6.

Module
1
F
I
B
R 2 1 1
E 0
C G
H b
A 3 E 2
N
N
E
xiv10424
L 4
Figure 342. Host-connections patch panel with Fibre Channel and 10 Gb Ethernet iSCSI
ports
Patch panel 6 (P6)

From To
Connector Connector
Channel
Channel
Channel
Channel
10 Gb P6EM9.1-M9F1 Patch panel 6 E1 White Module 9 F1 White
Ethernet
Ethernet
Patch panel 5 (P5)

From To
Connector Connector
Channel
Channel
Channel
Channel
Ethernet
From To
Connector Connector
Ethernet
Patch panel 4 (P4)

From To
Connector Connector
Channel
Channel
Channel
Channel
Ethernet
Ethernet
Patch panel 3 (P3)

From To
Connector Connector
Channel
Channel
Channel
Channel
10 Gb P3EM6.1-M6F1 Patch panel 3 E1 Purple Module 6 F1 White
Ethernet
10 Gb P3EM6.2-M6F2 Patch panel 3 E2 Purple Module 6 F2 White
Ethernet

Patch panel 2 (P2)
From To
Connector Connector
Channel
Channel
Channel
Channel
Ethernet
Ethernet
Patch panel 1 (P1)

From To
Connector Connector
Channel
Channel
Channel
Channel
Ethernet
Ethernet
Modem cable connection

This information identifies the cables that connect from the modem to the utility
panel.
The following figure shows the top view of the modem.
MOD port
xiv10166
Figure 343. Modem
The following table lists the cable connections for the modem.
Table 74. Modem cable connection
From To
Connector Connector
Telephone CMOD-UMOD Modem MOD Black Utility panel Modem Black
USB to USB Modem USBR Black Maintenance mUSB Black
module
Front-door logo LED cable connection

This information lists the cable that connects from the logo LED on the inside of
the front door to module 5.
Figure 344 on page 408 shows the inside view of the rack front door where the
logo LED is located.

LED port
Front door Power cable

(inside)
xiv10214
Figure 344. Front-door logo LED cable
The following table lists the cable connection for the front-door logo LED.
Table 75. Front-door logo LED cable connection
From To
Supported
Power Model CRV.LED- Front door logo LED Black Module 5 mUSB Black
281x-114, M5.mUSB LED
281x-214
(see note)
Note: This cable might be disconnected for XIV systems running code V11.2.x and later. If this cable is not
connected in the XIV system that you are servicing, do not reconnect it.
Notices
The legal notices pertain to IBM XIV Storage System documentation.
This information was developed for products and services offered in the U.S.A.
IBM may not offer the products, services, or features discussed in this document in
other countries. Consult your local IBM representative for information on the
products and services currently available in your area. Any reference to an IBM
product, program, or service is not intended to state or imply that only that IBM
product, program, or service may be used. Any functionally equivalent product,
program, or service that does not infringe any IBM intellectual property right may
be used instead. However, it is the user's responsibility to evaluate and verify the
operation of any non-IBM product, program, or service.
IBM may have patents or pending patent applications covering subject matter
described in this document. The furnishing of this document does not grant you
any license to these patents. You can send license inquiries, in writing, to:
IBM Director of Licensing

IBM Corporation
North Castle Drive
Armonk, NY 10504-1785
U.S.A.
The following paragraph does not apply to the United Kingdom or any other
country where such provisions are inconsistent with local law:
INTERNATIONAL BUSINESS MACHINES CORPORATION PROVIDES THIS
PUBLICATION "AS IS" WITHOUT WARRANTY OF ANY KIND, EITHER
EXPRESS OR IMPLIED, INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, THE IMPLIED
WARRANTIES OF NON-INFRINGEMENT, MERCHANTABILITY OR FITNESS
FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE. Some states do not allow disclaimer of express or
implied warranties in certain transactions, therefore, this statement may not apply
to you.
This information could include technical inaccuracies or typographical errors.

Changes are periodically made to the information herein; these changes will be
incorporated in new editions of the publication. IBM may make improvements
and/or changes in the product(s) and/or the program(s) described in this
publication at any time without notice.
Any references in this information to non-IBM Web sites are provided for
convenience only and do not in any manner serve as an endorsement of those Web
sites. The materials at those Web sites are not part of the materials for this IBM
product and use of those Web sites is at your own risk.
IBM may use or distribute any of the information you supply in any way it
believes appropriate without incurring any obligation to you.
Any performance data contained herein was determined in a controlled

environment. Therefore, the results obtained in other operating environments may
vary significantly. Some measurements may have been made on development-level
systems and there is no guarantee that these measurements will be the same on

generally available systems. Furthermore, some measurements may have been
estimated through extrapolation. Actual results may vary. Users of this document
should verify the applicable data for their specific environment.
Information concerning non-IBM products was obtained from the suppliers of

those products, their published announcements or other publicly available sources.
IBM has not tested those products and cannot confirm the accuracy of
performance, compatibility or any other claims related to non-IBM products.
Questions on the capabilities of non-IBM products should be addressed to the
suppliers of those products.
All statements regarding IBM's future direction or intent are subject to change or
withdrawal without notice, and represent goals and objectives only.
All IBM prices shown are IBM's suggested retail prices, are current and are subject
to change without notice. Dealer prices may vary.
This information is for planning purposes only. The information herein is subject to
change before the products described become available.
This information contains examples of data and reports used in daily business
operations. To illustrate them as completely as possible, the examples include the
names of individuals, companies, brands, and products. All of these names are
fictitious and any similarity to the names and addresses used by an actual business
enterprise is entirely coincidental.
If you are viewing this information softcopy, the photographs and color
illustrations may not appear.
Trademarks
IBM, the IBM logo, and ibm.com are trademarks or registered trademarks of
International Business Machines Corp., registered in many jurisdictions worldwide.
Other product and service names might be trademarks of IBM or other companies.
A current list of IBM trademarks is available on the web at Copyright and
trademark information at www.ibm.com/legal/copytrade.shtml.
Adobe, the Adobe logo, PostScript, and the PostScript logo are either registered
trademarks or trademarks of Adobe Systems Incorporated in the United States,
and/or other countries.
Intel and Intel Xeon are trademarks or registered trademarks of Intel Corporation
or its subsidiaries in the United States and other countries.
Microsoft and Windows are trademarks of Microsoft Corporation in the United

States, other countries, or both.
Java and all Java-based trademarks and logos are trademarks or registered
trademarks of Oracle and/or its affiliates.
Homologation statement
This product may not be certified in your country for connection by any means
whatsoever to interfaces of public telecommunications networks. Further
certification may be required by law prior to making any such connection. Contact
an IBM representative or reseller for any questions.
Glossary
This glossary includes terms and definitions for IBM XIV Storage System.
This glossary includes selected terms and A

definitions from:
access To obtain computing services or data.
v The American National Standard Dictionary for
Information Systems, ANSI X3.172–1990, In computer security, a specific type of
copyright 1990 by the American National interaction between a subject and an
Standards Institute (ANSI), 11 West 42nd Street, object that results in flow of information
New York, New York 10036. Definitions from one to the other.
derived from this book have the symbol (A) Active Directory
after the definition. Microsoft Active Directory (AD) provides
v IBM Terminology, which is available online at directory (lookup), DNS and
the IBM Terminology website authentication services.
(www.ibm.com/software/globalization/
alerting event
terminology/index.jsp). Definitions derived
An event that triggers recurring event
from this source have the symbol (GC) after the
notifications until it is cleared.
definition.
v The Information Technology Vocabulary developed allocated storage
by Subcommittee 1, Joint Technical Committee The space that is allocated to volumes but
1, of the International Organization for not yet assigned. Contrast with assigned
Standardization and the International storage.
Electrotechnical Commission (ISO/IEC API See application programming interface (API).
JTC1/SC1). Definitions derived from this book
have the symbol (I) after the definition. application programming interface (API)
Definitions taken from draft international An interface that allows an application
standards, committee drafts, and working program that is written in a high-level
papers that the ISO/IEC JTC1/SC1 is language to use specific data or functions
developing have the symbol (T) after the of the operating system or another
definition, indicating that final agreement has program.
not been reached among the participating assigned storage
National Bodies of SC1. The space that is allocated to a volume
and that is assigned to a port.
This glossary uses the following cross-reference
forms: Asynchronous interval
Denotes, per given coupling, how often
See Refers the reader to one of two kinds of the master runs a new sync job.
related information:
authorization level
v A term that is the expanded form of an
The authorization level determines the
abbreviation or acronym. This
permitted access level to the various
expanded form of the term contains the
functions of the IBM XIV Storage
full definition.
Management GUI:
v A synonym or more preferred term
Read only
See also Only viewing is allowed.
Refers the reader to one or more related
terms. Full Access to all the configuration
and control functions is allowed,
Contrast with including shutdown of the
Refers the reader to a term that has an system. This level requires a
opposite or substantively different password.
meaning.

auto-delete priority consistency group
As the storage capacity reaches its limits, A cluster of specific volumes for which a
snapshots are automatically deleted to snapshot can be taken simultaneously as
make more space. The deletion takes a group, thus creating a synchronized
place according to the value set for each snapshot. The volumes in a consistency
snapshot, as follows: group are grouped into a single volume
set. Snapshots can be taken for the
1 last to be deleted
volume set in multiple snapshot sets
4 first to be deleted under the specific consistency group. See
also snapshot set, volume set.
Each snapshot is given a default auto
delete priority of 1 at creation. coupling
A primary volume and a secondary
B volume connected together through
mirroring definitions.
basic mode
A means of entering XCLI commands on
D
the XCLI client that requires specifying IP
address and login information for each data availability
command. Additional output formatting The degree to which data is available
options are available in basic mode. when needed. Availability is typically
measured as a percentage of time in
best effort mode
which the system is able to respond to
A mode of remote mirroring in which I/O
data requests (for example, 99.999%
operation is not suspended when
available).
communication between a primary and
secondary volume is broken. data module
A module dedicated to data storage. A
C fully populated rack contains nine
dedicated data modules, each with 12
call home
disks.
A communication link established
between the storage system and a service default storage pool
provider. The storage product can use this The default storage pool when a volume
link to call IBM or to another service is created.
provider when it requires service. With
destination
access to the storage system, service
See event destination.
personnel can perform service tasks, such
as viewing error logs and problem logs or
E
initiating trace and dump retrievals.
escalation
clearing events
A process in which event notifications are
The process of stopping the recurring
sent to a wider list of event destinations
event notification of alerting events.
because the event was not cleared within
CLI The IBM XIV command-line interface a certain time.
(XCLI). See command-line interface (CLI)
event destination
command-line interface (CLI) An address for sending event
The nongraphical user interface used to notifications.
interact with the system through set
event notification rule
commands and functions. The IBM XIV
A rule that determines which users are to
command-line interface (XCLI) for the
be notified, for which events and by what
IBM XIV Storage System.
means.
completion code
event notification
The returned message sent as a result of
The process of notifying a user about an
running CLI commands.
event.
event A user or system activity that is logged data. A fully populated rack has six
(with an appropriate message). interface data modules.
host A port name of a host that can connect to
F the system. The system supports Fibre
fabric The hardware that connects workstations Channel and iSCSI hosts.
and servers to storage devices in a SAN.
The SAN fabric enables I
any-server-to-any-storage device
I/O input/output.
connectivity through the use of Fibre
Channel switching technology. image snapshot
A snapshot that has never been unlocked.
FC-AL Also known as arbitrated loop. A Fibre
It is the exact image of the master volume
Channel topology that requires no Fibre
it was copied from, at the time of its
Channel switches. Devices are connected
creation. See also snapshot.
in a one-way loop fashion.
interactive mode
FC-HBA
A means of entering XCLI commands on
Fibre Channel host bus adapter.
the XCLI client in which the IP address,
FC See Fibre Channel. user, and password information does not
need to be specified for each command.
Fibre Channel
Serial data transfer architecture developed Internet Protocol
by a consortium of computer and mass Specifies the format of packets (also called
storage device manufacturers and now datagrams), and their addressing schemes.
being standardized by ANSI. See also Transmission Control Protocol
(TCP).
functional area
One of the high-level groupings of icons IOPs input/output (I/O) per second.
(functional modules) of the left pane in
IP See Internet Protocol.
the IBM XIV Storage Management GUI
screen (for example, Monitor, iSCSI Internet SCSI. An IP-based standard for
Configuration, or Volume management). linking data storage devices over a
See functional module. network and transferring data by carrying
SCSI commands over IP networks.
functional module
One of the icons of a functional area, on
L
the left pane in the IBM XIV Storage
Management GUI screen. For example, latency
System (under Monitor) or Hosts and Amount of time delay between the
LUNs (under Configuration). See moment an operation is issued, and the
functional area. moment it is committed.
LDAP Lightweight Directory Access Protocol.
G
LDAP attribute
Graphical user interface (GUI)
A property of an LDAP object, with a
On-screen user interface supported by a
single or multiple values. A special object
mouse and a keyboard.
attribute is designated by an LDAP
GUI See graphical user interface (GUI). administrator to hold user group
memberships values corresponding to
H XIV roles.
H/W Hardware. LDAP authentication
A method for authenticating users by
HBA Host bus adapter.
validating the submitted credentials
host interface module against data stored on an LDAP directory.
The interface data module serves external
host requests with the ability to store
Glossary 413
LDAP directory multipathing
A hierarchical database stored on an Used for direct access from host-interface
LDAP server and accessed through LDAP modules to any volume.
calls.
P
LDAP server
A server that provides directory services peer Denotes a constituent side of a coupling.
through LDAP. Whenever a coupling is defined, a
designation is specified for each peer -
LDAP status
one peer is designated primary and the
The status of an LDAP server.
other is designated secondary.
load balancing
pool See storage pool.
Even distribution of load across all
components of the system. primary volume
A volume that is mirrored for backup on
locking
a remote storage system.
Setting a volume (or snapshot) as
unwritable (read-only).
R
LUN map
rack The cabinet that stores all of the hardware
A table showing the mappings of the
components of the system.
volumes to the LUNs.
remote mirroring
LUN Logical unit number. Exports a systems
The process of replicating a volume on a
volume into a registered host.
remote system.
M remote target connectivity
A definition of connectivity between a
main-power cable
port set of a remote target and a module
The electrical connection between the ac
on the local storage system.
power source and the automatic transfer
switch (ATS). remote target
An additional storage system used for
mandatory mode
mirroring, data migration, and so on.
A mode of remote mirroring in which I/O
operation stops whenever there is no role The actual role that the peer is fulfilling
communication to the secondary volume. as a result of a specific condition, either a
master or a subordinate.
master volume
A volume that has snapshots is called the rule See event notification rule.
master volume of its snapshots.
S
MIB Management Information Base. A
database of objects that can be monitored SAN Storage area network.
by a network management system. SNMP
SCSI Small computer system interface.
managers use standardized MIB formats
to monitor SNMP agents. secondary volume
A volume that serves as a backup of a
Microsoft Active Directory
primary volume.
See Active Directory
Simple Network Monitor Protocol
mirror volume
A protocol for monitoring network
A volume that contains a backup copy of
devices. See also MIB, SNMP agent, SNMP
the original volume.
manager, SNMP trap.
mirroring
SMS gateway
See remote mirroring.
An external server that is used to send
modified State SMSs.
A snapshot state. A snapshot in modified
state can never be used for restoring its
master volume.
SMTP gateway thin provisioning
An external host that is used to relay The ability to define logical volume sizes
email messages through the SMTP that are much larger than the physical
protocol. capacity installed on the system.
snapshot set Transmission Control Protocol
The resulting set of synchronized Transmission Control Protocol (TCP) on
snapshots of a volume set in a consistency top of the Internet Protocol (IP)
group. See also consistency group, Volume establishes a virtual connection between a
set. destination and a source over which
streams of data can be exchanged. See
snapshot
also IP.
A point-in-time snapshot or copy of a
volume. See also image snapshot. trap See SNMP trap.
SNMP agent
U
A device that reports information through
the SNMP protocol to SNMP managers. unassociated volume
A volume that is not associated with a
SNMP manager
consistency group. See Consistency group.
A host that collects information from
SNMP agents through the SNMP protocol. uninterruptible power supply
Provides battery backup power for a
SNMP trap
determined time, so that the system can
An SNMP message sent from the SNMP
power down in a controlled manner, on
agent to the SNMP manager, where the
the occurrence of a lengthy power outage.
sending is initiated by the SNMP agent
and not as a response to a message sent
V
from the SNMP manager.
volume cloning
SNMP
Creating a snapshot from a volume.
See Simple Network Monitor Protocol.
volume set
snooze
A cluster of specific volumes in a
The process of sending recurring event
consistency group, for which snapshots
notifications until the events are cleared.
are taken simultaneously, thus, creating a
storage pool synchronized snapshot of all of them.
A reserved area of virtual disk space Snapshots of the volume set can be taken
serving the storage requirements of the into multiple snapshot sets of the specific
volumes. consistency group. See also Snapshot set,
Volume set.
Sync Job
A synchronization procedure run by the volume
master at specified user-defined intervals, A logical address space, having its data
entailing synchronization between the content stored on the systems disk drives.
master and the subordinate. A volume can be virtually any size as
long as the total allocated storage space of
synchronization
all volumes does not exceed the net
The process of making the primary
capacity of the system. A volume can be
volume and secondary volume identical
exported to an attached host through a
after a communication downtime or upon
LUN. A volume can be exported to
the initialization of the mirroring.
multiple hosts simultaneously. See also
Storage pool, Unassociated volume.
T
target See remote target. W
TCP/IP WWPN
See Transmission Control Protocol, Internet Worldwide port name
Protocol.
Glossary 415
X
XCLI IBM XIV command-line interface (XCLI)
command set. See command-line interface.
XCLI client
The system on which the XCLI command
is entered.
XCLI identification parameters
Parameters that identify the user issuing
the command and the XIV system (if any)
on which the command is to run. XCLI
identification parameters can be specified:
v By entering them at the beginning of an
interactive mode session
v In a configuration file
v When running a command in basic
mode
v When running a list of commands as a
batch
XCLI system command
An XCLI command that is sent to the XIV
system for processing.
XCLI utility command
An XCLI command that is issued on the
XCLI client. An XCLI utility command is
not sent to an XIV system for processing.
XCLI utility commands are used for
setting up configurations on the XCLI
client and for queries (for example, of
software version) that can be processed
on the client.
XDRP The disaster recovery program for the
XIV system – The remote mirror feature
of the XIV system.
XIV mapping
An association of data on the LDAP
server (a specific LDAP attribute) and
data on the XIV system. The mapping is
used to determine which access rights to
grant to an authenticated LDAP user.
Index
A cable connections (continued)
upper data modules 10-15 361
detaching
return hose 295
about this document utility patch panel 399 supply hose 294
sending comments xxvi cables diagnostic tests
ac-sensor cables ac-sensor, replacing ATS to module running 323
field replaceable units 356 1 278 disconnecting
replacing from ATS to module 1 278 ac-sensor, replacing ATS to ATS-to-uninterruptible power-supply
replacing from ATS to uninterruptible uninterruptible power supply 3 276 power cables 190, 191
power supply 3 276 connecting 40 automatic transfer switch cables 218
air-purging hose, opening and disconnecting uninterruptible power uninterruptible power supply
closing 298 supply 193 cables 193
ATS-to-uninterruptible power-supply emergency power off 55 disk drive modules
power cables replacing 272 installing 39
disconnecting 190, 191 replacing Ethernet 273, 280 LEDs 325
attaching replacing Fibre Channel 280 removing 36
rack doors 44 replacing InfiniBand 275 replacing 123
rack tie-down kit 24 replacing module-to-module 273 status 325
rack to non-raised floor 24 replacing module-to-switch 274 documentation
rack to raised floor 28 replacing patch panel 280 improvement xxvi
return hose 295 replacing serial-to-USB 273, 274 downloading
supply hose 294 capacity 6 Technician Assistant tool 16, 119
automatic transfer switch 230, 247 checking draining
about main-power cable uninterruptible power supply battery heat exchanger 293
configurations 111 born date 207
cable connections 394 closing the air-purging hose 298
connecting cables 221
disconnecting cables 218
collecting
system logs 324
E
installing 221, 230, 247 earthquake resistance kit
comments, sending xxvi
LEDs 333 installing 23
component replacement 120
powering off 217 emergency power off
connecting
powering on 223 setting up 56
automatic transfer switch cables 221
removing 220 emergency power off cables 55
power cables 199, 201
replacing ac-sensor cable to module emergency power off switch 54
room emergency power off switch 56
1 278 environmental notices xiii, xvii
replacing ac-sensor cable to EPO 54
uninterruptible power supply 198
uninterruptible power supply 3 276 Ethernet cables
connecting water supply to the rear-door
replacing, on-concurrent 217 replacing patch-panel cables 280
heat exchanger 46
Ethernet ports, number of 7
connectivity 7
Ethernet switch
considerations
B emergency power off 54
LEDs 330
event 321
batteries, heavy equipment xvi
events 321
installing uninterruptible power safety
supply 198, 210 site preparation xvi
removing uninterruptible power site safety xvi
supply 194, 208 F
Fibre Channel
D replacing patch-panel cables 280
C data module
Fibre Channel ports, number of 7
field replaceable units
cable connections 182, 184 installing 137
ac-sensor cables 356
automatic transfer switch 394 removing 132
components 351
front door logo LED 407 removing batteries 311
Ethernet cable 355
host-connections patch panels 400, data modules
fiber optic cable kit 356
403 about 100
front door logo-LED cable 357
InfiniBand switches 384 cable connections for lower data
host-attachment cables 357
interface modules 4-9 368 modules 380
InfiniBand cables 356
lower data modules 1-3 380 cable connections for upper data
main-power cables 357
maintenance module 388 modules 361
modem cable 356
modem 406 installing 35
non-stocked components 360
power-distribution units 396 LEDs 326
non-stocked serial-to-USB-cables 355
rack cabling verification test 348 replacing 129
power cords 358
uninterruptible power supplies 389

field replaceable units (continued) installing (continued) maintenance module (continued)
serial-to-USB cables 355 IBM XIV Storage Management LEDs 329
switch stacking and uplink cable 355 GUI 15, 118 removing 177
technician-use cable 356 interface module 153 removing batteries 305, 307
filling the rear-door heat exchanger with modem 271 replacing 177
water 47 modules 38 maintenance module ports
fire suppression xv rack doors 51, 289 patch panel 8
forums xxiii rack side panels 34, 300 management port
front door logo LED rack top cover 21, 287 patch panel 8
cable connection 407 rear-door heat exchanger 291 management ports
front door logo-LED cable ruggedized brace 303 IP configuration 11
field replaceable units 357 Technician Assistant tool 16, 119 protocols 11
FRUs uninterruptible power supplies 197 requirements 11
See field replaceable units uninterruptible power supply 197 management tools
uninterruptible power-supply install 15, 118
network-management card 214 memory cache 7
G XCLI 15, 118
XIVTop 15, 118
model 281x-114
setting up 17
getting started 120
installing guide rails 182, 184 model 281x-214
guide rails 179
Installing maintenance module 182, 184 setting up 17
installing 182, 184
interface module model 281x-215
removing 177
installing 153 setting up the rack 53
rear view 153 model 281x-216
removing 147 setting up the rack 54
H removing batteries 311 modem
hardware components 3 interface modules cable connection 406
heat exchanger about 103 installing 271
draining 293 cable connections 368 port 8
purging air 296 LEDs 326 removing 270
repairing leak 349 replacing 145 replacing 270
required tools for installation 42 IP configuration module cable connections 182, 184
return hose 295 management ports 11 modules
supply hose 294 iSCSI ports, number of 7 installing 38
heavy equipment xvi replacing ac-sensor cables 278
homologation 411 replacing cables 274
host-attachment cables, field replaceable
units 357
L replacing module-to-module
cables 273
labels, safety information xiii
host-connections patch panels
laser safety xiv
cable connections 400, 403
LED status
automatic transfer switch 333 N
data modules 326 network
I Ethernet switch 330 connections 8
IBM XIV Storage Management GUI interface modules 326 network-management card
install 15, 118 maintenance module 329 installing 214
IEC 60950-1 xiii uninterruptible power supplies 332 removing 214
InfiniBand cables LEDs network-management cards
field replaceable units 356 disk drive modules 325 about 111
InfiniBand switch leveling the rack 22 replacing 212
replacing cables 274 lifting heavy equipment xvi new features
InfiniBand switch power-supply units location, preparing xvi overview xix
replacing 173 non-raised floor
InfiniBand switch, replacing cables 275 attaching rack to 24
InfiniBand switches
cable connections 384
M notes 13, 116
notices
M3 maintenance module
replacing 168 environmental xiii, xvii
removing 178
inspecting legal 409
main-power cables 61 safety xiii
removing 178
installing 230, 247
automatic transfer switch 221
removing 179
batteries, uninterruptible power
supply 198, 210
main-power cables O
field replaceable units 357 opening the air-purging hose 298
completion steps 50
inspecting 61 overview
data module 137
swapping 265 automatic transfer switch 111
data modules 35
maintenance module
disk drive modules 39
earthquake resistance kit 23
install 182, 184
host-retention plate 296
P radio frequency identification device tag
replacing 303
replacing (continued)
InfiniBand switch cables 275
packing an XIV system 96 raised floor InfiniBand switch power-supply
patch panel 8 attaching rack to 28 units 173
replacing cables 280 reader feedback, sending xxvi InfiniBand switches 168
PDFs xxiii rear-door heat exchanger interface modules 145
ports See also heat exchanger maintenance module 177
management 11 connecting the water supply 46 modem 270
patch panel 8 filling with water 47 module-to-module cables 273
positioning the rack 20 removing and installing 291 module-to-switch cables 274
power cables repairing 349 patch-panel cables 280
connecting 199, 201 replacing 290 power cables 272
disconnecting 190, 191 recycling batteries power distribution unit 284
replacing 272 data module 311 uninterruptible power supply 281
replacing from power distribution interface module 311 rack doors 287
unit 284 maintenance module 305, 307 rack side panels 298
replacing from uninterruptible power related information xxiii rack top cover 285
supply 281 relocating radio frequency identification device
power distribution unit 281x-114 93 tag 303
replacing power cables 284 281x-214 93 rear-door heat exchanger 290
power-distribution units preparation for 93 ruggedized brace 302
cable connections 396 XIV system weight-reduced rack 94 serial-to-USB cables 274
powering off 317 Remote Support replacing 273
automatic transfer switch 217 Support Access Level 1 uninterruptible power supply 187
model 281x-215 318 removing uninterruptible power-supply
uninterruptible power supply 212 batteries, uninterruptible power network-management cards 212
powering on 313 supply 194, 208 replacing uninterruptible power-supply
281x-215 315 data module 132 batteries 206
281x-216 62 disk drive modules 36 return hose, attaching and detaching
automatic transfer switch 223 host-retention plate 296 return hose 295
model 281x-114 62 interface module 147 room emergency power off switch
model 281x-214 62 modem 270 connecting 56
model 281x-215 68 rack door 19, 288 ruggedized brace
uninterruptible power supply 203, rack side panels 19, 299 installing 303
215 rack top cover 20, 41, 286 removing 302
preparing the site xvi rear-door heat exchanger 291 replacing 302
processors, number of 7 ruggedized brace 302
protocols uninterruptible power supply 190,
management ports 11
publications xxiii
196
uninterruptible power-supply
S
purging air 296 safety
network-management card 214
environmental notices xiii
removing batteries
information labels xiii
data module 311
R interface module 311
laser xiv
notices xiii
rack maintenance module 305, 307
sending
attaching to non-raised floor 24 removing guide rails 177
comments xxvi
attaching to raised floor 28 Removing maintenance module 177,
serial-to-USB cables
leveling 22 178, 179
replacing module-to-switch 274
positioning 20 removing protective wrappings 22
service call
setting up 17 repairing
completing 128, 144, 160, 165, 172,
rack components 3 rear-door heat exchanger 290, 349
175, 187, 205, 211, 215, 225, 259, 269,
rack doors repairing a leak in the heat
271
attaching 44 exchanger 349
setting up
installing 51, 289 replacing
emergency power off circuit 56
removing 19, 288 ac-sensor cables, ATS to module
setting up the rack
rack migration 53, 54 1 278
model 281x-114 17
rack side panels ac-sensor cables, ATS to
model 281x-214 17
installing 34, 300 uninterruptible power supply 3 276
model 281x-215 53
removing 19, 299 automatic transfer switch,
model 281x-216 54
replacing 298 on-concurrent 217
shutdown
rack tie-down kit cables 272
system 321
attaching 24 data modules 129
site, preparing xvi
rack top cover disk drive modules 123
SSD cache 7
installing 21, 287 Ethernet 280
status
removing 20, 41, 286 Ethernet cables
disk drive modules 325
replacing 285 replacing 273
supply hose, attaching and detaching
Fibre Channel 280
supply hose 294
Index 419
Support Access Level
Remote Support 1
V
system logs verifying
collecting 324 system health 323
verifying the XIV system 70
VPN ports
patch panel 8
T
Technician Assistant tool
downloading 16, 119
technician ports 8
W
tests warnings 13, 116
diagnostic 323 water supply
thermal shutdown 321 connecting to the rear-door heat
tools 120 exchanger 46
trademarks 410 work flow 120
troubleshooting
techniques 323
tips 323 X
two-main-power-cable configuration, XCLI
about 111 install 15, 118
XIV system
packing 96
U relocating 93
unconnected cables relocatingmodel 281x-114
removing protective wrappings 22 weight-reduced rack 94
uninterruptible power supplies XIV system weight-reduced rack
cable connections 389 packing 96
installing 197 XIVTop
LEDs 332 install 15, 118
uninterruptible power supply
battery born date 207
disconnecting cables 193
disconnecting power cables 190, 191
installing 197
installing batteries 198, 210
powering off 212
powering on 203, 215
removing 190, 196
removing batteries 194, 208
repair 189
replace 189
replacing 187
replacing ac-sensor cables 276
replacing power cables 281
uninterruptible power-supply batteries
replacing 206
Uninterruptible power-supply batteries
about 110
installing 214
removing 214
network-management cards
about 111
replacing 212
uninterruptible power-supply units
about emergency power off 54
updating
Technician Assistant tool 16, 119
upgrading XIV system code 88
utility patch panels

Printed in USA
GC27-3921-16

Xiv Model11x 21x Isg

Uploaded by

Document Informationclick to expand document information

Copyright:

Available Formats

Xiv Model11x 21x Isg

Uploaded by

Document Information

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

Xiv Model11x 21x Isg

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

IBM XIV Storage System Gen3

Models 281x-11x and 281x-21x

Installation and Service Guide

This edition replaces GC27-3921-15.

© Copyright IBM Corp. 2011, 2015 iii

© Copyright IBM Corp. 2011, 2015 vii

© Copyright IBM Corp. 2011, 2015 xi

Safety notices and labels

IBM Systems safety notices and information

IBM Systems Safety Notices, G229-9054

The publication is organized into three sections:

Finding translated notices

To find the translated text for a caution or danger notice:

© Copyright IBM Corp. 2011, 2015 xiii

Special caution and safety notices

Use an OSHA/CSA approved non-conductive step or platform ladder specified for

Fire suppression systems

Safety and environmental notices xv

If more clearance is needed for models 281x-114 or 281x-214 racks, the

Heavy equipment - personal injury or equipment damage might result if

IBM Systems Environmental Notices and User Guide (ftp://

Safety and environmental notices xvii

© Copyright IBM Corp. 2011, 2015 xix

Updated the Capacity Expansion: Data Modules and Interface

Who should use this guide

Conventions used in this guide

Note: These notices provide important tips, guidance, or advice.

About this guide xxi

Attention: These notices indicate possible damage to programs, devices, or data.

IBM XIV Storage System Service Information Center website

Service information that is available in the information center is also available in a

Title Description Order number

This document describes all

Publications and related information

Information that is available in the information center is also available in a set of

About this guide xxiii

IBM Redbooks publications and technical papers

Getting information, help, and service

About this guide xxv

The IBM Publications Center website (www.ibm.com/shop/publications/order/)

Sending your comments

Send your comments by email to starpubs@us.ibm.com. Be sure to include the

About this task

Figure 1. Support settings window

© Copyright IBM Corp. 2011, 2015 1

Models 281x-114 and 281x-214

Custom-rack model 281x-215

The following components are supplied with each XIV system:

Custom-rack model 281x-216

© Copyright IBM Corp. 2011, 2015 3

Fully populated rack (15 modules)

aaaaaa aaa aaaaaa aaaaaaaaaaa aaaaaaaa aaaaaa aaa

Automatic transfer switch

Minimally populated rack (six modules)

Each module contains twelve 1 TB limited capacity, 2 TB , 3 TB, or 4 TB, 3 TB, 4

Automatic transfer switch

Processors and memory

Host-connections patch panel

Utility patch panel